Revised November 13, 2008
After ACID software is installed and you start it for the first time, the registration wizard appears. This wizard offers easy steps that allow
you to register the software online with Sony Creative Software Inc. Alternatively, you may register online at http://
www.sonycreativesoftware.com/ at any time.
Registering your product will provide you with access to a variety of technical support options, notification of product updates, and
special promotions exclusive to registered ACID users.
Registration assistance
If you do not have access to the Internet, registration assistance is available during normal weekday business hours. Please contact our
Customer Service department by dialing one of the following numbers:
Telephone/Fax
Country
1-800-577-6642 (toll-free)
+608-204-7703
US, Canada, and Virgin Islands
for all other countries
All countries
1-608-250-1745 (Fax)
Customer service/sales
For a detailed list of customer service options, we encourage you to visit
http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/support/custserv.asp. Use the following numbers for telephone support during normal weekday
business hours:
Telephone/Fax
Country
1-800-577-6642 (toll-free)
+608-204-7703
US, Canada, and Virgin Islands
for all other countries
All countries
1-608-250-1745 (Fax)
Technical support
For a detailed list of technical support options, we encourage you to visit
http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/support/default.asp. To listen to your support options by telephone, please call 608-256-5555.
About your rights in ACID software
ACID is licensed to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement. The End User License Agreement is first presented to you
when you install the software. Please review the End User License Agreement carefully as its terms affect your rights with respect to the
software. For your reference, a copy of the End User License Agreement for ACID is located at
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Macromedia Flash
Macromedia and Flash are trademarks or registered trademarks of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft DirectX programming interface
Portions utilize Microsoft® DirectX® technologies. Copyright © 1999 – 2008 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Microsoft Windows Media Technologies
Portions utilize Microsoft Windows Media® technologies. Copyright © 2008 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
PCRE LICENCE
PCRE is a library of functions to support regular expressions whose syntax and semantics are as close as possible to those of the Perl 5 language.
Release 7 of PCRE is distributed under the terms of the “BSD” licence, as specified below. The documentation for PCRE, supplied in the “doc”
directory, is distributed under the same terms as the software itself.
The basic library functions are written in C and are freestanding. Also included in the distribution is a set of C++ wrapper functions.
THE BASIC LIBRARY FUNCTIONS
---------------------------
Written by: Philip Hazel
Email local part: ph10
Email domain: cam.ac.uk
University of Cambridge Computing Service,
Cambridge, England.
Copyright (c) 1997-2008 University of Cambridge
All rights reserved.
THE C++ WRAPPER FUNCTIONS
-------------------------
Contributed by: Google Inc.
Copyright (c) 2007-2008, Google Inc.
All rights reserved.
THE “BSD” LICENCE
-----------------
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
•
•
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
•
Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the name of Google Inc. nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
PNG file format
Copyright © 2008. World Wide Web Consortium (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, European Research Consortium for Informatics and
Mathematics, Keio University). All rights reserved. This work is distributed under the W3C Software License in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTIBILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Propellerhead Software
ReWire™ is a trademark of Propellerhead Software.
Real, RealMedia, RealAudio, and RealVideo applications
2008 RealNetworks, Inc. Patents Pending. All rights reserved. Real®, Real Media®, RealAudio®, RealVideo®, and the Real logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of RealNetworks, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Steinberg Media Technologies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cubase®, VST®, and Nuendo® are registered trademarks of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH.
ASIO™ is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH.
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF)
Adobe Tagged Image™ File Format is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries. All rights
reserved.
Targa file format
The Targa™ file format is a trademark of Pinnacle Systems, Inc.
Thomson Fraunhofer MP3
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
Supply of this product does not convey a license nor imply any right to distribute content created with this product in revenue generating
broadcast systems (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or other distribution channels), streaming applications (via internet, intranets and/or other
networks), other content distribution systems (pay-audio or audio on demand applications and the like) or on physical media (compact discs,
digital versatile discs, semiconductor chips, hard drives, memory cards and the like).
An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit: http://mp3licensing.com.
Sony Creative Software Inc.
1617 Sherman Avenue
Madison, WI 53704
USA
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a guarantee or commitment on
behalf of Sony Creative Software Inc. in any way. All updates or additional information relating to the contents of this manual will be
posted on the Sony Creative Software Inc. Web site, located at http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/. The software is provided to you
under the terms of the End User License Agreement and Software Privacy Policy, and must be used and/or copied in accordance
therewith. Copying or distributing the software except as expressly described in the End User License Agreement is strictly prohibited.
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express written consent of Sony
Creative Software Inc.
Copyright © 2008. Sony Creative Software Inc.
Program Copyright © 2008. Sony Creative Software Inc. All rights reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introducing ACID Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Using online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Table of
Contents
Context-sensitive help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Audio signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
MIDI signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starting projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Previewing media from the Explorer window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adding media to the project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Obtaining or editing CD information using Gracenote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
One-shots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Beatmapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Adding and editing events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Painting events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Changing the length of events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Editing MIDI events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Positioning the cursor with the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
TABLE OF CONTENTS | 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selecting multiple events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Creating time selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Creating event selections within time selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Working with tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Reordering tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Resizing tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Changing track colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Renaming tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Duplicating tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Deleting tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Copying, cutting, and pasting tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Adjusting the mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Muting or unmuting tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Soloing tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Choosing a track’s input/recording device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Monitoring track output levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Working with groups of tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using undo and redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Undoing all edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Clearing the undo history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Playing the project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using the transport bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using playback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Saving projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Rendering projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Rendering in real time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Publishing to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Understanding track-at-once and disc-at-once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using Paste Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using Paste Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2 | TABLE OF CONTENTS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Splitting at the cursor position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Splitting one event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Splitting multiple events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Joining events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Creating crossfades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Cutting events in ripple editing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Deleting events in ripple editing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pasting events in ripple editing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Shifting the contents of (slipping) events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Slip-trimming events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Sliding events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Muting and locking events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Muting events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Locking events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setting an event’s fade-in and -out envelope curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Inserting a section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Adjusting a section's length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Changing a section’s color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Moving (shuffling) sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Copying a section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Deleting a section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Moving a section label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Removing a section label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Clearing all events from a section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the Media Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Creating a new media library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Removing media files from a library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
TABLE OF CONTENTS | 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Applying a tag to a media file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Removing a tag from a media file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Deleting a tag from a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Merging subtags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Arranging tags in the tag tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Editing tag names or images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Viewing or creating palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Saving tags and properties to media files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Using the Sony Sound Series Loops & Samples reference library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Searching using a keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Searching using tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Sorting search results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Viewing previous searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Using advanced search options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Resolving offline media files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Automatically hiding the Search pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Docking and undocking the Search pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Resizing columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Moving columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Showing or hiding columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Adding custom columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using project markers and regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Working with standard markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Working with time markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Working with command markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Working with regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Choosing snapping options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Changing tempo, time signature, and key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing project tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing project time signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Changing project key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4 | TABLE OF CONTENTS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with tempo/key/time signature change markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using a tempo curve to change tempo between markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Changing a clip’s key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Changing an event’s key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Inserting time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fitting to time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Working in the Chopper window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Viewing the Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the Chopper grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing Chopper snapping options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Magnifying the Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Inserting markers and regions in the Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Placing files in the Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Creating selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Creating selections of a specific musical length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Inserting increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Creating increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Creating increments of a custom musical length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Using copy and paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Dragging selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Moving the insert position in the track view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Using the Chopper with one-shots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Working with Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Adding clips to tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Adding envelopes to a bus track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Adding effects to a bus track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Soloing a bus track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Monitoring bus track output levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Automating VSTi parameters in soft synth bus tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
TABLE OF CONTENTS | 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arranging plug-in chain order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Bypassing plug-ins in a chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Bypassing effect automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Removing plug-ins from chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Removing or bypassing all effects on tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Using track automation envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Configuring track properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
MIDI track properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Managing a track’s clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Adjusting general clip properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Adjusting stretching properties for loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Reloading files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Replacing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Saving file properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Applying or removing grooves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Editing grooves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Creating a folder track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Muting a folder track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Mixing multiple tracks to a single track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Exporting loops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Organizing Plug-Ins and ReWire Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Viewing plug-ins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6 | TABLE OF CONTENTS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing a plug-in’s folder assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Displaying audio plug-in folders in the Mixing Console window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Renaming a plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Using audio plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Using Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Showing or hiding automation controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Track automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Mute automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Volume or pan automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Bus automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Assignable effects automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Adding or removing track effect automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
MIDI controller automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
MIDI program change automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Working with track envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Adjusting envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Using the Envelope tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Hiding track envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Removing track envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Automation recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Recording automation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Editing individual envelope points or keyframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Setting the automation recording mode for a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Using the Mixing Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
The Mixing Console toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
The Channel List pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Channel strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Adding track, assignable FX, bus, and soft synth channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Changing a track’s name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
TABLE OF CONTENTS | 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting bus or assignable effects send levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Changing a track’s automation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Muting or soloing a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Arming a track for recording or toggling input monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adjusting track panning or volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Adding or deleting output busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Assigning tracks to output busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Automating effect parameters for output busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Using audio bus channel strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Using Input Busses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Adding or deleting input busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Using input busses with hardware-based effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Changing an assignable effect chain’s name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Adding or editing effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Adjusting assignable effects input levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Changing an effects chain’s output device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Monitoring output levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Muting or soloing an assignable effects chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Recording Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Setup with mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Using the metronome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Recording into a time selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Recording into an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Recording into an event with a time selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8 | TABLE OF CONTENTS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing where recorded files are stored for individual projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Using record input monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Working with MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Adding MIDI tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Adding MIDI files to a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Freezing MIDI tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Recording MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Recording MIDI in real time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Using MIDI step recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Using MIDI merge recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Choosing a drum map or kit for a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Auditioning notes with the keyboard/drum grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Selecting notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Adding or deleting notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Editing note positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Editing note duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Quantizing MIDI events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Editing velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Editing duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Editing MIDI track properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Configuring MIDI track output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Editing a MIDI clip’s time signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
MIDI Track Envelopes and Keyframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Adding a MIDI controller envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Configuring MIDI track controller automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Adding a program change keyframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
TABLE OF CONTENTS | 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing MIDI clip properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Merging controller data from a MIDI clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Adding note events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Editing note events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Toggling note snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Deleting note events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Undoing and redoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Viewing the list editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Filtering the list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Creating events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Deleting events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Undoing and redoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding external devices as MIDI inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Creating program maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Editing a drum map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Choosing a drum map for a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Generating MIDI timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Triggering from MIDI timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Generating MIDI clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Exporting the project to a standard MIDI file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10 | TABLE OF CONTENTS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring a Frontier TranzPort. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Working with Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Adding or replacing video files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Removing the video track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Hiding and showing the video track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Synchronizing audio and video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Moving video events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Trimming video events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Slipping and sliding video events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Copying a frame to the clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Using toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Viewing the status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Previewing on external monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Working with 5.1 Surround. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Setting up surround projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Adjusting track volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Adjusting assignable effects send or bus send levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Adjusting channel levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Panning audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Panning mixer controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Adding panning keyframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Working with keyframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
TABLE OF CONTENTS | 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Burning AC-3 files to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Customizing ACID Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Docking and floating ACID windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Using the ruler offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Setting the grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Hiding and displaying the toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Adding buttons to the toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Removing buttons from the toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Using the time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Monitoring MIDI timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Using the General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Using the Audio tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Using the MIDI tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Using the Video tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Using the Editing tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Using the Sync tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Using the Other tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Using the External Control & Automation tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Using Control Surfaces with ACID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Configuring ACID to use your control surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Configuring or customizing your control surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Connecting the Mackie Control Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Configuring the software to use the Mackie Control Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Configuring or customizing control mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
12 | TABLE OF CONTENTS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Fader Banks buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Markers buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
View buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Audio/Video buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Project buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Timeline buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Transport buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Viewing the control mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Adjusting track or bus volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Editing a track's input device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Editing a track or mixer control’s output device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Customizing your control mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Hardware setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Configuring ACID to use the Behringer BCF2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Using the Behringer BCF2000 with ACID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Encoder Groups buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Fader automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
ACID Tips and Tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Playing with duplicate tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
TABLE OF CONTENTS | 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fading in and out of mixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Abruptly changing volume or pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Making automated frequency changes more natural. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Overriding compress/expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Slicing and dicing in the Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Chopping new loops for alternate time signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Creating one-track remixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Building scales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Shortcut commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i
14 | TABLE OF CONTENTS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
1
Introducing ACID Software
Welcome
Congratulations on purchasing a revolutionary software application for Microsoft® Windows®. With ACID® from Sony
Creative Software Inc., you can create great music by simply picking, painting, and playing.
System requirements
The following lists the minimum system requirements for using ACID:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microsoft® Windows® XP (SP 2 or later) or Windows Vista™.
1.8 GHz processor (2 GHz or faster recommended).
1 GB RAM (2 GB or more recommended).
150 MB hard-disk space for program installation. 8 GB of hard-disk space for installation of all optional components.
Microsoft Windows-compatible sound card.
DVD-ROM drive for installation.
Supported CD-recordable drive (for CD burning only).
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0 (included on application disc). *
Internet connection (for Gracenote® MusicID™ service).
*.NET 3.0 adds functionality to .NET 2.0. After installing the .NET Framework 3.0, versions 2.0 and 3.0 will be displayed
in the Windows Add or Remove Programs listing. Do not attempt to uninstall version 2.0; it is required by version 3.0.
Installing ACID
Prior to installing the software, we recommend that you exit all open applications and temporarily turn off any virus
protection.
1. Insert the application disc. The setup screen appears (if AutoPlay is enabled for your DVD-ROM drive).
Note: If you have disabled the AutoPlay feature, click the Start button and choose Run. In the Run dialog that the
DVD-ROM drive letter and add :\setup.exe. Click OK to start the installation.
2. Click Install. The installation process begins.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to install the appropriate version of the software for your computer.
Using online help
You can access three varieties of help within ACID:
•
•
•
Online help
Context-sensitive help
Help on the Web
Online help
To access online help, choose Contents and Index from the Help menu or press F1.
INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE | 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Toolbar
Tabs
Information
pane
Context-sensitive help
To use context-sensitive help in a dialog box, click the question mark button
in the upper-right corner of the dialog box.
Help on the Web
Additional ACID information is available on the Sony Creative Software Inc. Web site. From the Help menu, choose Sony on the Web,
and choose the desired location from the submenu. The software starts your system’s Web browser and attempts to connect to the
appropriate page on the Web site.
Overview of ACID software
ACID software is designed to be powerful and flexible, yet easy to use. Many of the ACID operations, menu items, and shortcut keys are
common to other Sony Creative Software Inc. applications.
The following sections provide a tour of the ACID work area.
Main window
The ACID workspace includes three main areas: the track list, the track view (or timeline), and the window docking area. The other parts
of the interface are tools and features used while creating and working with your project. You can resize the track list, track view, and
window docking area by dragging the dividers between them.
16 | CHAPTER 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Divider
Timeline
Track view
Track list
Divider
Window
docking
area
Toolbar
The toolbar allows you to quickly access the most commonly used functions and features in ACID.
Opens a new project. You will be prompted to save any
changes to the current project.
Locks envelope points so they move with an event when it is
moved along the timeline.
Displays the Open File dialog. From this window, you can
browse all of the available drives to select an ACID project or
audio file to open.
Allows editing of MIDI events directly on the timeline. In this
mode, you can draw and erase notes in a piano roll or drum
grid view.
Saves any changes to the current project.
Activates the Draw tool to add and edit events.
The first time you save a project, the Save As dialog appears.
Opens the Publish wizard so you can share your ACID creation
on the Web.
Activates the Selection tool to select multiple events.
Opens a dialog where you can download media from the
Internet.
Activates the Paint tool to insert events across multiple
tracks.When used in conjunction with the Ctrl key, the Paint
tool can paint an entire one-shot, MIDI, or Beatmapped media
file to an event with one click.
Clears the selected items from the track view and places them
on the ACID clipboard. You can then paste them to a new
location.
Activates the Erase tool to erase events or parts of events.
When used in conjunction with the Ctrl key, the Erase tool can
erase an entire one-shot, MIDI track, or Beatmapped track
event with one click.
Creates a copy of the selected items from the track view on
the ACID clipboard. You can then paste them to a new
location.
Activates the Envelope tool to select and modify envelope
points.
Inserts the contents of the ACID clipboard at the current
cursor position. The pasted items cover any existing events.
To make room for pasted events, choose Paste Insert from the
Edit menu.
Activates the Time Selection tool to quickly select all events
within range of time.
Reverses the last action performed. ACID supports unlimited
undos, allowing you to restore the project to any state since
the last save.
Activates the Groove tool to apply a groove to a track. You
can use grooves to manipulate the timing of tracks by
quantizing media to predefined grooves or by applying the
feel of one track to another.
INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE | 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reverses an undo.
Activates the Groove Erase tool to erase grooves or parts of
grooves. When used in conjunction with the Ctrl key, the
Groove Erase tool can erase an entire groove event.
Turns the snapping feature on or off. With snapping enabled,
you can decide whether to snap to the grid or to all elements
(markers, regions, etc.).
Activates context-sensitive help to obtain information about
a specific option, menu, or part of the ACID window.
Allows you to automatically create crossfades when you
overlap two audio events.
Track list
This list identifies the track order in your project and contains the track’s controls. The following sections identify and briefly explain the
controls located in the track list.
Arm for Record
Record Device Selector
Bus Assignment
Track number
Invert Track Phase
Automation
Settings
Track FX
Track name
Mute
Solo
Audio Meter
AUDIO TRACKS
Paint Clip Selector
Pan slider
Volume slider
Minimize Track Height
Maximize Track Height
MIDI TRACK
MIDI Input
Program
MIDI Output
Controller data sliders
Insert controller envelopes
MIDI controller data
Minimize/Maximize Track Height buttons
These buttons control the track’s appearance (size) on the track list and the track view.
Track number
This area identifies the track’s number in the project. You can quickly change the track order by dragging selected tracks within the
track list.
Track name
When you add a file to a project, the track name is initially the same name as the file’s name. Right-click the track name and choose
Rename from the shortcut menu (or double-click) to change the track name.
18 | CHAPTER 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bus assignment/Device selection
Clicking the Bus Assignment button
and selecting a letter from the menu allows you to assign the corresponding track to the
specified output bus. However, the button is only available in projects containing multiple busses.
MIDI Input button
Clicking the MIDI Input button
MIDI Output button
Clicking the MIDI Output button allows you to select soft synths and MIDI devices and the channel you want to use to play MIDI data on
the track. For more information, see Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into a track on page 190.
Program button
Clicking the Program button
allows you to change the settings of your soft synth and show/hide keyframes. For more information,
Invert Track Phase button
Clicking the Invert Track Phase button reverses the phase of all events on an audio track.
Although inverting data does not make an audible difference in a single file, it can prevent phase cancellation when mixing or
crossfading audio signals.
Track FX button
The Track FX button
accesses the Audio Plug-In window from which you can add, edit, and apply effects to the track. For more
Freeze Track button
The Freeze Track button
on a MIDI track converts a MIDI track to .wav file, effectively taking your soft synths offline and conserving
processing and disk resources.
Mute button
Clicking the Mute button
temporarily suspends playback of the corresponding track, allowing you to focus on the project’s
remaining tracks. A muted track appears grayed out in the track view. For more information, see Muting or unmuting tracks on page 42.
Solo button
Clicking the Solo button isolates the track during playback by muting the project’s remaining tracks. For more information, see Soloing
Record Device Selector button
Click the Record Device Selector button
to turn input monitoring on or off and choose a recording device.
INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE | 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Surround panner
In 5.1 surround projects, the surround panner
allows you to view and edit surround panning settings for a track. Double-click a
surround panner to view the Surround Panner window and make fine panning adjustments.
Volume fader
This dedicated volume fader controls how loud a track is in the mix. A value of 0 dB means that the track plays with no boost or cut from
the software. Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume; dragging to the right boosts the volume. For more information, see
Pan slider
This dedicated pan slider controls the position of a track in the stereo field. Dragging the slider to the left places the track in the left
speaker more than the right, while dragging the slider to the right places the track in the right speaker.
You can choose among five panning types to determine how a track is panned. For more information, see Choosing stereo pan types on
Multipurpose slider
This multipurpose slider allows you to control the following:
•
•
The level of the track’s signal being routed to each of the project’s busses.
The level of the track’s signal being routed to an assignable effect control.
Each track’s slider position is independent from the others; however, you can move sliders simultaneously by selecting multiple tracks
before making your adjustment. If you do not see this slider, expand the track.
For MIDI tracks, four multipurpose sliders are displayed to allow you to adjust MIDI controller data. For more information, see Controller
You may choose what the slider controls by clicking the slider label. Changing the slider type for one track changes it for all tracks so you
can compare levels of the same control across the project. For more information, see Adjusting the mix on page 41.
Paint Clip Selector button
Clicking the Paint Clip Selector button displays all the clips available for the track, allows the user to add clips, and opens the Clip
Pool.
The Paint Clip Selector button shows the clip type icons. For more information, see Understanding clip types on page 34.
Clip type icons
Loop
One-shot
Beatmapped
MIDI (if Loop button
is selected in the Clip Pool)
in the Clip Pool)
MIDI (if Loop button is not selected
Track view
In the track view, you can view and edit the events in a track. The area in which events display is the timeline. The track view contains
other elements which are described in the following sections.
20 | CHAPTER 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Marker bar
Beat ruler
Zoom
controls
Transport
bar
Time ruler
(if displayed)
Marker bar
The marker bar runs the length of your project and contains the tags for markers and regions positioned along the project’s timeline.
Beat ruler
The beat ruler allows you to place events in reference to the musical time of bars and beats. This ruler is fixed and does not update when
you change the tempo. This allows the events in the tracks to maintain their size when you adjust the tempo.
Time ruler
The time ruler provides a timeline for your project. This ruler can show real time in many different formats. For more information, see
Changing the time ruler format on page 249. The ruler changes with tempo, since the number of beats and beats per second of real time
changes with tempo.
Transport bar
The transport bar contains the playback and cursor positioning buttons frequently used while working on your project.
Record new track
Move cursor to start of project
Move cursor to end of project
MIDI step record
Loop playback
Play from beginning of project
Play project from cursor position
Pause playback
MIDI merge record
Toggle metronome for playback and recording
Stop playback
Toggle metronome countoff and set countoff options
The software also includes keyboard shortcuts for these playback commands. For more information, see Playback commands on page 309.
INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE | 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zoom controls
To the right of the horizontal scroll bar are the time zoom controls. Clicking the Zoom In Time button ( ) increases the horizontal
magnification of the project. To decrease the level of magnification, click the Zoom Out Time button ( ).
Directly below the vertical scroll bar are the dedicated track height zoom controls. Clicking the Zoom In Track Height button (
)
increases the vertical magnification of the project. To decrease the level of magnification, click the Zoom Out Track Height button ( ).
Note: Double-clicking the horizontal or vertical scroll bars adjusts the magnification so that as much of the project (either horizontally
or vertically) is displayed as possible.
Click the Zoom Tool button ( ) in the corner of the track view to temporarily change the cursor into the Zoom tool. After you select an
area of the track view to magnify, the cursor reverts to the previously active tool.
Note: Double-clicking the Zoom tool adjusts both the horizontal and vertical magnification so that as much of the project is displayed
as possible.
Window docking area
This area allows you to keep frequently used windows available while working on a project. Windows can be docked side by side or in
stacks in the window docking area. For more information, see Docking and floating ACID windows on page 247.
Click the Close button to
remove a window from a
floating dock or the window
docking area.
Click the Maximize/Minimize
button to control the size of
the window in the window
docking area.
Click the handle to drag a
window to a different
location or dock.
Click a tab to
view a window.
The default windows display in the window docking area when you start ACID for the first time. Additional windows can be displayed by
clicking the window’s tab or by choosing the desired window from the View menu.
Tip: You can quickly hide or show the window docking area by pressing F11.
The available windows can be docked anywhere at the bottom of the ACID window or floated over the ACID window or on a secondary
monitor (this setup requires a dual-monitor video card). You can also create floating docks anywhere by dragging more than one
window to the same area.
Explorer window
The Explorer window works similarly to the Windows® Explorer. You can use the Explorer window to locate, preview and select media
files to be added to your project. You can also use the Explorer window to perform common file management tasks, such as renaming
files or creating folders. Display the Explorer by choosing Explorer from the View menu or pressing Alt+1.
22 | CHAPTER 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chopper
The Chopper™ isolates audio events so that you can dissect them and reinsert them into a project to produce elaborate slice-n-dice
effects with minimal effort. Display the Chopper by choosing Chopper from the View menu or pressing Alt+2. For more information, see
Mixing Console
The Mixing Console provides an integrated view of all tracks and busses in your project using the appearance of a traditional hardware-
based mixer. Display the Mixing Console window by choosing Mixing Console from the View menu or pressing Alt+3. For more
Video Preview
This window displays prerendered video files that can be imported and synchronized with an ACID project. The video file displays
during project playback and can be rendered with the project to an appropriate format. Display the Video Preview window by choosing
Video Preview from the View menu or pressing Alt+4. For more information, see Using the Video Preview window on page 232.
Media Manager
This window displays the Media Manager™, which you can use to search for, manage, and tag your media files. Display the Media
Manager window by choosing Media Manager from the View menu or pressing Alt+5. For more information, see Using the Media
Track Properties
This window allows you to change track attributes. Display the Track Properties window by double-clicking a track’s icon or by pressing
Surround Panner
This window allows you to control panning in a 5.1 surround project. Display the Surround Panner window by double-clicking the
surround panner on a track or by pressing Alt+7. For more information, see Working with 5.1 Surround on page 235.
Soft Synth Properties
This window allows you to route soft synths to DLS soft synths, VST instruments, or ReWire 2.0 devices, and you can configure soft
synths for external input from a MIDI controller. Display the Soft Synth Properties window by double-clicking a soft synth control’s icon
or by pressing Alt+8.
Audio Plug-In
This window displays plug-ins and settings for track, assignable, bus, and soft synth effects chains. Display the Audio Plug-In window by
clicking a track’s Track FX button ( ), by choosing Audio Plug-In from the View menu, or by pressing Alt+9. For more information, see
INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE | 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Plug-In Manager
This window allows you to view and choose effects plug-ins to be added to a track, bus, or assignable effects chain. Display the Plug-In
Manager window by choosing Plug-In Manager from the View menu or by pressing Ctrl+Alt+1. For more information, see Organizing
Tips:
•
•
To add an effect quickly, drag a plug-in from the Plug-In Manager window to a track, bus, assignable effects chain, or soft synth bus.
If the VST plug-in you want to use isn't displayed in the list, you can use the VST Effects tab in the Preferences dialog to add the plug-in's
folder and then click the Refresh button to scan for plug-ins. For more information, see Using the Video tab on page 261.
If the DirectX plug-in you want to use isn't displayed in the list, hold Ctrl+Shift while restarting ACID and then select the Delete all cached
application data check box to reset your preferences and rescan for DirectX plug-ins.
•
Groove Pool
This window allows you to view and edit the grooves in your project. Display the Groove Pool by choosing Groove Pool from the View
menu or by pressing Ctrl+Alt+2. The upper half of the Groove Pool window shows all of the groove maps currently in your project. The
lower half of the window displays the selected groove map in the Groove Editor, which allows you to make changes. For more
Clip Properties
For audio (non-MIDI) clips, this window allows the user to change clip types (loop, one-shot, and Beatmapped), and adjust time
stretching, pitch, root notes, tempo, and downbeat.
For MIDI clips, you can use the Clip Properties window to edit data using the OPT list editor or piano roll.
For more information, see Using the piano roll editor on page 213. For more information, see Using the list editor on page 216.
24 | CHAPTER 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes on audio signal flow
•
•
In 5.1 surround projects, tracks routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning (six-channel) information. Tracks routed
to busses (e.g., Bus A) send stereo panning (two-channel) information.
•
•
Assignable effect chain panning is available only in 5.1 surround projects. In 5.1 surround projects, assignable effect chains routed
to the Surround Master bus send surround panning (six-channel) information. Assignable effect chains routed to busses (e.g., Bus
A) send stereo panning (two-channel) information.
Bus panning is available only in 5.1 surround projects. In 5.1 surround projects, busses routed to the Surround Master bus send
surround panning (six-channel) information. Busses routed to hardware send stereo panning (two-channel) information.
26 | CHAPTER 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes on MIDI signal flow
•
Soft synth panning is available only in 5.1 surround projects. In 5.1 surround projects, soft synth controls routed to the Surround
Master bus send surround panning (six-channel) information. Soft synth controls routed to busses (e.g., Bus A) send stereo panning
(two-channel) information.
•
Bus panning is available only in 5.1 surround projects. In 5.1 surround projects, busses routed to the Surround Master bus send
surround panning (six-channel) information. Busses routed to hardware send stereo panning (two-channel) information.
28 | CHAPTER 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
2
Getting Started
Now that you have an understanding of the interface and controls found in ACID® software, you are ready to begin
learning the techniques needed to pick, paint, and play in ACID projects. In this chapter you will learn the skills that will
allow you to create music, from locating media files to writing the finished project to CD.
Starting projects
Double-clicking the ACID icon on the desktop starts the software. You can immediately begin building your ACID project
using the application’s default project properties. However, you may prefer to customize the project properties prior to
beginning the project.
Setting project properties
ACID allows you to configure project properties and add summary information prior to beginning a project. Choosing
New from the File menu displays the New Project dialog. This dialog contains two tabs: Summary and Audio. Selecting
the Start all new projects with these settings check box configures the software to use the parameters and information
in both tabs as defaults when starting all subsequent projects.
Note: You can edit project audio properties and summary information at any time. Choose Properties from the File
menu to display the Project Properties dialog, which contains the identical tabs and parameters as the New Project dialog.
Using the Summary tab
This tab allows you to enter information about the project. These boxes may be left blank or if information exists, you
may change it at any time.
Item
Title
Description
Enter the name or title of the project.
Artist
Enter the name of the narrator, band, or artist(s) being recorded into the
project.
Engineer
Enter the name(s) of the people who mixed and edited the project.
Enter the date and ownership rights of the project.
Enter information that identifies and describes the project.
Enter the Universal Product Code (UPC) and the Media Catalog Number (MCN)
to be written to your CD for identification purposes.
Select this check box if your projects’ requirements do not change or you want
consistent settings for future projects.
Copyright
Comments
Universal Product Code/Media
Catalog Number
Start all new projects with these
settings
Using the Audio tab
This tab allows you to set different characteristics the project uses to handle the audio.
Item
Description
Master bus mode
Choose either Stereo for a standard audio project or 5.1 Surround for a surround
project.
Number of additional stereo
busses
Enter the number of stereo busses that you want in your project. You may add up to
26 busses. The busses appear in the Mixing Console window. For more information,
Sample rate
Choose a sample rate from the drop-down list or enter your own rate. The sample rate
range is 2,000 Hz to 192,000 Hz. Higher sample rates result in better quality sound, but
also mean larger audio files.
Bit depth
Choose a bit depth from the drop-down list. A higher bit depth results in better quality
sound, but also means larger audio files.
Enable low-pass filter on LFE
Select this check box to limit the audio sent to the LFE channel in a 5.1 surround
GETTING STARTED | 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
Cutoff frequency for low-pass filter Enter a low-pass cutoff frequency value for 5.1 surround projects. Audio sent to the
LFE channel is limited to frequencies lower than the value you enter. Applying a low-
pass filter approximates the bass-management system in a 5.1 decoder and ensures
that you’re sending only low-frequency audio to the LFE channel.
Available only in ACID.
Low-pass filter quality
Recorded files folder
Choose a setting from the drop-down list to determine the sharpness of the low-pass
filter’s rolloff curve. Best produces the sharpest curve.
Available only in ACID.
This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you record new audio
or MIDI tracks. Choose <Project> to save recorded files in the same folder as your ACID
project file, or click the Browse button to choose a different folder.
The recorded files folder from the Folder tab of the Preferences dialog is used by
default unless you choose a project-specific location. If you select the Start all new
projects with these settings check box, the setting on the Folder tab of the
Preferences dialog will be updated to use the folder specified in the Project Properties
dialog.
Start all new projects with these
settings
Select this check box if your project requirements do not change or you want
consistent settings for future projects.
Opening existing projects
1. From the File menu, choose Open. The Open dialog appears.
2. Choose a drive and folder from the Look in drop-down list.
3. Select a file in the browse window or type a name in the File name box. Detailed information about the selected file appears at the
bottom of the dialog box.
4. Choose a file type from the Files of type drop-down list to limit the files displayed in the dialog box.
5. Click Open.
Note: If one of the media files cannot be located when you open an ACID project, you can choose to leave the media offline and
continue to edit events on the track. The events point to the location of the source media file. If you restore the source media file at a
later time, the project opens normally.
Opening ACID projects with embedded media
When you open an .acd-zip project, the project file and all media files are copied to the temporary files folder.
Note: You can customize the location of the temporary files folder. For more information, see From the Options menu, choose
Any changes you make to the project are saved to the files in this temporary folder until you save the .acd-zip file again. For more
Getting media files
Now that you’ve created a new project or opened an existing project, the next step is to add media to the project. You can use the
Explorer window to locate, preview and add media to your project. You can also extract audio from a CD or download media from the
Web. If you have ACID, you can also use the Media Manager to locate and add media files.
Previewing media from the Explorer window
The Explorer window allows you to preview files in looped playback at the current project tempo before adding them to your project.
You can also preview files in the Explorer in conjunction with playing your project, thereby allowing you to preview how a file will sound
in the project.
To preview files, use the Start Preview ( ), Stop Preview ( ), and Auto Preview ( ) buttons at the top of the Explorer window.
30 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Previewing a media file
1. Select the media file in the Explorer window that you want to preview.
2. Click the Start Preview button ( ). The media file begins looped playback. You can monitor its levels on the preview bus.
3. Click the Stop Preview button ( ) to end playback.
Previewing multiple media files
You can use the Explorer’s multiple-selection preview feature to preview a group of files in the order that you select them.
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences.
In ACID, click the Other tab of the Preferences dialog and select the Enable multiple-selection preview in Explorer window check
box.
If you want, you can enter values in the Number of times to repeat each Loop box, Seconds of each One-Shot to play box, and
Number of Beatmapped measures to play box to specify how different file types are previewed.
2. Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
3. In the Explorer, select the media you want to preview. Hold Shift while clicking to select multiple, adjacent files or hold Ctrl while
clicking to select multiple, nonadjacent files.
4. Click the Start Preview button ( ). The first selected file in the list is previewed, followed by each file in the list. A file’s icon
changes to a Play icon ( ) to indicate which file is currently previewing.
Note: To add the currently previewing file to your project, press Ctrl+Enter. Press Enter to add all selected files to your project.
Using Auto Preview
Click the Auto Preview button ( ) to toggle automatic playback of media files when you select them in the Explorer. If your project is
currently playing when you select a new file, the new file plays back along with your project. This feature allows you to listen to the
media file in the context of your project.
Adding media to the project
You must add media files to a project before you can paint, arrange, and process them. When you add a file to a project, a new track is
created to accommodate it. New tracks are added at the current volume of the Preview fader in the Mixing Console window, unless you
have set a default track volume level. For more information, see Setting default track properties on page 252.
There are several methods of adding media files to a project.
Notes:
•
•
Proxy files may be created for media whose compression scheme may cause working with them to be inefficient and slow. For more
Before using long Beatmapped or long one-shot files from CDs or shared network folders, copy the media to your local drive for the best
possible performance.
ACID temporary files
When you add a media file to a project from a removable device, a copy of the media file is stored in the temporary files folder. This
keeps the media file available for use even if the source of the media is no longer accessible.
Be aware that the temporary files folder is cleared when you close the ACID application. However, files are not cleared from the folder if
the software closes inappropriately.
Note: You can customize the location of the temporary files folder. For more information, see From the Options menu, choose
GETTING STARTED | 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding media files from the Explorer window
You can use the Explorer window, which operates similarly to the Windows® Explorer, to locate media files for use in projects. Display
the Explorer, if needed, by choosing Explorer from the View menu, or by pressing Alt+1.
There are three ways to add media files from the Explorer window:
•
•
Double-click the desired file.
Drag the file from the Explorer to the track view or track list. Dragging a file from the Explorer to the track name of an existing track
allows you to replace the original file with the new file, while all events remain in place.
•
Right-click and drag a file to the track view or track list to specify the type of track to be created. When you drop the file, a shortcut
menu appears that allows you to choose whether to treat the file as a loop, one-shot, Beatmapped track, or as an autodetected
type.
Adding MIDI files from the Explorer window
You can add MIDI files to your project just as you would add audio files. You can right-click a MIDI in the Explorer window, you can
choose how you want to add it to your project:
•
•
•
•
Add to Project.
Add to Project with Events.
Add to Project with Events Rippled.
Open as New Project.
Adding media files from the Media Manager window
If you have ACID, you can use the powerful Media Manager feature to locate, catalog, and add media files to your ACID projects. Within
the Media Manager window, you can build media libraries of your media that include file attributes, ACID metadata, and tags that you
can assign to classify your media. You can also search for, purchase, and access reference libraries from outside sources to build your
media file base. Display the Media Manager, if needed, by choosing Media Manager from the View menu, or by pressing Alt+5.
Adding media files from the Open dialog
There are three ways to add media files from the Open dialog:
•
•
•
Select the desired file and click Open.
Right-click the selected file and choose Select from the shortcut menu.
Double-click the selected file.
Adding media files from outside the application
You can also add a media file to a project by dragging it from Windows® Explorer to the track view.
Adding multiple media files simultaneously
To add multiple media files to the project, Ctrl+click (or Shift+click) to select the files and drag them to the track view or the track list.
Extracting media files from CD
You can extract 44,100 Hz, 16-bit, stereo data from CDs. Extracted CD tracks are added to new tracks in your ACID project.
1. Insert a CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2. From the File menu, choose Extract Audio from CD. The Extract Audio from CD dialog appears.
3. If you have more than one CD drive, choose the CD drive that contains the audio you want to extract from the Drive drop-down list.
32 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. From the Action drop-down list, choose how you want to extract
audio:
•
•
•
Choose Read by track and select each track you want to
extract. Each track is extracted to a new track in your project.
Choose Read entire disc to extract the current CD to a single
file.
Choose Read by range and enter a starting time and ending
time (or a starting time and length). The time range is
extracted to a new track in your project.
Click Play to preview your selection. In order to preview, your CD
drive’s audio output must be connected to your sound card, or
you can connect headphones to the front of the CD drive.
5. Click the MusicID button if you want to obtain CD information
using Gracenote MusicID.
If CD information is not available, you can click the CD Info button
to display a dialog box where you can edit the CD information and
submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote Media Database. For more
6. From the Speed drop-down list, choose the speed at which you want to extract audio.
7. Click OK. The Save As dialog appears.
8. Enter a file name and choose a location for the new file(s).
Tip: Extracted tracks can be automatically named for you. From the Options menu, choose Preferences, and on the General tab, select
the Autoname extracted CD tracks check box. For more information, see From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the
9. Click Save to start extracting audio.
CD data extraction begins and a progress meter is displayed. If the file is longer than 30 seconds, the Beatmapper™ Wizard appears.
10. Use the Beatmapper Wizard or choose to open the file as a one-shot. The extracted file is added to a track. For more information, see
You can also double-click a CDA file in the Explorer window (or drag it to the track view) to extract a CD track without opening the
Extract Audio from CD dialog.
Note: When adding media from multiple CDs, you may need to press F5 to refresh the Explorer window to view the new CD’s contents.
Obtaining or editing CD information using Gracenote
If ACID can access information about a track or CD (either from the file or CD itself, or from a local cache), it automatically reads and
displays this information when you insert a CD or browse your computer. However, if this information is not available, the software can
retrieve information over the Internet from Gracenote MusicID.
Once ACID obtains information from Gracenote MusicID, it is saved to a local cache so the information displays more quickly the next
time the tracks are displayed.
If the software cannot connect to the Gracenote Media Database and the appropriate CD information is not available on your computer,
the tracks are simply listed numerically. In this case, you can edit CD information and submit it to the Gracenote Media Database.
Note: Using Gracenote MusicID requires an active Internet connection. For more information on using Gracenote MusicID, refer to
www.gracenote.com/.
GETTING STARTED | 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Obtaining CD information
1. Insert a CD in your drive.
2. Click the MusicID button in the in the Extract Audio from CD dialog, or browse to the CD and click the
button in the Explorer
window. For more information, see Extracting media files from CD on page 32. For more information, see Explorer window on page 22.
Gracenote MusicID attempts to obtain matching CD information and displays artist, album, and track data:
•
•
If the service locates an exact match, this information is automatically displayed. No additional action is necessary.
If the service locates multiple possible matches, the Match dialog is displayed. Proceed to step 2.
3. Choose a method for completing the CD information:
•
If none of the possible matches is appropriate, click the Submit New button. The Gracenote CDDB Disc Information dialog is
displayed, allowing you to complete information for the CD and submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote Media Database. For
help on submitting CD information, click the Help/Guidelines button in this dialog.
When you are finished typing information, click the OK button to submit your data.
•
Select the appropriate match from the list and click the Accept Match button. The artist, album, and track information is
displayed based on your selection in the right side of the PC pane.
4. You’re now ready to extract tracks.
Editing and submitting CD information
1. Insert a CD in your drive.
2. Select a track and click the CD Info button in the Extract Audio from CD dialog, or browse to the CD and click the
button in the
Explorer window. The Gracenote CDDB Disc Information dialog is displayed. For more information, see Extracting media files from CD
3. Use the Gracenote CDDB Disc Information dialog to edit information about the CD. For help on submitting CD information, click
the Help/Guidelines button in this dialog.
4. When you are finished entering the information, click the OK button to submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote Media Database.
Understanding clip types
When you add media to a project, a new track is created for the file. Depending on the type of media you add, one of four clip types is
created to accommodate it: loop, one-shot, Beatmapped, or MIDI. You can identify a track’s type by looking at the paint clip selector
Loops
Loops are small chunks of audio that are designed to create a continuous beat or pattern when played repeatedly. They are usually one
to four measures long. Loops are the type of file that you will use most frequently.
One-shots
One-shots are chunks of audio that are not designed to loop, and they are streamed from the hard disk rather than stored in RAM if they
are longer than three seconds. Things such as cymbal crashes and sound bites could be considered one-shots.
Unlike loops, one-shots do not change pitch or tempo with the rest of a project.
Beatmapped
When you add a file that is longer than thirty seconds to a project, the Beatmapper Wizard starts, allowing you to add tempo
information to the file. As a result, these clips respond to tempo and key changes just like loops. For more information, see Using the
Tip: You can change the length of the file that starts the Beatmapper in the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog. For more
34 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI
A MIDI clip is automatically created when you open a MID, SMF, or RMI file. You can use MIDI clips to record data from and play back
through synthesizers and other MIDI-compliant equipment. For more information, see Working with MIDI on page 187.
Folder tracks
Folder tracks can contain any combination of tracks. Use folder tracks to group related tracks or sections of a project so they can be
easily expanded or minimized. For example, if you have many drum tracks in your project, you can add a folder track to consolidate
drum tracks and minimize their vertical space in the track list.
When the folder track is minimized, you can also perform edit operations on clustered events in the group, but you cannot create events
with the Draw or Paint tools or perform edge-trimming. Expand the folder track to edit individual events.
Adding and editing events
You have added media to the project, and tracks have been created for the media files. Now you can add events to the track view. The
following sections describe three basic techniques used when working with audio events: painting, deleting, and moving.
Painting events
After you add a media file to your project, you must paint it on the timeline in order to hear it. When you paint on the media file’s track,
you create an event that displays the file’s waveform. You can paint events on the timeline using either the Draw tool
tool
or the Paint
.
Clips can also be painted on the timeline with the Draw and Paint tools. For more information, see Adding clips to tracks on page 101.
Note: Media files must be added to the project before either of these tools can be used to paint events.
Placing events with the Draw tool
The Draw tool is the most common method of placing events on the timeline. This tool allows you to add events one at a time. In
addition, you can use the Draw tool to select, edit, and move events. For more information, see Adding and editing events on page 35.
1. Click the Draw Tool button ( ) or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Draw from the submenu. The pointer
displays as a pencil icon.
2. Place the Draw Tool at the left edge of any track containing a media file.
3. Click and hold the mouse button while dragging the Draw tool to the right. A waveform representing the event appears on the
timeline as you drag the mouse.
Notice that if you are placing a loop file on the timeline, small indentations appear along the top and bottom edges of the event
indicating the start and end points of each individual loop.
Tip: Events can be also be drawn from right (end) to left (beginning).
4. Release the mouse button to end the event.
5. Click the Play from Start button ( ) on the transport bar. The event plays back.
GETTING STARTED | 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Painting events with the Paint tool
Unlike the Draw tool, the Paint tool allows you to quickly paint multiple events across several tracks. This can be useful when you need
to quickly add several seemingly random events to a project. The Paint tool is also best used for painting multiple one-shot events that
will be evenly spaced on the grid lines.
When painting MIDI or one-shot clips, you can click the down arrow next to the Paint tool to set the length of events that will be
created when you drag with the Paint tool.
1. Click the Paint Tool button ( ) or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Paint from the submenu. The mouse
pointer displays as a brush icon.
2. Click and hold the mouse button while dragging the Paint tool randomly across the several tracks. Notice that events are painted in
every grid space the Paint tool contacts.
3. Release the mouse button to stop adding events.
4. Click the Play from Start button ( ) on the transport bar. All new events play back.
Tip: With the Paint tool selected, you can use Ctrl+click to paint an entire event for one-shot, Beatmapped, and MIDI tracks.
Inserting events at the play cursor
You can also insert events at the cursor during playback. You can use this feature to create rhythms on one-shot tracks while listening to
the track you’re editing in the context of the rest of your project. When you’re done creating events, you can use the Render to New
Track command (on the Edit menu) to save the rhythm to a new track, or you can copy and paste your new events across the timeline.
1. Create a time selection in the portion of the project you want to edit.
2. Select the Loop Playback button ( ).
3. Click the Play button ( ) to start playback.
4. Click a track header in the track list to set the focus track.
5. Press Y to add an event at the play cursor (during playback, the edit cursor remains fixed, and the play cursor follows playback).
If snapping is enabled, events are created at the next snap point. You can use snapping to quantize your events.
6. Repeat step 5 as needed.
7. You can press the up and down arrow keys to change the focus track.
8. Click the Stop button ( ) when you’re finished creating events.
9. Edit event positions as necessary.
Tip: If you're using this feature to tap rhythms with one-shot tracks, try applying a groove to adjust the timing of your rhythm.For more
Changing the length of events
After an event is painted on the track view, you may discover that it is too long or not long enough; however, it is easy to change the
length of an event. You may find it helpful to turn snapping options on by choosing Snapping from the Options menu and choosing
Enable from the submenu.
To alter an event’s length, click the Draw Tool button ( ) and drag either end of the event. When you drag the event past the end of
the file, looped files repeat, but one-shot and Beatmapped tracks draw silence.
Original event
Drag the end of
the event...
...to increase its length.
36 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing sections of events
Occasionally you may need to delete only specific sections of an event and leave the rest of it intact. The easiest method of deleting a
section of an event is to use the Erase tool.
1. Click the Erase Tool button (
) or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Erase from the submenu. The pointer
displays as an eraser icon.
2. Drag in the track view to delete event data.
Tip: With the Erase tool, you can delete an entire one-shot, Beatmapped, or MIDI event. Just hold Ctrl while you click the event.
Moving events
The position of the left edge of an event indicates when the event becomes audible during playback. You can move events along the
timeline either individually or as a group.
In addition, you can stack events on top of one another. A longer event placed over a smaller event conceals the smaller event and
makes it inaudible. A smaller event placed over a larger event is audible and renders the section of the longer event it covers inaudible.
1. Click the Draw Tool button (
).
2. Click the event to be moved. The event is highlighted to indicate that it is selected.
Tip: You can hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple events.
3. Drag the event to a new location on the track.
Note: Multiple selected events move in relation to the event being dragged.
Editing MIDI events
You can use the inline MIDI editing mode to edit MIDI events directly in the timeline. In this mode, you can draw and erase notes in a
Using the cursor
The ACID cursor is a flashing vertical line that spans the track view of the entire project. The cursor position determines where events
split, where playback/recording starts, and where clipboard contents are pasted. In addition, the positioning of the cursor is essential to
the creation of time selections.
Positioning the cursor with the mouse
1. Click the Draw Tool button ( ).
2. Click in the track view to position the cursor.
Positioning the cursor with the keyboard
While using the mouse to position the cursor in the timeline is quick and intuitive, it is not always precise. For example, you may want
the beginning of a guitar solo to coincide with a snare drum hit, or background vocals to enter exactly 3 minutes and 24 seconds into a
song. For these reasons, you can also position the cursor using your keyboard. For more information, see Cursor placement, loop region
GETTING STARTED | 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Positioning the cursor with the Go To command
The Go To command is used to place the cursor at a specific location in the ACID project.
•
Press Ctrl+G to position the cursor based on the position displayed on the beat ruler. Specify a position (in measures.beats.ticks
format) in the box that appears in the time display and press Enter.
•
Press Shift+G to position the cursor based on the time displayed on the time ruler. Specify a time in the box that appears in the
time display and press Enter.
Tip: You can also open the boxes in the time display by double-clicking the desired value.
Making selections
You must select events before you can move or edit them.
Selecting an event
1. Click the Draw Tool button (
).
2. Click an event. The event is highlighted.
Selected event
Selecting multiple events
You have several methods of selecting multiple events:
•
•
•
•
•
Press Ctrl or Shift while clicking events.
Use the Select All on Track command.
Use the Select Events to End command.
Use the Select All command.
Use the Selection tool.
Note: Unless stated otherwise, selections can only be made using the Draw tool.
Selecting multiple events using the keyboard and mouse
Holding Ctrl while clicking events allows you to select multiple, nonadjacent events that reside on any track. This method is useful when
you need to move several scattered events by an equal amount within the project.
Holding Shift allows you to select multiple, adjacent events. Selecting any two events while holding Shift automatically selects all events
located between the selected events. Events may be selected from the same track or across tracks. This method is useful when you want
to move several adjacent events by an equal amount within the project.
Selecting multiple events using the Select All on Track command
Right-clicking any track in the track view and choosing Select All on Track from the shortcut menu selects every event on the track.
38 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting multiple events using the Select Events to End command
Right-clicking an event in the track view and choosing Select Events to End from the shortcut menu selects every event on the track
after the selected event.
You use this command across multiple tracks by holding Ctrl to click events on several tracks and then right-clicking and choosing
Select Events to End from the shortcut menu.
Selecting events that use a specified clip
Perform any of the following actions to select events created from a clip:
•
•
•
Right-click an event in the timeline and choose Select Events Using This Event's Clip from the shortcut menu to select all events
on the track that use the same clip as the selected event.
Right-click the timeline, choose Select Events Using Clip, and then choose a clip from the submenu to select all events on the track
that use the specified clip.
Right-click a clip in the Clip Pool window and choose Select Timeline Events from the shortcut menu.
Selecting events using the Select All command
Choosing Select All from the Edit menu selects all events in a project.
Selecting multiple events using the Selection tool
You can drag the Selection tool across the track view to select events across multiple tracks. This tool allows you to select events using
three methods: vertical, horizontal, and free selection.
Method
Vertical
Description
Allows you to select all events on all
tracks within an interval of time.
Displays as...
Parallel dashed line spanning the
vertical length of the project.
Horizontal
Allows you to select all events on a track Parallel dashed line spanning the
or several adjacent tracks. horizontal length of the project.
Free selection Allows you to select a group of adjacent Dashed line box.
events on adjacent tracks. This is the
default selection method.
1. Click the Selection Tool button (
) or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Selection from the submenu.
2. Place the pointer on the track view. The pointer displays as an arrow with an adjacent dotted box (
).
3. Drag the mouse on the track view. A dashed rectangular box appears on the track view and all events within and adjacent to it are
selected.
4. While holding the left mouse button, click and release the right mouse button (referred to as toggle-clicking). The selection
method changes to vertical and again, all events within and adjacent to the selection area are selected.
5. Toggle-click the mouse once more. The selection method changes to horizontal and all events within and adjacent to the selection
area are selected.
Creating time selections
You are not limited to selecting events. Frequently, you may want to select only audio events occurring within a time selection. You can
do this using the Time Selection tool.
1. Click the Time Selection Tool button ( ) or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Time Selection from the
submenu. The pointer displays with an adjacent cursor ( ).
2. Drag the mouse in the track view. The selection area is highlighted on the track view.
3. Release the mouse button. A time selection is created and all events within it are selected.
Note: If the selection area is automatically snapping to the track view’s grid lines, the ACID snapping feature is turned on. You can turn
snapping off by pressing F8.
GETTING STARTED | 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating event selections within time selections
You can select specific events within a general time selection. This technique is useful for selecting individual instruments from a
particular section of a song. For example, you may want to copy all percussion events from a song’s bridge and re-use them in the coda.
1. Click the Time Selection Tool button ( ) or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Time Selection from the
submenu. The pointer displays with an adjacent cursor ( ).
2. Drag the mouse in the track view. The selection area is highlighted on the track view.
3. Release the mouse button. A selection is created and all events within it are selected.
4. Hold Ctrl and click any event that extends beyond the time selection. The entire event appears highlighted; however, only the
section of the event contained within the time selection is actually selected.
Tip: You can select additional events within the time selection by continuing to hold Ctrl while clicking events. In addition, holding Shift
allows you to select the events of multiple adjacent tracks within a selection.
Working with tracks
The following sections explain several basic track functions and features. For more in-depth information on tracks, see Working with
Reordering tracks
When building an ACID project, you may want to reorder the tracks to place similar instruments in proximity to one another. For
example, placing all drum loops together in the track view makes it easier for you to fine-tune the mix of the song’s overall drum sound.
1. Drag the track header to a new location in the track list. A heavy black horizontal line appears on the track list to indicate where the
track will be placed.
2. Release the mouse button. The track is dropped in the new location and the entire track list/track view adjusts accordingly.
Tip: You can reorder multiple tracks by holding Ctrl or Shift while selecting tracks and dragging the tracks as a group.
Resizing tracks
You can change the height of a track, thereby affecting how many tracks display in the track view. This is especially useful when building
a project with a large number of tracks. In addition, you can decrease the track’s height until only the multipurpose slider, Track FX
button, Mute button, and Solo button are visible.
1. Drag the bottom edge of a track up or down in the track list. The pointer displays as a vertical stretch icon ( ).
2. Release the mouse button to establish the track’s new height.
Tip: You can set the default height for all new tracks by right-clicking the newly resized track in the track list and choosing Set Default
Track Properties from the shortcut menu. For more information, see Setting default track properties on page 252.
Changing track colors
As mentioned previously, tracks are automatically created to accommodate new media files. These tracks are assigned a default color.
However, you can change track colors to organize the tracks in your project. To change the color, right-click the track in the track list,
choose Color from the shortcut menu, and choose the desired color from the submenu.
Renaming tracks
To rename a track, right-click the track name and choose Rename from the shortcut menu, or double-click the track name. Renaming a
track applies to the project only and does not change the file associated with the track.
40 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Duplicating tracks
To duplicate a track, right-click it and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu. An exact copy of the track is created and its
events and adds it below the original track in the project. The words “Copy of” appear before the name of the duplicate track to identify
it in the track list.
Deleting tracks
You can delete unnecessary tracks from a project by selecting the track and using any of the following methods:
•
•
•
Choose Delete from the Edit menu.
Right-click a track and choose Delete Track from the shortcut menu.
Press Delete.
Copying, cutting, and pasting tracks
Copying a track places an exact copy of the selected track on the clipboard, but leaves the track view unchanged. To copy a track, select
the track and do one of the following:
•
•
•
•
Click the Copy button (
) on the toolbar.
Choose Copy from the Edit menu.
Right-click the track header and choose Copy Track from the shortcut menu.
Press Ctrl+C.
Cutting a track removes it from the track view and places it on the clipboard. To cut a track, select it and do one of the following:
•
•
•
•
Click the Cut button (
) on the toolbar.
Choose Cut from the Edit menu.
Right-click the track header and choose Cut Track from the shortcut menu.
Press Ctrl+X.
Tracks that are copied or cut to the clipboard can be pasted back into the current project or into a different project an unlimited number
of times. This is a useful way to share tracks between different compositions. You can paste a track in one of the following ways:
•
•
•
•
Click the Paste button (
) on the toolbar.
Choose Paste from the Edit menu.
Right-click the track view and choose Paste Track from the shortcut menu.
Press Ctrl+V.
Adjusting the mix
You can adjust the mix of a specific track in the track header. Volume and pan each have dedicated sliders to make adjustments.
Assignable effects and busses share a multipurpose slider. Click the multipurpose slider to choose what you want to adjust.
Multipurpose slider mode
Multipurpose slider
GETTING STARTED | 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once you have chosen what you want to adjust, drag the slider to adjust the level. You can hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple tracks and
move the sliders together as a group.
Function
Volume
Description
This dedicated volume slider controls how loud a track is in the mix. A value of 0 dB means that the track
plays with no boost or cut from the software. Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume; dragging to the
right boosts the volume.
Pan
This dedicated pan slider controls the position of a track in the stereo field. Dragging the slider to the left
places the track in the left speaker more than the right, while dragging the slider to the right places the track
in the right speaker.
Because true stereo panning is used, you can introduce clipping when panning a track to the left or right.
Unlike a left/right balance control—which simply decreases the volume of one channel—the default
panning mode actually adds the audio from one channel to the other. When panning a track, adjust the
track volume accordingly.
You can choose among five panning types to determine how a track is panned. For more information, see
FX
With the multipurpose slider, you can control the level of the track sent to each of the assignable effect
chains that you have created. Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume; dragging to the right boosts
the volume.
Bus
With the multipurpose slider, you can control the level of the track sent to each of the additional busses that
you have created for your project. Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume; dragging the fader to the
right boosts the volume.
Note: When adjusting the mix of your tracks, remember to look at the meters on the Mixing Console. Because you are adding the
volumes of all the tracks together, it is easy to clip the audio output. Make sure that the meters never display the red clip indicator during
playback.
Muting or unmuting tracks
Each track has a Mute button ( ). Clicking this button renders the corresponding track inaudible during playback and shades it to
indicate that it is muted. Toggle-muting a track is an effective way of determining whether a track contributes to the overall sound of a
project.
Note: Muting a track mutes its main output and post-fader sends only unless the Track prefader sends listen to mute check box on
the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog is selected. For more information, see Using the Audio tab on page 255.
1. Deselect the Automation Settings button ( ) to toggle trim mode.
2. Click the Mute button (or press Z). Repeat this step on additional tracks to add them to the mute group, if desired.
Tip: Press Ctrl and click the Mute button to mute only the selected track (and restore any other muted tracks). If the selected track is
already muted, press Ctrl and click the Mute button to restore all tracks.
Adjusting mute automation
When you select the Automation Settings button ( ), the Mute button is displayed as a , and you can use the control to edit volume
automation.
42 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Soloing tracks
Located next to the Mute button, the Solo button ( ) allows you isolate tracks in a project during playback. When you click this button
during playback, the corresponding track remains audible and all other tracks are muted. Clicking the Solo button a second time returns
all tracks to their original levels in the mix. Toggle-soloing a track is an effective method of configuring and previewing isolated track
effects against how they sound in the project.
You can also press X to solo a track or group of tracks.
Tip: Press Ctrl and click the Solo button to solo only the selected track (and restore any other soloed tracks). If the selected track is already
soloed, press Ctrl and click the Solo button to restore all tracks.
Choosing a track’s input/recording device
The Record Device Selector button
in a track header chooses the audio input that will be used to record to a track.
You can click the Record Device Selector button to turn input monitoring on or off and choose a recording device:
Monitoring track output levels
During playback, a responsive meter is displayed in the track header to monitor the track's output.
Horizontal meter
Vertical meter
(Right-click and choose
Use Vertical Meters
from the shortcut menu)
When clipping is detected, the peak meter displays a red Clip indicator.
Right-click the meters and choose a command from the shortcut menu to adjust the display of the meters. This shortcut menu allows
you to reset clip indicators, choose a display scale, toggle vertical display, or turn output meters off.
Working with groups of tracks
Select a group of tracks by holding the Ctrl key while you click the track header of the desired tracks. Now you can adjust the volume,
panning, track color, and other track attributes simultaneously.
Using undo and redo
You have unlimited undo and redo capabilities in ACID. Each edit you perform in the project is added to an undo history, which allows
you to quickly restore the project to any of its previous states. In addition, undoing an edit automatically places it in the project’s redo
history where it can be quickly re-performed. However, any new edit performed on the project overwrites the redo history.
Note: The undo and redo histories are cleared when you close the project or exit the application.
GETTING STARTED | 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using undo
To undo an edit, click the Undo button ( ) on the toolbar or press Ctrl+Z. Edits are undone in the reverse order they were performed.
Tip: You can also undo the most recent edit by choosing Undo from the Edit menu.
Undoing a series of edits
Clicking the down arrow next to the Undo button (
) displays the project’s undo history. The history displays as a drop-down list with
the most recent edit located at the top. Undoing an edit in the list requires all subsequent edits to be undone as well.
1. Click the arrow to the right of the Undo button ( ). The undo history appears.
2. Locate the edit to be undone. Notice that all subsequent edits are automatically selected and the total number of edits to be
undone is indicated at the bottom of the drop-down list.
3. Click the edit to be undone. The project is restored to the state it was in prior to the selected edit.
Undoing all edits
Choosing Undo All from the Edit menu undoes all project edits and automatically adds them to the redo history.
Using redo
To redo an edit, click the Redo button ( ) on the toolbar or press Ctrl+Shift+Z. Edits are re-performed in the reverse order they were
undone.
Tip: You can also redo the most recent undone edit by choosing Redo from the Edit menu.
Redoing a series of edits
Clicking the down arrow next to the Redo button ( ) displays the project’s redo history. The history displays as a drop-down list with
the most recently undone edit located at the top. Redoing an edit in the list requires all subsequently undone edits to be re-performed
as well.
1. Click the arrow to the right of the Redo button ( ). The redo history appears.
2. Locate the edit to be redone. Notice that all subsequently undone edits are automatically selected and the total number of edits to
be redone is indicated at the bottom of the drop-down list.
3. Click the edit to be redone. The project is restored to the state it was in prior to the selected undone edit.
Tip: Clicking the desktop outside the drop-down list cancels the redo operation.
Clearing the undo history
You can clear the undo and redo histories without closing the project or exiting the application. After the histories are cleared, new ones
are created as you continue building the project.
1. From the Edit menu, choose Clear Undo History. A confirmation dialog appears, alerting you that this action permanently deletes
the current edit histories.
2. Click Yes to clear the edit histories or No to retain the current edit histories.
44 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the project
You have several methods for playing your projects.
Using the transport bar
All buttons required to play your project are located on the transport bar. The transport bar should look somewhat familiar to you, as it
contains buttons found on most home CD and cassette players. For more information, see Transport bar on page 21.
Using playback options
As you build a project, you will likely have different playback needs. For example, you may want to hear the project in its entirety when
checking the final mix, but not when you are working on the ending. Because of this, you have three playback options:
•
•
•
Playing the entire project.
Playing from the cursor position.
Playing in looped playback.
Playing the entire project
To begin playback from the beginning of the project, click the transport bar’s Play From Start button ( ) or press Shift+Space. To stop
playback, click the transport bar’s Stop button ( ) or press Space.
Playing from the cursor position
To begin playback from the current cursor position, click the transport bar’s Play button( ) or press Space. To stop playback, click the
transport bar’s Stop button ( ) or press Space.
Playing in looped playback
You can also limit playback to a specific loop region on the track view. This playback method uses the transport bar’s Loop Playback
button ( ) and allows you to fine-tune mixes and effects while continually listening to the selected area. For more information, see
1. Drag the handles of the loop bar to create the desired loop region.
Handle
Loop bar
2. Click the Loop Playback button ( ) to turn on looped playback.
3. Click the transport bar’s Play button ( ) or press Space. Playback of the selected area begins. To stop playback, click the transport
bar’s Stop button ( ) or press Space.
GETTING STARTED | 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bypassing audio effects during playback
If you want to hear your project without your applied audio effects (track, bus, and assignable effects), you can quickly bypass these
effects during playback. From the Options menu, choose Bypass All Audio FX. This option can also conserve processing power to avoid
playback problems.
Note: When effects are bypassed, you can choose whether bypassed effects remain open. When the Keep bypassed FX running check
box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog is selected, effects remain open so you can bypass/enable effects with no pause for A/B
testing. When the check box is cleared, effects are fully bypassed, conserving processing power.
Saving, rendering, and delivering projects
Though you are provided with the tools to quickly build impressive musical projects, you may find yourself building elaborate projects
over a period of weeks or even months. While you are working on a project, you should save it in the ACID native format: the ACID
project file (.acd).
Important: If you save a project originally created in an earlier version of ACID software in ACID version 7.0, it will be unusable in earlier
versions of the software. Use the Save As dialog to save the project with a new name after editing it in version 7.0.
When you are finished building a project, you can render projects in a variety of formats. You should determine the project’s final format
(or formats) based on how you will deliver the media. For example, you would render your project to a streaming media format if you
plan to publish it to the Internet.
Note: Be aware that projects containing MIDI files that are routed to external MIDI ports must be rerouted to internal DLS sets or VST
instruments (VSTi) to be included in the rendered mix. For more information, see Rendering projects with MIDI tracks on page 222.
Saving projects
An ACID project file (.acd) is the default file format for saving a new project and should be used for saving unfinished projects. There are
two ACID project file types.
Format
Extension Description
ACID Project File
.acd
Contains all information regarding the project including track layout, envelope settings, and effects
parameters. However, this type of file does not contain actual audio, only references to the audio files.
Contains all information regarding the project including track layout, envelope settings, and effects
parameters. In addition, all audio files used in the project are embedded into the project file.
ACID Project with .acd-zip
Embedded Media
If you save a project in .acd-zip format, the project file and all media files are copied to a temporary files folder.
If you continue to work on your project after saving the .acd-zip file, your changes are saved to the files in this
temporary folder.
You can customize the location of the temporary files folder. For more information, see From the Options
1. To save a file, display the Save As dialog using any of the following options:
•
•
•
Click the Save button ( ) on the toolbar.
From the Edit menu, choose Save.
Press Ctrl+S.
2. From the Save in drop-down list, choose the drive and directory where the file will be saved.
3. Enter a name for the project in the File name box.
4. From the Save as type drop-down list, choose the desired ACID project file type.
5. If you want to save a copy of each of the project’s media files to the same location as your project file, select the Copy all media
with project check box. This is available when saving as an ACID project file.
46 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Click Save. The project is saved.
Tip: Once the project is saved, you can use the Save As command from the File menu to create a copy of the project with a new name or
save to a different ACID project file format.
Rendering projects
Rendering refers to the process of converting the ACID project into a
file that is formatted for a specific playback method. Possible playback
methods include media player applications, Internet streaming
media, CD-ROM, and CD audio. When an ACID project is rendered, it is
not overwritten, deleted, or altered and you are able to return to the
original project to make changes and re-render.
1. From the File menu, choose Render As. The Render As dialog
appears.
2. From the Save in drop-down list, choose the drive and folder
where the file will be saved.
3. Enter a new name for the project in the File name box.
4. From the Save as type drop-down list, choose the desired file
format.
5. If the selected file type supports it, you can choose an encoding
template from the Template drop-down list, or click Custom to
6. Select or clear the following check boxes as needed:
•
Select the Save project as path reference in rendered
media check box if you want to save the project path
information with the rendered file to easily return to your source project if you use your rendered file in another project.
Note: If you modify the project file after rendering, the project data will no longer match the rendered file. To edit a project using a
path reference, the project file and all media must be available on your computer.
•
•
•
Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to save only the portion of the project that is contained within the
loop region. The loop region does not need to be active for this option to work.
If the selected file type supports it, you can select the Save project markers with media file check box to include markers and
regions in the rendered media file.
If the selected file type supports it, you can select the Save sections as regions with a media file check box to include sections
in the rendered media file. If the information cannot be saved to your media file, an .sfl file will be created (using the same
base name as your media file).
•
•
•
Select the Save each track as a separate file check box to save each track in your project to a separate file. All of the volume
adjustments, panning, FX, and events are saved with the track. You can also use this feature to create tracks that you can use in
multitrack recording software or Macromedia® Flash®.
If your project contains video, you can select the Stretch video to fill output frame (do not letterbox) check box to have your
video reformatted so that it fills the output frame size listed in the Description box. When the check box is cleared, the current
aspect ratio is maintained and black borders are added to fill the extra frame area (called letterboxing).
If your project contains video and you see unacceptable artifacts in the rendered video, you can clear the Fast video resizing
check box. Turning off this option can correct the artifacts, but your rendering time will increase significantly.
7. Click Save. A progress dialog appears.
GETTING STARTED | 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. When rendering is complete, you can choose one of the following options:
•
•
•
Click Open to start the associated media player and play the newly rendered file.
Click Open Folder to open Windows Explorer and display the location of the newly rendered file.
Click Close to close the progress dialog and return to the ACID window.
Note: MIDI tracks must be routed to DLS or VSTi soft synths to be included in the rendered output. For more information, see
Supported formats for rendering
The following table briefly describes the file formats available for rendering a project.
Format
ATRAC
AIFF File
Extension
.aa3
.aif
Description
A Sony proprietary audio compression technology.
The standard audio file format for audio used on Macintosh
computers.
Dolby Digital AC-3 Pro/ .ac3
Dolby Digital AC-3
Studio
A Dolby Laboratories proprietary audio compression format.
FLAC audio
MPEG-1 and MPEG-2
.flac
.mpg
A nonproprietary, lossless audio compression format.
MPEG files are a format used when burning audio and video to a
Video CD, Super Video CD, or DVD. MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 file
creation is supported through the use of the MainConcept
MPEG plug-in.
Note: This format requires a separate purchase of the
MainConcept MPEG plug-in.
MPEG-1 Layer 3
.mp3
A highly compressed format used for portable digital players
and Internet sharing of media. 20 free MP3 encodes are
provided. After you have used the free encodes, you must
register the plug-in to continue rendering MP3s.
A patent-free audio encoding and streaming technology.
QuickTime® for Microsoft Windows.
The RealNetworks® standard for streaming media via the Web.
This option renders both audio and video into one file.
A Sony proprietary lossless audio compression format.
A Sony proprietary wave format that does not have a restricted
file size (unlike Windows standard WAV format which is limited
to ~2GB).
Ogg Vorbis
QuickTime
RealMedia
.ogg
.mov
.rm
Perfect Clarity Audio
Wave64
.pca
.w64
Video for Windows
Wave
.avi
The standard video file format used on Windows-based
computers.
The standard audio file format used on Windows-based
computers.
.wav
Windows Media Audio .wma
Windows Media Video .wmv
The Microsoft® audio format used to create files for streaming or
downloading via the Web.
The Microsoft audio and video format used to create files for
streaming or downloading via the Web.
Note: Some plug-ins, such as MP3, may require registration.
48 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating custom rendering settings
The Custom Settings dialog appears when you click Custom in the Save As dialog. You can use the Custom Settings dialog to create
custom encoding templates for many of the file formats available in the software.
1. From the File menu, choose Render As. The Render As dialog appears.
2. Choose your preferred file format from the Save as type drop-down list. If the format allows you to create custom settings, the
Custom button becomes active.
3. Click Custom. The Custom Template dialog appears.
4. Make the appropriate setting changes for the chosen file format. For information about specific controls in each file type’s Custom
Template dialog, click the Help button
.
Tip: To save the custom settings for future use, enter a name for the template in the Template box and click the Save Template button
).
(
5. Click OK. The Custom Template dialog closes.
Copying rendering templates between computers or user accounts
You can make your customized rendering templates available on another computer or user account by copying .sft2 files to the
appropriate location in the new account or computer.
Rendering templates are stored in the following folders:
•
C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Application Data\Sony\Render Templates ACID 7.0\<plug-in name>\ in
Windows XP.
•
C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Roaming\Sony\Render Templates ACID 7.0\ in Windows Vista.
Notes:
•
•
The Application Data folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the
Windows Folder Options control panel.
You can find a plug-in’s name by clicking the About button in the Render As dialog.
To make a template available on another computer or user account, copy the .sft file to the same location in another account.
For example, to make JSmith’s custom wave template available for the AJones user account, copy the appropriate .sft2 file from this
folder:
•
C:\Documents and Settings\JSmith\Application Data\Sony\Render Templates ACID 7.0\wave
to this folder:
•
C:\Documents and Settings\AJones\Application Data\Sony\Render Templates ACID 7.0\wave.
Note: If you’re copying templates from an older Sony Creative Software application, templates are saved as .sft files in the following
folder: C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Application Data\Sony\File Templates\<plug-in name>\<plug-in
GUID>.
GETTING STARTED | 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rendering in real time
Real-time rendering is a playback mode that renders your project to .wav (or .w64) format. Real-time rendering allows you to include the
output from an external input source such as a hardware synth or effects processor with your project. For more information, see Using
input busses with hardware-based effects on page 172 or Using input busses with hardware-based synthesizers on page 174.
Notes:
•
•
•
When you start real-time rendering, any track that is armed for recording will be unarmed. You cannot arm a track for recording or start
recording in real-time rendering mode. For more information, see Arming the track for recording on page 180.
When rendering a project that does not use external audio hardware, real-time rendering and normal rendering will produce the same
output. Real-time rendering will take longer to complete, allowing you to monitor the rendered file as it is created.
If metronome count in is enabled, it will be turned off before real-time rendering begins. If the metronome is enabled for playback, it will
not be included in the rendered output. For more information, see Using the metronome to count off for playback or recording on page
1. From the File menu, choose Real-Time Render.
2. Choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop-down list, or use the browse window to locate the folder where you want to save
your file.
Important: When using real-time rendering, render your project to a local hard drive. Rendering to a network folder or removable drive
can result in gapping.
3. Type a name in the File name box, or select a file in the browse window to replace an existing file.
4. Click Save to start rendering your project from the beginning of the timeline.
Publishing to the Internet
When your project is finished, you have the option of publishing it to the Internet. The most common place to publish your project is
ACIDplanet.com, a virtual community of ACID users. ACIDplanet.com allows you to do the following:
•
•
•
•
Share your music.
Listen to projects built by other ACID enthusiasts.
Download free loops.
Enter remix contests co-sponsored by Sony and major record labels.
Publishing your project to the Internet involves two distinct procedures: creating a personal account and uploading the project.
Creating a personal account
You can create accounts at Web sites where you can publish your song files. Each Web site that offers publishing directly through ACID
software will guide you through its own account creation process. If you haven’t created an account and you attempt to publish a song,
you will be directed to complete the Publish Setup utility.
1. From the File menu, choose Publish. The Publish Setup dialog displays.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to create an account.
At any time, you can go back and create another account at a different Web site. The Web site you are currently logged into in the
Publish Setup utility is where your song is published when you choose Publish from the File menu.
Uploading a project
Publishing a project file copies your media to the Web so you can share it with other Web users. The following procedure assumes you
already have an account set up with a publish provider. If not, you will first be redirected to set up an account. After successfully creating
an account, you will be directed back to the Publish feature.
1. From the File menu, choose Publish. The Publish Setup dialog displays.
2. Log into your publishing account, or follow the on-screen instructions to create one.
50 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Select the appropriate radio button to specify whether the song to be published is the current ACID song or a different song.
•
•
To publish your current ACID song, choose a streaming format and bit rate.
To publish a different song, enter the path to the song or click Browse to locate the file. This song must already be in a
streaming format.
4. Click Next. If you are publishing the current ACID song, it is rendered in the format and bit rate you specified. A window appears
from the publish provider with directions for completing the publishing process.
5. Follow the instructions provided by the publish provider. The file begins uploading to the provider. A progress dialog informs you
when the upload is finished.
6. Click OK. The publish provider provides a link to the song on their Web site; however, this may vary depending on provider.
Writing to CD
You can burn your projects to CD using supported CD-R/CD-RW drives. You can burn CDs for multiple- or single-track projects and build
audio CD layouts automatically or manually. You can also create video CDs that can be played in many home DVD players and on
computers with a CD-ROM drive and VCD player software, and multimedia CDs that can be played in any computer with the
appropriate player.
Understanding track-at-once and disc-at-once
ACID provides two ways to record audio to a CD-R disc: track-at-once and disc-at-once.
Track-at-once
Track-at-once writing records individual tracks to the disc and results in a partially recorded disc. However, the CD-R disc remains
unplayable on most systems until you close the disc. The advantage of track-at-once writing is that you can record tracks onto the disc
as you finish them versus waiting until you have finished your whole album. Track-at-once writing burns the entire project as a single
track.
Disc-at-once (Single Session or Red Book)
Disc-at-once writing is the most common burning method in the music industry. This writing mode is used when creating a master disc
to be sent to a disc manufacturer for mass replication. Disc-at-once works just as it sounds. Multiple tracks of audio are written to the CD
in one recording session.
Burning single tracks (track-at-once)
Note: The entire project length is written to a CD track. If your project has events on muted tracks that extend beyond the end of the
audible material, the muted events burn as silence at the end of your CD track. To burn just a portion of a project, create a loop region and
select the Burn loop region only check box.
1. Insert a blank CD in a supported CD-R/CD-RW drive.
2. From the Tools menu, choose Burn Track-at-Once Audio CD.
Notice that the Burn Track-at-Once Audio CD dialog indicates the amount of time that the current project will fill on the CD as well
as the total amount of time remaining on the CD. If the Time needed for audio value exceeds the Time available on disc value, you
are not allowed to write the track to the CD.
Note: If there is no CD in the CD-R/CD-RW drive, only the Cancel button is available in this dialog.
GETTING STARTED | 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Choose a setting from the Action drop-down list:
•
•
•
•
•
Choose Burn audio to begin recording audio to your CD when you click Start. You must close the disc before it can be played
in an audio CD player.
Choose Test, then burn audio to test whether your files can be written to the CD without encountering buffer underruns.
Recording begins after the test if it is successful.
Choose Test only to test whether your files can be written to the CD without encountering buffer underruns. No audio is
recorded to the CD.
Choose Close disc to close your disc without adding any audio when you click Start. Closing a disc allows your files to be
played on an audio CD player. You cannot add tracks to a CD once it has been closed.
Choose Erase RW disc to erase a rewritable CD when you click Start.
4. Select your burning options:
•
Select the Buffer underrun protection check box if your CD recorder supports buffer underrun protection. Buffer underrun
protection allows a CD recorder to stop and resume burning.
Buffer underrun protection can create a disc that can be played in CD players but may contain a bit error where burning
stopped and restarted. Consider clearing this check box when creating a premaster disc.
•
•
Select the Erase RW disc before burning check box to erase a rewritable CD before you begin burning.
Select the Close disc when done burning check box to close the CD after burning. Closing a disc allows your files to be played
on an audio CD player. You cannot add tracks to a CD once it has been closed.
•
•
•
Select the Eject disc when done check box to eject the CD automatically when burning is complete.
Select the Burn selection only check box to burn only the selected region. Clear the check box to burn the entire project.
Select the Render temporary image before burning check box if you want to render your CD project to a temporary file
before recording. Prerendering can prevent buffer underruns if you have a complex project that cannot be rendered and
burned in real time.
Note: The rendered temporary file will remain until you modify your project or exit. If an image file exists when you Open the Burn
Disc-at-Once Audio CD dialog, the check box is displayed as Use existing rendered temporary image.
5. From the Drive drop-down list, choose the drive for burning CDs.
6. From the Speed drop-down list, choose the speed at which you want to burn. Choosing Max uses your drive’s fastest possible
speed; decrease the setting if you have difficulty burning because of buffer underruns.
7. Click Start.
Important: Once the CD writing begins, cancelling the write operation renders the CD unusable.
52 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc-at-once (DAO) CD burning
The DAO burning process involves arranging your media on the timeline, adding pauses between tracks as necessary, inserting track
markers, and burning your CD.
Adding pauses
Each CD track in your project should have a two-second pause following it. This default setting is based on the Red Book specification
for audio CDs. The exception to this standard is a continuous recording, such as a live concert CD. For a continuous recording, you can
omit the pauses after tracks for continuous playback. You can manually insert silence between your audio files to create a pause.
Note: The Red Book specification also requires a two-second pause at the beginning of an audio CD. This pause is automatically added
when you burn your CD.
1. Position your audio files on the timeline in the order in which you want them to play on your CD.
2. Position the cursor where you want to insert the pause between files.
3. From the Insert menu, choose Time. The Insert Time dialog appears.
4. Enter two seconds in the Amount of time to insert box.
5. Click OK. Two seconds are inserted in the timeline at the cursor position.
Inserting CD track markers
You can use CD track markers in your project to indicate to the CD-R device where to mark the beginning and ending of a track during
the writing process. A Red Book CD can contain up to 99 tracks.
1. Position your audio files and add pauses between them as necessary. For more information, see Adding pauses on page 53.
2. Position the cursor at the start of an audio file.
3. From the Insert menu, choose CD Track Marker. The marker appears in the marker bar and is automatically numbered.
Important: You must place your first CD track marker at the beginning of your project. Audio placed before the first marker will
not be burned to CD.
Tip: Once you have inserted a marker, you can move or delete them as needed.
4. Repeat step 3 until you have marked all CD tracks.
Burning a disc (disc-at-once)
1. Insert a blank CD in a supported CD-R/CD-RW drive.
2. From the Tools menu, choose Burn Disc-at-Once Audio CD. The Burn Disc-at-Once Audio CD dialog appears.
3. From the Drive drop-down list, use the CD drive that you want to use to burn your CD.
4. From the Speed drop-down list, choose the speed at which you want to burn. Max will use your drive’s fastest possible speed;
decrease the setting to prevent the possibility of buffer underruns.
5. Select the Buffer underrun protection check box if your CD recorder supports buffer underrun protection.
Buffer underrun protection allows a CD recorder to stop and resume burning.
Note: Buffer underrun protection can create a disc that can be played in CD players, but may contain a bit error where burning
stopped and restarted. Consider clearing this check box when creating a premaster disc.
6. Choose a radio button in the Burn mode box:
•
•
Burn CDs begins recording audio to your CD immediately.
Test first, then burn CDs performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without
encountering buffer underruns. No audio is recorded to the CD during the test, and recording begins after the test if it is
successful.
•
Test only (do not burn CDs) performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without
encountering buffer underruns. No audio is recorded to the CD.
GETTING STARTED | 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Select the Render temporary image before burning check box if you want to render your CD project to a temporary file before
recording. Prerendering can prevent buffer underruns if you have a complex project that cannot be rendered and burned in real
time.
Note: The rendered temporary file will remain until you modify your project or exit. If an image file exists when you Open the Burn
Disc-at-Once Audio CD dialog, the check box is displayed as Use existing rendered temporary image.
8. Select the Automatically erase rewritable discs check box if you’re burning to rewritable media and want to erase the disc before
burning.
9. Select the Eject when done check box if you want the CD to eject automatically when burning has completed.
10. Click OK to start burning.
54 | CHAPTER 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
3
Editing Events
In this chapter, you’ll learn about basic event editing techniques such as cutting, copying, pasting, trimming, splitting,
and joining events. You’ll also learn how to use ripple editing to expand the possibilities of timeline editing. Finally, you’ll
take a look at advanced editing techniques such as slipping and sliding events, changing event properties, and adding
event envelopes.
Note: For the basic event editing topics in this chapter, make sure that ripple editing is turned off. Verify that the Ripple
Edits command in the Options menu is not selected. For more information, see Ripple editing on page 61.
Copying events
Copying an event, a time selection, or event within a time selection places an exact copy of the selected event(s) on the
clipboard, but leaves the track view unchanged. Events copied to the clipboard can be pasted in the project an unlimited
number of times. In addition, clipboard content remains on the clipboard until replaced by new content.
1. Select the event data you want to copy or make a time selection. For more information, see Making selections on page
2. Copy the event data using any of the following methods:
•
•
•
•
Click the Copy button (
) on the toolbar.
Choose Copy from the Edit menu.
Right-click the selection and choose Copy from the shortcut menu.
Press Ctrl+C.
Pasting events
The clipboard’s contents can be pasted in a project an unlimited number of times. However, an event is always pasted in
the track it was copied/cut from. In addition, pasting the contents of the clipboard over an existing event results in the
pasted event overlapping the existing event. To avoid pasting over existing events, you have two options:
•
•
When events are cut/copied to the clipboard and subsequently pasted into a project, the time data inherent in the cut/
copied events is maintained and pasted. For example, if you select two events on the same track that are separated by
five seconds of silence, copying and pasting these events results in the five seconds of silence also being pasted into the
project.
Original events
Pasted events
Taking this concept a step further, if you select discontinuous events from several tracks, copying and pasting these
events results in any selected time data being pasted into the project as well. This maintains the relative position of
events in the project.
Original events
Pasted events
Note: You can also paste events across tracks using clips. For more information, see Copying clips and events across
EDITING EVENTS | 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Paste command
1. Place the cursor at the desired position on the timeline.
2. Paste the clipboard contents using any of the following methods:
•
•
•
•
Click the Paste button (
) on the toolbar.
Choose Paste from the Edit menu.
Right-click the track view and choose Paste from the shortcut menu.
Press Ctrl+V.
Using Paste Repeat
When building projects, you often need to paste the contents of the clipboard several times. Rather than repeatedly pasting and
moving the content, the Paste Repeat command allows you to specify the number of times and at what interval the clipboard’s
contents are pasted on the track view. This is a useful way of quickly building a project that uses a repetitive riff or structure. For
example, you can build the backing tracks for a twelve-bar blues, copy them, and use Paste Repeat to paste several copies of it in the
project.
1. Click the Time Selection Tool button ( ).
2. Drag the mouse in the track view to create a time selection spanning several events and copy it to the clipboard.
3. Click the Go To End button ( ) on the transport bar or press Ctrl+End to send the cursor to the end of the project.
4. From the Edit menu, choose Paste Repeat or press Ctrl+B. The Paste Repeat dialog appears.
5. Enter a number in the Number of times to paste box.
6. Select the End to end radio button and click OK. The events are pasted end to end the number of times specified in step five,
starting at the cursor position.
Using Paste Insert
To insert the contents of the ACID clipboard at the current cursor position and force existing events to move in time to accommodate
the pasted events, choose Paste Insert from the Edit menu.
If the cursor is in the middle of an event, the event splits at the cursor position where the new events are pasted. For more information,
Pasting events at the play cursor
You can also paste the contents of the clipboard at the cursor during playback. You can use this feature to create rhythms on one-shot
tracks while listening to the track you’re editing in the context of the rest of your project. When you’re done creating events, you can use
the Render to New Track command (on the Edit menu) to save the rhythm to a new track, or you can copy and paste your new events
across the timeline.
1. Create a time selection in the portion of the project you want to edit.
2. Select the Loop Playback button ( ).
3. Copy the one-shot you want to use.
4. Click the Play button (
) to start playback.
5. Press Shift+Y to paste at the play cursor (during playback, the edit cursor remains fixed, and the play cursor follows playback).
If snapping is enabled, events are pasted at the next snap point. You can use snapping to quantize your events.
6. Repeat step 5 as needed.
7. Click the Stop button (
) when you’re finished creating events.
8. Edit event positions as necessary.
Tip: If you're using this feature to tap rhythms with one-shot tracks, try applying a groove to adjust the timing of your rhythm. For
56 | CHAPTER 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cutting events
Cutting an event, a time selection, or an event within a time selection removes the audio data from the track view and places it on the
clipboard. Once data is placed on the clipboard, it can be pasted back into the project an unlimited number of times. Clipboard content
remains on the clipboard until it is replaced by new data.
1. Select the event data you want to cut or make a time selection. For more information, see Making selections on page 38.
2. Cut the event data using any of the following methods:
•
•
•
•
Click the Cut button (
) on the toolbar.
Choose Cut from the Edit menu.
Right-click the selection and choose Cut from the shortcut menu.
Press Ctrl+X.
All selected events are removed from the track view and placed on the clipboard.
Deleting events
Deleting an event, a time selection, or an event within a time selection removes the data from the track view and discards it. Deleted
events are not placed on the clipboard and do not replace or interfere with current clipboard content. In addition, deleted events
cannot be pasted back into a project.
Note: Deleted data can only be replaced in a project using the Undo command. For more information, see Using undo on page 44.
1. Select the event data you want to delete or make a time selection. For more information, see Making selections on page 38.
2. Delete the event data using any of the following methods:
•
•
•
Choose Delete from the Edit menu.
Right-click the selected event and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
Press Delete.
All selected events are removed from the track view and discarded.
Tip: To remove the unused media from your project, choose Remove All Unused Clips from the Tools menu. To remove unused clips
from individual tracks, click the Remove Unused Clips button
Reversing events
You can select events in the timeline and reverse their audio and peak data. Select an event in the timeline, right-click, and
choose Reverse (or press U) from the shortcut menu. An arrow appears on the event in the timeline to indicate that it has
been reversed.
Trimming events
Whereas deleting allows you to select event data to be removed from the project, trimming allows you to select the data that remains.
Trimming is performed by creating a time selection or selecting an event within a time selection and subsequently deleting all
unselected data.
1. Create a time selection or select specific events within a time selection. For more information, see Creating time selections on page 39.
2. Press Ctrl+T to trim the data within the selection. All unselected event data is removed from the track view and discarded.
EDITING EVENTS | 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Splitting events
Splitting is a quick way to create independently functioning events from a single one. You might consider splitting an event if you want
to adjust a small part of the track. For example, you may want to apply pitch shift to a guitar track for a few measures and then return the
track to its original setting.
Splitting occurs at the cursor position or at the in and out points of a time selection. When you split an event, a new ending point is
created for the original event and creates a starting point for the newly created event.
When you split an event, the newly created events abut each other. If Quick fade edges to prevent clicks is selected in the Event
Properties dialog, fades are added at the split point. For more information, see Changing event properties on page 64.
Split position
Two events
However, you may move either of the events, which creates a gap.
Split position
Two events
Splitting at the cursor position splits all selected events that the cursor crosses on all tracks.
1. Select the event(s) that you want to split.
2. Place the cursor where you want the split to occur or make a time selection.
3. From the Edit menu, choose Split or press S. The result of the split depends on how events were selected.
Splitting at the cursor position
Splitting at the cursor position splits all events that the cursor crosses on all tracks.
Events before splitting
Events after splitting
Cursor position
and split point
After the split, the three events become
six events
58 | CHAPTER 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Splitting one event
Selecting a single event prior to splitting prevents other events from being split at the cursor’s position.
Events before splitting
Events after splitting
Eventto
be split
Only the selected
event splits at the
cursor position
Cursor position
and split point
Splitting multiple events
Selecting multiple events splits only the selected events at the cursor’s position. Be sure to set your cursor position before selecting
events. Attempting to set your cursor after selecting events causes you to lose your event selection.
Events before splitting
Events after splitting
Only the selected
events split at the
cursor position
Events to
be split
Cursor position
and split point
Splitting a time selection
Making a time selection allows you to split events at the time selection’s in and out points across all tracks.
Events before splitting
Events after splitting
Loop bar
Loop bar
In point
Out point
Split point
Split point
EDITING EVENTS | 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Splitting events within a time selection
When selecting events within a time selection, only the selected events in the time range split at the in and out points.
Events before splitting
Events after splitting
Selection bar
Selection bar
Only the selected
event splits at the in
and out points
Event to split at the
time selection’s in
and out points
Split point
Split point
In point
Out point
Joining events
You may join events on ACID tracks that have been segmented along the timeline. Joining events is an efficient way to redraw an event
and remove any splits or silent regions between events.
You would want to join events if you decided that the event should play uninterrupted over the specified time range.
1. Select the events or range of events that you want to join. For more information, see Selecting multiple events on page 38.
2. From the Edit menu, choose Join or press J. The selected events are joined.
Select all the events that you want to join.
You can also select the first and last events you
want to join, creating an event selection range.
After you join the events, a single event appears.
Joining events is similar to dragging the edge
of an existing event
Automatic crossfades
From the Options menu, choose Automatic Crossfades if you want to automatically create crossfades when you overlap two audio
events.
Note: Event crossfades are not available for MIDI events.
Creating crossfades
You can easily create crossfades between events by simply dragging an event.
1. From the Options menu, choose Automatic Crossfades to turn on automatic crossfades.
2. Drag and event so that it overlaps another event on the same track.
A crossfade is automatically added to transition smoothly between the two events.
60 | CHAPTER 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing fade types
You can change a crossfade to use one of many combinations of fast, slow, linear, smooth, and sharp fade curves.
1. Right-click the overlapping area to display a shortcut menu.
2. Choose Fade Out Type from the shortcut menu and choose a fade curve from the submenu to set the curve for the first event’s
fade out.
3. Choose Fade In Type from the shortcut menu and choose a fade curve from the submenu to set the curve for the first event’s fade
in.
Ripple editing
ACID includes a ripple editing feature. This feature allows you to cut, delete, and paste events or portions of events within a time
selection and simultaneously adjust the position of all later events on a selected track. The existing events’ timeline position adjusts by
the total amount of the time selection that is being cut, deleted or pasted from the clipboard.
You may turn on ripple editing mode by choosing Ripple Edits from the Options menu or pressing Ctrl+L.
Note: Ripple edit mode is not available unless you're using the Time Selection tool ( ).
Cutting events in ripple editing mode
Cutting events or portions of events removes them and their time information from their respective tracks. This information is placed on
the clipboard, from which you may paste the information back into your project.
1. From the Options menu, choose Ripple Edits to enter ripple editing mode.
2. Click the Time Selection Tool button ( ).
3. Select the events you want to cut. If you want all events within a time selection to be cut, do not select any events and continue to
step 4.
To cut multiple events, use the Ctrl key, the Shift key, or the Selection (
) tool to select the events. For more information, see
4. Drag along the marker bar to make a time selection. All events, and/or portions of events within the region are highlighted.
5. Click the Cut button ( ) on the toolbar to cut the event(s) to the clipboard.
The cut events and their time information are removed from the selected track(s) and placed on the clipboard. Existing events in
the selected track(s) move forward to occupy the space created by the cut.
Cutting time selections in ripple editing mode
Events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard. Also, the time information is placed on the clipboard.
Existing events occurring after the time selection move forward in the project by the length of the time selection.
Events before cut
Clipboard contents
Events after cut
Existing events
adjust to occur
sooner in the project
EDITING EVENTS | 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cutting time and event selections in ripple editing mode
Events and portions of events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard. Also, the time information is
placed on the clipboard. Existing events occurring later than the time selection move forward by the length of the time selection. Only
tracks containing selected events are affected by the ripple edit.
Events before cut
Clipboard contents
Events after cut
Existing events on the top
track adjust to occur
sooner in the project
Deleting events in ripple editing mode
Deleting events or portions of events removes them and their time information from their respective tracks. However, this information
is not placed on the clipboard. Existing events move forward when you delete material from a selected track.
1. From the Options menu, choose Ripple Edits to enter ripple editing mode.
2. Click the Time Selection Tool button ( ).
3. Select the events you want to delete. If you want all events within a time selection to be deleted, do not select any events and
continue to step 4.
To delete multiple events, use the Ctrl key, the Shift key, or the Selection (
) tool to select the events. For more information, see
4. Drag along the marker bar to make a time selection. All events, and/or portions of events within the region are highlighted.
5. Press Delete to delete the event(s).
Deleting time selections in ripple editing mode
Events within the time selection and their time information are removed from the project. Existing events occurring after the time
selection move forward in the project by the length of the time selection. When information is deleted, it is not placed on the clipboard.
Events before delete
Clipboard contents
Events after delete
Existing events
adjust to occur
sooner in the
project
Deleting time and event selections in ripple editing mode
Events within the time selection and their time information are removed from the project. Existing events occurring after the time
selection move forward in the project by the length of the time selection. When information is deleted, it is not placed on the clipboard.
Events before delete
Clipboard contents
Events after delete
Existing events on the top
track adjust to occur
sooner in the project
62 | CHAPTER 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pasting events in ripple editing mode
Once information is copied to the clipboard, you may choose a variety of ways to paste the clipboard items into tracks. For more
information, see Pasting events on page 55. The following procedures explain pasting information in ripple editing mode.
Note: Events are always pasted into their own tracks at the cursor position.
1. From the Options menu, choose Ripple Edits to enter ripple editing mode.
2. Move the cursor to the desired timeline location.
3. Place the cursor within the track where you want to paste the event.
4. Click the Paste button (
) on the toolbar to paste the event into the track.
Clipboard information is pasted at the cursor’s position on the track. Existing events or portions of events after the cursor adjust to occur
later in the project. The amount of adjustment is based on the total length of the information being pasted.
Pasting single track information in ripple editing mode
The information on the clipboard determines how many tracks are affected when you paste. If you have copied or cut information from
one track, only the selected track is affected by the pasted event and time information.
Clipboard contents
Events before paste
Events after paste
Existing event adjusts
to move later in the
project.
Newly pasted
event
Paste
position
Pasting multitrack information in ripple editing mode
Multiple events can be pasted as easily as single events.
Clipboard contents
Events before paste
Events after paste
Newly pasted event
These events will
be pasted
Existing events on the tracks adjust later in
the project
Paste
position
Note: Pasting in ripple editing mode ripples only the events on the tracks that receive the clipboard contents. If you want to ripple all
tracks at the paste position, use the Paste Insert command from the Edit menu.
Slipping and sliding events
To help you picture what happens when you slip and slide events, think of an event as a window to a media file. The window can display
the entire media file or a small section. When the window displays only a portion of the media file, you can move either the window or
the underlying media to adjust the media played by an event:
•
•
When you slip an event, your event maintains its place on the timeline, but the media file moves in the direction you drag.
When you slide an event, the media file maintains its place on the timeline, but the event moves in the direction you drag.
EDITING EVENTS | 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Original loop event
Slipping the event two measures to the right
Slip-trimming the event two measures to the right
Sliding the event two measures to the right
Shifting the contents of (slipping) events
Hold Alt while dragging an event. The slip cursor appears (
).
As you drag the event, the contents of the event shift, but the event does not move. You can use this technique when you want to
maintain an event’s length and position but want the to event play a different section of the source media file.
Slip-trimming events
Hold Alt while dragging the right or left edge of an event. The slip-trim cursor appears ( ).
As you drag the event edge, the media moves with the event edge.
Sliding events
Hold Ctrl+Alt while dragging an event. The slide cursor appears (
).
As you drag, the relative position of the media remains fixed on the track, and the event position changes. You can use this technique
when you want to maintain an event’s length but want the event to play a different section of the source media file at a different point
in your project.
Changing event properties
To access event properties, right-click the event and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
These properties are saved in the project but are not saved into the file when you save changes to a clip in the Clip Properties window. ꢀ
The following table describes each of the settings in the Event Properties dialog.
Item
Description
Start offset
The Start offset for an event specifies a playback starting position that is different than the beginning of the file. This is
especially useful for loops; you can change the feel of a loop by simply starting on beat two rather than beat one.
Pitch shift
The Pitch shift value specifies a pitch shift for the selected event. Event-based pitch shift is calculated after the project key
and any pitch shift assigned to a track. For more information, see Changing tempo, time signature, and key on page 90.
64 | CHAPTER 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
Quick fade edges to When you add an offset to an event so that it does not end on a loop point, you can introduce an audible click at the edges
prevent clicks
of the event. Select the Quick fade edges to prevent clicks check box, and a quick fade-in or fade-out is performed on the
event edges.
To adjust a quick fade, zoom into the event and hover over the upper-left or upper-right corner of an event until the cursor
is displayed as
. Drag the edge of the fade to adjust its duration. For more information, see Setting an event’s fade-in and
Reverse
Select the Reverse check box to reverse the event’s audio and peak data. An arrow appears on the event in the timeline to
indicate that it has been reversed.
Muting and locking events
Right-click an event, choose Switches from the shortcut menu, and then choose a command from the submenu to mute or lock the
selected event.
Hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking to select multiple events.
Muting events
Muting an event excludes it from playback while preserving its position on the timeline.
1. Select the events you want to mute.
2. Right-click a selected event, choose Switches from the shortcut menu, and then choose Mute from the submenu.
If you want to unmute an event, choose Mute again.
Muted events are dimmed on the timeline.
Muted event
Locking events
Locking an event prevents it from being edited on the timeline.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
•
Locked events cannot be dragged on the timeline.
When adding events to the timeline, you cannot draw or paint past a locked event.
Erasing in the timeline will not erase a locked event.
Event envelopes cannot be modified for locked events.
Ripple edits and automatic crossfades will not be applied to locked events.
1. Select the events you want to lock.
2. Right-click a selected event, choose Switches from the shortcut menu, and then choose Lock from the submenu.
If you want to unlock an event, choose Lock again.
Using event envelopes
You can use envelopes on individual events. Envelopes give you the ability to control each event’s fade-in, fade-out, and overall volume.
Envelopes are useful for transitional effects between events by subtly fading out one event’s volume while another fades in.
These envelopes are different than track envelopes because they affect only the event whereas track envelopes can affect multiple
The event’s volume level and fade curves are represented by a line on the event.
EDITING EVENTS | 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting an event’s volume envelope
You can control an event’s overall volume by setting an envelope at the desired decibel (dB) level.
1. Place the mouse pointer at the top of the event. The envelope cursor ( ) appears.
2. Drag the volume line to the desired level. As you drag the volume line, the event’s decibel level is displayed.
3. Release the mouse to set the event’s dB level.
After you set the event volume level, you may change it later by dragging the envelope line.
Setting an event’s fade-in and -out envelope curve
You can control an event’s envelope fade-in and -out characteristics by adjusting the event’s envelope handles. These handles allow
you to control the length and dB level of fade-ins and fade-outs. Also, you can change the type of curve that the event uses to control
the volume’s fade characteristics.
1. Place the mouse pointer on the upper corner of the event. The envelope cursor ( ) appears.
2. Drag the envelope cursor and position the envelope curve. As you drag the cursor, the following information is displayed:
•
•
The event decibel level.
The length (in measures.beats.ticks) of the fade-in or fade-out.
3. Release the mouse to set the fade-in or fade-out characteristics.
Changing the event’s fade curve type
You can set an event’s fade curves (fast, linear, slow, smooth, or sharp) that are used to raise or lower the volume over time. Right-click
the fade region, select Fade In Type or Fade Out Type from the shortcut menu, and choose the appropriate fade curve from the
submenu.
Using sections
With sections, you can create different arrangements using simple drag-and-drop operations.
Each section header above the timeline represents a segment of your project. When you drag a section header to a new location of the
timeline, all events, envelopes, regions, markers, and commands within the section follow.
66 | CHAPTER 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inserting a section
1. Create a time selection that includes the portion of the timeline that you want to use as a section.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Section (or press Shift+S). A section label is added above the marker bar.
3. Type a name to identify the section and press Enter.
Adjusting a section's length
1. Hover over the end of a section label. The mouse pointer is displayed as a
.
2. Drag the end of the section:
to extend or shorten it.
Tips:
•
•
Hold Shift to override snapping.
As you drag the edge between two adjacent sections, both will be adjusted simultaneously.
Renaming a section
1. Right-click the section label and choose Rename from the shortcut menu. The section label changes to an edit box.
Tip: Press F2 to rename the selected section.
2. Type a new name in the edit box.
3. Press Enter.
Changing a section’s color
1. Right-click the section label and choose Color from the shortcut menu.
2. Choose a color from the menu. The color of the section header is updated, but event colors do not change.
Moving (shuffling) sections
Shuffling sections allows you to move all events, envelopes, regions, commands, and markers within a section in a single operation. For
1. Drag a section label to a new position on the timeline. A
is displayed to indicate where the section will be moved.
2. When you drop the section, events are split at each end of the section, and all events within the section are moved to the position
where you dropped the section. Downstream events ripple to make room for (or fill the space of) the section you dragged.
Notes:
•
•
Hold Ctrl or Shift to select and shuffle multiple selections
When shuffling envelope points, the shape of the envelope is copied to the new location and additional points are created at each end of
the section if necessary.
•
The tempo, time signature, and key of the section will be preserved during shuffling, and tempo, time signature, and key markers will be
created if necessary.
EDITING EVENTS | 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying a section
Copying sections lets you copy all events within a section in a single operation. For more information, see Ripple editing on page 61.
1. Hold Ctrl and drag a section header, or multiple section headers, to a new position on the timeline. A
is displayed to indicate
where the section will be copied.
2. When you drop the section, it is copied to the position where you dropped it.
Note: Hold Ctrl or Shift to select and copy multiple selections.
Deleting a section
Deleting a section removes the section and all events are removed from the timeline.
Right-click a section label and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Events are split at each end of the section, and all events,
envelope points, regions, commands, and markers within the section are deleted. Downstream events ripple to fill the space of the
Moving a section label
Hold Alt while dragging a section label to move the selected labels without affecting the contents of the timeline.
Hold Ctrl+Alt while dragging a section label to create copies of the selected labels without affecting the contents of the timeline.
Removing a section label
Removing a section label removes the section label from the timeline without affecting the section's events.
Right-click a section label and choose Remove Label from the shortcut menu.
Clearing all events from a section
Clearing events removes the events from a section while leaving the section label intact.
Right-click a section label and choose Clear Events from the shortcut menu. Events are split at each end of the section, and all events
68 | CHAPTER 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
4
Using the Media Manager
This chapter covers the management and tagging of your media files in ACID using the Media Manager feature.
Creating a new media library
You can create multiple media libraries as necessary to organize your media. Each media library is maintained by the
Media Manager software as a separate database that stores information about the media contained within it.
1. From the Media Manager window, click the Media Library actions button (
) and choose New Media Library
from the menu. The New Media Library dialog is displayed.
2. In the Name box, type the name you want to use to identify the library.
3. The Folder box displays the path to the folder where the library will be created. Click Browse to choose a different
location.
4. Click the Create button to create the new library.
Opening a media library
The Media Manager window displays the contents of the current media library. You can open a different library at any
time.
Important: When you open a media library, the Media Manager tool creates a transaction log file. This file is created in
the same folder as the .medialib file and uses the same base name as the .medialib file. For example, the transaction log
file for default.medialib would be default_log.ldf.
Do not delete these log files. Doing so will prevent you from opening the associated library. When the Media Manager tool
closes, it automatically removes the log file. If the application terminates inappropriately, close all running ACID windows,
restart ACID, and close the application to clear the log file.
1. In the Media Manager window, click the Media Library Actions button (
) and choose Open Media Library from
the menu. The Open Media Library dialog is displayed.
2. Choose the folder where the library you want to open is stored:
•
Choose a drive and folder from the Look in drop-down list.
—or—
•
Use the bar on the left side of the window to browse to a folder.
3. Select a library from the list.
4. Click the Open button to open the selected library. The name of the current library is displayed in the upper-right
corner of the Search Results pane:
USING THE MEDIA MANAGER | 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding media files to a library
Before you can search or organize your media files, you’ll need to add them to a media library.
When the Sony Sound Series Loops & Samples™ reference library is installed and set as the active reference library in the Media Manager
Options dialog, tags and custom properties from the reference library will be applied to media from existing Sony Sound Series Loops &
Samples or Loops for ACID collections when you add media to your library. For more information on Media Manager options, see Setting
Note: The Sony Sound Series Loops & Samples reference library is not installed by default, but you can install it from the ACID CD or
download it from the Sony Creative Software Inc. Web site (http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/reference). After installing the library,
go to the Media Manager Options dialog and choose the reference library from the Reference library drop-down list.
Tip: If the Save media-usage relationships in active media library check box is selected on the General tab of the ACID Preferences dialog,
you can add individual files to a library by previewing the files in the ACID Explorer window.
1. Click the Add Files to Media Library button ( ). The Add Files to Media Library dialog is displayed.
2. Choose the folders that will be searched for media:
a. If it isn’t displayed automatically, click the Add Folder button ( ) to display the Browse for Folder dialog.
b. Select the folder you want to search.
c. Click OK.
Tips: If you want to change an item in the folder list, select it and click the Browse button ( ) in the Folders column. If you want to
remove a folder from the list, select it and click the Remove Folder button ( ).
3. Repeat step 2 for each folder you want to search.
4. Select the Include subfolders check box if you want to search folders within the selected folders.
5. Select the Audio, Video, Images, or MIDI check boxes to indicate the types of media you want to add. Clear a check box to exclude
that type of media file.
Files that contain audio and video streams will be added if either or both of the Audio or Video check boxes are selected.
6. Specify whether you want to search for new files or all files:
•
Select the New files only radio button if you want to search only for new media files. Files that already exist in the media
library will be skipped.
—or—
•
Select the All files radio button if you want to search for all media files in the specified folder. New media files will be added,
and files that already exist in the media library will be searched to determine whether their properties have changed.
7. Select the Add tags and custom properties from files check box if you want to add tags and custom columns saved in the media
files to your library. For more information about tagging media, please see Tagging media files on page 71. For information about
8. Select the Use file and folder names to apply tags automatically check box if you want to automatically tag files based on the file
path.
For example, when this check box is selected, a loop saved in the d:\loops\drums\hi-hats\ folder would have the tags Drums and
Hi-Hats applied when it is added to the library. Some synonyms (and variant spellings) will be resolved automatically. If you need to
modify the pattern-matching, you can edit the AutoTagPatterns.xml file, which is created in your My Documents\Sony Media
Libraries folder the first time the application starts.
Note: Changing the selection of the Add tags and custom properties from files and Use file and folder names to apply tags
automatically check boxes also changes the settings in the Media Manager Options dialog.
70 | CHAPTER 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Click the Search button to start adding files to the library.
10. Click the Close button when you’re finished.
A tag is automatically added to the tag tree when you search. The tag name will include the date and time of the search, and all files
that were added or updated in the library are marked with this tag.
Removing media files from a library
You can remove a reference to a media file from a library without affecting the media file itself.
1. Select files in the Search Results pane to choose the files you want to delete:
•
To select a single file, click the file.
—or—
•
To select multiple consecutive files, click the first file, hold the Shift key, and then click the last item.
—or—
•
To select multiple files that are not consecutive, hold the Ctrl key and click each file.
2. Right-click a selected file and choose Remove from Library from the shortcut menu (or press the Delete key on your keyboard). A
confirmation dialog is displayed.
3. Click OK to remove the selected files from the library.
Tagging media files
Tagging helps you classify your media files. For example, if you wanted to keep track of loops played by a specific instrument, you could
create a tag with the name of the instrument and apply it to the appropriate loops. Similarly, you could create tags for genres, moods,
seasons, client names, locations, scenes, performer names, and so on.
When you create a new library, a default tag tree is displayed in the Tags pane. You can create your own tags to customize the tags for
your needs. Tags are the fastest way to search a media library, and they require very little disk space.
Tags are saved in your media library. If a media file exists in multiple libraries, tagging the media file in one library has no effect on the
other libraries unless you save the tags to the files and use the Add Files to Media Library dialog to update tags and custom properties
for all files.
Tip: If you want to see which tags are associated with a file as you’re adding or removing tags, drag the Tags column in the Search
Results pane to the left so you can see the Name and Tags columns at the same time.
Creating a tag
Adding tags creates new tags in the current library only.
1. Click the Add Tag button ( ) to add a new tag to the tree.
If a tag is selected, the new tag will be added below the selected tag. If no tag is selected, the new tag will be added to the bottom
of the tag tree.
2. Type a name for the tag.
3. Press Enter.
4. If you want to change the icon used to display the tag, right-click it and choose Edit from the shortcut menu to display the Tag
Editor dialog.
5. If you want to change the tag’s location, drag it to a new location in the tag tree.
USING THE MEDIA MANAGER | 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying a tag to a media file
You tag media by dragging a tag from the tag tree to a media file in the Search Results pane (or by dragging a media file to a tag) when
the Add Tag Mode button ( ) is selected.
1. Select media files to tag in the Search Results pane:
•
To select a single file, click the file.
—or—
•
To select multiple consecutive files, click the first file, hold the Shift key, and then click the last item.
—or—
•
To select multiple files that are not consecutive, hold the Ctrl key and click each file.
2. Click the Add Tag Mode button ( ) in the Search pane.
3. Drag a tag from the tag tree to the selected file(s).
Tip: You can also right-click a selection in the Search Results pane and choose Add Tag from the shortcut menu to add a tag to all
selected media. The Tag Chooser dialog will be displayed. Select the tag you want to add, and then click the OK button.
When you add a subtag to a media file, the tag’s hierarchical position in the tag tree is applied
implicitly.
In this example, adding the “Snare” tag to a media file would mean that a search for “Audio,” “Drum
One-Shots,” or “Snare” would find your tagged media. If the user rearranged the tag tree so that the
“Snare” tag did not appear below the “Audio” and “Drum One-Shots” tags, searching for “Audio” or
“Drum One-Shots” would not find your tagged media.
If you add all three tags to your media file, a search for “Audio,” “Drum One-Shots,” or “Snare” would
find your tagged media even if the tag tree had been rearranged, though this behavior is not always
desirable.
Removing a tag from a media file
You remove tags from media by dragging a tag from the tag list to a media file in the Search Results
pane (or by dragging a media file to a tag) when the Remove Tag Mode button ( ) is selected.
1. Select media files in the Search Results pane:
•
To select a single file, click the file.
—or—
•
To select multiple consecutive files, click the first file, hold the Shift key, and then click the last item.
—or—
•
To select multiple files that are not consecutive, hold the Ctrl key and click each file.
2. Click the Remove Tag Mode button ( ) in the Search pane.
3. Drag a tag from the tag tree to the selected file(s). The tag is removed from the file(s).
72 | CHAPTER 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a tag from a library
Deleting the selected tag(s) affects the current library only.
1. In the Search pane, select the tag(s) to be removed:
•
To select a single tag, click the tag.
—or—
•
To select multiple consecutive tags, click the first tag, hold the Shift key, and then click the last tag.
—or—
•
To select multiple tags that are not consecutive, hold the Ctrl key and click each tag.
2. Click the Delete Selected Tag button ( ) to delete the tag from the current library. A confirmation dialog is displayed.
3. Click OK to remove the selected tags from the library.
Merging subtags
Merging tags combines a selected tag with its subtags and removes the subtags from your library permanently.
To merge a tag with its subtags, right-click the tag and choose Merge Subtags into Selected Tag from the shortcut menu.
All subtags are combined with the main tag, and the subtags are removed from the library. All media formerly associated with the
subtags is associated with the main tag.
Arranging tags in the tag tree
Tags are displayed in a tree view in the Media Manager window. You can organize tags hierarchically: click the Expand button ( ) in the
Search pane to expand a list, or click the Collapse button ( ) in the Search pane to hide an expanded list.
You can drag, copy, and paste tags within the list to arrange them and create parent and child tags.
You can also display tags in a palette view by clicking the Change Tags View button ( ).
Editing tag names or images
1. Double-click a tag (or right-click a tag and choose Edit from the shortcut menu) to display the Tag Editor dialog.
2. In the Tag name box, type the name you want to display for the tag.
3. Select a thumbnail image to choose the icon that will be displayed for the tag in the Search pane and in the Search Results pane
when the tag is added to a media file.
4. Click the OK button to apply your changes and close the Tag Editor dialog.
Viewing or creating palettes
The palette view provides another way of working with tags that can be useful for more focused searching. You can use a palette to
concentrate on a portion of the current tag tree.
In the palette view, tags are displayed as a grid of buttons instead of the standard hierarchical tag tree.
1. Click the Change Tags View button ( ) to toggle the display of the tag tree and palette view.
2. Click the down arrow
next to the button to choose a saved palette or create a new palette.
Creating a palette
1. Click the down arrow
next to the Change Tags View button ( ) and choose New Palette from the menu. The New Palette
dialog is displayed.
2. In the Name box, type the name you want to use to identify the palette.
3. In the Rows box, specify the number of rows of buttons you want to display in the palette.
4. In the Columns box, specify the number of columns of buttons you want to display in the palette.
5. Click OK to create the palette. The palette is displayed as a grid with empty buttons.
USING THE MEDIA MANAGER | 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assigning palette buttons
1. Perform either of the following actions to display the Tag Chooser dialog:
•
Click an empty palette button.
—or—
•
Click an existing button and choose Choose Tag from the shortcut menu.
2. Select the tag you want to assign to the button.
3. Click the OK button.
Clearing a button
Right-click a palette button and choose Clear from the shortcut menu.
Deleting a saved palette
1. Right-click a palette button and choose Delete Current Palette from the shortcut menu.
2. Click the OK button when prompted to delete the palette from your library.
Saving tags and properties to media files
Saving tags and properties to files makes all your organization portable: if tags and custom properties are saved to files, that information
will be preserved in the files and can be added to the library by selecting the Add tags and custom properties from files check box in
the Add Files to Media Library dialog.
Saving tags and properties to files affects only the current media library and libraries that you create after saving the information. If you
have multiple libraries, you can add embedded tags and custom columns to existing libraries by opening the desired library and
rescanning your media folders with the Add tags and custom properties from files check box selected in the Add Files to Media Library
dialog. Embedded file properties are also updated when you preview or add media to a project.
The following file formats can store this type of information internally:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MP3
Windows Media Format (WMA and WMV)
WAV
WAV64
SFA
PCA
Scott Studios
For other file types, the Media Manager tool will save metadata to an .sfl file (using the same base name as your media file).
Follow these steps to save tag and property information in your media file(s):
1. In the Search Results pane, select media files for which you want to save tags and properties:
•
To select a single file, click the file.
—or—
•
To select multiple consecutive files, click the first file, hold the Shift key, and then click the last item.
—or—
•
To select multiple files that are not consecutive, hold the Ctrl key and click each file.
2. Click the Save Tags and Properties to File(s) button ( ) in the top right corner of the Search Results pane. Tags and other
information from the Search Results pane is saved for the selected file(s).
74 | CHAPTER 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing up your media libraries
Media Manager software automatically saves your library as you make changes, so you don’t need to tell the application explicitly to
save your library as you're working.
However, you can create a backup of the current library as a restore point or as a template to create new libraries.
1. Click the Media Library Actions button (
) and choose Back Up Media Library from the menu. The Back Up Media Library
dialog is displayed.
2. Choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop-down list, or use the browse window to locate the folder where you want to save
your backup.
3. In the File name box, type the name you want to use to identify the library.
4. Click the Save button.
To restore the backup at a later time, open the backup file.
Opening a Reference Library
A reference library contains information about media from an outside source or vendor.
You can also use a reference library to search media files that you aren’t part of your collection. For example, if you’re unable to find the
perfect loop for an ACID project in your own collection, you could use the Sony Sound Series Loops & Samples reference library to
search the entire Sony Sound Series Loops & Samples catalog and purchase a new loop library.
You can use the Media Reference Library drop-down list in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine which library is opened
when you click the Switch to Media Reference Library button ( ).
1. Click the Switch to Media Reference Library button ( ). The reference library specified in the Media Manager Options dialog is
opened. Media in a reference library is displayed in gray text to indicate that the files are not available on your computer.
2. Find the media you’re looking for with a standard or advanced search.
3. Tag media from the reference library as needed. For more information on tagging, see Tagging media files on page 71.
4. When you select a file in a reference library, the Product Information pane displays information about the selected file and a link
you can use to purchase the media.
Using the Sony Sound Series Loops & Samples reference library
If you have the Sony Sound Series Loops & Samples reference library loaded when you search your computer for media, media from
existing Sony Loops and Samples or Loops for ACID collections will inherit tags and custom properties from the reference library.
The Sony Sound Series Loops & Samples reference library is not installed by default, but you can install it from the ACID CD or download
it from the Sony Creative Software Inc. Web site
(http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/reference). After installing the library, go to the Media Manager Options dialog (click the Media
Library Actions button (
) and choose Options from the menu) and choose the reference library from the Reference library drop-
down list.
Searching for media files
You can use the Media Manager tool to search the current media library for media files using keywords or tags.
Tips: You can use the Search Results Limit box in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine the maximum number of media files
you’d like to have returned in the results of your searches. Increasing the Search Results Limit setting increases the amount of time
required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high.
When performing complex searches, consider creating temporary tags to classify the results. If you apply a tag to the files found by a
complex search, you can return to those files easily by searching on the tag. The Media Manager tool can search for tags more quickly
than it can perform keyword or advanced searches.
USING THE MEDIA MANAGER | 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Searching using a keyword
1. Select the Quick text search check box in the Search pane and type a keyword (or keywords) in the edit box.
Tip: You can separate search terms using quotation marks and other operators. If quotes or wildcard characters are not applied, an * is
automatically added before and after each search term.
2. Press Enter.
The Media Manager tool searches your media files and displays the results in the Search Results pane on the right side of the
window. Any file that contains your keywords in the file name or attributes is displayed (tags are not searched as keywords).
Your search terms are displayed in the yellow bar below the Search Results toolbar.
Search terms
Keyword
Search results
3. You can refine the search results using any of the following methods:
•
•
•
Select tag check boxes.
Use the Advanced search controls. For more information, see Using advanced search options on page 77.
Choose Match Any from the Match Any/Match All drop-down list to display all media that matches any of your keyword, tag,
or advanced search criteria. Using this option in the search displayed in step 2, the Search Results pane would display all files
that contain the keyword “EBow” OR the “Guitar” tag.
•
Choose Match All from the Match Any/Match All drop-down list to display only media that matches all of your keyword, tag,
and advanced search criteria. Using this option in the search displayed in step 2, the Search Results pane would display all files
that contain the keyword “EBow” AND the “Guitar” tag.
76 | CHAPTER 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Searching using tags
In the Search pane, select the check box for each tag you want to find. The Media Library searches
your media files and displays the results in the Search Results pane on the right side of the window.
Choose Match Any from the Match Any/Match All drop-down list if you want to display all media
that contains any keyword, tag, or advanced search criteria. In the example to the right, the Search
Results pane would display all files that contain the tag “High Tom” OR the tag “Floor Tom.”
Choose Match All from the Match Any/Match All drop-down list if you want to display only media
that includes all keyword, tag, and advanced search criteria. In the preceding example, the Search
Results pane would display only files with tags “High Tom” AND “Floor Tom.”
Note: If you have check boxes selected for parent and child tags, those tags
will be treated as an OR relationship regardless of whether Match Any or
Match All is selected.
Sorting search results
Click a column heading to sort the results in ascending or descending order based on that column.
Viewing previous searches
Click the Previous Search button ( ) in the top left corner of the Search Results pane to navigate
through your recent searches and update the contents of the Search Results pane.
After viewing previous searches, click the Next Search button ( ) in the top left corner of the Search Results pane to navigate back to
your current search.
Using advanced search options
If your media library contains many files and you’re searching for a very specific media file, the Advanced section of the Search pane can
help you zero in on exactly the file you want.
If you want to perform an advanced search to refine the results of a previous search, start by creating a quick search or tag-based search
and then perform the following steps.
Tips: You can use the Search Results Limit box in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine the maximum number of media files
you’d like to have returned in the results of your searches. Increasing the Search Results Limit setting increases the amount of time
required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high.
When performing complex searches, consider creating temporary tags to classify the results. If you apply a tag to the files found by a
complex search, you can return to those files easily by searching on the tag. The Media Manager tool can search for tags more quickly
than it can perform keyword or advanced searches.
1. Add your search criteria:
a. Click the Add New Search Criteria button ( ) in the Search pane. The Search Criteria Chooser is displayed.
USING THE MEDIA MANAGER | 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b. Double-click an item in the Search Criteria Chooser or drag it to the Advanced section of the Search pane.
Tips: If an item in the Search Results pane displays a
button, you can click it to find related media. For example, clicking the
button in the following example adds an item to the Advanced section to help you find other media with a beat count of 16.
You can also drag a column heading from the Search Results pane to the Advanced section of the Search pane.
2. Set parameters for each of your search criteria. If the item displays an edit box, type the parameter you want to search for. If the
item is displayed as a hyperlink, click the value to display a control you can use to set the value.
3. Choose whether you want to display files that match any or all of your search criteria:
•
Choose Match Any from the Match Any/Match All drop-down list if you want to display all media that matches any of your
keyword, tag, or advanced search criteria.
—or—
•
Choose Match All from the Match Any/Match All drop-down list if you want to display only media that matches all of your
search criteria.
4. Select the check boxes for the advanced search criteria you want to include in your search, or clear a check box to exclude that
item.
Previewing media
You can use the transport controls in the Media Manager window to preview media files.
1. Select files in the Search Results pane to choose the files you want to preview:
•
To select a single file, click the file.
—or—
•
To select multiple consecutive files, click the first file, hold the Shift key, and then click the last item.
—or—
•
To select multiple files that are not consecutive, hold the Ctrl key and click each file.
2. Start playback:
•
•
If the Auto Preview button ( ) is selected, playback will begin automatically.
If the Auto Preview button is not selected, click the Start Preview button ( ) to begin playback.
If you have multiple files selected, they will be played back sequentially. Each file’s icon will change to a play icon ( ) during
playback.
3. Click the Stop Preview button ( ) to stop the preview, or turn off the preview feature by deselecting the Auto Preview button.
If the file is offline, you’ll be prompted to locate the file or choose a replacement.
Tip: To preview a media file in its associated media player, right-click the file and choose Open with Player from the shortcut menu.
78 | CHAPTER 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding media to your project
After you’ve added media to your library, tagged it, and searched for specific files or related media, you’ve probably found just the right
piece of media for your current project.
You can add media to your project from the Search Results pane by performing any of the following actions:
•
Dragging a file from the Search Results pane to the project timeline. The file is added wherever you drop it.
Tip: You can also drag files from the Search Results pane to the Windows desktop, a folder, or to another application that is an OLE
(object linking and embedding) drop target.
•
•
Double-clicking a media file in the Search Results pane (if the Double-click in Search Results pane adds media to project check
box is selected in the Media Manager Options dialog). The file is added to the bottom of the track list.
Right-clicking a media file in the Search Results pane and choose Add to Project from the shortcut menu. The file is added to the
bottom of the track list.
If the file is offline, you’ll be prompted to locate the file or choose a replacement. For more information, see Resolving offline media files
below.
Resolving offline media files
An offline media file is a file that is no longer available to the Media Manager. Media may be classified as offline if you eject removable
storage after adding a file to your library or change a file’s name or location.
1. Add media to your project or preview media files. If any of the files are not accessible, the Resolve Offline Media dialog is displayed
with a listing of offline files and their status:
Icon Status Description
Offline
The file listed in the Offline File column cannot be found. The status will be Offline if you did
not search or browse for a replacement file.
Probable The file listed in the Offline File column will be replaced by the file listed in the Replacement
Match
File column. A status of Probable Match indicates that the Media Manager tool found a
likely replacement file when you clicked Smart Search.
Found
The file listed in the Offline File column will be replaced by the file listed in the Replacement
File column. A status of Found indicates that you chose the file you want to use after
clicking the Browse button.
2. Select the files you want to resolve:
To select a single file, click the file.
—or—
•
•
To select multiple consecutive files, click the first file, hold the Shift key, and then click the last item.
—or—
•
To select multiple files that are not consecutive, hold the Ctrl key and click each file.
3. Specify how you want to resolve the selected files:
•
•
•
•
Click the Smart Search button to search quickly and allow the Media Manager tool to suggest the replacement file.
Click the Browse button to choose a specific replacement file.
Click the Leave Offline button to leave the file offline. The file will not be added to your project.
Click the Remove button to remove the file from the media library. The file will not be added to your project. The original
media file is not deleted.
4. Repeat step 3 for each file in the list.
5. Click the OK button to preview the files or add the files to your project and update the media library with the replacement files.
USING THE MEDIA MANAGER | 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing the Media Manager window
Much of what you see in the Media Manager window can be customized to suit your preferences.
Automatically hiding the Search pane
Click the push pin button (
) in the title bar of the Search pane if you want to save space in the Media Manager window by
automatically hiding the search pane:
•
•
The push pin is displayed as a (
The push pin is displayed as a (
) when the Search pane is anchored in the Media Manager window.
) when the Search pane is set to hide automatically.
When the Search pane is set to hide automatically, you can hover over the Search tab on the left edge of the Media Manager window to
show the pane. When you move your mouse away from the Search pane, it hides automatically.
Docking and undocking the Search pane
You can undock the Search pane from its location in the Media Manager window to float it over the ACID window, or you can change
the docking position of the pane within the Media Manager window. To undock and move the Search pane, drag its title bar to the
desired location.
Resizing columns
You can resize the columns in the Search Results pane by dragging the splitter between columns to the desired size. To resize a column
automatically, double-click a splitter.
Moving columns
To move a column in the Search Results pane to a different location, drag the column header to the desired location. A red indicator
shows where the column will be dropped.
Showing or hiding columns
1. Right-click the column headings and choose Column Chooser from the shortcut menu.
2. Drag the columns you want to see from the Column Chooser dialog to the Search Results pane.
3. To hide a column, right-click a column heading and choose Remove this Column from the shortcut menu.
Adding custom columns
You can add custom columns to the Search Results pane to store additional information about media files. When you add custom
columns, they are added to the current library only.
For example, if you wanted to keep track of which removable hard drive contained a media file, you could create a custom Drive
Number column to assign any numeric rating to a media file. You could then use the Advanced section of the Search pane to search
using the Drive Number value.
When adding media to a library, you can choose to add this information by selecting the Add tags and custom columns from files
check box in the Add Files to Media Library dialog.
1. Right-click the column headings and choose Custom Columns from the shortcut menu.
2. Click the Add New Column button ( ) to add a custom column. A new entry is added to the list.
3. In the Name box, type the name you’d like to display as a column heading.
80 | CHAPTER 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Select the Type box and choose Text or Integer from the drop-down list to indicate whether you’ll store text or numeric data in the
column.
5. If you want to remove a custom column, select an entry in the list and click the Delete Selected Columns button ( ). The column
and all data stored in the column is removed from the library.
6. Click the OK button. The column is added to the media library, and the Search Results pane is scrolled to the right to display your
new column.
Setting Media Manager options
Use the Media Manager Options dialog to set options for working with the Media Manager tool.
1. Click the Media Library Actions button (
) and choose Options from the menu. The Media Manager Options dialog is
displayed.
2. From the Reference library drop-down list, choose the library you want to load when you click the Switch to Media Reference
Library button in the upper left corner of the Search Results pane. For more information about using reference libraries, see Opening a
3. In the Search results limit box, type the maximum number of media files you’d like to have returned in the results of your searches.
Note: Increasing the Search Results Limit setting increases the amount of time required to search a library and can significantly
decrease performance if set excessively high.
4. Select the Double-click in Search Results pane adds media to project check box if you want to add files to the current project by
double-clicking a file in the Search Results pane.
5. Select the Shut down database service on exit check box if you want to stop the database service when you close ACID.
Note: Stopping the service can conserve system resources when you aren’t using any applications that use the Media Manager tool.
However, the application will take longer to start when the check box is selected.
6. Set your options for adding media to a library:
a. Select the Add tags and custom properties from files check box if you want to add tags and custom columns saved in the
media files to your library. For more information about tagging media, see Tagging media files on page 71. For information about
b. Select the Use file and folder names to apply tags automatically check box if you want to automatically tag files based on the
file path.
For example, when this check box is selected, a loop saved in the d:\loops\drums\hi-hats\ folder would have the tags Drums and
Hi-Hats applied when it is added to the library. Some synonyms (and variant spellings) will be resolved automatically. If you need to
modify the pattern-matching, you can edit the AutoTagPatterns.xml file, which is created in your My Documents\Sony Media
Libraries folder the first time the application starts.
7. Click the OK button to close the dialog.
USING THE MEDIA MANAGER | 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 | CHAPTER 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
5
Working in the Track View
This chapter introduces you to several ACID® features that increase your productivity, such as markers, regions, and
snapping options. You’ll also learn about the different ways to change a project’s tempo, key, and time signature. Finally,
you’ll learn several options for adjusting the project timeline.
Using project markers and regions
ACID markers and regions identify areas of your project and provide navigational cues for quickly finding those areas.
After you insert markers and regions, you may adjust their position along the project’s timeline and label them with
meaningful names for your reference.
Marker type
Description
Marker (standard)
Markers identify specific reference points in your project. Points that you
may want to identify are introductions, bridges, refrains, choruses, or
whatever you choose.
Time marker
Time markers are fixed to the time ruler and mark absolute time in your
project. They are very useful when scoring video.
Command marker
Command markers indicate when an instruction or function occurs in a
streaming media file.
Region
Regions subdivide your project into time segments. Regions have in and out
points, which allow them to function as permanent time selections.
Working with standard markers
Markers are tools that can make creating music easier by identifying specific points along the project’s timeline. They can
be named, moved, and serve as snap and navigational points for the cursor and events. When you place markers, they are
automatically numbered (up to 99) in the order that you place them.
Placing markers
Markers are placed at the cursor position. You may place a marker in one of the following ways:
•
•
From the Insert menu, choose Marker.
Right-click the marker bar, choose Markers/Regions from the shortcut menu, and choose Insert Marker from the
submenu.
•
Press M. You may use this method to place a marker while the project is playing.
Marker
Marker bar
Moving markers
1. Place the mouse pointer on the marker to be moved. The hand cursor ( ) appears.
2. Drag the marker to the desired position.
WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW | 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Naming markers
You can name markers in your project. You may want to name markers based on parts of the project. For example, you may want to
identify choruses, refrains, bridges, or instrument solos as reference points along the timeline.
1. Place the mouse pointer on the marker to be named. The hand cursor ( ) appears.
2. Right-click the marker and choose Rename from the shortcut menu. A box appears next to the marker.
3. Type a marker name in the box and press Enter to save the name.
Tip: You can use the same steps to rename a marker. Alternately, you can double-click the marker and enter a new name.
Navigating to markers
While you are working on your project, you may have scrolled to a portion of the project where the cursor is not visible. There are two
ways to move the cursor directly to the selected marker:
•
•
•
Right-click the marker and choose Go To from the shortcut menu.
Click the marker once.
Press the number key (not on the numeric keypad) corresponding to the marker number.
Tip: You may also navigate from one marker to the next by pressing Ctrl+left/right arrow key.
Adjusting tempo to match cursor to marker
Position the cursor, right-click the marker tab, and choose Adjust tempo to match cursor to marker from the shortcut menu. The
project tempo changes so that the cursor position matches the selected marker.
Deleting markers
You may remove markers from the project at any time. Because markers are automatically numbered (up to 99) when they are placed,
the remaining markers are not renumbered when one is deleted. Rather, the remaining markers retain their numbers. However, if you
add markers later, numbering begins to fill the sequence gap.
For example, if you have five markers in your project and delete markers three and four, the remaining markers are listed as one, two
and five. When you add markers again, the markers are numbered as three and four.
1. Place the mouse pointer on the marker to be deleted. The hand cursor ( ) appears.
2. Right-click the marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. The marker is removed from the project.
Working with time markers
Unlike standard markers, time markers are tied to absolute time within your project. They are added differently than standard markers
and appear on the time ruler at the bottom of the track view. Otherwise, time markers can be manipulated just like other markers.
84 | CHAPTER 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Placing time markers
Time markers are placed at the cursor position. You may place a time marker in one of the following ways:
•
•
From the Insert menu, choose Time Marker.
Press H. You may use this method to place a time marker while the project is playing back.
Time marker
Note: Time markers are not numbered.
Adjusting tempo to match marker to cursor
Using this function with time markers is particularly useful when scoring video. For more information, see Scoring video on page 234.
Position the cursor, right-click the marker tab, and choose Adjust tempo to match marker to cursor from the shortcut menu. The
project tempo changes so the time marker matches the cursor position.
You can also align the marker and cursor by holding Alt while dragging the marker. For example, hold Alt while dragging a time marker
to a location on the beat ruler. The project tempo adjusts so the time at the marker occurs on a specific beat. For example, if you place a
time marker at 10 seconds on the time ruler and hold Alt while dragging the marker to 5.1 on the beat ruler, the project’s tempo is
adjusted so the first beat of measure five occurs at ten seconds.
Working with command markers
Command markers add interactivity to a multimedia presentation streamed over the Internet. As your media plays, any number of other
actions can be programmed to execute. These commands are a part of the Windows Media® and RealMedia™ streaming formats. Most
frequently, these actions add text or open a related Web site. The specific commands available vary depending on the final format of
your project.
Note: Streaming media files can be played back from a hard drive or CD-ROM, but in order to stream properly across the Internet, the file
must be on a streaming media server. Check with your internet service provider for details and availability of this service.
Placing command markers
Command markers appear on the command ruler, which is above the marker bar.
URL command marker
Command ruler
Marker bar
1. Position the cursor where you want to place the command marker.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Command.
WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW | 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Complete the Command Properties dialog:
•
From the Template drop-down list, choose a custom template. For more information, see Saving command properties as a
•
From the Command drop-down list, choose the type of command. For more information, see Defining streaming media
•
•
•
Enter parameters in the Parameter box to define the behavior of the command.
Enter your own notes or comments in the Comment box.
Specify the timing of the command in the Position box. Command markers are automatically set to the current cursor position
unless you change this value.
4. Click OK. The new command marker appears on the command bar.
After you create a command marker, you can move the marker by dragging it to a new location.
Editing command marker properties
Double-click any command marker to open the Command Properties dialog and edit its contents. You can also right-click a command
marker and choose Edit from the shortcut menu.
Saving command properties as a custom template
If you plan to use a command more than once, you can save command properties as a template. You can then reuse the command
properties by selecting the template from the Template drop-down list.
1. Create a command and complete the Command Properties dialog.
2. Click in the Template box and enter a name for the template.
3. Click the Save Template button ( ).
Tip: Your metadata command templates are saved in the cmdtemp.xml file in the ACID program folder. You can edit this file directly to
modify your templates.
86 | CHAPTER 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defining streaming media commands
In a streaming media file, command markers can be used to display headlines, show captions, link to Web sites, or any other function
you define.
Several command types are included that you may add to a streaming media file. Some command types are exclusive to either the
Windows Media or the RealMedia file types.
Command
URL
Player Type
Description
Windows Media Indicates when an instruction is sent to the user’s Internet browser to change the content being
and RealMedia
displayed. With this command, you enter the URL that displays at a specific time during the
rendered project’s playback.
TEXT
Windows Media Displays text in the captioning area of the Windows Media Player located below the video
display area. You enter the text that displays during playback.
Note: To view captions during playback in Windows Media Player 9, choose Captions and
Subtitles from the Windows Media Player Play menu, and then choose On if Available from the
submenu.
WMClosedCaption Windows Media Displays the entered text in the captioning window defined by an HTML layout file.
WMTextBodyText Windows Media Displays the entered text in the text window defined by an HTML layout page.
WMTextHeadline Windows Media Displays the entered text in the headline window defined by an HTML layout file.
Title
RealMedia
RealMedia
Displays the entered text on the player’s title bar.
Note: When rendering Windows Media files, title information is based on the settings on the
Summary tab of the ACID Project Properties dialog or the Index/Summary tab of the Custom
Template dialog. The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if
information has been specified in both places.
To view this information during playback, choose Now Playing Options from the Windows
Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display.
Author
Displays the entered text (author’s name) when a user selects About this Presentation from
the RealPlayer shortcut menu or Properties from the Windows Media shortcut menu.
Note: When rendering Windows Media files, author information is based on the settings on the
Summary tab of the ACID Project Properties dialog or the Index/Summary tab of the Custom
Template dialog. The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if
information has been specified in both places.
To view this information during playback, choose Now Playing Options from the Windows
Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display.
Copyright
RealMedia
Displays the entered copyright information when a user selects About this Presentation from
the RealPlayer shortcut menu or Properties from the Windows Media shortcut menu.
Note: When rendering Windows Media files, copyright information is based on the settings on
the Summary tab of the ACID Project Properties dialog or the Index/Summary tab of the Custom
Template dialog. The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if
information has been specified in both places.
To view this information during playback, choose Now Playing Options from the Windows
Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display.
Adjusting tempo to match cursor to marker
Position the cursor, right-click the marker tab, and choose Adjust tempo to match cursor to marker from the shortcut menu. The
project tempo changes so that the cursor position matches the selected command marker.
Deleting command markers
To delete a command marker, right-click the marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
Working with regions
Regions are useful tools that allow you to subdivide your project into time sections by designating in and out points along the timeline.
Regions can function as permanent time selections for playback and editing purposes. Like markers, regions can serve as reference
points and may be moved, named, and provide snap points for the cursor and events.
When you place regions, they are automatically numbered in the order that you place them.
WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW | 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Placing and moving regions
Regions are placed at the start and end points of a loop region (time selection). You may place a region in one of the following ways:
•
•
•
From the Insert menu, choose Region.
Right-click the marker bar, choose Markers/Regions from the shortcut menu, and choose Insert Region from the submenu.
Press R.
Region end
Region start
Loop region
After you place a region, you may change its position by dragging the region tag to the desired position.
Tip: You can move a region without changing its size by holding Alt while dragging either region tag.
Naming regions
You can name the placed regions in your project. You may want to name regions based on parts of the project or to define the amount
of time that the regions encompass. For example, you may want to identify introductions, solos, or special time-related features in your
project as reference points.
1. Right-click the region’s start tag and choose Rename from the shortcut menu. A box appears next to the tag.
2. Type a region name and press Enter to save the name.
Navigating to regions
While you are working on your project, you may have scrolled to a portion of the project where the cursor is not visible. You may click in
the track view to move and view the cursor or you may use region tags to bring the cursor into view.
To move the cursor to the selected region tag, right-click the region tag and choose Go To from the shortcut menu.
Tip: You may also navigate between regions in your project by pressing Ctrl+left/right arrow key or the number key (not on the numeric
keypad) corresponding to the region number.
Selecting regions
You may use the region’s start and end tags to make a time selection across all tracks in your project. The information within the time
selection can then be used for playback or editing.
To select a region, right-click a region tag and choose Select Region from the shortcut menu. The loop bar appears between the region
tags and the tracks are highlighted.
Deleting regions
You may remove regions from the project at any time. Because regions are automatically numbered when they are placed, the existing
regions are not renumbered when one is removed. Rather, the existing regions retain their numbers. However, if you add regions later,
numbering begins to fill the sequence gap that exists.
For example, if you have six regions in your project and delete regions four and five, the remaining regions are listed as one, two, three
and six. When you add regions again, the regions are numbered as four and five.
To remove a region from a project, right-click the region tag marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
88 | CHAPTER 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using snapping
Snapping helps you to align events in your project with other items. Event edges are preset to snap to the project’s grid lines as you
drag an event along the track. If snapping is enabled and the Grid Only option is turned off, the event’s edges automatically align to
these designated snap points:
•
•
•
•
•
Cursor position
Grid lines
Markers
Regions start and end points
Loop region (time selection) in and out points
You may turn on snapping for these elements in the project or limit snapping to grid lines.
Choosing snapping options
If the snap function is preventing you from placing an event precisely where you want it, you may turn snapping off. Turning off
snapping prevents events from automatically aligning to the cursor, grid lines, markers, regions, and time selections.
The Options menu allows you to toggle snap functions. The button image next to the Enable command indicates when snapping is
turned on. The button image next to the Grid Only command indicates the type of snapping in use.
Select to turn all snapping on/off
Select to toggle between snapping
to grid lines only and snapping to all
elements.
Tip: You can temporarily suspend snapping while dragging by holding down the Shift key.
Turning snapping on and off
You may turn snapping on and off in one of the following ways:
•
•
•
Click the Enable Snapping button (
) on the Toolbar.
From the Options menu, choose Snapping, and choose Enable from the submenu.
Press F8.
Snapping to grid lines
With snapping turned on, you may choose to snap only to grid lines. From the Options menu, choose Snapping, and choose Grid Only
from the submenu. The button image next to the command indicates that it is active.
Snapping to all elements
With snapping turned on, you may choose to snap to all elements. From the Options menu, choose Snapping, and choose Grid Only
from the submenu. The button image next to the Grid Only command appears deselected when snapping to all elements.
Tip: Press Ctrl+F8 to toggle between grid only and all elements.
WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW | 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing tempo, time signature, and key
You can set a tempo, time signature, and key for your ACID project. You can also make adjustments during playback.
You can add specific tempo, time signature, and key changes within a project using tempo/key/time signature change markers. These
markers appear on the marker bar above the track view. When the cursor passes over one of these markers, the master project tempo,
key, and/or time signature changes in real time.
...or change these elements dynamically in
the timeline.
Set the tempo, time signature, and key for the whole project...
Project Key
Project Tempo
Project Tempo slider
Project Time
Signature
Changing project tempo
You can change the tempo of a project without affecting the project’s key.
Changing tempo using the Project Tempo slider
Drag the Project Tempo slider at the bottom of the track list. Dragging the slider to the left slows the tempo, while dragging it to the
right speeds the tempo.
Tip: Double-click the tempo value next to the Project Tempo slider to enter
an exact value. Press Enter when you are finished.
As you drag the Project Tempo slider, a colored bar appears under each track’s name to represent the amount a track is being stretched
to match the project tempo. The mark in the center of the bar represents the original tempo of a file. When the bar appears to the right
of the mark, the project tempo is faster than the original file; when the bar appears to the left of the mark, the project tempo is slower
than the original file. The amount of change also displays as a percentage at the right end of the bar.
As you drag the slider, a colored bar appears for each track.
Project tempo is faster than
file tempo.
Project tempo is slower
than file tempo.
Project Tempo slider
Changing project tempo to match file tempo
Each track’s shortcut menu contains the option Use Original Tempo. The original tempo of the file used on the track appears to the
right of this option in the shortcut menu. To change the project’s tempo to match the original file tempo, simply choose Use Original
Tempo from the shortcut menu.
90 | CHAPTER 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing project time signature
Click the Project Time Signature control and select a time signature from the menu to adjust a project’s time signature. Select Other
from the menu to enter a custom time signature.
Changing project key
Click the Project Key control and select a key from the menu to adjust a project’s key.
Project Key control
This feature makes it possible to use media that are in different keys in the same project: each loop that has a specified root note is
transposed to the key indicated by the Project Key control.
For example, if three loops have root notes of A, B, and C, and your Project Key control is set to D, the loops are pitch-shifted by five,
three, and two semitones, respectively.
Note: If the root note for a track is set to Don’t Transpose in the Clip Properties window, the track does not pitch shift with the rest of the
project.
Working with tempo/key/time signature change markers
Tempo/key/time signature change markers allow you to make changes to the tempo, key, and/or time signature at specified points in
your project.
Note: Time signature changes must occur on the first beat of a measure.
Adding tempo/key/time signature change markers
1. Position the cursor where you want the change to occur.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Tempo/Key/Time Signature Change. The Tempo/
Key/Time Signature Change dialog appears.
3. Select the Key Change check box and choose a key from the menu to change the
key of all tracks from the cursor position until another key change marker is
encountered.
4. Select the Tempo Change check box and enter a new tempo (in beats per minute)
in the edit box to change the tempo of all tracks from the cursor position until
another tempo change marker is encountered.
When you add a tempo change marker, you can choose an setting from the
Transition type drop-down menu to determine how the tempo is changed between markers. For more information on using
WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW | 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Select the Time Signature Change check box and make your Beats per measure and Beat value selections to change the time
signature at the marker position. The time ruler divisions and grid spacing will be updated accordingly.
Note: Time signature changes must occur on the first beat of a measure. If your cursor is not on the first beat of a measure, the marker is
placed at the nearest measure.
6. Click OK. A marker appears in the marker bar at the cursor position that displays the change information.
New marker and
marker text
Editing tempo/key/time signature change markers
There are several ways to edit a tempo/key/time signature change marker:
•
Position the cursor on or after the marker and adjust the Project Tempo, Project Time Signature, or Project Key controls. The
marker’s text reflects the change.
•
Right-click the marker, choose Edit from the shortcut menu, and enter the appropriate change in the Tempo/Key/Time Signature
Change dialog.
•
•
Double-click the marker text and type the new value.
Double-click the marker and enter the appropriate change in the Tempo/Key/Time Signature Change dialog.
Adjusting tempo to match cursor to marker
Position the cursor, right-click the marker tab, and choose Adjust Tempo to Match Cursor to Marker from the shortcut menu. The
project tempo changes so that the cursor position matches the selected marker.
Deleting tempo/key/time signature change markers
To delete a marker, right-click the marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
Using a tempo curve to change tempo between markers
When you add a tempo change marker to the timeline, you can choose to change tempo gradually between markers. Tempo curves are
perfect for ramping tempo up or down.
1. Add a tempo change marker to the timeline or double-click a tempo-change marker to edit an existing marker.
2. Choose a setting from the Transition type drop-down list to indicate how ACID will interpolate tempo between markers:
Option
Hold
Description
Looks Like
No tempo change will take place. The tempo settings will be
maintained until the next tempo change marker.
Linear
Fast
Tempo change parameters are interpolated in a linear path.
Tempo change parameters are interpolated in a fast logarithmic
path.
Slow
Tempo change parameters are interpolated in a slow
logarithmic path.
Smooth
Sharp
Tempo change parameters are interpolated along a smooth,
natural curve.
Tempo change parameters are interpolated along a sharp
curve.
92 | CHAPTER 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a clip’s key
You can change the key of a clip on a track without affecting the project’s key. For creative ways to use track key changes, see Detuning
1. Right-click the track and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Track Properties window appears.
2. Double-click the event you want to edit.
3. On the General tab of the Clip Properties window, enter the number of semitones by which to adjust the key in the Pitch Shift box
or use the spinner control. Use the minus (-) key for negative values.
4. Close the Track Properties window. The pitch shift displays in the event.
Pitch shift display
Tip: Another way to change the key of the track is to select the track in the track list and press + (plus) or - (minus) on the numeric keypad.
Changing an event’s key
You can change the key of an individual event without affecting the pitch of the track or project.
Right-click the event in the track view, choose Pitch Shift from the shortcut menu, and choose Up
Semitone or Down Semitone from the submenu. The pitch shifts one semitone in the direction specified,
and the amount of shift displays on the event itself.
You can also change an event’s key using keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see Event editing
Adjusting time
Two commands are provided for adjusting your project’s timeline: Insert Time and Fit to Time.
Inserting time
Use the Insert Time command to insert a specified amount of blank space into the project at the current cursor position. This feature
can be used to create space in the project for new events.
1. Position the cursor where you want to insert time.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Time. The Insert Time dialog appears.
3. Enter the amount of time you want to insert and click OK.
Note: The Insert Time dialog uses the measures.beats.ticks format used by the beat ruler.
WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW | 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fitting to time
The Fit to Time command allows you to adjust the project’s overall length to a specified amount of time.
Note: The maximum and minimum length is limited to reduce the possibility of creating audible artifacts through the compression/
expansion process.
1. From the Edit menu, choose Fit to Time. The Fit to Time dialog appears with the current project length displayed in the New
length box.
2. Enter the new project length in the New length box. The length is always entered in time format, regardless of the format used on
the time ruler.
3. Click OK. The dialog closes and the tempo is adjusted to alter the project’s length.
94 | CHAPTER 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
6
Using the Chopper
The Chopper™ feature in ACID® allows you to quickly create slice-and-dice effects. For creative ways to use the Chopper, see
Working in the Chopper window
Selecting an event loads its clip in the Chopper.
Toolbar
Beat ruler
Time ruler
Transport bar
Viewing the Chopper
To display the Chopper, choose Chopper from the View menu or press Alt+2.
Changing the Chopper grid
The Chopper’s grid uses the same increments available on the track view. To change the grid display, right-click the
waveform area of the Chopper, choose Grid Spacing from the shortcut menu, and choose the desired display from the
submenu.
Changing Chopper snapping options
The snapping behavior of the track view and Chopper are linked. To enable snapping in both components, choose
Snapping from the Options menu and choose Enable from the submenu, or press F8.
When snapping is turned on, you can choose between snapping only to the grid or snapping to all elements. For more
Magnifying the Chopper
There are three ways of adjusting the magnification of the Chopper.
•
•
•
Click the Zoom In Time and Zoom Out Time
buttons located in the lower-right corner of the window.
Click within the Chopper and use the mouse wheel.
Quickly magnify a selection by right-clicking and choosing Zoom to Loop Region from the shortcut menu.
Previewing in the Chopper
The Chopper contains a dedicated transport bar that can be used to preview selections prior to inserting them into the
project.
USING THE CHOPPER | 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Chopper toolbar and keyboard commands
In addition to the transport bar, the Chopper contains a toolbar that is designed to make creating selections quick and easy. The
following table briefly describes the toolbar buttons and the associated keyboard commands.
Button Keyboard
Function
/ (front slash) or A
Inserts the Chopper selection as an event in the track view at the
current cursor position.
Y
Inserts the Chopper selection as an event in the track view at the play
cursor position.
Ctrl + , (comma)
Ctrl + . (period)
N
Shifts the track view’s cursor position to the left by the length of the
increment arrow.
Shifts the track view’s cursor position to the right by the length of the
increment arrow.
Links the length of the increment arrow with the length of the
selection. When toggled on, the length of the increment remains equal
to the length of the selection. When toggled off, you can configure the
increment independently of the Chopper selection.
; (semicolon)
’ (apostrophe)
< or , (comma)
Halves the length of the Chopper selection.
Doubles the length of the Chopper selection.
Shifts the Chopper selection to the left by the length of the selection.
> or . (period)
Shifts the Chopper selection to the right by the length of the selection.
Ctrl + Shift + , (comma)
Shifts the selection left by the increment length.
Shifts the selection right by the increment length.
Doubles the length of the increment arrow.
Halves the length of the increment arrow.
Inserts a region.
Ctrl + Shift + . (period)
Ctrl + ; (semicolon)
Ctrl + ’ (apostrophe)
R
M
I
Inserts a marker.
Marks the start point of a loop region.
O
Marks the end point of a loop region. Once the endpoint is established,
the loop region becomes highlighted.
Inserting markers and regions in the Chopper
When working with events in the Chopper, you can drop markers and create regions just like in the track view. For more information, see
These markers and regions are saved with the project when it is saved. They can also be saved back to the original media file by clicking
the Save File button ( ) in the Track Properties window. For more information, see Saving file properties on page 123.
Creating selections in the Chopper
After you place a file in the Chopper, you can use the toolbar, transport bar, and mouse (or their keyboard equivalents) to create and
preview selections within the file. When have made the selection you want, you can insert the selection into the track view.
96 | CHAPTER 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Placing files in the Chopper
To place a file in the Chopper, do any of the following:
•
•
•
Select a track in the track list.
Select an event.
Right-click an event and choose Select in Chopper from the shortcut menu.
Note: If you choose Select in Chopper on an event that contains only a portion of a file, the entire contents of the file are placed in the
Chopper. The part of the waveform selected, however, matches the contents of the selected event. This allows you to see the event in the
context of the entire media file.
Creating selections
To create a selection, drag the mouse, or hold Shift while pressing the arrow keys. A shaded region appears in the Chopper to indicate
the current selection, and its start point, end point, and length display at the bottom-right corner of the window in measures.beats.ticks
format. You can preview the selection at any time by clicking the Play button (
) on the Chopper’s transport bar or pressing Space.
Increment arrow
Start
End
Length
Note: In addition, an increment arrow appears on the track view above the selected block. For more information, see Inserting
As you make a selection in the Chopper, a colored block appears in the track view. This block indicates where the selection will be placed
on the track view when you insert it from the Chopper.
Creating selections of a specific musical length
You may want to create a selection with a length corresponding to a musical value. You can easily do this in the software using the
Chopper’s selection shortcut menu.
1. Create a selection or place the cursor in the Chopper. For more information, see Creating selections on page 97.
2. Right-click and choose the desired musical length from the shortcut menu. A selection is created equal to the specified musical
length.
USING THE CHOPPER | 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inserting increments
In addition to creating selections, the Chopper feature allows you to configure the sections of silence between selections painted on a
track. When you click the Link Arrow to Selection button (
), the increment arrow length is incremented with the selection length.
This forces the increment and selection lengths to remain equal, thereby allowing you to insert selections seamlessly, end-to-end, in the
project.
Chopper selection inserted end-to-end three times
Selection and increment length linked
When the Link Arrow to Selection button is toggled off, the increment arrow is displayed in black and you are able to establish a
increment length that is independent of the selection length. The increment arrow can be set by dragging either end of the arrow or by
using the increment shortcut menu.
When the increment length is greater than the length of the selection, an appropriate amount of silence is inserted following the
selection when you insert it in the track view. This affects the track’s insert position and allows you to paint selections separated by the
specified increment.
Increment greater than selection
Selection inserted with specified increment three times
When the increment length is less than the length of the selection, the selections are overlapped as you insert them in the track view.
Selection overlaps when inserted three times
Increment less than selection
Creating increments
1. Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button (
) is toggled off and the increment arrow is displayed in black.
2. Drag the point of the arrow to configure an increment of the desired length.
Tip: While dragging the increment arrow, the Chopper’s middle status value temporarily displays the length of the increment.
98 | CHAPTER 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating increments of a specific musical length
The increment shortcut menu, like the selection shortcut menu, allows you to create increments that correspond to the specified
musical length.
1. Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button (
) is toggled off and the increment arrow is displayed in black.
2. Right-click the increment arrow and choose the desired musical value from the shortcut menu. The increment length is
automatically configured to the selected value in both the Chopper and the track view.
Creating increments of a custom musical length
1. Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button (
) is toggled off and the increment arrow is displayed in black.
2. Right-click the increment arrow and choose Custom from the shortcut menu. The Custom Length dialog appears.
3. Choose the desired increment format from the drop-down menu.
4. Enter an appropriate value in the adjacent box and click OK. The increment length is automatically configured to the selected value
in both the Chopper and the track view.
Note: It is possible to set an increment value that results in the increment arrow extending beyond the scope of the Chopper. If this
occurs, an accurate depiction of the increment still appears in the track view.
Inserting selections in the track view
You can add selections from the Chopper to your project in several ways.
Using the Insert Selection button
After you create the desired selection and increment, you can insert the selection in the project at the track view’s cursor position by
clicking the Insert Selection button (
). After the Chopper inserts the audio, the cursor moves to the end of the increment.
•
•
If the increment length is equal to the selection length, selections are painted end-to-end.
If the increment length is greater than the selection length, an appropriate amount of silence is painted prior to the next insert
position.
•
If the increment length is less than the selection length, selections overlap.
Using copy and paste
You can right-click the selection in the Chopper and choose Copy from the shortcut menu to copy the current selection to the
clipboard. You can then use the Paste command to insert the selection in the track view. After the event is pasted, the cursor advances
to the end of the pasted event.
Note: When you paste a selection from the Chopper to the track view, the increment setting is ignored.
Dragging selections
You can drag a Chopper selection from the Chopper to the track view. Release the mouse at the location where you want to insert the
selection.
Moving the insert position in the track view
Click the Move Track View Cursor Left button (
) and the Move Track View Cursor Right button (
) to move the current insert
position in the track view left/right by the increment length.
USING THE CHOPPER | 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Chopper selections as new files
You can quickly create a new loop by making a selection in the Chopper and saving the selection as a new file. The file is added to your
project as a new track.
1. Make a selection in the Chopper.
2. Right-click the selection and choose Chop to New Track or Chop to New Clip from the shortcut menu. The Chop to New dialog
appears.
Tip: You can also drag a selection from the Chopper to the track list.
3. In the File name box, enter a name for the new file.
4. From the Save as type box, choose a file format for the new file.
5. From the Template drop-down list, choose a template for rendering the file, or click Custom to create custom rendering settings.
6. Click Save.
If you chopped to a new clip, a new clip is added to the original track. For more information, see Using clips with tracks on page 101.
If you chopped to a new track, the file is added as a new track in the project.
Using the Chopper with one-shots
Selections of loops and Beatmapped files transfer flawlessly between the Chopper and the track view because the beats are clearly
identified. However, one-shot files present more of a problem. You can use the following method to create accurate single-hit selections
in one-shot files.
1. Verify that the snapping options are active. If snapping is not active, choose Snapping from the Options menu and choose Enable
from the submenu, or press F8.
2. Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button (
) is selected.
3. Create a selection of the desired musical length in the Chopper. For more information, see Creating selections of a specific musical
4. From the Options menu, choose Snapping, and choose Enable from the submenu, or press F8 to toggle all snapping options off.
5. Click the Link Arrow to Selection button (
) to toggle the linking option off. You can now adjust the selection without changing
the increment.
6. Drag the middle of the increment arrow to reposition selection length in the Chopper.
7. Use the mouse and/or keyboard to fine-tune the selection. The increment arrow does not change.
8. Insert the desired selection data in the track view. For more information, see Inserting selections in the track view on page 99.
9. Repeat steps six through eight to insert all desired selections in the track view.
100 | CHAPTER 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
7
Working with Tracks
This chapter covers advanced track features including using clips, track effect chains, track envelopes, groove mapping™,
and stereo panning modes. You’ll also learn more about track types, track properties, track folders, and rendering tracks
to new files.
Using clips with tracks
In previous versions of ACID®, each track in your project corresponded to a single media file. If you’re comfortable with
the track-equals-media model, this version of ACID can behave in much the same way: when you add media to your
project, a new track is created for the media file. You can use the Draw
track’s media.
and Paint
tools to create events using the
In this version of ACID, you can now add multiple media files — or clips — to one track. Think of clips as the palette you
can dip your paintbrush in when you paint on the timeline. For example, if you want to use one track for all the guitar
loops in your project, you can create a single guitar track and add each guitar loop as a separate clip. When a track has
multiple clips, the Draw and Paint tools create events using the active clip.
A single audio track can contain any combination of loops, one-shots, or Beatmapped clips. MIDI tracks can contain only
On a track with a single clip, events are always created using the track's media.
On a track with multiple clips, each event can point to a different media file. In this example, each
event represents one of the track's three clips.
The banner at the top of each event (i.e. Bongo 01, Bongo 02, and Bongo 03) displays the name of
the event's source clip.
Adding clips to tracks
Drag a file from the Windows Explorer, Explorer Window, or Media Manager window to an existing track in the timeline to
add a clip to the track and add an event where you drop the clip. The new clip is set as the active clip for creating events
with the Draw
or Paint
tool.
You can also record into a track to create a new clip.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
You can drag single-stream MIDI files to a track to add clips. When you drag multistream MIDI files to a track, tracks and
events are created.
You can also drag events across tracks. When you drag an event to a new track, the event is added to the new track where
you drop it, and a clip is added to the track’s clip pool.
You can use the Chopper window to create new clips from the track’s existing media. For more information, see Using the
If you want to add a clip to a track without creating an event, drag a file from the Windows Explorer, Explorer Window, or
Media Manager window and drop it on the Paint Clip Selector button.
•
Hold Shift while clicking the Paint Clip Selector button to display the Open dialog, where you can add a new clip.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the active clip and creating events
It is simple to set active clips and create events with ACID.
1. Click the Paint Clip Selector button in the track header. A menu is displayed to list the track’s current clips.
2. Choose a clip from the menu. The selected clip is used for creating events with the Draw
or Paint
tool.
Copying clips and events across tracks
In previous versions of ACID, you could only copy and paste events within the same track. Now you can use clips to copy events
between tracks.
Tips:
•
•
You can also use the Cut
paste clips across tracks.
, Copy
, and Paste
buttons in the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties window to cut, copy, and
Hold Ctrl while dragging an event to a different track to copy the event and clip to the destination track.
1. Select the events you want to copy.
Tip: Hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple events. You can select multiple events that use different clips.
2. Click to position the cursor where you want to paste the events.
3. Click the track header of the track where you want to paste the contents of the clipboard.
4. From the Edit menu, choose Paste. Events are added at the cursor position, and clips are added to the track for the pasted events
as needed.
. . . and paste it into track the same track, a new event is created on the
same track. No clips are created.
If you copy an event from track 1. ..
... and paste it into track 2, the event from track 1 is added to track 2, and a new
clip is created for the new event.
If you copy an event from track 1. . .
102 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.. . and paste them into track 2, the event from track 1 is added to track 2, and a new
clip is created for the new event. A new track is created for the event from track 3.
If you copy events from tracks 1 and 3. . .
Copying clips across tracks without copying events
You can use the Cut
, Copy
, and Paste
buttons on the audio Track Properties or MIDI Track Properties window to cut, copy,
and paste clips across tracks:
1. Click the Paint Clip Selector button on the track header and select Clip Pool.
2. In the Clip Pool, select the clip you want to cut or copy, and then click Cut or Copy.
3. Click the Paint Clip Selector button in the track header where you want to paste clips, and then choose Clip Pool from the menu.
4. Click the Paste button in the Clip Pool.
Creating new MIDI clips
Right-click a MIDI clip and choose Copy to New Clip from the shortcut menu to copy the selected clip to a new, separate clip. Copying
an event to a new clip allows you to edit a single MIDI event without affecting other events that use the same clip.
Right-click a MIDI track and choose Create Empty Clip from the shortcut menu to create a new, empty clip and set it as the track’s active
clip.
Tip: You can also use the Chopper window to create new clips from a track’s existing media. For more information, see Working in the
Previewing clips
Select a clip in the clip list, and then click the Play button
to play it. Click the Stop button
to stop playback.
Changing an event’s clip
1. Select the events you want to change.
2. Right-click a selected event and choose Event Clip. The track’s current clips are displayed in a submenu.
3. Choose the clip you want to use from the submenu. All selected events are updated to use the new clip.
Tip: Press C or Shift+C to change the selected event's clip by cycling forward or backward through the track's clips.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pitch shifting audio clips
You can use the Clip Properties window to pitch-shift all events on the track associated with a specific clip. For more information, see
Using the Clip Pool to manage clips
You can use the Clip Pool to organize each track's media. In the track header, click the Paint Clip Selector button and then choose Clip
Pool.
The clip list displays each track's clips, the number of times the clip is used on the track, and the path to the media file.
Clear a clip's check box to remove it from the Paint Clip Selector menu without removing it from the track. To make the clip available
again, select the check box.
To set the active clip, click the space next to a clip's check box. The
Draw or Paint tool.
icon indicates which clip will be used for creating events with the
Click the Remove Unused Clips
button to remove all unused clips from the track.
Tip: To remove the unused media from your project, choose Remove All Unused Clips from the Tools menu.
Click the Open
Select a clip in the Clip Pool and click the Delete
You can use the Cut , Copy , and Paste
button to display the Open dialog, where you can browse to clips you want to add to the track.
button. Only clips with a Use Count of 0 can be deleted.
buttons in the Clip Pool window to cut, copy, and paste clips across tracks.
Selecting events that use a specified clip
Right-click an event and choose Select Events Using This Event's Clip from the shortcut menu to select all events on the track that use
the same clip as the selected event.
Right-click the timeline, choose Select Events Using Clip, and then choose a clip from the submenu to select all events on the track that
use the specified clip.
Changing an event’s clip settings
To change settings for an event’s clip, right-click an event in the timeline, choose Event Clip from the shortcut menu, and then choose a
command from the submenu:
Tip: Editing a clip affects all events on the track that use the clip.
Command
Description
Rename
Allows you to type a new name for the selected event's clip.
The new name is displayed in the Clip Pool and in the event when Event Information is selected on the View menu.
Choose a color from the submenu to change the color used to draw a clip's events.
Color
Loop
Select this command if you want a MIDI clip to repeat when painted on the timeline.
When the command is not selected, the MIDI clip will be treated as a one-shot.
Note: This command is available only for MIDI clips.
Use Original
Tempo
Sets the project tempo to match the clip's original tempo.
104 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command
Description
Edit in Audio
Editor
Opens the clip's media in your selected audio editor.
After you have edited and saved the file, ACID automatically detects the updated file and updates the events in the project.
However, if you change the media file’s name or location (by using Save As), you must import the edited (new) file into your
project.
Note: When you edit a clip in an external editor, audio, MIDI, and external control hardware is released regardless of the
Close audio and MIDI ports when ACID is not the active application check box setting (for more information, see Using
Edit Source
Project
If a clip's media was created from an ACID project and rendered with the project path reference in the file, this command
opens the source project in a new ACID window.
If you render the edited file using the same file name and location as the track's original media, your project will automatically
be updated to use the latest rendered media file.
Note: This command is available only for audio clips.
Add to Groove
Pool
Makes the selected clip available in the Groove Pool so you can apply its timing to other tracks.
Notes:
•Groove cloning can extract grooves from loop tracks only.
•This command is available only for audio clips.
Invert Phase
Normalize
Reverses the phase of the sound data. Although inverting data does not make an audible difference in a single file, it can
prevent phase cancellation when mixing or crossfading audio signals.
Note: This command is available only for audio clips.
Maximizes a clip's volume without clipping.
The Normalize peak level setting on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog sets the level to which the largest peak in the clip
will be normalized.
Note: This command is available only for audio clips.
Channels
Specifies how to treat the channels in a clip:
Both
Treats the clip as a normal stereo file.
Left Only
Right Only
Combine
Creates a mono clip using only the left channel of your media file.
Creates a mono clip using only the right channel of your media file.
Creates a mono clip by mixing the channels of your media file. After mixing the channels, the amplitude is
divided by two to prevent clipping.
Swap
Exchanges the right and left channels in a stereo file.
Note: This command is available only for audio clips.
Clip List
Next Clip
Displays the track's available clips. Choose a clip from the menu to set the event's clip.
Updates the event's contents to use the next clip in the clip list.
Tip: Select an event and press C to switch to the next clip quickly.
Previous Clip
Updates the event's contents to use the previous clip in the clip list.
Tip: Select an event and press Shift+C to switch to the previous clip quickly.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using bus tracks
From the View menu, choose Show Bus Tracks to toggle the display of bus tracks at the bottom of the track view. A bus track exists for
each bus, input bus, assignable effects chain, and soft synth in your project.
You can use bus tracks to automate volume, panning, and effect parameters using envelopes. If a bus track has envelopes applied, its
icon will include a fader in the bus track and in the Mixing Console window.
For example, if you wanted to adjust the volume of all tracks in your project, you could apply a volume envelope to the Master bus track
instead of adjusting each track individually.
Adding envelopes to a bus track
Adding volume, panning, and effect automation envelopes to a bus track is just like adding an envelope to a standard track. For more
Adding effects to a bus track
1. Click the Bus FX button ( ) in the bus track header to add or edit bus effects. If there are no effects on the bus, the button is
displayed in gray, and clicking this button displays the Plug-In Chooser. If a bus already has effects assigned, clicking this button
displays the Audio Plug-In window.
2. Select each plug-in you want to add and click the Add button or browse to a packaged effects chain.
Tip: To reorder the plug-ins within the chain, drag a plug-in button to a new location or click the Shift Plug-In Left ( ) or Shift Plug in
Right ( ) buttons.
3. Once you have added all of the plug-ins and specified the plug-in chain order, click on the OK button to close the Plug-In Chooser
and return to the Audio Plug-In window.
4. Adjust the settings for the effects. For more information about using specific plug-ins, click the Plug-In Help button ( ).
Muting a bus track
Click the Mute button ( ) to prevent a bus track from being played in the mix. Click the Mute button on additional tracks to add them
to the mute group. To unmute a track, click the Mute button again.
Muting or unmuting a bus track
Deselect the Automation Settings button ( ) to toggle trim mode.
Click the Mute button ( ).
When you have a group of tracks muted, hold Ctrl while clicking the Mute button on an unmuted track to remove all other tracks from
the mute group. Hold Ctrl while clicking the Mute button on a muted track to reset all Mute buttons.
Adjusting mute automation
When you select the Automation Settings button ( ), the mute button is displayed as a
, and you can use the control to edit
volume automation.
Soloing a bus track
Click the Solo button ( ) to solo all selected audio bus tracks. Click the Solo button on additional tracks to add them to the solo group.
To remove a track from the solo group, click its Solo button again.
Hold Ctrl while clicking a Solo button to solo a single track and remove all other tracks from the solo group.
106 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring bus track output levels
During playback, a responsive meter is displayed in the bus track header to monitor the bus’s output.
Horizontal meters
Vertical meters
(Right-click and
choose Use Vertical
Meters from the
shortcut menu)
When clipping is detected, the peak meter displays a red Clip indicator.
Right-click the meters and choose a command from the shortcut menu to adjust the display of the meters. This shortcut menu allows
you to reset clip indicators, choose a display scale, toggle vertical display, or turn output meters off.
Automating VSTi parameters in soft synth bus tracks
You can use the soft synth bus track to control parameter automation for VST instruments using envelopes. For more information, see
Resizing bus tracks
You can drag the horizontal splitter between the track list and bus tracks to increase or decrease the space allocated to bus tracks.
Perform any of the following actions to resize individual bus tracks:
•
•
•
•
Drag a bus track’s bottom border to set its height.
Click Minimize
to minimize a track vertically.
Click Maximize
to zoom in vertically so a bus track fills the lower portion of the timeline.
After minimizing or maximizing a bus track, click the Minimize or Maximize button again to return a bus track to its previous
height.
•
Press Ctrl+Shift+Up/Down Arrow when the bus track area has focus to resize all bus tracks at once.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using track effects
ACID allows you to use DirectX® and VST plug-ins at the track level. Track-level plug-ins process everything on the selected track.
You can create plug-in chains, adjust the order of plug-ins on a chain, bypass plug-ins, remove plug-ins, and save frequently used chains
as presets.
Tips:
•
•
If the VST plug-in you want to use isn't displayed in the Plug-In Chooser, you can use the VST Effects tab in the Preferences dialog to add the
plug-in's folder and then click the Refresh button to scan for plug-ins. For more information, see Using the Video tab on page 261.
If the DirectX plug-in you want to use isn't displayed in the Plug-In Chooser, hold Ctrl+Shift while restarting ACID and then select the
Delete all cached application data check box to reset your preferences and rescan for DirectX plug-ins.
Using track effects
The Sony Track EQ plug-in effect is assigned to all tracks by default; however, it does not use CPU power or affect the sound until you
adjust its settings. You can remove the EQ plug-in if desired. For more information, see Removing plug-ins from chains on page 110.
In addition, you can use effect plug-ins in the Mixing Console window by applying effect chains to busses or soft synths, or by creating
assignable effect chains and routing tracks to them. For more information, see Using the Mixing Console on page 151.
Important: Be aware that using non-in-place plug-ins (such as Time Stretch, Pitch-Shift without preserving duration, and some
Vibrato settings) will cause audio to play out of synchronization with the waveform display in the timeline and with other tracks. If an
effects chain includes non-in-place plug-ins, the effects chain icon will be displayed as a
.
When using ACID as a ReWire device, any effects chain that includes non-in-place plug-ins will be automatically bypassed to prevent
synchronization problems with the ReWire mixer application. The effects chain icon will be displayed as a
the ReWire mixer application.
. Apply the plug-ins within
Creating or adding to track plug-in chains
A plug-in chain can contain one or more plug-ins. When you add multiple plug-ins, you may set the processing sequence that the
track’s events go through when the project is played back. Moreover, the plug-ins that you add to the chain may be added more than
once. For example, a plug-in chain could look something like this: Track EQ, Track Compressor, Track EQ, and Track Noise Gate.
After you create a plug-in chain, the track’s events are processed by each plug-in in its respective order on the chain. The events’ effects
processing is cumulative, so in some cases, you may want to rearrange the order of plug-ins to achieve the desired sound. For more
1. Click the Track FX button ( ) in the track header. The Audio Plug-In window appears.
2. Click the Edit Chain button ( ) to display the Plug-In Chooser dialog.
Chain area
108 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Select the plug-ins that you want to add. There are three ways to add a plug-in to the chain:
•
•
•
Double-click the plug-in.
Drag the plug-in to the chain area.
Select the plug-in and click the Add button.
4. Rearrange the order of plug-ins as needed by dragging plug-ins to different locations in the chain or by selecting a plug-in and
clicking the Shift Plug-In Left ( ) and Shift Plug-In Right ( ) buttons.
5. Once you have added all of the plug-ins and specified the plug-in chain order, click on the OK button to close the Plug-In Chooser
and return to the Audio Plug-In window.
6. Adjust the settings for the effects. For more information about using specific plug-ins, click the Plug-In Help button ( )..
Tips:
•
•
You can save an effect’s parameters as a preset to be used in other projects. To save a preset, enter a name in the Preset box and click the
Save Preset ( ) button.
You can also use the Insert FX control region in the Mixing Console window to add, remove, or configure track effects. For more
7. Click the Close button ( ) to close the Audio Plug-In window.
You can use a track effect chain as a default for all new tracks you create. For more information, see Setting default track properties on page
Automating plug-in parameters
You can automate the parameters of certain plug-ins by adding envelopes to the track. For more information, see Adding or removing
Arranging plug-in chain order
The plug-ins are cumulative during playback. For example, when the track’s signal passes through the EQ, it carries the EQ’s settings as
it passes through the compression plug-in, then the signal carries both those plug-in settings to the next plug-in.
Because of this cumulative effect, you may need to arrange plug-ins in a certain order so that one plug-in’s processing does not
adversely affect the next plug-in on the chain. There is no right or wrong way to order plug-ins, although some plug-ins work better
when they follow another. However, the plug-in order in the chain is strictly based on your preferences and desired output.
1. Click the Track FX button ( ). The Audio Plug-In window appears.
2. There are three ways to arrange plug-ins in your chain:
•
•
•
Drag the plug-in to a new location in the chain.
Right-click the plug-in and choose Move Left or Move Right from the shortcut menu.
Click the plug-in and then click the Shift Plug-In Left (
) and Shift Plug-In Right ( ) buttons.
3. Click the Close button ( ) to close the Audio Plug-In window.
Bypassing plug-ins in a chain
You can bypass a plug-in without removing it from the chain by clearing the check box for the plug-in. Alternately, right-click the plug-
in and choose Bypass from the shortcut menu.
Tip: To bypass (or re-enable) all plug-ins in a chain, right-click the Track FX button ( ) and choose Bypass All or Enable All.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bypassing effect automation
For plug-in chains that include effect automation using envelopes, you can bypass automation by clicking the Bypass FX Automation
button ( ) on the Audio Plug-In window. This does not remove any effect automation envelopes from the track, but rather
temporarily bypasses processing of the effect automation. You can toggle this button on and off to hear the difference between the
plug-in chain as a standard (non-automated) effect versus an automated effect.
Removing plug-ins from chains
1. Click the Track FX button ( ). The Audio Plug-In window appears.
2. Right-click the plug-in and choose Remove from the shortcut menu, or click the Remove Selected Plug-In button ( ).
3. Click the Close button ( ) to close the Audio Plug-In window.
Tip: To remove all plug-ins in a chain, right-click the Track FX button ( ) and choose Delete All.
Removing or bypassing all effects on tracks
You can clear a track of all effects by right-clicking the Track FX button ( ) and choosing Delete All from the shortcut menu.
You can bypass all of a track’s effects without removing them by right-clicking the Track FX button ( ) and choosing Bypass All from
the shortcut menu. To apply them again, right-click the Track FX button ( ) and choose Enable All from the shortcut menu.
Routing tracks to an assignable effects chain
Routing tracks to an assignable effects chain allows you to assign multiple tracks to a plug-in chain.
In order to route tracks to an assignable effects chain, you must first add an assignable effects chain to your project. For more
1. Click the label on the multipurpose slider label and choose the desired assignable effects chain from the submenu. The label
changes to reflect the name of the assignable effects.
Tip: If you can’t see the multipurpose slider, drag the bottom edge of the track header to increase its height.
2. Drag the fader to adjust the level of the track sent to the assignable effects chain.
If you set the Dry Out faders in your effects chain to -inf, you can adjust the wet/dry balance using the Volume and FX settings on
the multipurpose slider: Volume will adjust the dry signal and FX will control the effect signals.
110 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can also use the Sends control region in the Mixing Console window to configure bus sends. For more information, see Using audio
Tips:
•
•
FX sends are post-volume by default. To change to pre-volume, right-click the fader handle and choose Pre Volume from the shortcut
menu.
If you want to apply track panning (including pan position and panning mode) to FX sends, right-click the FX fader and choose Link to
Main Track Pan from the shortcut menu.
•
•
When Link to Main Track Pan is not selected, the track sends a center-panned stereo signal using the track's current panning mode.
Select the Use legacy track send gain check box on the Audio page of the Preferences dialog if you want to configure audio track sends
to behave as they did in ACID 6.0 and earlier. When the check box is selected, you can open projects created with earlier versions of ACID
and be assured they will sound the same as they did in earlier versions of ACID. For more information, see Using the Audio tab on page
Assigning tracks to busses
Assigning tracks to busses allows you to apply settings to a series of tracks or route tracks to a hardware output.
For example, if you wanted to apply the same three effects to several tracks, you could apply the effects to a bus and assign the tracks to
that bus. If you wanted to send several tracks to a single hardware output, you could assign the tracks to a bus and then route the bus to
a hardware output.
Assigning a track to a bus
The bus button in a track header chooses the track’s primary output. Assigning tracks to busses is especially useful for creating submixes
that allow you to adjust the levels of multiple tracks at once or apply an effect to multiple tracks.
1. Click the bus button on the track.
The button is displayed as a
when the track is routed to the master bus, and the bus letter is displayed (
,
, and so on) when
a track is routed to another bus.
2. Select the desired bus from the submenu. The Bus button changes to display the selected bus.
Notes:
•
•
•
If the Bus button does not appear on the track, then you have not specified more than one bus in your project settings. For more
If you want to send a track to multiple outputs — for creating cue mixes or effects sends — you can use the multipurpose fader to control
the level of the track sent to each bus or assignable effects chain.
Bus sends are pre-volume by default. In Post Volume mode, the following settings are applied to the track before it is sent to the bus: track
volume, track volume envelopes, track panning, and track panning envelopes. To change to post-volume, right click the fader handle and
choose Post Volume from the shortcut menu.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting a bus send level
1. Click the label on the multipurpose slider and choose the desired bus from the menu. The label changes to reflect the name of the
bus.
Tip: If you can’t see the multipurpose slider, drag the bottom edge of the track header to increase its height.
2. Drag the fader to adjust the level of the track sent to the bus.
You can also use the Sends control region in the Mixing console window to configure bus sends. For more information, see Using audio
Tips:
•
•
Bus sends are pre-volume (and pre-mute) by default. When bus sends are pre-volume, you can create a cue mix that is independent of
your main mix. To change to post-volume, right-click the bus fader and choose Post Volume from the shortcut menu.
If you want to apply track panning to bus sends (including pan position and panning mode), right click the bus fader and choose Link to
Main Track Pan from the shortcut menu.
•
•
When Link to Main Track Pan is not selected, the track sends a center-panned stereo signal using the track's current panning mode.
Select the Use legacy track send gain check box on the Audio page of the Preferences dialog if you want to configure audio track sends
to behave as they did in ACID 6.0 and earlier. When the check box is selected, you can open projects created with earlier versions of ACID
and be assured they will sound the same as they did in earlier versions of ACID. For more information, see Using the Audio tab on page
Using track automation envelopes
Track envelopes allow you to control volume, panning, assignable effect send levels, bus send levels, and effect parameters (for effects
that support automation) for a specific track. You can distinguish the various envelopes by their color.
112 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choosing stereo pan types
When you pan a track using the pan slider or a pan envelope, you can choose among several pan types to determine how the track is
panned.
Note: When applying stereo pan types, a monaural track is interpreted as a stereo track with the same data in both channels.
1. Click the pan slider label and choose a pan type from the submenu:
•
The Add Channels pan type is most useful for panning stereo source material. This pan type makes the stereo image appear
to move as a unit between the speakers. As the fader is moved from the center to a side, more and more of the signal from the
opposite side is folded into the side you are panning towards, until at the extreme, both channels are fed at full intensity into
a single channel. This pan type uses a linear panning curve.
•
The Balance pan type is most useful for adjusting the relative signal levels of the right and left channels in stereo source
material. In this pan type, moving from the center to a side, the opposite side starts at a base dB level (either 0 dB, -3 dB, or -
6 dB) and decays to no signal level. The signal in the side you are panning towards starts at the base dB level (either 0 dB, -3 dB,
or -6 dB) and increases to 0 dB. When the stereo source is panned fully to one side, that side plays at 0 dB while the other side
provides no signal at all. This pan type uses a linear panning curve.
•
•
The Constant Power pan type is most useful for panning mono source material. As you move the fader from side to side, this
pan type creates the illusion of the source moving around the listener from one side to the other, in a semi-circle. This pan
type uses the constant-power panning curve.
The Film pan type allows you to pan between pairs of adjacent speakers using a constant power model. This mode is
optimized for theater-style speaker placement. In stereo projects, Film mode functions identically to Constant Power. As you
drag the pan point to the center speaker, the sound becomes diffused through the front and rear speakers. When the track is
panned fully to the center speaker, there is no output from the front and rear speakers. Dragging the pan point to the center of
the surround panner sends the signal to all speakers.
You can choose a pan type as a default for all new tracks you create. For more information, see Setting default track properties on page 252.
Using the Beatmapper
When a long file is added to a project, the Beatmapper Wizard starts to allow you to add tempo information to the file.
Notes:
•
•
The Beatmapper Wizard is started by default for files longer than 30 seconds. Use the Open files as loops if between (seconds) setting
on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to determine the file length.
Support for multitempo clips is available for clips that are recorded or rendered in ACID or by adding Beatmap markers on the Clip
Properties dialog.
1. Perform either of the following actions to start the Beatmapper Wizard:
•
Add a long file to your project. If tempo information is not detected in the file, the Beatmapper Wizard starts.
Select the Yes radio button and click Next to detect measures and downbeats. The file will be able to stretch/compress with
the project's tempo.
Select the No radio button and click Finish if you want to add the file as a one-shot. The file will maintain its original length
regardless of the project tempo.
—or—
•
Open the Clip Properties window for a Beatmapped track, switch to the Stretch tab, and click the Beatmapper Wizard button.
2. The Beatmapper Wizard will draw the file's waveform and place a marker to locate the first beat of the first measure.
Click the Play button ( ) to verify the marker’s position. If the marker is positioned on a downbeat, click Next. Otherwise, drag the
marker to the appropriate location and click Next.
Tip: Click the Reset button to set the downbeat marker to its original position.
3. The Beatmapper Wizard will draw the file's waveform and place a region to indicate the length of the first measure.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Click the Play button ( ) to verify the measure’s length. If the region is positioned correctly, click Next. Otherwise, drag the ends
of the loop region to the appropriate locations and click Next.
•
•
Select the Metronome check box if you want to play a click track at the detected tempo.
Click the Halve Selection ( ) or Double Selection ( ) buttons or drag the ends of the loop region to adjust the measure
length.
4. The waveform is displayed with markers at the end of the measure. Drag the Measure slider to scroll through the song, and click
the Play button ( ) to verify that the detected measure length is accurate throughout the song.
The Beatmapper Wizard uses a single measure length for the entire song. You can drag the end of the measure selection to change
the measure's length. However, changing the length will affect the entire song; if adjusting the last measure of the song causes the
first measure to be incorrect, the downbeat may not be positioned correctly or the song's tempo may not be consistent enough for
the Beatmapper Wizard.
5. Click Next when the measure lengths are correct. Tempo information is added to your file.
6. Select the desired check boxes:
•
•
•
Select the Change project tempo to match Beatmapped track check box if you want to set your project tempo to match the
tempo calculated by the Beatmapper Wizard. Selecting the check box ensures that your Beatmapped track plays at its original
tempo.
Select the Preserve pitch of the Beatmapped track when tempo changes check box if you want your track to maintain its
pitch when your project tempo changes. Clear the check box to create DJ-style remixes: the track's pitch will raise and lower
with tempo changes as it would when a turntable's speed is manipulated.
Select the Save Beatmapper information with file check box if you want to save tempo information in the file. When the
check box is selected, you can add the file to other ACID projects without starting the Beatmapper Wizard every time.
Note: If the information cannot be saved to your media file, an .sfl file will be created (using the same base name as your media file) to
store tempo information. If you move your media file, you should also move its associated .sfl file.
7. .Click Finish to close the Beatmapper Wizard.
Notes:
•
•
To paint the entire track, select the Paint tool ( ) and Ctrl+click in the track.
If a track has an intro before its downbeat, the intro will not be included when you draw or paint events. Drag the left edge of the event to
expose the intro.
Understanding stretching properties
All loops on the ACID installation disc (as well as all loop collection CD-ROMs) contain stretching properties. This means that tempo and
key information is stored in the loops, allowing the application to accurately perform its time stretching/compressing and pitch-shifting
functions on these loops when placed in a project.
Keep in mind that you do not need to designate stretching properties for loops that you create for ACID projects. The application
typically makes an accurate estimate regarding the loop file’s tempo. In addition, you can temporarily assign a root note to the file to
allow it to be transposed to the project’s key. However, when creating custom loops for use in multiple projects, you should define
stretching properties.
You can set the stretching properties for loops and Beatmapped clips. For more information, see Adjusting stretching properties for loops
114 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring track properties
From the View menu, choose Track Properties to display the Track Properties window. The contents of the Track Properties window
reflect the currently selected audio or MIDI track.
Double-click a
clip to modify clip
properties
If you want to edit media properties and stretching information, use the Clip Properties window.
Audio track properties
For audio tracks, the Track Properties window displays the Clip Pool. The Clip Pool is used to organize each track's media.
MIDI track properties
You can use the Output Settings tab to adjust MIDI controllers, voices, and drum maps. You can use the Input Filters tab to set up MIDI
message, velocity, or quantize filters. You can use the Clip Pool tab to organize each track's media and enable looped or one-shot
drawing for MIDI events. By right-clicking a clip in the Clip Pool, you may access the Clip Properties window to use the Piano Roll Editor
and List Editor tabs. The Piano Roll Editor and List Editor tabs allow you to view and edit all MIDI data.
Configuring clip properties
1. Double-click a track icon (such as ) to display the Track Properties window and the clips used on the track.
Note: This section addresses clip properties for non-MIDI clips. For information on MIDI clip properties, see Processing and filtering MIDI
2. Double-click a clip to open the Clip Properties window.
Tip: You can also display the Clip Properties window using either of the following methods:
•
•
From the View menu, choose Clip Properties.
Right-click a clip in the timeline and choose Clip Properties from the shortcut menu.
The contents of the Clip Properties window will change to display properties for the currently selected clip in the timeline.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
•
•
•
If you adjust a clip's properties and do not click the Save button ( ), the new properties are saved in your ACID project only (the media
file is not modified).
If you adjust a clip's properties and click the Save button ( ), the modified properties are embedded in the media file if possible (you will
be prompted to save to a different file if necessary).
When you load a project, the clip properties saved in the ACID project are displayed first. If clip properties have been edited since the
project was saved or if the clip was modified in an external editor, you can click the Reload button
to load the properties saved
in the file.
Managing a track’s clips
Each track in your ACID project can contain multiple, distinct media files, called clips. Use the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties
window to add, remove, and preview clips. For more information, see Using clips with tracks on page 101.
Adjusting general clip properties
The General tab displays information about the file associated with a track and allows you to change the ACID type, apply pitch shifting
to all events on the track that use the same clip, and adjust time-stretching for Beatmapped clips.
116 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing clip type
Choose a setting from the ACID type drop-down list to change the way the clip is handled.
Track Type
Loop
Description
When Loop is selected, the clip is transposed to the project key and stretches to fit
the project tempo. Loops can be drawn across the track and will repeat end-to-end.
When One-Shot is selected, the clip is streamed from the hard disk rather than being
stored in RAM. One-shot files do not change tempo with the rest of the loops and are
not transposed to the project key.
One-Shot
The Stretch tab is not available when One-Shot is selected.
Beatmapped
When a file that is longer than 30 seconds is added to a project, the Beatmapper
Wizard starts to allow you to add tempo information to the file.
You cannot choose Beatmapped for very short media files. A file must be at least one
measure long at 300 BPM to be Beatmapped.
Use the Open files as loops if between (seconds) setting on the Audio tab of the
Preferences dialog to determine the file length.
Adjusting pitch shift
Enter a value in the Pitch shift box (or use the spinner control) to adjust the pitch of all events that use the same clip.
Note: Track pitch shifting is not saved to the media file when you click the Save button ( ).
Adjusting time stretching (Beatmapped tracks only)
ACID provides two time-stretching methods for Beatmapped tracks: Classic and élastique. Classic is the standard time-stretch method
used by ACID.
1. Select the Preserve pitch when stretching check box if you want your track to maintain its pitch when your project tempo
changes. When the check box is cleared, the clip’s pitch will raise and lower with tempo changes. When the check box is cleared,
you cannot change the pitch of a Beatmapped event.
2. Choose a setting from the Method drop-down list to determine the time-stretch method to use.
•
•
Classic is the standard time-stretch method used by ACID.
The élastique method uses technology from zplane.development and provides enhanced real-time time stretching and pitch-
shifting capabilities. The élastique method also allows you to preserve and shift a clip’s formants, which are the characteristic
resonant frequencies of a sound.
Note: If you experience gapping during playback while using the élastique stretching methods, you may need to switch to the Classic
time-stretch method.
3. Choose a setting from the Mode drop-down list to choose the stretching method best suited to your media.
Tip: The élastique Pro mode provides the highest quality stretching but requires more RAM usage and CPU power. The élastique
Efficient mode uses fewer resources while still producing great time-stretching quality for polyphonic audio. The Soloist (Monophonic)
and Soloist (Speech) provide good quality for monophonic audio with little effect on system resources.
4. Select the Preserve formants when stretching check box if you want your track to maintain its characteristic resonance when your
project tempo changes. Formant preservation is most often used to avoid vocal performances that sound as if they’ve been sped
up (sometimes referred to as the “chipmunk effect”).
This option is only available for élastique Pro and Soloist (Monophonic) modes.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Enter a value in the Formant Shift (semitones) box (or use the spinner control) to adjust the formants of all events that use the
same clip. Formant shifting can be used to deepen the tone of a vocal performance without changing the pitch.
For élastique Pro, this amount represents the number of semitones to shift the timbre in addition to the offset required to
compensate for any pitch shifting. For example, a setting of 0.000 applies formant correction with no additional shifting, while a
setting of -7.000 will apply formant correction and deepen a sound by 7 semitones.
This option is only available when the Preserve formants when stretching check box is selected.
Adjusting stretching properties for loops
The Stretch tab in the Clip Properties window allows you to specify how pitch shifting and time stretching is handled for loop tracks.
Beat anchor
Beat marker
Combination beat/
stretch marker
Stretch marker
Tip: Click the Redetect Beats button to apply the ACID beat-detection algorithm to existing media.
You'll notice that the Stretch tab looks similar to the Groove Editor window. Both windows contain beat anchors and markers;
however, the markers on these windows perform complementary functions:
•
On the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window, the beat markers indicate beats in the media, and the beat anchors indicate
the adjustment that is required to quantize the media to straight time before applying a new groove.
•
In the Groove Editor window, a beat anchor represents the beat that will be adjusted, and a groove marker represents the
point in time when that beat will be played when the groove is applied. A groove marker can occur before or after the beat
anchor. A line connects a groove marker to its associated beat anchor.
If you want to hear the results of editing beat anchors and markers, select the Play Quantized button ( ) at the bottom of the Clip
Properties window and use the Clip Properties transport controls to preview the loop. Playing the clip in Play Quantized mode
demonstrates how the track sounds when the Quantize to Straight groove is applied. Click the Play button ( ) to hear the original
loop.
118 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have edited a clip’s properties, click the Save button ( ) to embed ACID information in the file.
Notes:
•
•
To save to a different file, click the Save File As button ( ).
If you save stretching properties to a new file, the changes will also be applied to the current clip and saved with the ACID project; the
changes are not saved to the original file.
•
If you edit a file in another audio-editing program, it is possible that the ACID data will be removed. Simply edit the settings on the Stretch
tab to optimize the file again.
The following table describes the settings on the Stretch tab for loop files.
Item
Description
Root note
Choose a note from the drop-down list to set the base note for loops that you want to
conform to the project key.
If you do not want a clip transposed to the project key (a clip that contains a drum sample,
for example) choose Don’t transpose.
Number of beats
Choose a setting from the drop-down list to specify the length of the original file. Selecting a
value that does not match the actual file causes the loop to play at a different speed. For
example, specifying a length of 8 beats for a 4-beat loop causes the loop to play at half-
speed at any given tempo.
You can misinform the software regarding the beat length of a loop for creative ends. For
Stretching method
Stretching properties determine how time compression and expansion is performed on
audio events. If you hear audio anomalies due to time compression, try editing the
stretching properties of the track.
Looping segments is the default stretching method, and it works well with most types of
material. The clip media is divided into sections that are crossfaded, and some sections may
be looped if necessary to achieve the necessary length.
Combination beat/stretch markers and stretch-only markers represent the divisions in
the clip media.
Choose Nonlooping segments for sustaining material such as synthesizer pads and held
notes. The clip media is divided into sections that are crossfaded, but no sections are
looped.
Combination beat/stretch markers and stretch-only markers represent the divisions in
the clip media.
Choose Pitch shift segments to shift the pitch of the clip to adjust for increases or decreases
in tempo. Using this option, you can eliminate some of the problems that occur with
extreme tempo changes just create new sounds from existing loops. For example, if you
have slowed the project tempo down and hear echo artifacts, choosing Pitch shift
segments can eliminate these artifacts.
Combination beat/stretch markers and stretch-only markers represent the divisions in
the clip media.
Choose Sliced segments for material such as drum loops where silence exists between
notes. Instead of crossfading the segments, silence is added between beats to reduce
warbling or other artifacts.
When you set the stretching method to Sliced segments, beat markers represent
divisions in the clip media where silence will be inserted to accomplish stretching. Stretch-
only markers are not used in this mode and are displayed in gray
.
Transient sensitivity
Type a value in the box or use the spinner control to adjust the sensitivity for beat detection.
Higher settings increase sensitivity and lower settings decrease sensitivity.
When you set the control to 100, beat markers ( ), stretch markers ( or ), and beat
anchors ( ) are created for every transient.
As you decrease the setting, markers are created for only strong transients.
Increasing this setting can be advantageous when working with audio that has complex
rhythms. Lower settings are more suitable for synthesizer pads and other basic material.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
Timing tightness
Choose a setting from the drop-down list to specify the resolution for beat anchors ( ). For
example, if you wanted to quantize beat anchors to sixteenth notes, choose Sixteenth
Notes from the drop-down list.
Quantized beat anchors are displayed as . If the you choose a resolution from the Timing
tightness drop-down list that is too coarse, you'll notice that not all beat markers will be
quantized.
Stretch spacing
Redetect Beats
Choose a setting from the drop-down list to specify how many stretch markers ( or ) will
be displayed along the bottom of the waveform display.
Audio that contains rapid notes such as drum rolls will benefit from setting the divisions at a
smaller fraction of a beat. Slower-paced material, however, may actually suffer from high
resolution.
Click to automatically detect the beats in the current file. Use this button to apply the ACID
beat-detection algorithm to existing media.
Adjusting stretch markers for loop clips
Stretch markers correspond to subdivisions of beats in the audio file. These markers tell ACID where to divide the audio when
performing time stretching to match tempo. Accurately detecting these beats is the key to making the time-compression process
sound good..
Marker Description
Indicates a stretch-only marker that was detected by the software or added manually.
Indicates a combination beat/stretch marker. Each beat marker on the beat ruler corresponds to a combination beat/stretch marker on the timeline.
If you want to convert a combination beat/stretch marker to a stretch-only marker, double-click the marker (or right-click the marker and choose
Convert to Stretch Marker from the shortcut menu).
Indicates an inactive stretch marker.
When Sliced segments is selected from the Stretching method drop-down list, beat markers represent the points where silence
will be inserted to accomplish stretching. Stretch-only markers are not used in this mode and are displayed in gray.
Tip: Use the Zoom In Time (Up) ( ) and Zoom Out Time (Down) ( ) buttons to change the magnification of the waveform.
As a general rule, markers that are excessively close to each other may cause clicks in the audio. However, markers should not be more
than one second apart, or pitch and echo artifacts may result.
You can add, move, and delete stretch markers on the Stretch tab. If snapping is enabled, markers will snap to the current grid spacing.
Moving stretch markers
You can drag any marker to a new location. If you move a combination stretch/beat marker ( ), its associated beat marker ( ) will also be
moved.
Adding stretch markers
Double-click the marker bar at the bottom of the waveform display to create a new marker. It is advantageous to add new markers if the
software does not detect any quick subdivisions in beats.
The biggest cause of audio artifacts due to time compression is a lack of beat detection. Make sure that you add markers anywhere the
application fails to put one on a pronounced beat.
Deleting markers
You can remove a user-defined marker by right-clicking and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu (or by double-clicking a disabled
marker).
Double-click a combination stretch/beat marker to remove the beat marker , or double-click a stretch marker to delete it.
Resetting stretch markers
Click the Reload button (
) to reset the markers to their last-saved positions.
120 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beat anchors and markers for loop clips
Beat anchors ( ) correspond to musical beats on the ruler at the top of the waveform display. Beat markers ( ) correspond to points in
time on the ruler at the bottom of the waveform display. Each beat marker corresponds to a combination beat/stretch marker ( ) on the
timeline. If you want to convert a combination beat/stretch marker to a stretch-only marker, double-click the marker (or right-click the
marker and choose Convert to Stretch Marker from the shortcut menu).
Beat anchors and markers are used only when a groove is applied to a track.
Offsets between beat anchors and beat markers indicate that the beat represented by an anchor is actually played at the marker
position, which may occur before or after the beat. This mapping represents the difference required to remove an existing groove from
a media file and return the media to straight machine time so that grooves can be applied accurately.
If you want to hear the results of editing beat anchors and markers, select the Play Quantized button ( ) at the bottom of the Clip
Properties window and use the Clip Properties transport controls to preview the loop. Playing the clip in Play Quantized mode
demonstrates how the clip sounds when the Quantize to Straight groove is applied.
In most cases, you won’t need to edit beat anchors.
Tip: Use the Zoom In Time ( ) and Zoom Out Time ( ) buttons to change the magnification of the waveform.
Important: Grooves are not applied using the markers on the Stretch tab. Autodetected stretch markers are used to establish a
baseline for applying other grooves with the Groove Pool window and Groove tool. User-defined markers have no effect on groove
quantization.
You can add, move, and delete beat anchors and markers on the Stretch tab.
Moving anchors
You can drag beat anchors and stretch markers to map the sample data in the waveform to a specific beat:
•
•
Moving a beat marker ( ) changes the audio that will be played at a beat anchor location.
Moving a beat anchor ( ) changes the beat on which the audio represented by a stretch marker will be played. Beat anchors snap
to the current grid spacing. Hold Shift while dragging to bypass snapping (press Shift after you click).
Adding anchors
Double-click the marker bar (above or above the beat ruler) to create a new anchor and marker.
Deleting anchors
You can remove a marker by right-clicking and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu (or by double-clicking it).
Resetting beat anchors
Right-click the beat marker bar and choose Reset All from the shortcut menu to reset the markers to their last-saved positions.
Adjusting stretching properties for Beatmapped clips
Use the Stretch tab in the Clip Properties window to quickly edit Beatmapper information for a clip without starting the Beatmapper
Wizard. After you've edited a clip’s properties, click the Save button ( ) to embed ACID information in the file.
Notes:
•
•
To save to a different file, click the Save File As button ( ).
If you save stretching properties to a new file, the changes will also be applied to the current clip and saved with the ACID project; the
changes are not saved to the original file.
•
•
•
If you edit a file in another audio-editing program, it is possible that the ACID data will be removed. Simply edit the settings on the Stretch
tab to optimize the file again.
Support for multitempo clips is available for clips that are recorded or rendered in ACID or by adding Beatmap markers on the Clip
Properties dialog.
The ruler on the General tab is fixed, and the ruler on the Stretch tab is stretched to represent measures of varying lengths.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following table describes the settings on the Stretch tab for Beatmapped clips.
Item
Description
Initial root note
Choose a note from the drop-down list to set the first root note for tracks that you want to
conform to the project key.
If you do not want a track transposed to the project key, choose Don’t transpose.
Initial tempo
Displays the starting tempo of the clip as determined by the Beatmapper Wizard. Enter a
value in the box or use the spin control to adjust the tempo.
Initial time signature Choose settings from the Beats per measure and Beat value controls to set the starting
time signature of your clip. Time signature changes in the clip will be marked by Beatmap
markers.
Ignore root note
changes
Select this check box if you do not want to transpose the Beatmapped clip when stretching.
When the check box is cleared, pitch-shifting will be applied so the clip will conform to your
project key
Beatmapper Wizard
The waveform display shows tempo changes and measures using markers:
Marker Description
Represents the first downbeat.
Indicates a tempo change. These markers can be added manually or are added by ACID when recording or
rendering
Represent measures.
You can adjust tempo by dragging measure or Beatmap markers:
•
•
•
Dragging a measure marker that occurs before the first Beatmap marker sets the clip's initial tempo.
Measure markers between Beatmap markers cannot be moved.
Dragging a Beatmap marker adjusts the tempo of the Beatmap marker you drag and the previous marker. The length of the
measures between the Beatmap markers is adjusted as you drag.
•
Dragging a measure marker that occurs after the last Beatmap marker sets the clip's final tempo.
You can add Beatmap markers to signal a tempo change: just double-click a measure marker or a blank area of the Beatmap marker bar
to add a marker.
To remove a Beatmap marker, double-click an existing marker.
To edit a Beatmap marker, right-click it and choose a new setting from the Root Note or Time Signature submenu.
Reloading files
Clicking the Reload button (
) located on the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window restores all settings from the media file.
Any setting changes made on the Stretch tab are discarded.
Clicking this button also updates the Clip Properties window when changes are made to the properties from an external editor.
Replacing files
Clicking the Replace File button (
) located on the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window displays the Replace File dialog
and allows you to replace the audio file on the current clip with a new audio file. This feature only replaces the actual audio. All track
timing, effects, and envelopes remain.
Tip: You can also replace a file by dragging an audio file from the Explorer and dropping it on the track name of an existing track.
122 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a clip to the Groove Pool
Click the Add to Groove Pool button ( ) located on the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window to make the selected clip available in
the Groove Pool so you can apply its timing to other tracks.
Groove cloning can extract grooves from loop tracks only.
Saving file properties
When you make changes in the Clip Properties window, the changes you have made are saved in the project file, but does not alter the
original media file. To save clip property changes in the media file, click the Save File button ( ).
You can also click the Save File As button ( ) to save the changes to a new file. The media is saved with the modified track properties to
a new file, and renames the track in the track list to reflect the change.
All the information in the Clip Properties window is saved to your file except for any pitch-shifting you have applied. Any regions or
markers you have created in the Chopper™ are also saved. For more information, see Inserting markers and regions in the Chopper on page
Adjusting clip properties for MIDI tracks
From the View menu, choose Clip Properties to display the Clip Properties window. The contents of the Clip Properties window will
change to display properties for the currently selected clip in the timeline.
You can use the Clip Properties window to edit MIDI data using the OPT list editor or piano roll.
Working with grooves
From the View menu, choose Groove Pool to toggle the display of the Groove Pool window. The top portion of the Groove Pool
window displays the available groove maps in your project. The bottom portion shows the selected groove map so you can edit it.
Available groove
maps
Selected groove
map
Note: The grooves listed in the Groove Pool are specific to your project. If you’ve deleted grooves and saved your project, those grooves
will be unavailable unless you import the grooves again. For more information, see Importing a groove on page 126.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A groove refers to the rhythmic pattern of a piece of music. Groove maps in ACID expand on the software’s ability to match the rhythm
and timing of files nondestructively and in real time:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Breathe new life into your collection of loops and MIDI files by creatively applying grooves to change the rhythmic feel.
Adjust the timing of a track to add or remove a human feel.
Quantize and map multiple tracks or loops to a common groove.
Extract the groove from an existing audio file.
Create new grooves from scratch.
Different grooves can be applied to an entire track or portions of a track so you can easily match loops with incompatible feels and
tighten/loosen grooves nondestructively.
Note: Grooves cannot be applied to tracks that contain Beatmapped clips.
Applying or removing grooves
From the View menu, choose Groove Pool to toggle the display of the Groove Pool window.
With the Groove Pool and Groove tool (
portions of tracks.
) on the main ACID toolbar, you can use groove maps to adjust the timing of entire tracks or
Tips:
•
•
If you want to get really creative, try setting a clip’s stretching method to Pitch shift segments (on the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties
window). When a groove adjusts a beat so it plays early, the pitch will be raised. When a beat is played late, its pitch will be lowered.
If a groove map does not seem to work correctly on a loop, the beats in the file may not be properly detected. Click the Redetect Beats
button on the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window to apply the ACID beat-detection algorithm to the loop.
Note: Groove maps are applied nondestructively. If you want to change a media files's inherent groove, use the Render to new
track command to render a new, grooved media file.
Important: Grooves cannot be applied to Beatmapped clips.
Applying a groove to an entire track
1. From the View menu, choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window if it isn’t already visible.
2. Drag a groove from the Groove Pool window to a track. You can drop the groove in the track list or on the timeline.
A groove event is displayed at the bottom of the track to indicate that a groove has been applied to the track.
To toggle the height of the groove strips, choose Show Full-Size Groove Strips from the View menu.
Tips:
•
•
•
•
Drag a groove from the Groove Pool to an existing groove event to change the event's groove.
Right-click and drag with the Groove tool ( ) to erase a groove event.
Hold Ctrl and right-click a groove event with the Groove tool to erase the entire event.
Hold Ctrl and click a groove event with the Groove Erase tool (
) to erase the entire event.
124 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting a default groove for new tracks
If you have a groove that you’d like to use to set the overall feel of a project, you can set it as a default for your project.
1. From the View menu, choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window if it isn’t already visible.
2. Choose a setting from the Default groove for new tracks drop-down list.
When you add a new loop, one-shot, or MIDI track to your project, the selected groove will be applied to the entire track. Existing
tracks are not affected.
Applying multiple groove events to a track
Groove events allow you to apply grooves to portions of tracks or apply different grooves to various portions of a track. The groove is
applied where the groove event overlaps the media event.
The edges of groove events are boundaries for grooves, and audio cannot be grooved beyond the event edges.
1. Select the Groove tool (
) on the main ACID toolbar.
2. Click the down arrow
next to the Groove toolbar button and choose a groove from the menu (or double-click a groove in the
Groove Pool).
3. Click and drag over a track to paint groove events in the same way you create other events on the timeline.
Groove events are displayed at the bottom of the track to indicate where a groove will be applied.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to paint groove events as needed.
To toggle the height of the groove strips, choose Show Full-Size Groove Strips from the View menu
Tips:
•
•
Drag a groove from the Groove Pool to an existing groove event to change the event's groove.
Drag a groove from the Groove Pool to a space between two groove events to create a new groove event to fill the space between the
events.
•
•
•
•
•
Hold Ctrl while clicking the space between two groove events to create a new groove event to fill the space between the events.
Right-click and drag with the Groove tool to erase a groove event.
Hold Ctrl and right-click a groove event with the Groove tool to erase the entire event.
Hold Ctrl and click a groove event with the Groove Erase tool (
) to erase the entire event.
Zoom in to see groove markers in the groove events. The markers represent the amount and direction of offset applied to beats.
Erasing groove events
1. Select the Groove Erase tool (
) on the main ACID toolbar.
2. Click and drag the Groove Erase tool to erase a groove, or hold Ctrl while clicking a groove event to erase the entire event.
Tips:
•
•
•
•
•
Right-click and drag with the Groove tool (
Hold Ctrl and right-click a groove event with the Groove tool to erase the entire event.
Hold Ctrl and click a groove event with the Groove Erase tool ( ) to erase the entire event.
Zoom in to see groove markers in the groove events. The markers provide a visual cue to the mapped groove.
You can also right-click a track header and choose Remove Groove from Track from the shortcut menu to remove all groove events
from a track.
) to erase a groove event.
Removing unused grooves from your project
1. From the View menu, choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window if it isn’t already visible.
2. Click the Remove All Unused Grooves from Project button (
) to remove any grooves that have not been used in your project.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing a groove from your project
1. Select a groove in the Groove Pool window.
2. Click the Remove Selected Grooves from Project button (
). The selected groove is removed from your project.
If the groove is in use, a confirmation will be displayed if the Confirm groove deletion when still in use check box is selected on
the General tab of the Preferences dialog.
Creating grooves
You can add grooves to your project by using an existing track, duplicating existing grooves, importing grooves, or by creating an
entirely new groove from scratch.
Using Groove Cloning to create a new groove using a track in your project
ACID can analyze a clip’s audio to extract its groove so you can apply its feel to other clips.
Note: Groove cloning can extract grooves from loop clips only.
1. Right-click a track header in the track list and choose Paint Clip from the shortcut menu.
2. Choose Add to Groove Pool from the submenu.
A new groove will be added to the Groove Pool window using the name of the clip you selected in step 1.
Note: Grooves that you create from existing clips will be available only in the project where they were created. If you want to make a
groove available to other projects, export it to a .groove file.
Tip: You can also click the Add to Groove Pool button (
) in the Clip Properties window to add a loop groove to the Groove Pool.
Duplicating a groove
Existing grooves can serve as templates for creating your own grooves.
1. Select the grooves you want to duplicate. Hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple grooves.
2. Click the Duplicate Selected Grooves button (
). The duplicated grooves are added to the Groove Pool.
3. To change the name of a duplicated groove, right-click a groove and choose Rename from the shortcut menu.
4. You can then edit the duplicated grooves as needed.
Importing a groove
You can use the Import Grooves button to add grooves from .groove files or other media files to the Groove Pool of your project.
1. Click the Import Grooves button ( ) in the Groove Pool window. The Import Groove dialog is displayed.
2. Select the .groove or media file you want to add. Information about the file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Click the Open button to add the new groove to the Groove Pool.
Tip: You can extract a groove quickly by dragging a file from the Explorer window or Media Manager window to the Groove Pool.
126 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exporting a groove
Grooves are stored with your ACID project. Exporting a groove allows you to save a groove in a file that you can use in other projects or
share with other ACID users.
1. Select a groove in the Groove Pool window.
2. Click the Export Selected Grooves button ( ). The Export Groove to File dialog is displayed.
3. Choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop-down list, or use the browse window to locate the folder where you want to save
your groove.
Note: By default, grooves will be saved in the folder specified in the Default groove folder box on the Folders tab of the Preferences
dialog. Grooves in this folder will be available in the Groove Pool window when you create a new ACID project.
4. Type a name in the File name box, or select a file in the browse window to replace an existing groove.
5. Click the Save button to save your groove.
Creating a new groove
1. Click the New Groove button ( ). A new groove is added to the Groove Pool window.
2. Type a name for your groove in the edit box, and then press Enter.
Use the Groove Editor at the bottom of the Groove Pool window to adjust the length and feel of your groove. For more information
about editing grooves, please see below.
Editing grooves
You can use the bottom portion of the Groove Pool window to edit grooves.
Your edits are saved with your project. If you want to use the edited groove in other projects, you’ll need to export it as a .groove file and
import the edited groove in each project where you want to use it.
1. From the View menu, choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window.
2. Select a groove in the top portion of the window.
Tip: If you want to audition your edits in real-time, apply the groove to an event and start looped playback before you start editing the
groove.
The bottom half of the Groove Pool window displays your groove as a timeline with beat anchors and groove markers to represent
how beats will be adjusted.
You’ll notice that this view is similar to the Stretch tab in the Clip Properties window. Both windows contain beat anchors ( );
however, the markers on these windows perform opposite functions: the beat markers ( ) on the Stretch tab are used to remove an
existing groove from a file, and the groove markers ( ) on the Groove Editor window represent a new groove that can be applied
with the Groove Pool window and Groove tool.
•
In the Groove Editor window, a beat anchor ( ) represents the beat that will be adjusted, or the source of your groove
adjustment.
•
A groove marker ( ) represents the point in time when a beat will be played. This is the destination of your groove
adjustment. A groove marker can occur before or after the beat anchor. A line connects a groove marker to its associated beat
anchor.
3. Use the Length spinner control to adjust the length of the groove. Decreasing the setting will remove beat anchors and groove
markers from the file; increasing the setting will add anchors and markers.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Add or remove markers as needed:
•
If you want to add a marker, press M or double-click the beat ruler. A beat anchor and groove marker are added to the nearest
division on the beat ruler.
•
If you want to delete a marker, right-click it and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
Tip: Use a single beat anchor/groove marker to adjust all beats forward or back equally. This produces an effect similar to slipping
an event.
5. Adjust beat anchors and groove markers as necessary. Adjusting anchors and markers during looped playback helps you hear the
results of your edits.
a. Drag a beat anchor ( ) (or insert a new one) to indicate which beat you want to adjust.
If snapping is enabled, beat anchors snap to the current grid spacing. Hold Shift while dragging to bypass snapping (press
Shift after you click).
b. Drag a groove marker ( ) to adjust when the beat will be played. Drag to the left if you want a beat to be played early, or drag
left if you want it to be played late.
You cannot drag groove markers past each other, but multiple markers can exist at the same point in time.
When the Allow snapping for Post-Groove Markers check box is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog,
groove markers will snap to the current grid spacing if snapping is enabled. Hold Shift while dragging to bypass snapping.
c. Double-click a beat anchor or groove marker to reset the marker to the beat anchor position.
Tip: Hover over a beat anchor or groove marker to display a ToolTip that explains the effect of groove marker adjustments.
Using folder tracks
You can use the folder track feature to help organize your track list and timeline by grouping tracks so they can be quickly and easily
minimized or expanded.
When the folder track is minimized, you can perform edit operations on clustered events in the group, but you cannot create events
with the Draw or Paint tools or perform edge-trimming. Expand the folder track to edit individual events.
Tip: You can also use folder tracks to maintain alternate mixes of a project. For example, create two distinct drum parts and move the
tracks to separate folder tracks. Mute one of the drum folder tracks to choose which beat is used when you play or render your project.
Creating a folder track
From the Insert menu, choose Folder Track. A folder track is added below the currently selected track.
You can create nested folder tracks by dragging a folder track to an existing folder track.
Adding existing tracks to a folder track
To add an existing track to a folder track, drag the track to the folder track. When the folder track is expanded, you can specify the
location of the track by dragging it to the desired position. When the folder track is minimized, dragging the track to the folder track
header places the track at the top of the list within the folder track.
128 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing tracks from a folder track
To remove a track from the folder track, expand the folder track and drag the track to another location in the track list.
Muting a folder track
To mute all tracks in a folder track, click the Mute button ( ) on the folder track’s header. To unmute the folder track, click the Mute
button again.
Soloing a folder track
To solo only the tracks in a folder track, click the Solo button ( ) on the folder track’s header. To unsolo the folder track, click the Solo
button again.
Editing events in a folder track
When the folder track is minimized, you can also perform edit operations on clustered events in the group. The following edit
operations will affect clustered events:
•
•
•
Pitch-shifting events.
Dragging events.
Cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting events.
Click to select a clustered group of events, or hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking to select multiple clusters of events. Selected events are
displayed in a darker color than unselected events.
Events that overlap are treated as a single event when the folder track is minimized.
Mixing multiple tracks to a single track
You can mix a selected group of tracks or an entire project to a single-track stereo event. If your project includes any muted tracks,
however, those events are not mixed into the new track. The original tracks and their events are unaffected when you mix to a single
track.
Typically, you would use this feature when you are finished refining a few tracks and want to combine them to conserve processing
power. Also, when you mix multiple tracks to a single stereo track, any envelope or track effects that you applied are rendered into the
newly mixed-down track. You can also use this feature to downmix 5.1 surround projects to stereo.
This option also allows you to destructively process any track effect plug-ins.
1. Solo the tracks you want to mix. To mix down the whole project, skip to step two.
2. From the Tools menu, choose Render to New Track or press Ctrl+M. The Render to New Track dialog appears.
WORKING WITH TRACKS | 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Complete the Render to New Track dialog:
•
•
•
•
From the Save in drop-down list, choose the location where you want to save the new media file.
Enter a name for the track in the File name box.
From the Save as type drop-down list, choose a file format.
From the Template drop-down list, choose an audio format from the template list, or click Custom to create custom rendering
settings.
Note: If you want to downmix a 5.1 surround project, choose a stereo rendering format.
•
Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to render only the loop region to the new mixed down track. Clear
the check box to render the full length of the project.
4. Click Save. The time selection or project is mixed down to a new track and a copy of the file is saved in the folder specified.
As the tracks are being mixed down, a status bar appears in the lower-left corner of the ACID window.
Tip: You may cancel the rendering process by clicking the Cancel button ( ) on the
status bar.
Cancel button
After the new track is mixed down, it appears at the bottom of the track view. If you mixed down the entire project, you may delete
or mute the other tracks from the project, as they are all contained on the new track.
5. Use the Draw (
) tool to paint the waveform on the new track.
Note: MIDI tracks must be routed to DLS or VSTi soft synths to be included in the rendered output. For more information, see
Exporting loops
From the File menu, choose Export Loops to create new loops using the original loop media files in your ACID project.
A new loop file is created for every tempo change in the project, which can result in multiple loop files being created from a single loop
media file.
1. From the File menu, choose Export Loops. The Export Loops dialog appears.
2. From the Save in drop-down list, choose the drive or folder to which the new files will be saved.
3. From the Save as type drop-down list, choose the file format.
4. From the Template drop-down list, choose an audio format, or click Custom to create custom rendering settings.
5. Click Save. A progress dialog appears for each track as it is rendered to a file. Tempo information is included in the file name of each
loop file created (e.g., bass 120.000 BPM. wav).
130 | CHAPTER 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
8
Organizing Plug-Ins and ReWire Devices
You can use the Plug-In Manager to organize your DirectX and VST plug-ins (VST effects and instruments) and ReWire
devices.
From the View menu, choose Plug-In Manager to toggle the display of the Plug-In Manager window.
With this window, you can access effects and effects packages and apply them to tracks, busses, assignable effects chains,
and soft synth busses. You can also rename and reorganize plug-ins.
Tip: To add an effect quickly, drag a plug-in from the Plug-In Manager window to a track, bus, assignable effects chain, or
soft synth bus.
Scanning your computer for plug-ins
Scanning your computer for VST plug-ins is a two-stage process: first, you need to tell ACID where your plug-ins are
installed, and then you can scan those folders for plug-ins.
Note: You don't need to scan for DirectX or ReWire plug-ins. These plug-ins are registered with Windows and are detected
automatically.
1. From the View menu, choose Plug-In Manager if the window isn’t already visible.
2. Click the Configure VST button ( ) at the top of the Plug-In Manager window. The Plug-In Configuration dialog is
displayed. The dialog displays a list of folders where ACID looks for VST plug-ins.
3. Indicate where your plug-ins are installed:
•
•
•
If you want to add a new folder, click the Add button and then browse to the folder where your plug-in is
installed.
If you want to edit an existing folder path, select a folder in the Search Folder column, click the Edit button, and
then browse to the folder where your plug-in is installed.
If you want to remove an existing folder, select a folder in the Search Folder column and click the Remove
button.
4. Click the Scan button to start scanning your folders for plug-ins.
ORGANIZING PLUG-INS AND REWIRE DEVICES | 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing plug-ins
When you open the Plug-In Manager window, an Explorer view is displayed with separate folders for your plug-ins.
Folder
Description
Audio FX
Displays all your DirectX and VST audio plug-ins.
You can drag plug-ins to tracks or Mixing Console channel strips to add effects to your project.
Select the All folder to display all audio plug-ins.
•
•
•
The Failed folder contains plug-ins that did not scan correctly or timed out during scanning. These plug-
ins cannot be used in ACID. You can right-click a plug-in and choose Rescan from the shortcut menu to
attempt to rescan the plug-in for use in ACID.
The Ignored folder contains plug-ins that you want to prevent ACID from using without uninstalling the
plug-in. You can right-click a plug-in and choose Ignore from the shortcut menu or drag it to the Ignored
folder.
The Unavailable folder contains plug-ins that you have uninstalled since running ACID. ACID preserves
information about uninstalled plug-ins so settings can be restored if the plug-ins are reinstalled.
The Audio FX folder also contains additional folders you can use to organize and categorize your plug-ins.
Displays your ReWire device (client) applications.
ReWire Devices
Select the All folder to display all ReWire clients.
The Ignored folder contains plug-ins that you want to prevent ACID from using without uninstalling the
plug-in. You can right-click a plug-in and choose Ignore from the shortcut menu or drag it to the Ignored
folder.
The ReWire Devices folder also contains a Favorites folder you can use to keep your most-often-used ReWire
clients handy. You can right-click a plug-in and choose Add to Favorites from the shortcut menu or drag it
to the Favorites folder.
To create custom folders for organizing your plug-ins, you can right-click a folder and choose New Folder
from the shortcut menu.
Soft Synths
Displays all your software synthesizers, including the DLS soft synth and VST instrument (VSTi) plug-ins.
Select the All folder to display all soft synths.
The Failed folder contains plug-ins that did not scan correctly or timed out during scanning. These plug-ins
cannot be used in ACID.
The Ignored folder contains plug-ins that you want to prevent ACID from using without uninstalling the
plug-in. You can right-click a plug-in and choose Ignore from the shortcut menu or drag it to the Ignored
folder.
The Unavailable folder contains plug-ins that you have uninstalled since running ACID. ACID preserves
information about uninstalled plug-ins so settings can be restored if the plug-ins are reinstalled.
The Soft Synths folder also contains subfolders you can use to organize and categorize your plug-ins by
instrument type and vendor. For more information, see Organizing Plug-Ins and ReWire Devices on page
132 | CHAPTER 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The toolbar at the top of the window helps you navigate the Plug-In Manager window and adjust its display.
Item
Name
Description
Address Bar
Displays the current folder. You can choose a folder from this drop-down list or click a
folder in the tree view to navigate the Plug-In Manager.
Tree View
Displays all of the folder that you can use to organize your plug-in.
Contents Pane Displays the contents of the selected folder.
Up
Opens the folder one level above the selected folder.
Refresh
New Folder
Delete
Refreshes the contents of the active folder.
Adds a new folder where you can drag plug-ins.
Deletes a user-created folder or removes the selected plug-in from a user-created folder.
When you delete a folder, only the folder is deleted. The plug-ins remain on your system.
Only user-created folders can be deleted.
Views
Click the down arrow next to the Views button and choose a command from the menu to
change the way the plug-ins are displayed.
Tree View
Details
Displays all of the available folders on the left side of the window.
Displays detailed information about each plug-in.
Organizing plug-ins with folders
The Audio FX, ReWire Devices, and Soft Synths folders contain subfolders to help you organize your plug-ins. Several folders are
displayed by default, and you can add your own folders. Each plug-in can be assigned to multiple folders, but audio plug-ins and soft
synths can be assigned to only one category.
If you want to create a folder to group your plug-ins, select a folder and click the New Folder button ( ) on the toolbar (or right-click a
folder and choose New Folder from the shortcut menu). To add a plug-in to a folder, perform either of the following actions:
•
•
Drag the plug-in from the right-hand pane to a folder.
Right-click a plug-in in the right-hand pane, choose Folder Assignments from the shortcut menu, and then choose a folder from
the menu. All user-created group folders are displayed in the menu, and a check mark is displayed next to each folder the plug-in is
associated with.
The Folder Assignments menu is available only after you’ve created folders for your plug-ins.
Note: Subfolders act as filters on parent-level folders: if you create a folder named Dynamics and add the Wave Hammer and Wave
Hammer Surround plug-ins to that folder, you'll see both plug-ins when you select the Dynamics folder.
Next, create subfolders named Stereo and 5.1 Surround and drag Wave Hammer to the Stereo folder and Wave Hammer - Surround to
the 5.1 Surround folder.
•
•
•
When you select the Dynamics folder, no plug-ins are displayed—the contents are filtered by the Stereo and 5.1 Surround folders.
When you select the Stereo folder, only the Wave Hammer plug-in is displayed.
When you select the 5.1 Surround folder, only the Wave Hammer Surround plug-in is displayed.
To remove a plug-in from a folder, perform either of the following actions:
•
•
Navigate to the folder, select the plug-in, and click the Delete button ( ) on the toolbar.
Right-click a plug-in in the right-hand pane, choose Folder Assignments from the shortcut menu, and then choose a folder from
the menu to clear the check mark.
ORGANIZING PLUG-INS AND REWIRE DEVICES | 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing a plug-in’s folder assignments
You can see a plug-in’s folder assignments by right-clicking the plug-in and choosing Folder Assignments from the shortcut menu. A
submenu displays all available folders.
Select a folder from the submenu to change a plug-in’s folder assignments, or choose Remove from All Folders to clear all folder
assignments.
Displaying audio plug-in folders in the Mixing Console window
You can use folders and categories to organize plug-ins in the Mixing Console window.
When you click the Insert FX button in the Mixing Console, plug-ins are grouped into submenus.
If you want to use folders and categories to organize plug-ins in the Mixing Console window, right-click a folder in the Plug-In Manager
and choose Show in Insert FX Submenu from the shortcut menu.
If you want to remove a folder or category from the Mixing Console window, right-click a folder in the Plug-In Manager and choose
Show in Insert FX Submenu from the shortcut menu to deselect the Show in Insert FX Submenu command.
Classifying audio plug-ins and soft synths with categories
Categories help you organize your plug-ins by type. The Audio FX folder contains several default categories, and the Soft Synths folder
contains an Instruments folder with default instrument categories. You can also create your own categories to help you organize your
plug-ins.
Each plug-in can be assigned to only one category.
If you want to create a new category, select the Categories or Instruments folder and click the New Folder button ( ) on the toolbar.
To add a plug-in to a category, perform either of the following actions:
•
•
Drag the plug-in from the right-hand pane to a category.
Right-click a plug-in in the right-hand pane, choose Set Category or Set Instrument from the shortcut menu, and then choose a
category from the menu.
To change a plug-in’s category, perform either of the following actions:
•
•
Navigate to the folder, select the plug-in, and drag it to a different category folder.
Right-click a plug-in in the right-hand pane, choose Set Category or Set Instrument from the shortcut menu, and then choose a
category from the menu.
If you want to edit a category, right-click its folder and choose Edit Audio FX Category or Edit Soft Synth Instrument Category from the
shortcut menu. You can edit the category’s name (only for user-created categories), short name, and description.
134 | CHAPTER 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Renaming a plug-in
If you want to change a plug-in’s name, right-click the plug-in in the Plug-In Manager window and choose Rename from the shortcut
menu. You can then type a new name in the edit box.
To reset a plug-in’s default name, right-click the plug-in and choose Reset Default Name from the shortcut menu.
Ignoring a plug-in
If you want to prevent ACID from using a plug-in, but you don’t want to uninstall the plug-in, you can ignore it: just right-click a plug-in
and choose Ignore from the shortcut menu.
To re-enable an ignored plug-in, right-click a plug-in and choose Ignore from the shortcut menu to deselect the Ignore command.
Using audio plug-ins
When viewing plug-ins in the Audio FX folders, the following icons are used to represent your plug-ins:
Icon
Description
Represents a DirectX audio plug-in.
Represents a DirectX audio plug-in that supports automation.
Represents a VST audio plug-in.
Represents a locked VST plug-in.
When you use a VST plug-in in your project, ACID will lock it for the remainder of your ACID session. A lock is
displayed to indicate that the plug-in cannot be removed until you close and restart the application.
To add plug-ins to your project, you can drag them from folders in the Plug-In Manager window to tracks or channel strips in the Mixing
Using ReWire devices
When viewing ReWire devices in the ReWire Devices folders, the following icons are used to represent your plug-ins:
Icon
Description
Represents a ReWire device that is not currently in use.
Represents a ReWire device that is currently in use by a soft synth bus.
When you select a ReWire device, its outputs are displayed on the right side of the Plug-In Manager window.
This icon represents an unused ReWire output.
Represents a ReWire output that is in use.
To add a ReWire device to your project, select a ReWire device ( ) in the left-hand pane to display its outputs. You can then right-click
an output ( ) and choose Insert Rewire Device Bus from the shortcut menu to add a soft synth bus to the Mixing Console window.
ORGANIZING PLUG-INS AND REWIRE DEVICES | 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using soft synths
When viewing soft synths in the Soft Synths folders, the following icons are used to represent your plug-ins:
Icon
Description
Represents a soft synth.
Represents a locked VSTi plug-in.
When you use a VSTi plug-in in your project, ACID will lock it for the remainder of your ACID session. A lock is
displayed to indicate that the plug-in cannot be removed until you close and restart the application.
To add a soft synth to your project, right-click a soft synth ( ) in the right-hand pane and choose Insert Soft Synth from the shortcut
menu. A soft synth bus is added to the Mixing Console window.
136 | CHAPTER 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
9
Using Automation
Automation allows you to control audio and video levels, panning, and effect parameter automation over time. You can
create fades, apply stereo panning, and vary effect parameters throughout your project. Automation is represented on
the ACID® timeline as an envelope or set of keyframes. You can create automation by adding envelopes or keyframes to
your tracks (including bus tracks), or you can record automation parameters by adjusting controls in the ACID interface
(or on a control surface) during playback.
Showing or hiding automation controls
The controls in the track list can function as trim controls or automation controls for track volume, panning, assignable
effects send, and bus send levels. Adjusting the trim control affects the level of the entire track.
To display trim controls in the track header, deselect the Automation Settings button
.
Track automation
Track automation will always affect all events on the track. This means that any event envelopes will be calculated after
Tip: Choose a fade type from the Audio default drop-down list on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog to set the
default fade type that will be used when you add volume and panning envelopes. This setting is used only when you
create new envelopes—when you add a point to an existing envelope, the new point always uses the same fade type
as the preceding envelope point. Also, this setting is not used for event envelopes.
Mute automation
Mute automation changes a track’s mute state throughout your project. Mute automation is either on or off with no fade
between. If you want to use fades, apply volume automation.
When you apply mute automation to a track, it’s possible to have a track that is muted and soloed simultaneously. The
mute state overrides the solo state:
•
If a track’s Solo button is selected, the track is included in the solo group, but it will be muted whenever the mute
automation is set to mute the track.
•
If the track’s Mute button is selected, the track is muted regardless of the mute automation settings.
Adding or removing mute automation
1. Select a track.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Audio Envelopes or Video Envelopes, or right-click in the track list and choose
Insert/Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu.
3. From the submenu, choose Mute. A check mark is displayed next to the command, and an envelope is added to the
timeline.
4. You can adjust the automation by editing the envelope in the timeline or by using the Mute button in the track
header when the Automation Settings button is selected.
USING AUTOMATION | 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting mute automation settings
1. Select the Automation Settings button . The Mute button is displayed as
.
2. Click the Mute button to change the track's mute automation state at the cursor position.
The button behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode:
•
•
When the track automation mode is set to Off, the button mutes the entire track.
When the track has a mute envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read, the button changes state to reflect the
envelope setting during playback but cannot be adjusted.
•
When the track has a mute envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch, the button edits the envelope
setting at the cursor position.
If you click the Mute button during playback, the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode. For
Volume or pan automation
You can change a track’s volume or position in the stereo field throughout a project using automation envelopes.
Adding volume or pan envelopes
1. Select the track to which you want to add the envelope. (You may select multiple tracks.)
2. Add the envelope to the selected track(s) in one of following ways:
•
•
From the Insert menu, choose Envelopes, and choose Volume or Pan from the submenu.
Right-click the track header in the track list, choose Insert/Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu, and choose Volume or
Pan from the submenu.
•
Press Shift+V (volume envelope) or Shift+P (pan envelope).
A blue line appears across the track(s) for a volume envelope, and a red line appears across the track(s) for a pan envelope.
Envelope line
Note: Because the default panning mode is additive, you can introduce clipping when panning a track to the left or right. Choose an
appropriate pan type and adjust the track volume accordingly. For more information, see Choosing stereo pan types on page 113.
Adjusting volume or pan automation settings
1. If you want to change volume or pan settings by recording automation, select the Automation Settings button . The fader/slider
handle is displayed as a
in automation mode.
2. Drag the Vol fader to control how loud a track is in the mix or drag the Pan slider to control the position of the track in the stereo
field.
The fader and the slider behave differently depending on the track automation recording mode:
•
•
•
When the track automation mode is set to Off, the fader adjusts the volume of the entire track and the slider pans the entire
track. In this mode, the automation control acts as a second trim control.
When the track has a volume envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read, the fader/slider will follow the envelope
during playback but cannot be adjusted.
When the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch, the fader/slider edits the envelope setting at the cursor position. If
the track does not have a volume/pan envelope, an envelope will be added when you adjust the fader/slider.
If multiple tracks are selected, all selected tracks are adjusted.
If you adjust the fader/slider during playback, the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode. For more
138 | CHAPTER 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bus automation
You can use bus automation envelopes to vary the level of a track sent to a bus.
Adding bus envelopes
A bus envelope controls the level of a track sent to a particular bus. Before you can add a bus envelope, you must add busses to the
1. Select the track to which you want to add the bus envelope. (You may select multiple tracks.)
2. Add the envelope to the selected track(s) in one of the following ways:
•
•
From the Insert menu, choose Envelopes, and choose the bus for which you want to add an envelope from the submenu.
Right-click the track header in the track list, choose Insert/Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu, and choose the
appropriate bus from the submenu.
A purple line representing the envelope appears across the track(s).
Adjusting bus automation levels
1. Select the Automation Settings button . The fader handle is displayed as a
in automation mode.
2. Click the label on the multipurpose slider and choose a bus from the menu.
3. Drag the fader to control the level of the track sent to each of the assignable FX chains that you have created. Dragging the fader to
the left cuts the volume; dragging to the right boosts the volume.
The fader behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode:
•
•
•
When the track automation mode is set to Off, the fader adjusts the send level of the entire track. In this mode, the automation
control acts as a second trim control.
When the track has a bus envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read, the fader will follow the envelope during
playback but cannot be adjusted.
When the track has a bus envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch, the fader edits the envelope
setting at the cursor position. If the track does not have an envelope, one will be created when you adjust the fader.
If multiple tracks are selected, all selected tracks are adjusted.
If you adjust the fader during playback, the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode. For more
Assignable effects automation
You can use assignable effects automation to vary the level of a track sent to an assignable effects chain.
Adding assignable effect envelopes
An assignable effect envelope controls the level of a track sent to a particular assignable effect chain. Before you can add an assignable
effect envelope, you must add an assignable effect chain to the project.
1. Select the track to which you want to add the assignable effect envelope. (You may select multiple tracks.)
2. Add the envelope to the selected track(s) in one of following ways:
•
From the Insert menu, choose Envelopes, and choose the assignable effect chain for which you want to add an envelope
from the submenu.
•
Right-click the track header in the track list, choose Insert/Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu, and choose the
appropriate assignable effect chain from the submenu.
A green line representing the envelope appears across the track(s).
USING AUTOMATION | 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting assignable effects automation levels
1. Select the Automation Settings button . The fader handle is displayed as a
in automation mode.
2. Click the label on the multipurpose slider and choose an assignable effects chain from the menu.
3. Drag the FX fader to control the level of the track sent to each of the assignable FX chains that you have created.
The fader behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode:
•
•
•
When the track has an assignable effects envelope and the track automation mode is set to Off, the fader adjusts the send
level of the entire track. In this mode, the automation control acts as a second trim control.
When the track has an assignable effects envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read, the fader will follow the
envelope during playback but cannot be adjusted.
When the track has an assignable effects envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch, the fader edits the
envelope setting at the cursor position. If the track does not have an envelope, one will be created when you adjust the fader.
If multiple tracks are selected, all selected tracks are adjusted.
If you adjust the fader during playback, the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode. For more
Adding or removing track effect automation
If a plug-in supports automation, you can dynamically adjust effect parameters over time.
Adding effect automation envelopes
If a plug-in supports automation, you can use envelopes to adjust effect parameters over time. The appearance of the plug-in in the
Plug-In Chooser window indicates whether the plug-in supports automation. Plug-ins with this icon
support automation, while
plug-ins with this icon do not. In addition, you can quickly locate plug-ins that support automation in the Automatable subfolder.
For creative ways to use effect automation envelopes, see Creating wah-wah effects with automated Track EQ on page 300 and Turning
1. Click the Track FX button ( ) on a track to open the Audio Plug-In window.
If no track effects exist, clicking the Track FX button displays the Plug-In Chooser. Use the Plug-In Chooser to create an effect chain
including an automatable plug-in. For more information, see Creating or adding to track plug-in chains on page 108.
2. Click the Configure FX Automation button ( ) on the Audio Plug-In window to display the FX Automation Chooser.
3. Click a plug-in at the top of the FX Automation Chooser. A list of the effect’s automatable parameters appears.
4. Select the check box for each parameter that you want to control with an envelope. You can use the Select All and Select None
buttons to quickly change your selections to all or none of the parameters.
5. Click OK to close the FX Automation Chooser.
140 | CHAPTER 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Envelopes display on the track for parameters that you selected in the FX Automation Chooser. To control which effect parameter
envelope displays on the track, click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button ( ) and choose an envelope from the menu.
Tip: Press E to toggle through the display of all effect parameter automation envelopes.
Adjusting effect automation settings
You can adjust automated effect parameters by editing the envelopes in the timeline or by recording automation with the controls in
the Audio Plug-In Window.
If you’ve enabled the Bypass parameter for a plug-in, you can click the Bypass button in the plug-in's banner to toggle the Bypass
envelope at the cursor position.
Note: When you automate an effect’s frequency parameter, such as the frequency parameters in the track EQ effect, you may notice
that the frequency changes are more apparent when moving through the lower frequencies. This is because frequency scales in track
EQ and other plug-ins use a logarithmic scale, but effect automation uses linear interpolation. To make the automated frequency
changes sound more natural, change the fade curve types to change the interpolation rates between envelope points. For high-to-
low frequency sweeps, use a fast fade curve; for low-to-high frequency sweeps, use a slow curve. For more information, see Changing
MIDI controller automation
You can use envelopes to adjust MIDI controllers throughout a project.
Adding or removing MIDI controller automation
1. Right-click the track header, choose Insert/Remove Envelopes, and then choose Configure Controllers from the menu. The MIDI
Track Controllers Automation dialog is displayed.
2. Select the check box for each controller you want to automate with an envelope.
If the controller you want to automate isn't displayed, select the Show all controllers check box at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Click the down arrow
in the Envelope box and choose a command from the menu:
•
•
•
•
Insert Envelope
Show/Hide Envelope
Reset All Envelope Points
Delete Envelope
For more information, see You can use the Output Settings tab on the configure which controllers can be automated; add, remove, or hide
USING AUTOMATION | 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting MIDI controller automation settings
Track-level MIDI input filters—available on the Input Filters tab in the Track Properties window—allow you to control exactly which
MIDI messages you want to record or exclude.
You can also use an external MIDI controller (or the keyboard/drum list between the track header and timeline) to record MIDI into your
ACID project.
MIDI program change automation
You can use keyframes to change the track voice throughout your project.
Working with track envelopes
Envelopes represent volume, audio panning, bus send levels, effect send levels, MIDI controllers, and effect parameter automation
settings in the timeline.
Envelope type
Volume
Description
Color
Blue
Controls track volume.
Bus send volume
Controls track level sent to bus.
Controls track level sent to assignable effects control.
Lilac
Assignable effects send
volume
Green
Pan
Controls the position of a track in the stereo field (pan). Red
Adjusts MIDI controller values Various
MIDI controller
Adjusting envelopes
To adjust the overall level of an envelope, simply drag the envelope line up or down. A tooltip displays the amount of the adjustment as
you drag. You can adjust envelopes in real time.
You can also change the level of an envelope over time by adjusting individual envelope points that you place along the envelope line.
Tip: If you have multiple envelopes on a track, hover over an envelope to display a
tooltip indicating the name of the envelope.
Adding envelope points
After you have inserted an envelope, you can add envelope points to control the level of signal or amount of panning at specific points
in time.
1. Place the mouse pointer on the envelope line. The envelope cursor ( ) appears.
2. Add an envelope point in one of the following ways:
•
•
Double-click the envelope.
Right-click the envelope and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu.
Tip: If you add too many points, you may delete a point by right-clicking it and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu. You may also
clear all envelope points by selecting Reset All from the shortcut menu.
142 | CHAPTER 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drawing envelope points
To create an envelope quickly, you can draw freehand envelope curves in the timeline.
1. With the Draw
, Envelope
, or Time Selection
tool active, hover over an envelope.
2. Hold Shift, and then click and drag over the envelope. As you drag, a trail of envelope points is created.
3. Release the mouse button when you're finished drawing.
If the Smooth and thin automation data after recording or drawing check box is selected on the External Control and
Automation tab of the Preferences dialog, the number envelope points will be reduced when you release the mouse.
Unthinned envelope
Thinned envelope
Thinning envelope points
Thinning envelope points decreases the number of points on an envelope while retaining the envelope’s overall settings. Right-click an
envelope and choose Thin All Points from the shortcut menu to thin the entire envelope.
To apply thinning to a section of the envelope, create a time selection, right-click the envelope, and then choose Thin Selected Points
from the shortcut menu.
Note: Thinning is intended to reduce the number of envelope points created through automation recording and will have little or
no effect if you create envelopes by adding and editing points manually.
Deleting envelope points
You can delete a point by right-clicking it and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu. If you want to delete all envelope points, right-
click a point and choose Reset All from the shortcut menu.
Adjusting individual envelope points
You can set the level of each envelope point by dragging it up or down. As you move an envelope point, a tooltip displays both the
point’s occurrence on the timeline and its level.
Other ways to set the level include:
•
•
•
Right-click an envelope point and choose a setting from the shortcut menu.
Choose Select All from the shortcut menu to raise or lower all points on the envelope.
Right-click an envelope point and choose Set To from the shortcut menu. This displays a box in which you can specify a setting.
You can adjust an envelope point’s location on the timeline by dragging it right or left. If snapping is enabled, the envelope point snaps
to time divisions as you drag. Hold Shift while dragging to override snapping (press Shift after you click). For more information, see Using
USING AUTOMATION | 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flipping envelopes
You can flip an envelope to invert the envelope around its center.
1. Right-click an envelope. A shortcut menu appears.
2. From the shortcut menu, choose Flip All Points.
Tip: If you want to flip only particular points on an envelope, select the points using the Envelope tool, right-click, and choose Flip
Selected Points from the shortcut menu. For more information on the Envelope tool, see Using the Envelope tool on page 144.
Changing envelope fade curves
You may set the type of fade curve that occurs between envelope points: linear, fast, slow, smooth, sharp, or hold. To change the fade
curve, right-click an envelope between two envelope points and choose the appropriate fade curve from the shortcut menu.
Locking envelope points to an event
From the Options menu, choose Lock Envelopes to Events if you want envelope points to move with an event when it is moved along
the timeline.
Using the Envelope tool
The Envelope tool ( ) is designed to manipulate multiple envelope points. Use the Envelope tool when you want to edit envelope
points but do not want to change other elements of the project. With the Envelope tool selected, events cannot be moved or edited.
Selecting and moving envelope points
To select multiple envelope points using the Envelope tool, click the track that contains the envelope and drag your cursor in the track
view to select the points you want to move. Selected points display in an alternate color. Click any selected point and drag it to the new
position; all selected points will follow.
To deselect the points, click anywhere outside the selection.
Cutting, copying, and pasting envelope points
1. Select the Envelope tool using one of the following methods:
•
•
From the Edit menu, choose Editing Tool, and choose Envelope from the submenu.
Click the Envelope Tool button ( ) on the toolbar.
2. Click within a track to select it.
3. Drag along the timeline to select envelope points.
4. From the Edit menu, choose Cut or Copy.
5. Position the cursor where you want to paste envelope points across a track.
6. From the Edit menu, choose Paste.
Copying envelopes to another track
1. Select the Envelope tool using one of the following methods:
•
•
From the Edit menu, choose Editing Tool, and choose Envelope from the submenu.
Click the Envelope Tool button ( ) on the toolbar.
2. Click within a track to select it.
3. From the Edit menu, choose Select All.
4. From the Edit menu, choose Cut or Copy.
5. Click within a track to select it.
144 | CHAPTER 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Click the Go to Start button ( ) if you want the envelope to appear exactly as it was in the original track, or click to position the
cursor where you want the envelope to start.
7. From the Edit menu, choose Paste.
Locking envelopes to events
Track envelopes extend for the length of a track and are independent of the events on the track. This means that the envelope remains
in place when you move the events in the track. However, track envelopes can be set to move with the underlying events, thus
preserving the timing of envelope points in relation to events.
To lock all of the envelopes in a project to the events in which they occur, click the Lock Envelopes to Events button ( ) or, from the
Options menu, choose Lock Envelopes to Events. You can turn this feature off by clicking the button again.
The original event
Moving the event with
Lock Envelopes to Events
turned on
Moving the event with
Lock Envelopes to Events
turned off
Hiding track envelopes
After you have created your envelope and set your envelope points, you may hide the envelope. Hiding an envelope does not affect the
envelope point settings or track playback.
Hiding volume, pan, bus, or assignable effect envelopes
1. Select the track(s) whose envelope(s) you want to hide.
2. From the View menu, choose Show Envelopes. A submenu appears. A check mark next to an envelope type indicates that it is
visible in the track view.
3. From the submenu, choose the type of envelope you want to hide. The specified envelope type no longer appears in the track view
for the selected track.
You can use the same steps to display the envelope again.
Tip: Select a track and press V to hide a volume envelope or P to hide a panning envelope. Press the key again to display the envelope.
Hiding effect automation envelopes on a track
To hide effect parameter envelopes, click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button ( ) and choose Hide All FX Automation
Envelopes from the menu. To display envelopes again, click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button ( ) and choose Show All FX
Automation Envelopes from the menu.
Tip: Press E to toggle through the display of all effect parameter automation envelopes.
Removing track envelopes
You can remove envelopes from tracks quickly and easily.
Note: When you remove an envelope from a track and then add it again, you must recreate its envelope points.
USING AUTOMATION | 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing volume, pan, bus, or assignable effect envelopes
1. Select the track(s) from which you want to remove the envelope(s).
2. From the Insert menu, choose Envelopes. A submenu appears showing a check mark next to the envelopes being used.
3. From the submenu, choose the type of envelope you want to remove. The envelope type is removed from the selected track(s).
Tip: Press Shift+V to remove a volume envelope or press Shift+P to remove a pan envelope.
Deleting MIDI controller envelopes
Click the down arrow
next to the Insert/Hide Envelope button
next to the controller's slider in the track header and choose
Delete Envelope.
If you want to show or hide an envelope without deleting its settings, click the Insert/Hide Envelope button
.
You can also remove continuous controller envelopes on the Output Settings tab in the Track Properties dialog.
Removing effect automation envelopes
1. Click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button ( ) and choose FX Automation from the menu. The FX Automation Chooser
appears.
2. Click the plug-in whose automation envelopes you want to remove. The parameters for the effect appear in the dialog.
3. Clear the check boxes for the envelopes to be removed.
4. Click OK.
Tip: You can bypass effect automation without removing envelopes. For more information, see Bypassing effect automation on page
Automating 5.1 surround projects
In a 5.1 surround project, you can automate the center channel’s volume and surround panning using keyframes. For more information,
146 | CHAPTER 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automation recording modes
Automation recording allows you to edit envelope and keyframe settings by using the controls in the ACID interface. When combined
with a control surface, you can create fades and adjust control parameters with a level of control that only a tangible control can
provide.
Automation recording is available for the following settings:
•
•
•
•
Audio track envelopes (using the controls in the track header). For more information, see Working with track envelopes on page
MIDI track envelopes (using the controls in the track header). For more information, see MIDI Track Envelopes and Keyframes on
Audio track effect parameters for automatable effects (using the controls in Audio Plug-In window). For more information, see
Bus, soft synth, and assignable effects output and panning levels (using the controls in the Mixing Console window or bus
track header).
•
•
VSTi parameters (using the controls in the Soft Synth Properties window).
Tips:
•
•
If you want to record MIDI controller envelopes into a track using a hardware controller, you can use MIDI merge recording to record the
envelopes.
If you want to thin envelope points after recording automation, you can select the Smooth and thin automation data after recording
or drawing check box on the External Control & Automation tab of the Preferences dialog or right-click the envelope and choose Thin All
Points or Thin Selected Points from the shortcut menu.
Recording automation settings
1. Add an envelope or automatable/keyframeable effect to a track.
For automatable audio track effects, you must add and effect automation envelope for each parameter you want to automate.
2. Select the Automation Settings button in the track header.
3. Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write (Touch) or Automation Write (Latch) from the menu.
Automation Recording Track Icon Description
Mode
Automation Write (Touch)
Envelope points or keyframes are created only while a control is being
adjusted. When you stop adjusting the control, automation recording stops
and the existing envelope points/keyframes are unaffected.
Automation Write (Latch)
Envelope points or keyframes are created when you change a control setting,
and recording continues until you stop playback. When you stop adjusting the
control, the control's current setting overwrites the existing envelope points/
keyframes.
4. Click to position the cursor in the timeline, and click the Play button
to start playback.
5. Adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust.
During playback, adjusting a control will create envelope points or keyframes at the cursor position. As long as you're adjusting the
control, new envelope points/keyframes will be created for each change of the play cursor's position.
6. Click Stop
to end playback and stop recording automation.
USING AUTOMATION | 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing sections of your recorded settings in Touch mode
In Touch recording mode, envelope points or keyframes are created only while a control is being adjusted. When you stop adjusting the
control, automation recording stops and the existing envelope points/keyframes are unaffected.
Use Touch mode for touching up sections of your recorded automation settings.
1. Select the Automation Settings button in the track header.
2. Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write (Touch) from the menu. The icon in the track header is
displayed as a
.
3. Click to position the cursor in the timeline, and click the Play button
to start playback.
4. When you're ready to start editing, adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust.
Envelope points/keyframes are updated at the cursor position, and when you stop adjusting the control, the original settings are
preserved.
5. Click Stop
to end playback and stop recording automation.
Overwriting recorded settings in Latch mode
In Latch mode, envelope points or keyframes are created when you change a control setting, and recording continues until you stop
playback. When you stop adjusting the control, the control's current setting overwrites the existing envelope points/keyframes.
Use Latch mode to overwrite automation settings with new values.
1. Select the Automation Settings button in the track header.
2. Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write (Latch) from the menu. The icon in the track header is
displayed as a
.
3. Click to position the cursor in the timeline, and click the Play button
to start playback.
4. When you're ready to start editing, adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust.
Envelope points/keyframes are updated at the cursor position until you stop playback.
5. Click Stop
to end playback and stop recording automation.
Editing individual envelope points or keyframes
Editing individual envelope points or keyframes gives you fine control over your recorded settings.
1. Select the Automation Settings button on the track you want to edit.
2. Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write (Touch) or Automation Write (Latch) from the menu.
3. Select the parameter you want to edit:
•
For a track envelope, select the envelope tool
and click the envelope point you want to edit. You can right-click a point and
choose Properties from the shortcut menu to display an effect's property page.
•
For a keyframe, double-click a keyframe to open its property page.
4. Adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust. The selected envelope point/keyframe
is edited, and all others are unaffected.
For track envelopes, you can also edit the envelope directly in the timeline.
148 | CHAPTER 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the automation recording mode for a track
1. Select the Automation Settings button in the track header.
2. Click the Automation Settings button and choose a command from the menu to choose the automation mode.
Mode
Off
Track Icon Description
Automated parameters are ignored during playback.
When you switch to Off mode, the control setting from the cursor position is
used as a static setting, and the envelope/keyframe is dimmed to indicate that
it is unavailable.
Read
The envelope/keyframe value is applied during playback, and the control
reflects the envelope/keyframe settings at the cursor position.
Adjustments to the control are not recorded.
Automation Write (Touch)
The envelope/keyframe value is applied during playback, and the control
follows the envelope/keyframe settings during playback and when you
position the cursor.
Envelope points or keyframes are created only while a control is being
adjusted. When you stop adjusting the control, automation recording stops
and the existing envelope points/keyframes are unaffected.
Automation Write (Latch)
The envelope/keyframe value is applied during playback, and the control
follows the envelope/keyframe settings during playback and when you
position the cursor.
Envelope points or keyframes are created when you change a control setting,
and recording continues until you stop playback. When you stop adjusting the
control, the control's last setting overwrites the existing envelope points/
keyframes.
USING AUTOMATION | 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 | CHAPTER 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10
Using the Mixing Console
The Mixing Console provides an integrated view of all tracks and busses in your project using the appearance of a
traditional hardware-based mixer. You can use the Mixing Console to mix your project in much the same way you work
with a hardware-based mixer.
Understanding the Mixing Console window
From the View menu, choose Mixing Console to toggle the display of the Mixing Console window.
Toolbar
Channel List
View pane
Channel strips
The Mixing Console window is explained in the following sections.
The Mixing Console toolbar
The Mixing Console toolbar is displayed at the top of the Mixing Console window and allows you to quickly configure the
window’s display; downmix audio; dim the output; or add tracks, assignable effects, or busses.
Item
Description
Click the
Properties and
Layout
button to open the Audio tab in the Project Properties dialog, or click the down
arrow and choose a command from the menu:
Audio Properties Displays the Audio tab in the Project Properties dialog.
Show Channel
List
Displays or hides the Channel List on the left side of the Mixing Console
window.
Select a channel strip’s check box to display it in the Mixing Console, or clear
a check box to hide a channel strip without removing it from your project.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
Show Channels Choose a command to configure which channel strips are displayed in the
Mixing Console window.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Show All Channels: Displays all channel strips in the Mixing Console.
Audio Tracks: Shows or hides audio track channel strips.
MIDI Tracks: Shows or hides MIDI track channel strips.
Audio Busses: Shows or hides auxiliary bus channel strips.
Input Busses: Shows or hides input bus channel strips.
Soft Synth Busses: Shows or hides soft synth bus channel strips.
Assignable FX Busses: Shows or hides assignable FX channel strips.
Master Bus: Shows or hides the Master bus channel strip.
Preview Bus: Shows or hides the Preview bus channel strip.
Show Control
Regions
Choose a command to configure which portions of the channel strips are
displayed in the Mixing Console window.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Show All Control Regions: Displays all control regions.
Insert FX Control Region: Shows or hides the Insert FX control region.
Sends Control Region: Shows or hides the Sends control region.
I/O Control Region: Shows or hides the I/O control region.
Peak Meters Control Region: Shows or hides Peak Meters.
Faders Control Region: Shows or hides volume faders.
Show Control
Region Labels
Choose this command to show or hide control region labels in channel
strips.
Show Fader Ticks Choose this command to show or hide the fader ticks next to the faders.
Channel Width Choose a setting to indicate whether you want to view narrow, medium
(default), or wide channel strips in the Mixing Console window.
Meter Layout
Choose Meter Defaults, and then choose a command from the submenu to
reset clip indicators; set the display range; or display labels, peaks, or valleys
in the channel meters.
Downmix Output
Downmixes your audio from 5.1 surround to stereo or from stereo to mono so you can ensure
your mix will sound the way you intended it — even when your audience’s hardware has fewer
channels than the original mix.
The button represents the current playback mode:
5.1 surround output
Stereo output
Mono output
Dim Output
Attenuates the volume of all busses that are routed to hardware outputs by 20 dB so you can
check your mix at a lower level (or answer the phone). Click again to restore volume.
Insert Audio Track
Insert MIDI Track
Adds an audio track to your project.
Adds a MIDI track to your project.
Insert Assignable FX Creates an assignable FX chain that you can route to one or more tracks in your project.
To delete an assignable FX chain, right-click the assignable FX channel strip and choose Delete
from the shortcut menu.
Insert Bus
Adds a bus to your project. The Audio tab in the Project Properties dialog is updated to reflect
the new number of busses.
To delete a bus, right-click the channel strip for the bus and choose Delete from the shortcut
menu.
Insert Input Bus
Insert Soft Synth
Adds an input bus to your project.
To delete a bus, right-click the channel strip for the bus and choose Delete from the shortcut
menu.
Adds a soft synth to your project.
To delete a soft synth, right-click the channel strip for the soft synth and choose Delete from
the shortcut menu.
152 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Channel List pane
The Channel List pane is displayed on the left side of the Mixing Console window.
To show or hide the window, click the down arrow next to the Properties and Layout button and
choose Show Channel List from the menu (or right-click the Mixing Console window and choose Show
Channel List from the shortcut menu).
The top of the Channel and Group List pane displays a listing of all tracks, busses, and assignable effects
chains in your project. Select a channel’s check box to include it in the Mixing Console display, or clear a
check box to hide the channel without removing it from your project.
Clicking a track, bus, soft synth, or assignable effects chain in the Channel List pane selects that channel.
You can hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple channels to perform ganged edits.
The View pane
The View pane is displayed on the left side of the Mixing Console window. If the Channel List pane is
visible, the View pane is displayed between the Channel List pane and the Channels pane.
You can use the buttons in this pane to show or hide components in the Mixing Console.
Item
Description
Show All
Audio Tracks
Click to show channel strips for all tracks, busses, and assignable effects chains.
Click to show or hide channel strips for audio tracks.
If your project does not contain any audio tracks, this button is unavailable.
Click to show or hide channel strips for MIDI tracks.
MIDI Tracks
Audio Busses
Soft Synths
If your project does not contain any MIDI tracks, this button is unavailable.
Click to show or hide channel strips for busses.
If your project does not contain any busses, this button is unavailable.
Click to show or hide channel strips for soft synths.
If your project does not contain any soft synths, this button is unavailable.
Click to show or hide channel strips for assignable effects chains.
Assignable FX
If your project does not contain any assignable effects chains, this button is unavailable.
Click to show or hide the channel strip for the Master bus.
Click to show or hide the channel strip for the Preview bus.
Click to show or hide the insert effects control region in channel strips.
Click to show or hide the sends control region in channel strips.
Click to show or hide the I/O control region in channel strips.
Master Bus
Preview Bus
Insert FX
Sends
I/O
Meters
Faders
Meter Range
Click to show or hide the peak meters control region in channel strips.
Click to show or hide the Faders control region in channel strips.
Drag the slider to adjust the range of all meters in the Mixing Console.
Tip: You can also right-click a meter and choose a range from the shortcut menu.
Channel Width
Click to display narrow , default , or wide channel strips.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel strips
Tracks, busses, soft synths, and assignable effects chains are displayed as channel strips in the Mixing Console.
When a control surface is enabled, an indicator is displayed in the Mixing Console to indicate which channels are under external control.
Multiple bars are displayed if a channel is under the control of multiple devices. For more information about using control surfaces,
In the Mixing Console, the
horizontal bars at the top of
channels 1-4 indicate which
channels are under external
control
Tips:
•
If you want to change the order in which channels are displayed, you can click the channel label and drag a channel strip to a new
location.
•
•
•
Hover over a fader and roll your mouse wheel to change its setting.
To edit a fader value quickly, you can double-click the displayed value to type a new value.
Hold Ctrl while dragging a fader to move it in fine increments.
154 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Insert FX Control
Region
Description
Insert FX
Control Region
The Insert FX control region displays the insert effects chain for a track or
bus.
Note: MIDI tracks do not have this region on the channel strip.
Sends Control
Region
The Sends control region displays controls for routing tracks to busses or
assignable effects chains. For assignable effects chains, the Send Region
also displays an input fader and meter.
Sends Control
Region
Note: MIDI tracks do not have this region on the channel strip.
I/O Control
Region
I/O Control Region The I/O control region allows you to choose the recording input for a
track or route a channel to a bus or hardware output.
Peak Meters Control The Peak Meters control region displays peak meters you can use to
Region
monitor instantaneous levels during playback and determine the loudest
level in your audio signal.
Peak Meters
Control Region
Note: To change the range of all meters in the Mixing console, drag
the Meter Range slider in the View pane (or right-click a meter and
choose a range from the shortcut menu).
Faders Control
Region
The Faders control region allows you to control a channel's gain.
•
Audio track channels display controls for the track automation mode,
arm for record, input monitor mode, mute, solo, pan, track gain, and
phase.
Faders Control
Region
•
•
•
MIDI track channels display controls for the track automation mode,
arm for record, MIDI input, solo, mute, pan, and track gain.
Bus channels display controls for the bus automation mode, mute,
solo, pan, bus gain, and pre/post fader effects processing.
Assignable effects channels display controls for the bus automation
mode, mute, solo, pan, and bus gain.
Channel Label
If the Meter Region is not visible, the Fader Region also displays a peak
meter.
Channel Label
The Channel Label displays the name of the track or bus. Double-click to
edit the name.
Adding track, assignable FX, bus, and soft synth channels
In its default configuration, the Mixing Console displays a channel for each track, bus, soft synth, and assignable effects chain in your
project.
You can use the buttons on the Mixing Console toolbar to add tracks, assignable effects chains, or busses to your project. For more
Using audio and MIDI track channel strips
A separate channel strip is displayed for each audio and MIDI track in your project. Each channel strip mirrors controls that are displayed
in the track header.
To show or hide audio track channel strips, click the Tracks button in the View pane.
To show or hide MIDI track channel strips, click the MIDI Tracks button in the View pane.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a track’s name
To rename an audio or MIDI track, double-click the track label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box (or
press F2 to rename the selected track). The channel strip in the Mixing Console and the track header are updated when you press Enter.
Adding or editing track (insert) effects
Note: MIDI tracks do not have an Insert FX control region.
When the Insert FX control region is visible, each track displays its effects chain at the top of the channel strip.
To show or hide the Insert FX control region, click the Insert FX button in the View pane.
Each effect is displayed as a button. You can hover over the button to see a ToolTip that displays the full plug-in and preset name.
Tip: When the Insert FX control region isn't visible, you can click the Track FX button
in the Faders control region to display the Audio
Plug-In window for the track’s effects chain.
Adding a plug-in
Click the
button and then choose a new plug-in from the menu to add a new plug-in to the effects chain.
Editing effects settings
Click an effect’s button to display the Audio Plug-In window, where you can adjust the plug-in’s settings.
When you right-click an effect’s button, a shortcut a menu is displayed:
•
•
Choose Show <Plug-In Name> to open the Audio Plug-In window, where you can adjust the plug-in’s controls.
Choose Bypass <Plug-In Name> to temporarily bypass a plug-in.
156 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When an effect is bypassed, its button is displayed in red text.
•
•
•
Choose Remove <Plug-In Name> to remove a plug-in from the track effects chain.
Choose Presets, and then choose a setting from the submenu to load a new preset.
To replace the current plug-in, right-click the effect’s button, and then choose a new plug-in from the menu. Plug-ins are organized
in submenus by type (EQ, Dynamics, Reverbs, etc.).
Adjusting bus or assignable effects send levels
Note: MIDI tracks do not have a Sends control region.
When the Sends control region is visible, each track displays controls you can use to route the track to busses and assignable effects
chains.
To show or hide the Sends control region, click the Sends button in the View pane.
When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is not selected, click the Channel Send button and choose a bus
or assignable effects chain from the menu, and then drag the fader to adjust the send level.
When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is selected, the fader handle is displayed as a , and you can use
it to edit send volume automation on the track.
Notes:
•
•
The trim level is added to the automation settings so your envelope is preserved, but with a boost or cut applied. For example, setting the
trim control to -3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB.
To adjust the size of the Sends control region, you can drag the bottom divider to make more or fewer sends visible.
Bus sends are pre-volume (and pre-mute) by default. To change to post-volume (and post-mute), click the Pre/Post button to switch to
Post Volume Send mode.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change a track’s input or output device
When the I/O control region is visible, each track (audio and MIDI) displays controls you can use to set the track's input device (for
recording) and output device.
To show or hide the I/O control region, click the I/O button in the View pane.
To choose the recording input for the track, click the Input Source button and choose a port from the menu.
To route an audio track to a bus, click the Output button and choose a bus from the menu.
To route a MIDI track to a soft synth device, click the Output button and choose a soft synth from the menu.
Monitoring track levels
When the Meters control region is visible, each audio and MIDI track displays meters you can use to monitor track levels.
To show or hide the Meters control region, click the Meters button in the View pane.
Note: If the Meters control region is not visible, peak meters are displayed in the Faders control region.
Right-click the meter and choose a setting from the shortcut menu to change the resolution and display options.
Changing a track’s automation mode
When the Faders control region is visible, each track displays controls you can use to adjust
track panning, volume and muting. The controls can adjust static (trim) or automation levels.
Use the Automation Settings button at the top of the Faders control region to choose the
automation mode and turn automation on or off.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane. To
change a track’s automation recording mode, click the down arrow next to the
Automation Settings button and choose a setting from the menu.
Click the button (so the Automation Settings button is not selected) if you want the Fader
control region controls to function as trim controls. Adjusting a trim control affects the entire
track. When the Automation Settings button is selected, you can use the buttons to edit pan,
volume, and mute automation for the track.
Audio track
MIDI track
158 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Muting or soloing a track
When the Faders control region is visible, each track displays Mute
and Solo buttons.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane.
Muting a track
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can click the Mute button
to prevent a track from
being played in the mix. Click the Mute button on additional tracks to add them to the mute group. To unmute a
track, click the Mute button again.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Mute button is displayed as
, and you can use the
button to edit mute automation.
Soloing a track
Click the Solo button to mute all unselected tracks. Click the Solo button on additional tracks to add them to the
solo group. To remove a track from the solo group, click its Solo button again.
Inverting a track’s phase
Note: MIDI tracks do not have a phase button.
When the Faders control region is visible, each track displays an Invert Track Phase button
.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane.
Click the Invert Track Phase button
to reverse the phase of all events on an audio track.
Although inverting data does not make an audible difference in a single file, it can prevent phase cancellation when
mixing or crossfading audio signals.
Select multiple tracks to invert several tracks simultaneously.
Note: If the Invert event switch is selected, inverting the phase of the track will return the event to its original phase.
Arming a track for recording or toggling input monitoring
When the Faders control region is visible, each track displays an Arm for Record button
and an Input Monitor
Mode button you can use to turn record input monitoring on or off.
Note: MIDI tracks do not have an Input Monitor Mode button.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane.
Arming tracks for recording
Select the Arm for Record buttons
on the tracks where you want to record. Arming a track enables it for recording.
When a track is armed, the track meter displays the track’s level. If input monitoring is not on, the meter displays the level of your input
source. If input monitoring is turned on, the meter shows the level of the input source plus the track effects chain.
Toggling record input monitoring
Click the Input Monitor Mode button
and choose a command from the menu.
Note: This button is available only when you’re using a low-latency audio device that supports input monitoring.
To turn on input monitoring, click the Input Monitor Mode button and choose and then choose Input Monitor Mode: On
or
Input Monitor Mode: Auto
from the menu. During recording, your signal will be played back with the current track effects chain, but
a dry (unprocessed) signal is recorded.
When Input Monitor Mode: On is selected, the behavior is similar to Input Monitor Mode: Auto mode, but you will always hear the
input monitor during recording—monitoring is not toggled on and off when recording in to a selected event.
When Input Monitor Mode: Auto
is selected, you will hear the input monitor signal when playback is stopped and during recording.
If you’re recording into selected events, you’ll hear the input monitor signal only when the cursor passes over the selected events.
Important: Your ability to monitor effects in real time is dependent on your computer’s performance. Effect automation envelopes are
bypassed during record monitoring.
Adjusting track panning or volume
When the Faders control region is visible, each track displays a Pan slider and a Volume fader.
160 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane.
Adjusting panning
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can drag the Pan slider to control the position of the track in the stereo
field: dragging to the left will place the track in the left speaker more than the right, and dragging to the right will place the track in the
right speaker.
You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments, or double-click the slider to return it to 0.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Pan slider handle is displayed as a , and you can use it to edit pan
automation.
Note: The trim level is added to the pan automation settings so your panning envelope is preserved, but with an offset applied. For
example, setting the trim control to 9% left has the same effect as moving every envelope point 9% to the left.
Adjusting volume
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can drag the Volume fader to control the overall (trim) volume of the
track.
You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments, or double-click the slider to return it to 0.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Volume fader handle is displayed as a , and you can use it to edit volume
automation.
Note: The trim level is added to the volume automation settings so your envelope is preserved, but with a boost or cut applied. For
example, setting the trim control to -3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using output busses
You can use busses to group and mix tracks. The most common uses of busses are for routing tracks and effects outputs to specific
hardware outputs or simply to use a bus as a master control for a set of tracks.
For example, if you wanted to control the master level of all your drum tracks to a relative level, you could create a bus and assign all
drum tracks to that bus. After your drums are mixed, you can adjust the overall volume of the drum tracks by adjusting the bus volume.
Adding or deleting output busses
From the Insert menu, choose Bus (or click the Insert Bus button ( ) in the Mixing Console window) to add a bus to your project.
The number of busses in your project will be determined by several factors, such as the number of outputs that your hardware contains
or how you will be using and applying effects throughout your project.
Note: You can add up to 26 busses, and you can change the number of busses at any time.
By default, all busses are assigned to the Master bus. In this configuration, you can use them for creating subgroups of tracks—for
example, you could route all your drum tracks to a bus so you can adjust their levels together without changing their relative levels.
However, you can also route busses to hardware outputs so you can use busses for sending tracks to external effects processors or for
mixing on an external mixer. For more information, see Routing a bus to a hardware output on page 163.
Adding a bus
From the Insert menu, choose Bus to add a bus to your project.
Tip: If the Mixing Console Window is visible, click the Insert Bus button ( ).
Renaming a bus
To rename a bus, double-click the label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box (or press F2 to rename the
selected bus). The channel strip in the Mixing Console is updated when you press Enter:
Delete all characters in a custom bus name to reset a custom bus name to its default.
Deleting a bus
Right-click a bus channel strip and choose Delete from the shortcut menu, or select a bus channel strip in the Mixing Console window
and press the Delete key.
Note: When you remove a bus from a project, any tracks assigned to that bus will be reassigned to the Master bus.
162 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Routing busses
You can create up to 26 (plus the Master) virtual busses that you can route to hardware attached to your computer or to other busses.
By default, all busses are assigned to the Master bus. In this configuration, you can use them for creating subgroups of tracks—for
example, you could route all your drum tracks to a bus so you can adjust their levels together without changing their relative levels.
When you assign busses to hardware outputs, you can use busses for sending tracks to external effects processors or for mixing on an
external mixer.
Important: When you route busses to hardware outputs, those busses will not be included in the mix when you render your project.
Routing a bus to another bus
Using bus track headers
2. If bus tracks aren’t already visible, choose Show Bus Tracks from the View menu.
3. Click the Playback Device Selector button on the audio bus track and choose a bus from the menu:
•
•
•
The button is displayed as a
The bus letter is displayed (
The button is displayed as a
when a bus is routed to the master bus.
,
, and so on) when a bus is routed to another bus.
when a bus is routed to a hardware output (not available for soft synth bus controls).
Note: To prevent feedback, you cannot perform circular routing. For example, if your project has two busses and bus A is routed to B, bus
B can only be routed to the Master bus.
Using the Mixing Console window
2. If the window isn’t already visible, choose Mixing Console from the View menu.
3. If the I/O control region isn’t already visible, click the I/O button in the View pane.
4. To choose an output device, click the Output button and choose a bus from the menu.
Routing a bus to a hardware output
Before you get started, verify that you are using Windows classic wave drivers or an ASIO driver:
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences and click the Audio Device tab.
2. From the Audio device type drop-down list, choose Windows Classic Wave Driver or an ASIO driver.
3. Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
Note: If you have selected Microsoft Sound Mapper in the Audio device type drop-down list on the Audio Device tab in the Preferences
dialog, you will not be able to assign the bus to a different device.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using bus track headers
2. If bus tracks aren’t already visible, choose Show Bus Tracks from the View menu.
3. Click the Playback Device Selector button on the audio bus track and choose an ouput device from the menu:
•
•
•
The button is displayed as a
The bus letter is displayed (
The button is displayed as a
when a bus is routed to the master bus.
,
, and so on) when a bus is routed to another bus.
when a bus is routed to a hardware output (not available for soft synth bus controls).
Using the Mixing Console window
2. If the window isn’t already visible, choose Mixing Console from the View menu.
3. If the I/O control region isn't already visible, click the I/O button in the View pane.
4. To choose an output device, click the Output button and choose an ouput device from the menu.
Assigning tracks to output busses
Assigning tracks to busses allows you to apply settings to a series of tracks or route tracks to a hardware output. For more information,
Adding or editing output bus effects
You can add effects to a bus using the bus tracks header in the track list or the bus channel strips in the Mixing Console. For more
information, see Adding effects to a bus track on page 106 or Adding or editing track (insert) effects on page 156.
Automating effect parameters for output busses
If a plug-in supports automation, you can add envelopes to a bus track to automatically adjust effect parameters over time. For more
Using audio bus channel strips
A separate channel strip is displayed for each bus in your project.
To show or hide channel strips for busses, click the Busses button in the View pane.
164 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a bus’s name
To rename a bus, double-click the label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box (or press F2 to rename the
selected bus). The channel strip in the Mixing Console is updated when you press Enter.
Adding or editing bus (insert) effects
When the Insert FX control region is visible, each bus displays its effects chain at the top of the channel strip.
To show or hide the Insert FX control region, click the Insert FX button in the View pane.
Each effect is displayed as a button. You can hover over the button to see a ToolTip that displays the full plug-in and preset name.
Tip: When the Insert FX control region isn't visible, you can click the Bus FX button
in the Faders control region to display the Audio
Plug-In window for the bus effects chain.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a plug-in
Click the
button and then choose a new plug-in from the menu to add a new plug-in to the effects chain.
Editing effects settings
Click an effect’s button to display the Audio Plug-In window, where you can adjust the plug-in’s settings.
When you right-click an effect’s button, a shortcut a menu is displayed:
•
•
Choose Show <Plug-In Name> to open the Audio Plug-In window, where you can adjust the plug-in's controls.
Choose Bypass <Plug-In Name> to temporarily bypass a plug-in.
When an effect is bypassed, its button is displayed in red text.
•
•
•
Choose Remove <Plug-In Name> to remove a plug-in from the effects chain.
Choose Presets, and then choose a setting from the submenu to load a new preset.
To replace the current plug-in, right-click the effect’s button, and then choose a new plug-in from the menu. Plug-ins are organized
in submenus by type (EQ, Dynamics, Reverbs, etc.).
Adjusting bus send levels
When the Sends control region is visible, each bus displays controls you can use to route the bus to assignable effects chains or to
busses that are routed to hardware outputs.
To show or hide the Sends control region, click the Sends button in the View pane.
When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is not selected, click the Channel Send button and choose a bus
or assignable effects chain from the menu, and then drag the fader to adjust the send level.
When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is selected, the fader handle is displayed as a , and you can use
it to edit send volume automation on the bus track.
Notes:
•
•
The trim level is added to the automation settings so your envelope is preserved, but with a boost or cut applied. For example, setting the
trim control to -3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB.
To adjust the size of the Sends control region, you can drag the bottom divider to make more or fewer sends visible.
Bus sends are post-volume (and post-mute) by default. To change to pre-volume (and pre-mute), click the Pre/Post button to switch to
Pre-Volume Send mode.
Changing a bus’s output device
When the I/O control region is visible, each bus displays controls you can use to set the bus's output device.
To show or hide the I/O control region, click the I/O button in the View pane.
To choose an output device, click the Output button and choose a bus or hardware output from the menu.
Important: When you route busses to hardware outputs, the outputs from those busses will not be included in the mix when you
render your project.
Monitoring bus levels
When the Meters control region is visible, each bus displays meters you can use to monitor output levels.
To show or hide the Meters control region, click the Meters button in the View pane.
If the Meters control region is not visible, peak meters are displayed in the Faders control region.
Right-click the meter and choose a setting from the shortcut menu to change the resolution and display options.
166 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Muting or soloing a bus
When the Faders control region is visible, each bus displays Mute
and Solo buttons.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane.
Muting a bus
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can click the Mute button
to prevent a bus from being played in the
mix. Click the Mute button on additional busses to add them to the mute group. To unmute a bus, click the Mute button again.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Mute button is displayed as , and you can use the button to edit mute
automation on the bus track.
Soloing a bus
Click the Solo button to mute all unselected busses. Click the Solo button on additional busses to add them to the solo group. To
remove a bus from the solo group, click its Solo button again.
Adjusting bus panning or volume
When the Faders control region is visible, each bus displays a Pan slider and a Volume fader.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane.
Adjusting panning
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can drag the Pan slider to control the position of the bus in the stereo
field: dragging to the left will place the bus in the left speaker more than the right, and dragging to the right will place the bus in the
right speaker.
You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments, or double-click the slider to return it to 0.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Pan slider handle is displayed as a , and you can use it to edit pan
automation on the bus track.
The trim level is added to the pan automation settings so your panning envelope is preserved, but with an offset applied. For example,
setting the trim control to 9% left has the same effect as moving every envelope point 9% to the left.
Adjusting volume
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can drag the Volume fader to control the overall (trim) volume of the bus.
You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments, or double-click the slider to return it to 0.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Volume fader handle is displayed as a , and you can use it to edit volume
automation on the bus track.
Note: The trim level is added to the volume automation settings so your envelope is preserved, but with a boost or cut applied. For
example, setting the trim control to -3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing pre/post routing
The Pre/Post-Fader Send button in the Sends control region and the Pre/Post Fader Insert FX button
in the Faders control region
work together to determine the signal flow for your busses.
The Pre/Post Fader Insert FX button allows you to indicate whether the insert FX chain is affected by the channel's gain fader. When set
to Post Fader Insert FX , the FX chain is affected by the channel’s gain. When set to Pre Fader Insert FX , the FX chain is not affected
by the channel’s gain fader, which is essential on the master bus when using plug-ins that dither the audio for final rendering.
The Pre/Post Fader Send button allows you to create cue mixes that are not affected by the gain (or mute/pan) stages of the bus or
track.
•
•
•
•
When Pre Fader Insert FX
pan — bus volume.
and Pre Fader Send are selected, your audio signal flows as follows: bus effects — bus send — bus
and Post Fader Send are selected, your audio signal flows as follows: bus effects — bus pan — bus
and Pre Fader Send are selected, your audio signal flows as follows: bus send — bus pan — bus
and Post Fader Send are selected, your audio signal flows as follows: bus pan — bus volume — bus
When Pre Fader Insert FX
volume — bus send.
When Post Fader Insert FX
volume — bus effects.
When Post Fader Insert FX
effects — bus send.
Using Input Busses
You can use input busses to input, process, record, and mix external audio sources with your ACID project. Following are some
examples of how you can use input busses in your projects:
•
•
•
•
Use an input bus as a recording input, allowing you to apply effects and record a wet signal.
Use an input bus as a mixer input for an external device, such as a synthesizer.
Use an input bus as a return for hardware-based effects.
Use an input bus to monitor a source such as a talkback microphone.
Adding or deleting input busses
From the Insert menu, choose Input Bus (or click the Insert Input Bus button
in the Mixing Console window) to add an input bus to
your project.
You can add up to 26 input busses, and you can change the number of busses at any time.
Adding a bus
From the Insert menu, choose Input Bus to add an input bus to your project.
Tip: If the Mixing Console Window is visible, click the Insert Input Bus button
.
Renaming a bus
To rename a bus, double-click the label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box (or press F2 to rename the
selected bus). The channel strip in the Mixing Console is updated when you press Enter:
Delete all characters in a custom bus name to reset a custom bus name to its default.
168 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a bus
Right-click an input bus channel strip and choose Delete from the shortcut menu, or select an input bus channel strip in the Mixing
Console window and press the Delete key.
Using input bus channel strips
A separate channel strip is displayed for each input bus in your project. For more information, see Using Input Busses on page 168.
To show or hide channel strips for busses, click the Busses button in the View pane.
Note: Input bus channel strips are available only when using the Mixing Console in ACID Pro 7.
Changing a bus’s name
To rename an input bus, double-click the label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box (or press F2 to rename
the selected bus). The channel strip in the Mixing Console is updated when you press Enter.
Adding or editing input bus (insert) effects
When the Insert FX control region is visible, each input bus displays its effects chain at the top of the channel strip.
To show or hide the Insert FX control region, click the Insert FX button in the View pane.
Each effect is displayed as a button. You can hover over the button to see a ToolTip that displays the full plug-in and
preset name.
Tips:
•
•
When the Insert FX control region isn't visible, you can click the Input Bus FX button in the Faders control region to display the Audio
Plug-In window for the bus effects chain.
Input bus insert effects are always applied pre-fader.
Adding a plug-in
Click the
button and then choose a new plug-in from the menu to add a new plug-in to the effects chain.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing effects settings
Click an effect's button to display the Audio Plug-In window, where you can adjust the plug-in's settings.
When you right-click an effect's button, a shortcut a menu is displayed:
•
•
Choose Show <Plug-In Name> to open the Audio Plug-In window, where you can adjust the plug-in's controls.
Choose Bypass <Plug-In Name> to temporarily bypass a plug-in.
When an effect is bypassed, its button is displayed in red text.
•
•
•
Choose Remove <Plug-In Name> to remove a plug-in from the effects chain.
Choose Presets, and then choose a setting from the submenu to load a new preset. The current preset is indicated by a check mark.
To replace the current plug-in, right-click the effect's button, and then choose a new plug-in from the menu. Plug-ins are organized
in submenus by type (EQ, Dynamics, Reverbs, etc.).
Adjusting input bus send levels
When the Sends control region is visible, each bus displays controls you can use to route the input bus to assignable effects chains or to
busses that are routed to hardware outputs. A bus cannot send to a bus that is directly or indirectly routed to the Master bus.
To show or hide the Sends control region, click the Sends button in the View pane.
When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is not selected, click the Channel Send button and choose a bus
or assignable effects chain from the menu, and then drag the fader to adjust the send level.
When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is selected, the fader handle is displayed as a , and you can use
it to edit send volume automation on the bus track.
Notes:
•
•
The trim level is added to the automation settings so your envelope is preserved, but with a boost or cut applied. For example, setting the
trim control to -3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB.
To adjust the size of the Sends control region, you can drag the bottom divider to make more or fewer sends visible.
Bus sends are post-volume (and post-mute) by default. To change to pre-volume (and pre-mute), click the Pre/Post button to switch to
Pre-Volume Send mode.
Changing an input bus’s input or output port
When the I/O control region is visible, each bus displays controls you can use to set the bus's input and output device.
To show or hide the I/O control region, click the I/O button in the View pane.
Choosing an input device
To choose an output device, click the Input button and choose a port from the menu.
Choosing an output device
To choose an output device, click the Output button and choose a bus or hardware output from the menu, or choose Output Off.
Setting the output to Output Off is useful when you're using an input bus as a recording input and want to monitor the bus through the
track or when using an input bus as a talkback mic.
When you route busses to hardware outputs, the outputs from those busses will not be included in the mix when you render your
project.
If you want to use an input bus as a track input, click the Record Input button on the track header, choose Input Busses from the menu,
and choose an input bus from the submenu.
Monitoring bus levels
When the Meters control region is visible, each bus displays meters you can use to monitor output levels.
170 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To show or hide the Meters control region, click the Meters button in the View pane.
Note: If the Meters control region is not visible, peak meters are displayed in the Faders control region.
Right-click the meter and choose a setting from the shortcut menu to change the resolution and display options.
Muting or soloing an input bus
When the Faders control region is visible, each bus displays Mute
and Solo buttons.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane.
Muting a bus
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can click the Mute button
to prevent a bus from being played in the
mix. Click the Mute button
on additional busses to add them to the mute group. To unmute a bus, click the Mute button again.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Mute button is displayed as , and you can use the button to edit mute
automation on the bus track.
Soloing a bus
Click the Solo button to mute all unselected busses. Click the Solo button on additional busses to add them to the solo group. To
remove a bus from the solo group, click its Solo button again.
Adjusting input bus volume or panning
When the Faders control region is visible, each input bus displays a Pan slider and a Volume fader.
Tip: The Pan slider is displayed only when an input bus is routed to the master bus or an auxiliary bus. It is not available when the input
bus is routed directly to a hardware output.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting panning
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can drag the Pan slider to control the position of the bus in the stereo
field: dragging to the left will place the bus in the left speaker more than the right, and dragging to the right will place the bus in the
right speaker.
You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments, or double-click the slider to return it to 0.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Pan slider handle is displayed as a , and you can use it to edit pan
automation on the bus track.
Note: The trim level is added to the pan automation settings so your panning envelope is preserved, but with an offset applied. For
example, setting the trim control to 9% left has the same effect as moving every envelope point 9% to the left.
Adjusting volume
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can drag the Volume fader to control the overall (trim) volume of the bus.
You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments, or double-click the slider to return it to 0.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Volume fader handle is displayed as a , and you can use it to edit volume
automation on the bus track.
Note: The trim level is added to the volume automation settings so your envelope is preserved, but with a boost or cut applied. For
example, setting the trim control to -3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB.
Changing input bus pre/post routing
Insert effects on input busses are always pre fader: the FX chain is not affected by the channel's gain fader.
The Pre/Post Fader Send button allows you to create cue mixes that are not affected by the gain (or mute/pan) stages of the bus or
track.
•
•
When Pre Fader Send is selected, your audio signal flows as follows: bus effects — bus send — bus pan — bus volume.
When Post Fader Send is selected, your audio signal flows as follows: bus effects — bus pan — bus volume — bus send.
Using input busses with hardware-based effects
Plug-ins are great, but there are times when you may want the sound of a specific piece of hardware for your tracks. This topic will show
you how to use auxiliary busses and input busses to send a track to an external processor.
1. Connect your effects processor to your audio interface:
a. Connect the input of your effects processor to an output from your sound card (for this example, we'll use LineOut 1).
b. Connect the output of your effects processor to an input on your sound card (for this example, we'll use Inst 1).
2. Add an audio bus to your project. This bus will be used as a destination to send a track to your effects processor.
3. Configure your bus to send its output to your effects processor:
In the I/O control region of the bus's channel strip, click the Output button and choose the output that is connected to your effects
processor's input (LineOut 1/LineOut 2 for this example).
This auxiliary bus provides
a signal path to your
effects processor's input.
172 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Add an input bus to your project. This input bus will receive the signal from your effects processor. For more information, see Adding
5. Configure your input bus to take its input from the effects processor and send its output to your main mix:
a. In the I/O control region of the input bus's channel strip, click the Input Source button and choose the sound card input that is
connected to your effects processor's output (Inst 1 for this example).
b. Click the Output button and choose the output where you want to send your processed signal. We’ll send this signal to the
master bus so it is included with your main mix and will be included when performing a real-time render. For more information,
This input bus provides a signal path from your
effects processor's output to your project.
6. Send your track to the effects processor:
Click the bus button on the track header and choose the bus you created in step 2.
The bus button on the track header
lets you send the track's audio to
your effects processor.
7. Click Play
.
When you play your project, the track is sent to your auxiliary bus, into the effects processor, out of the effects processor into the
input bus, and out to the master bus.
8. When you're ready to render your project, you can use real-time rendering to include the output from your effects processor with
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using input busses with hardware-based synthesizers
If you'd like to use your vintage synth with your ACID project, this topic will show you how to use input busses to send a MIDI track to a
hardware synthesizer.
1. Connect the MIDI Out port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI In port on your synthesizer.
2. Connect the audio output of your synthesizer to an input on your sound card (for this example, we'll use Inst 1).
3. Add an input bus to your project. This input bus will receive the audio signal from your synthesizer. For more information, see
4. Configure your input bus to take its input from the synthesizer and send its output to your main mix:
a. In the I/O control region of the input bus's channel strip, click the Input Source button, and choose the sound card input that
is connected to your synthesizer's output (Inst 1 for this example).
b. Click the Output button and choose the output where you want to send your synthesizer's signal. We’ll send this signal to the
master bus so it is included with your main mix and will be included when performing a real-time render.
This input bus provides a signal path from your
synthesizer's audio output to your project.
5. Send a MIDI track to the synthesizer:
Click the MIDI Output button on the track header and choose the MIDI port where you connected your synthesizer in step 1.
The MIDI Output on the track header lets you
send the track's MIDI to your synthesizer.
6. Click Play
.
When you play your project, the track is sent to your synthesizer, out of the synthesizer into the input bus, and out to the master
bus.
7. When you're ready to render your project, you can use real-time rendering to include the output from your synthesizer with your
174 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring an external source without mixing it with your project
You may not want every signal that goes through the Mixing Console to be mixed with your project. For example, you could set up a
cue (talkback) microphone to communicate between the control room and recording booth.
This topic will show you how to use an input bus to set up a cue microphone.
1. Add an input bus to your project. For more information, see Adding or deleting input busses on page 168.
2. Connect a microphone to an input on your sound card (for this example, we'll use Mic/Inst 1).
3. In the recording booth, connect a pair of powered speakers or a headphone amplifier to an output on your sound card (for this
example, we'll use LineOut 3L/LineOut 4R).
4. Set up your input bus:
a. In the I/O control region of the input bus channel strip, click the Input Source button and choose the sound card input where
your cue microphone is connected:
b. Click the Output button and choose the sound card output where your speaker or headphone amplifier is connected:
When you speak into the cue microphone, its output is sent to the recording booth without being mixed into your project output.
Using FX send (assignable effects) channel strips
A separate channel strip is displayed for each FX send (assignable effects chain) in your project. For information on adding assignable
To show or hide channel strips for assignable effects, click the FX Sends button in the View pane.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing an assignable effect chain’s name
To rename an assignable effects chain, double-click the label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box (or
press F2 to rename the selected assignable effects chain). The channel strip in the Mixing Console is updated when you press Enter.
Adding or editing effects
When the Insert FX control region is visible, each assignable effects chain displays its effects at the top of the channel strip.
To show or hide the Insert FX control region, click the Insert FX button in the View pane.
Each effect is displayed as a button. You can hover over the button to see a ToolTip that displays the full plug-in and preset name.
Adding a plug-in
Click the
button and then choose a new plug-in from the menu to add a new plug-in to the effects chain.
Editing effects settings
Click an effect’s button to display the Audio Plug-In window, where you can adjust the plug-in’s settings.
When you right-click an effect’s button, a shortcut a menu is displayed:
•
•
Choose Show <Plug-In Name> to open the Audio Plug-In window, where you can adjust the plug-in's controls.
Choose Bypass <Plug-In Name> to temporarily bypass a plug-in.
When an effect is bypassed, its button is displayed in red text.
•
•
•
Choose Remove <Plug-In Name> to remove a plug-in from the effects chain.
Choose Presets, and then choose a setting from the submenu to load a new preset.
To replace the current plug-in, right-click the effect’s button, and then choose a new plug-in from the menu. Plug-ins are organized
in submenus by type (EQ, Dynamics, Reverbs, etc.)
176 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting assignable effects input levels
When the Sends control region is visible, each assignable effects chain displays controls you can use to adjust and monitor the input
volume of the effects chain.
To show or hide the Sends control region, click the Sends button in the View pane.
Changing an effects chain’s output device
When the I/O control region is visible, each assignable effects chain displays controls you can use to set the chain’s output device.
To show or hide the I/O control region, click the I/O button in the View pane.
To choose an output device, click the Output button and choose a bus from the menu.
Monitoring output levels
When the Meters control region is visible, each assignable effects chain displays meters you can use to monitor output levels.
To show or hide the Meters control region, click the Meters button in the View pane.
If the Meters control region is not visible, peak meters are displayed in the Faders control region.
Right-click the meter and choose a setting from the shortcut menu to change the resolution and display options.
Muting or soloing an assignable effects chain
When the Faders control region is visible, each assignable effects chain displays Mute
and Solo buttons.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane.
Muting an assignable effects chain
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can click the Mute button
to prevent an assignable effects chain bus
from being played in the mix. Click the Mute button on additional chains to add them to the mute group. To unmute a chain, click the
Mute button again.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Mute button is displayed as , and you can use the button to edit mute
automation on the bus track.
Soloing an assignable effects chain
Click the Solo button to mute all unselected assignable effects chains and busses. Click the Solo button on additional assignable
effects chains or busses to add them to the solo group. To remove a chain from the solo group, click its Solo button again.
Adjusting assignable effects panning or volume
When the Faders control region is visible, each bus displays a Pan slider and a Volume fader.
To show or hide the Faders control region, click the Faders button in the View pane.
USING THE MIXING CONSOLE | 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting panning
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can drag the Pan slider to control the position of the bus in the stereo
field: dragging to the left will place the bus in the left speaker more than the right, and dragging to the right will place the bus in the
right speaker.
You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments, or double-click the slider to return it to 0.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Pan slider handle is displayed as a , and you can use it to edit pan
automation on the bus track.
Note: The trim level is added to the pan automation settings so your panning envelope is preserved, but with an offset applied. For
example, setting the trim control to 9% left has the same effect as moving every envelope point 9% to the left.
Adjusting volume
When the Automation Settings button is not selected, you can drag the Volume fader to control the overall (trim) volume of the bus.
You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments, or double-click the slider to return it to 0.
When the Automation Settings button is selected, the Volume fader handle is displayed as a , and you can use it to edit volume
automation on the bus track.
Note: The trim level is added to the volume automation settings so your envelope is preserved, but with a boost or cut applied. For
example, setting the trim control to -3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB.
178 | CHAPTER 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11
Recording Audio
ACID® software can record audio into multiple mono or stereo audio tracks while simultaneously playing back existing
audio and video tracks. You are limited only by the performance of your computer system and audio hardware. Audio is
recorded to a media file on your computer and into an event on the timeline. You may record into an empty track, a time
selection, an event, or a combination of time and event selection. Audio output from your computer during recording is
not necessarily recorded with the new audio.
Recording does not alter any of the source media files in your project. Even when recording into an existing event, you
are not overwriting the data in that event. Instead, the data is recorded into a new take for that event and saved to a
media file on your hard drive.
For information about real-time MIDI recording, MIDI merge recording, and MIDI step recording, see Recording MIDI on
Setting up your equipment
There are numerous ways to connect your equipment to your system. Refer to your equipment’s documentation for
specific setup instructions. The following are some possible general configurations.
Basic setup
This setup includes a simple microphone and speaker that are connected to the computer’s sound card. With a more
sophisticated microphone, you would typically want to use a preamplifier for input to the sound card.
Sound card out
Sound card in
Setup with mixer
This setup includes a mixer where the speaker and microphone connect. The mixer is then connected to the computer’s
sound card. Mixers usually have preamps built into them. This diagram does not show you an instrument or a physical
preamplifier, such as a rack-mounted component. The reason for this omission is because these types of setups vary
widely based on your mixer, instrument, and pre-amp type. Refer to your components’ documentation for specific setup
configurations.
Mixer out
Sound card out
Sound card in
Mixer in
Mixer
RECORDING AUDIO | 179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup with digital multitrack
This setup includes a digital multitrack recorder with an optional MIDI synchronization component. Usually you would have a mixer, a
microphone, etc. connected to these components. Your particular setup will vary depending on your equipment. Refer to your
components’ documentation for specific setup configurations.
Digital out
Digital in
Sync. out
Digital card
MIDI card
Digital
multitrack
Sync. in
The dashed line indicated an
option if you are synching ACID
software to tape via a MIDI
timecode.
MTC converter
Preparing to record
Before you record, you must arm the tracks into which you will record the new audio. You must also select the recording settings for the
tracks. You have the additional options of using a metronome or turning off playback during recording.
You may record into an empty track, a time selection, an event, or a combination of time and event selection. You can also record
multiple takes for an event so you can maintain multiple versions of an event that you may play back and edit.
Arming the track for recording
Whether recording into an existing track, an empty track, a selected event, or a time selection, you must prepare a track for recording.
You can arm multiple tracks prior to recording.
Click the Arm for Record button ( ) in the track list.
Once a track is armed, a record meter appears in the track list. Depending on your hardware, a record gain fader may also appear.
Using the metronome
A built-in metronome marks time to help with the timing and tempo when recording a performance. The metronome’s sound is not
mixed in the final rendering of the project.
Turning the metronome on or off
From the Options menu, choose Metronome (or click the Metronome button
on the transport bar) to turn the metronome on or
off.
When you start recording or playing your project, the metronome will start playing the project tempo and will follow any tempo or time
signature changes. For example, if you start recording at measure 20 and your project tempo changes at that measure is 160 BPM, the
metronome will play at 160 BPM.
180 | CHAPTER 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The metronome sounds are created by the general MIDI sound set, and the volume of the metronome is determined using the Preview
fader in the Mixing Console.
Notes:
•
•
The metronome’s sound is not mixed in the final rendering of the project.
Before rendering from a ReWire mixer application, turn off the ACID metronome, or the metronome will be included in the rendered
output.
•
The metronome will not follow grooves that you’ve applied to your project. If you want to hear a grooved metronome, use a simple click
loop and apply the desired groove to the track.
Using the metronome to count off for playback or recording
Metronome countoff allows you to use the metronome to count off a set number of bars before beginning recording or playback in the
same way a drummer counts off with her sticks before the band starts playing.
From the Options menu, choose Enable Metronome Countoff (or click the Metronome Countoff
button on the Transport bar)
to turn metronome countoff on or off.
You can click the down arrow next to the button to set countoff options:
Item
Description
Enable Metronome Countoff
Countoff Always On
Turns countoff on or off.
Metronome counts off during playback and recording.
Countoff Only During Playback Metronome counts off during playback only.
When countoff is turned on for playback only the button will display a play icon:
Countoff Only During Recording Metronome counts off during recording only.
When countoff is turned on for recording only, the button will display a record icon:
Sets the number of measures before the cursor position the metronome will count off.
One-Bar Countoff
Two-Bar Countoff
Four-Bar Countoff
Note: Countoff always uses the tempo at the cursor position. Countoff always uses the tempo at the cursor
position. In the following example, if you positioned the cursor at measure three and choose Two-Bar Countoff,
the metronome would count off for two measures at 120 BPM before reaching the cursor position:
Configure Metronome
Displays the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog, where you can choose a metronome sound. For more
Adjusting the metronome’s volume
If you need to adjust the volume of the metronome, drag the Preview fader in the Mixing Console.
If the Preview fader isn’t visible, click the Preview Bus button in the Mixing Console View pane.
RECORDING AUDIO | 181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
You may record into an empty track, a time selection, an event, or a combination of time and event selection. The recording is added to
the timeline as new clip and is saved to a media file on your hard drive.
By default, the Microsoft Sound Mapper is used to record audio. However, you can use the Audio Device tab in the Preferences dialog to
specify a different recording device. For more information, see Using the Audio Device tab on page 257.
Notes:
•
Recorded files are in the folder specified on the Folders tab of the Preference dialog by default. If you want to choose a project-specific
folder, you can use the Recorded files folder box on the Audio tab of the Project Properties dialog. For more information, see Using the
•
•
You can use the ACID type for recorded audio drop-down list on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to indicate whether you want
to create Beatmapped clips of one-shots when recording audio.
Use the Record action when nothing is armed drop-down list on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to indicate whether you want
to create an audio track, a MIDI track, or do nothing if you click the Record button
when no tracks are armed.
Recording into an empty track
1. Select a track. Alternately, to record to a new track, choose Audio Track from the Insert menu.
2. Place the cursor on the timeline where you want to begin recording.
3. Arm the track by clicking the Arm for Record button ( ) on the track.
4. Start recording by clicking the Record button ( ) on the transport bar.
Depending on the recording selection, a waveform is created along the timeline as you record into the armed track(s).
Recorded waveform
Start/stop
recording
Stop recording
5. Stop recording by clicking the Record button ( ) again or the Stop button ( ) on the transport bar.
6. A small dialog opens displaying the name and location of the file or files that were just created. Click Done to return to the main
workspace.
Delete—removes selected file
Rename—changes the name of a selected file
Delete All—removes all files in dialog
Done—returns to track view
When a check mark appears in this box,
ACID software displays this dialog after
each recording session.
182 | CHAPTER 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording into a time selection
By making a time selection, you specify where along the timeline to
record. The time selection also determines how long the software
records. Any selected events that occur within the time selection are
split and the recorded data is placed into the time selection.
The event’s waveform is displayed as it is recorded and automatically
stops recording when the cursor reaches the end of the time selection.
Recorded waveform
Recording into an event
By recording into an event, you automatically create a new clip containing the recorded material that is the same duration as the
selected event. The edges of the selected event serve as the punch-in and -out points that are used for recording. Recording into an
event allows you to establish a pre-roll before recording, which gives you time to prepare before recording starts.
Because the entire recording is saved to the media file (not just the material between the edges of the take), you are not limited to the
recorded material contained in the length of the new clip. You can adjust the edges of the event or slip the contents of the event if
The existing event that you record into is not affected or deleted. Instead, the event now contains two media files, each listed as a
separate clip in the track’s Clip Pool. For more information, see Using the Clip Pool to manage clips on page 104.
1. Place the cursor before the event to allow for pre-roll.
2. Press Ctrl and click the event to select it.
Tip: You can record into multiple events by pressing Ctrl and making selections.
3. Click the Arm for Record button ( ) on the event’s track. When recording into multiple selected events, arm their respective
tracks at this time.
4. Click the Record button ( ) on the transport bar to begin recording.
5. Click the Record button ( ) again or the Stop button ( ) on the transport bar to stop recording.
Recording into an event with a time selection
Recording into a time selection allows for a pre- and post- roll during recording. The time selection is adjustable to increase or decrease
the pre- and post-roll duration. During recording, the selected event’s edges serve as the punch-in and -out points. You can create
multiple punch-in and -out points by selecting more events within the time selection.
You may need to split an existing event into three pieces so that you can select a smaller portion of the event to record into. For more
1. Click the Arm for Record button ( ) on the desired track(s).
2. Select the event to record into.
Tip: You may record into multiple events by pressing Ctrl and making your selections.
3. On the marker bar, drag a time selection. You may adjust the time selection by dragging the selection bar’s starting and ending
points. Make the time selection start before the event for a pre-roll.
4. Click the Record button ( ) on the transport bar to begin recording.
If input monitoring is turned on, the track’s original audio is played until the cursor reaches the selected event. When the cursor
plays through the selected event, you’ll hear your recording input, and the track’s original audio is played again when the cursor
moves past the selected event.
RECORDING AUDIO | 183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using pre-roll
The previous technique allows you to define the playback region with a time selection and sets the punch-in and punch-out points in
the recording to the event boundaries. When you click the Record button, playback begins at the beginning of the time selection. The
event is then filled with the newly recorded material. The audio file that is recorded to your hard disk is the full duration of the time
selection. The event only contains a portion of the full recorded performance and can therefore be trimmed (both shorter and longer)
and repositioned within the event.
Time selection bar -
defines the recorded
audio file’s duration.
Pre-roll
Post-roll
Punch-in
Punch-out
Recording using an input bus
When you use an input bus to record audio, you can include input bus effects with the recorded signal.
For example, imagine that you need to record an electric guitar with an amplifier-modeling plug-in.
Scenario 1: Plug your guitar into your sound card's instrument input and choose that input as your recording input:
In this scenario, you could then add your amplifier-modeling plug-in as a track effect and record with input monitoring on. Your guitar
would be recorded directly (without the plug-in), and the plug-in would be processed each time you play or render your project. This
method allows you to adjust the plug-in settings as you work on your project.
Scenario 2: Set up an input bus that uses your amplifier-modeling plug-in as an insert effect, and choose that input bus as your
recording input:
In this scenario, your amplifier-modeling plug-in is cooked into the recorded signal. This method allows you to record your processed
signal but doesn't allow you to change your amplifier settings without rerecording the guitar part.
1. Add an input bus to your project. For more information, see Adding or deleting input busses on page 168.
2. Set up your input bus:
a. Click the Add New Insert FX button
in the Insert FX control region of the input bus channel strip to add plug-ins to
your input bus. For more information about input bus channel strips, see Using input bus channel strips on page 169.
b. In the I/O control region of the input bus channel strip, click the Input Source button and choose the sound card input you
want to record.
c. Click the Output button in the I/O control region of the input bus channel strip and choose Off. The bus output is left off so we
can monitor the input through the track.
3. Set your track to record from your input bus:
a. Click the Record Input button on the track header, choose Input Busses from the menu, and choose your input bus.
b. Click the Record Input button and choose Input Monitor Mode: On or Input Monitor Mode: Auto so you can hear your input
signal during recording.
•When Auto
is selected, you will hear the input monitor signal when playback is stopped and during recording. If you're
recording into selected events, you'll hear the input monitor signal only when the cursor passes over the selected events.
•When On
is selected, the behavior is similar to Auto mode, but you will always hear the input monitor during recording
— monitoring is not toggled on and off when recording into a selected event.
Important: Your ability to monitor effects in real time is dependent on your computer's performance. Effect automation envelopes are
bypassed during record monitoring.
4. Position the cursor where you want to start recording.
184 | CHAPTER 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Select the Arm for Record buttons ( ) on the track where you want to record. Arming a track enables it for recording.
When a track is armed, the track meter displays the track's level. If input monitoring is not on, the meter displays the level of your
input source. If input monitoring is turned on, the meter shows the level of the input source plus the track effects chain.
6. Click the Record button ( ) on the Transport bar to start recording.
7. To stop recording, click the Record button again or click the Stop button ( ) on the Transport bar. The Recorded Files dialog is
displayed.
8. Use the Recorded Files dialog to confirm the file name and location of your recorded audio. Click Delete or Delete All if you do not
want to save the recorded files, or click Rename to change the file's name.
9. Click Done to close the Recorded Files dialog. Your recorded file is displayed as a new event in the timeline.
Working with multiple recorded clips
Clicking the Loop Playback button ( ) on the transport bar enables you to continually create clips during recording. The last clip
recorded is set as the track’s active clip. You can use clips as different versions of a recorded event that you can quickly switch between
to choose the best one.
During recording with loop playback enabled, the time selection continually repeats and starts recording a new clip until you stop
recording. You can preview, select, rename, and delete clips in the Clip Pool pane of the Track Properties window to manage the clips.
The Clip Properties window will display region markers to represent the selected event’s clip in the waveform. For more information, see
Specifying where recordings are stored
Recorded files are saved in the folder specified on the Folders tab of the Preferences dialog is used by default.
If you want to choose a project-specific recorded files folder, you can use the Recorded files folder box on the Audio tab of the Project
Properties dialog.
Changing where recorded files are stored for new projects
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences.
2. Click the Folders tab.
3. Choose a setting from the Record drop-down list or click the Browse button to choose a folder.
4. Click OK.
Changing where recorded files are stored for individual projects
1. From the File menu, choose Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.
2. Click the Audio tab to display the project’s audio properties.
3. Click the Browse button next to the Recorded files folder box.
4. Browse for the location where you want to save recorded files.
5. Click OK.
RECORDING AUDIO | 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring audio levels
While you’re recording, a responsive meter is provided in the track header to monitor the
incoming signal level of the selected recording device. It is important that you record
with the highest signal possible without clipping.
A reading of 0 dB is the maximum for a digital signal. Clipping occurs when the incoming
signal is too high to be represented as a digital value. The result is distortion in the recording. A clipped signal will be indicated by a red
indicator warning at the end of the meters.
Right-click the meters and choose a command from the shortcut menu to adjust the display of the meters.
Using record input monitoring
If you’re using a low-latency audio device and you want to hear your recording signal with real-time track effects, you can turn on input
monitoring.
To turn on input monitoring, click the Record Device Selector button ( ) and choose Input Monitor Mode: Auto or Input Monitor
Mode: On from the menu. During recording, your signal will be played back with the current track effects chain, but a dry (unprocessed)
signal is recorded.
When Input Monitor Mode: Auto
is selected, you will hear the input monitor signal when playback is stopped and during
recording. If you’re recording into selected events, you'll hear the input monitor signal only when the cursor passes over the selected
events.
When Input Monitor Mode: On
is selected, the behavior is similar to Input Monitor Mode: Auto, but you will always hear the input
monitor during recording—monitoring is not toggled on and off when recording in to a selected event.
Note: Your ability to monitor effects in real time is dependent on your computer's performance. Effect automation envelopes are
bypassed during record monitoring.
186 | CHAPTER 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12
Working with MIDI
ACID® software allows you to record MIDI tracks and edit MIDI in your projects. The software provides two plug-ins: the
piano roll editor and the list editor. You can also render projects with MIDI tracks, play MIDI from an external device, and
synchronize to MIDI timecode (MTC).
Adding MIDI tracks and files
You can add MIDI files to your project or create new MIDI files from scratch. You can use MIDI tracks to record and play
back data from synthesizers and other MIDI-compliant equipment. MIDI tracks can use .mid, .smf, .wav, and .rmi files.
Adding MIDI tracks
To add a new, blank MIDI track to your project do one of the following:
•
•
From the Insert menu, choose MIDI Track
.
Right-click in the timeline and choose Insert MIDI Track.
Tip: You can also add a MIDI track by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Q.
Adding MIDI files to a project
You can add MIDI files to your project just as you would add audio files. You can double-click a MIDI file to create new
tracks and events, or you can drag a MIDI file from the Explorer or Media Manager window to an existing track to add a
new clip.
Note: When you select a MIDI file in the Explorer window, its length, tempo, type, and number of tracks are displayed
at the bottom of the window:
When you right-click a MIDI file in the Explorer window, you can choose how you want to add it to your project:
1. Add to Project — Adds the file to the current ACID project and adds tracks to the track list. No events are created.
•
For Type 0 MIDI files, a separate track is created for each channel in the MIDI file, and all tracks are organized
within a folder track.
•
For Type 1 MIDI files, a separate track is created for each track in the MIDI file, and all tracks are organized within
a folder track.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Add to Project with Events — Adds the file to the current ACID project at the cursor position, adds tracks to the track list, and
creates events for the MIDI note data on each track. Envelopes are added to the tracks to represent MIDI controller data.
•
For Type 0 MIDI files, a separate track is created for each channel in the MIDI file, and all tracks are organized within a folder
track.
•
For Type 1 MIDI files, a separate track is created for each track in the MIDI file, and all tracks are organized within a folder track.
3. Add to Project with Events Rippled — Adds the file to the current ACID project at the cursor position, adds tracks to the track list,
and creates events. Existing events are shifted downstream to make room for your MIDI file. Envelopes are added to the tracks to
represent MIDI controller data.
•
For Type 0 MIDI files, a separate track is created for each channel in the MIDI file, and all tracks are organized within a folder
track.
•
For Type 1 MIDI files, a separate track is created for each track in the MIDI file, and all tracks are organized within a folder track.
4. Open as New Project — Starts a new project, adds tracks to the track list, and creates events for the MIDI note data on each track.
•
•
For Type 0 MIDI files, a separate track is created for each channel in the MIDI file.
For Type 1 MIDI files, a separate track is created for each track in the MIDI file.
Freezing MIDI tracks
Projects that use soft synths can tax your computer's processing and disk resources. Freezing MIDI tracks allows you to convert each
MIDI track to a .wav file, effectively taking your soft synths offline.
Freeze your tracks when you're finished editing them. After freezing, you can adjust track volume and panning only.
Notes:
•
Only tracks that are routed to soft synths can be frozen. Track freeze is unavailable for tracks that are routed to MIDI devices or ReWire
devices, muted, or armed for recording.
•
•
Any VSTi parameter envelopes you have applied to a soft synth bus track are also saved into the frozen .wav file.
The soft synth bus in the Mixing Console window is not frozen. You can continue to work with effects, volume, and panning on the soft
synth bus.
•
If you freeze your MIDI tracks and save your project as an ACID project with embedded media (.acd-zip), the frozen .wav files will be
saved with your project. You can use this method to archive a MIDI project or share your project with a collaborator who doesn't have
all your soft synths.
Freezing selected tracks
1. Select the tracks you want to freeze.
2. Click the Freeze Track button
on a selected track (or right-click a selected track and choose Freeze Track from the shortcut
menu).
The tracks are rendered to .wav format. Please note that render speed is dependent on the soft synth plug-in.
If you freeze a track that is routed to a multiport VST instrument, you'll be prompted to choose which port you want to freeze. VSTi
technology does not allow you to freeze multiple ports.
MIDI track before freezing
MIDI track after freezing—all controls
other than Mute, Solo, Volume, Pan, and
Automation Settings are unavailable.
188 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing frozen tracks
After you freeze a MIDI track, you can adjust track volume and panning only. Trim and automation controls are available in the track
header and Mixing Console.
These controls behave as they do on an audio track. For more information, see Adjusting the mix on page 41.
A frozen MIDI track does not allow you to edit the following:
•
•
Moving, splitting, deleting, and drawing events are not available.
MIDI data — such as inline MIDI editing, continuous controller messages, SYSEX data, volume and pan messages, and voice
changes — is frozen.
•
•
•
MIDI filtering is not available.
MIDI track properties cannot be edited.
The Chopper window is not available.
Unfreezing tracks
1. Select the tracks you want to unfreeze.
2. Click the Freeze Track button
on a selected track (or right-click a selected track and choose Freeze Track from the shortcut
menu to clear the check box).
Recording MIDI
You can use an external MIDI controller (or the keyboard/drum list between the track header and timeline) to record MIDI into your
ACID project.
You can record in real time during project playback by using step recording or MIDI merge recording to build MIDI tracks.
Track-level MIDI input filters—available on the Input Filters tab in the Track Properties window—allow you to control exactly which
MIDI messages you want to record (or exclude) or even split a MIDI keyboard into zones to record into two different tracks at once.
Tip: If you use the keyboard/drum list between the track header and timeline to input MIDI notes, note that the buttons are velocity
sensitive: clicking toward the right side of a button plays the note with a higher velocity setting than clicking toward the left side. The
keyboard/drum list is visible in inline MIDI editing mode.
Important: Attempting to record MIDI controller data over an existing event will overwrite existing note data. If you want to record
controllers over an existing event, use MIDI merge recording. For more information, see Using MIDI merge recording on page 192.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into a track
1. Select the MIDI track you want to record into, or press Ctrl+Alt+Q to add a new, blank MIDI track to your project.
2. Choose a MIDI input port by clicking the MIDI Input button on the track header. Choose a command from the menu:
•
•
•
Auto Input
Input Off
— Uses automatic input routing. The focus track will accept input from any MIDI device.
— Turns off MIDI input to the track.
Hardware Input Port List
— Displays the devices that are selected in the Make these devices available for MIDI input list
on the MIDI tab of the Preferences dialog. Choose the specific device you want to use to send MIDI to the track.
Note: You must choose a specific input port to use MIDI input filters. For more information, see Configuring MIDI input filters on page
•
Soft Synth Input Port List
send MIDI to the track.
— Displays the available soft synths in your project. Choose the soft synth you want to use to
Choose Soft Synth
from the Insert menu and select a soft synth for your project from the Soft Synth Chooser dialog. You
can also select Insert Soft Synth from the Mixing Console window.
3. Choose a MIDI input channel:
•
•
Click the MIDI Input button on the track header.
Choose MIDI Channel from the menu, and choose the MIDI channel you want to send data to the track, or choose All if you
want the track to listen to all channels.
Tip: If you want to select multiple input channels, hold Ctrl and select additional channels from the MIDI Channel submenu.
4. Click the MIDI Input button on the track header and choose Send MIDI Input Thru to MIDI Output from the menu if you want to
echo notes from the MIDI controller to the track's MIDI device or soft synth for monitoring.
5. Click the MIDI Input button on the track header and choose MIDI Input Filters from the menu to open the Track Properties
window. Use the Input Filters tab to specify which MIDI messages you want to record (or exclude). For more information, see
Recording MIDI in real time
With real-time recording, you can record MIDI in real time while your project plays back.
1. Connect a MIDI controller to your computer. If you don't have a MIDI controller, you can use the keyboard in the track view (when
in MIDI timeline editing mode) or the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window. For more information, see Soft Synth Properties
Note: Not all VSTi plug-ins can record using the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window.
2. Select the Arm for Record buttons
on the tracks where you want to record. Arming a track enables it for recording.
3. Choose a MIDI input device and channel for each armed track. For more information, see Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into
If you’re recording using the keyboard in the track view or the Soft Synth Properties window, choose Auto Input.
Click the MIDI Input button on the track header and choose Send MIDI Input Thru to MIDI Output from the menu if you want to
echo notes from the MIDI controller to the track’s MIDI device or soft synth for monitoring.
4. Set up any desired MIDI message, velocity, or quantize filters for your armed tracks. For more information, see Configuring MIDI input
5. Position the cursor where you want to start recording.
190 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Click the Record
button on the transport bar to start recording. MIDI messages from your controller are recorded as you play
them.
•
•
Notes are added to an event in the timeline.
MIDI controller adjustments (such as pitch wheel and modulation wheel movements) are recorded as track envelopes. For
MIDI controllers are recorded in latch mode: envelope points are created when you change a control setting, and recording
continues until you stop playback. When you stop adjusting the control, the control's current setting overwrites the existing
envelope points.
Note: Envelope points are not thinned when recording MIDI controllers from a hardware device.
7. To stop recording, click the Record button again or click the Stop button on the transport bar.
A new clip is created for the recorded MIDI data on each armed track. You can use the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties window
to manage clips.
Note: You can also record into time selections, punch into MIDI events, or record multiple clips (when recording into a selection with
Loop Playback selected) in the same way you record audio.
Using MIDI step recording
Click the MIDI Step Record
button to open the MIDI Step Record dialog, where you can record by specifying the interval between
MIDI messages. Step recording allows you to record notes with very precise timing.
1. Connect a MIDI controller to your computer. If you don't have a MIDI controller, you can use the keyboard in the track view (when
in MIDI timeline editing mode) or the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window.
Note: Not all VSTi plug-ins can record using the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window.
2. Select the Arm for Record
buttons on the tracks where you want to record. Arming a track enables it for recording. If you don't
arm a track for recording, a new MIDI track will be created when you click the MIDI Step Record button.
3. Choose a MIDI input device and channel for each armed track. For more information, see Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into
a track on page 190. If you're recording using the keyboard in the track view or the Soft Synth Properties window, choose Auto
Input. Click the MIDI Input button on the track header and choose Send MIDI Input Thru to MIDI Output from the menu if you
want to echo notes from the MIDI controller to the track's MIDI device or soft synth for monitoring.
4. Set up any desired MIDI message, velocity, or quantize filters for your armed tracks. For more information, see Configuring MIDI input
5. Position the cursor where you want to start recording.
6. Click the MIDI Step Record
button.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Use the MIDI Step Record dialog to set options for recorded MIDI notes.
a. Click the Step size button and choose interval between the beginnings of notes.
Select the Tuplet check box to set irregular intervals. For example, to set a triplet interval in 4/4 time, select the Tuplet check
box and choose 3 in time of 4.
b. Click the Duration button and choose length of the note's sustain. When you choose a duration longer than the step size,
notes will overlap.
c. To set the note-on velocity for recorded notes, type a value in the Velocity box. If you want to record note-on velocity from
your controller, select the As Played check box.
8. MIDI messages from your controller are recorded as you play them, and notes are added to an event in the timeline.
Notes:
•
•
MIDI controller adjustments (such as pitch wheel and modulation wheel movements) are not recorded in step record mode.
If you press a key before releasing the current key, both notes will be recorded at the same timeline position. Release both keys to advance
to the next step.
9. To stop recording, close the MIDI Step Record dialog or click the Stop
button on the transport bar.
Using MIDI merge recording
Click the MIDI Merge Record
button to build a MIDI part by recording repeatedly into a loop region. MIDI merge data is recorded in
real time, and you can add more notes each time recording passes through the loop region.
1. Connect a MIDI controller to your computer. If you don't have a MIDI controller, you can use the keyboard in the track view (when
in MIDI timeline editing mode) or the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window.
Note: Not all VSTi plug-ins can record using the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window.
2. Select the Arm for Record
buttons on the tracks where you want to record. Arming a track enables it for recording. If you don't
arm a track for recording, a new MIDI track will be created when you click the MIDI Step Record button.
3. Choose a MIDI input device and channel for each armed track. For more information, see Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into
4. Set up any desired MIDI message, velocity, or quantize filters for your armed tracks. For more information, see Processing and filtering
5. Click and drag in the marker bar or a blank area of the timeline to create a loop region.
6. Select the Loop Playback
button.
button.
7. Select the MIDI Merge Record
8. Position the cursor at the start of the loop region. If you want to record with pre-roll, you can position the cursor before the loop
region.
192 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Click the Record
button on the transport bar to start recording.
MIDI messages from your controller are recorded as you play them.
•
•
Notes are added to an event in the timeline.
MIDI controller adjustments (such as pitch wheel and modulation wheel movements) are recorded as track envelopes. For
more information, see MIDI controller automation on page 141. MIDI controllers are recorded in touch timeout mode: envelope
points are created or edited when you change a control setting. When you stop adjusting the control, existing envelope points
on the timeline are preserved.
MIDI controllers that are switches (such as a damper pedal) are always recorded in latched mode: envelope points are created
when you change a control setting, and recording continues until you stop playback. When you stop adjusting the control,
the control's current setting overwrites the existing envelope points.
When recording returns to the beginning of the loop region, existing MIDI controller envelopes are unaffected. For example,
you could record note data the first time recording passes through the loop region, record pitch-bend controllers the second
time, and modulation the third time.
Note: Envelope points are not thinned when recording MIDI controllers from a hardware device.
10. To stop recording, click the Record
button again or click the Stop
button on the transport bar.
Editing MIDI on the timeline
Click the Enable Inline MIDI Editing button
to edit MIDI events directly on the timeline. In this mode, you can draw and erase notes
in a piano roll or drum grid view.
A piano roll allows you to edit MIDI notes for
most patches.
A drum grid allows you to edit MIDI notes for soft
synths that have drum maps defined.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you edit a MIDI event, all events that use the same clip will be updated. For more information, see Using clips with tracks on page
Tips:
•
•
•
Hold Ctrl+Shift while double-clicking a MIDI event to enter inline editing mode.
While in inline editing mode, drag over a blank area of the timeline with the Draw tool
While in inline MIDI editing mode, you can hover over a note or velocity stem to view its value in the bottom-right corner of the timeline:
to create a new clip and draw an empty event.
•
If you want to move a MIDI event while in timeline MIDI editing mode, drag the top of the event with the Draw
or Selection
tool:ꢀ
If you want to edit a single event, right-click the event and choose Copy to New Clip from the shortcut menu.
Choosing a drum map or kit for a track
MIDI tracks can display a piano roll or a drum grid. For more information, see Creating or editing drum maps on page 225.
Tracks that are routed to the DLS soft synth will display a drum grid only if a drum map exists for the current patch. You cannot edit
drum maps for GM2 drum kits.
Choosing a drum map or kit
1. Click the Program button
on the track header.
2. Perform one of the following actions:
•
•
If your track is routed to the DLS soft synth, choose Drum Kits from the menu. A submenu displays the available drum kits.
If your track is routed to a MIDI device or a VSTi soft synth, choose Drum Maps from the menu, and then choose Select Drum
Map from the submenu. The Output Settings page of the Track Properties dialog is displayed.
3. Choose the drum map or kit you want to use.
Displaying the piano roll
If your track is routed to a MIDI device or VSTi soft synth, you can switch from a drum grid view to a piano roll view. Click the Program
button , choose Drum Maps, and then choose None.
Navigating the piano roll or drum grid
In inline MIDI editing mode, adjusting the height of the track will allow you to see more or less of the piano roll or drum grid. After you
set the height of the track, you can use the following methods to navigate.
194 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scroll vertically
Perform any of the following actions to scroll vertically within a track:
•
Use the scroll buttons at the left edge of the track to scroll up or down:
Piano roll
Drum grid
•
•
•
With the Draw
or Selection
tool, hover over the timeline and hold Ctrl while rolling the mouse wheel forward or back.
Hold Ctrl while dragging the keyboard/drum list up or down.
Hover over the keyboard/drum list and roll the mouse wheel forward or back.
Zoom note height
Perform either of the following actions to zoom note height:
•
•
With the Draw
or Selection
tool, hover over the timeline and hold Ctrl+Alt while rolling the mouse wheel forward or back.
Hover over the keyboard and hold Shift while rolling the mouse wheel forward or back.
Zoom note width
Note width is based on the horizontal zoom level of the timeline. Use the zoom controls in the lower-right corner of the timeline (or
hover over the timeline and roll the mouse wheel forward or back) to zoom in or out.
Auditioning notes with the keyboard/drum grid
You can use the keyboard/drum grid between the track header and timeline to audition the track's MIDI output or record MIDI. When
you click the keys, the note is played using the appropriate patch at the cursor position.
These buttons are velocity sensitive: clicking toward the right side of a button plays the note with a higher velocity setting than clicking
toward the left side.
Clicking toward the right side of the keyboard (or
drum list) plays the note with a higher velocity.
Clicking toward the left side of the keyboard (or
drum list) plays the note with a lower velocity.
Audio driver latency can limit your ability to preview DLS voices in real time. Using low-latency drivers will produce the best results.
Selecting notes
You can select individual and groups of notes with the Draw
and Selection
tools.
Selecting individual notes
Click individual notes with the Draw
selection.
or Selection
tool to select them. Hold Ctrl while clicking to add or remove notes from the
WORKING WITH MIDI | 195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting groups of notes
Drag with the Selection
tool to draw selection boxes around the notes you want to include. The Selection tool can
draw three types of selection boxes:
Free selection The default behavior of the tool. Click to select individual notes (hold Shift or Ctrl
to select multiple notes). Drag to draw a rectangular region that begins where
you start drawing and ends where you release the mouse button. All notes
inside the region will be selected. This method is good for selecting a group of
notes that are close together.
Vertical
Can be used to easily select all notes that occur within a time range. The vertical
selection box automatically selects all of the notes between your first mouse
click and where you draw the selection box; even notes that are not visible at the
current magnification are selected.
Horizontal
Can be used to easily select all notes on a single or multiple adjacent rows. The
horizontal selection box automatically selects all notes on a row that is touched
by the selection box; even notes that are not visible at the current magnification
are selected.
To change the type of selection box you are using, right-click the mouse while holding down the left mouse button.
Clicking the right mouse button will toggle through the three types of selection boxes.
Adding or deleting notes
1. Click the Enable Inline MIDI Editing button
.
2. Use the scroll buttons at the left edge of the track to navigate the piano roll/drum grid:
Tip: Drag the bottom border of the track header to increase the height of the track.
3. Select an editing tool.
Tool
Icon
Description
Draw
Allows you to insert, edit, select, and move notes.
In drum-grid mode, the Draw and Paint tools both draw fixed-length note events.
Paint
Allows you to insert notes of a specific length.
The Paint tool is different from the Draw tool in that it can cross note row boundaries. Use the Paint tool to add a
random element to your ACID projects.
Note: In drum-grid mode, the Draw and Paint tools both draw fixed-length note events.
Using the Paint tool:
•
•
Click the down arrow next to the Paint tool button and choose a note length from the menu.
Click the Paint tool button to select the tool. The Paint tool is selected, and notes will be painted using the
selected note length.
Note: Right-click with the Paint tool to erase notes.
Erase
Allows you to remove existing notes.
196 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Inside an event, drag in the row for the pitch you want to create to create a new note, or click an existing note with the Erase tool
to remove it. If you draw or paint notes beyond the event edge, the event is automatically extended. Hold Shift while dragging
to override horizontal snapping (press Shift after you click).
Tip: In inline MIDI editing mode, drag in the top portion of the track to create a new event using the active clip.
Editing note positions
1. Click the Enable Inline MIDI Editing button
.
2. Use the scroll buttons at the left edge of the track to navigate the piano roll/drum grid:
3. Select the notes you want to edit by doing either of the following:
•
•
Click a note with the Draw tool
to select it. You can hold Ctrl while clicking to select multiple notes.
Use the Selection tool
want to edit.
to select multiple events by clicking and dragging to create a selection box around the notes you
4. Drag notes left or right to change their position on the timeline, or drag up or down to assign a note to a different pitch.
Tips:
•
•
Hold Shift while dragging to override horizontal snapping (press Shift after you click).
Hold Alt while dragging to constrain to horizontal or vertical movement.
•
With the Draw
and Selection
tools you can cut, copy, and paste MIDI notes.
Editing note duration
1. Click the Enable Inline MIDI Editing button
2. Select the Draw tool
.
.
3. Use the scroll buttons at the left edge of the track to navigate the piano roll/drum grid:
4. Drag either edge of a note. The edge of the note moves, changing its duration:
Hold Shift while dragging to override horizontal snapping (press Shift after you click).
WORKING WITH MIDI | 197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing note velocity
Note velocity is represented in the timeline by velocity stems. To show or hide velocity stems in inline MIDI editing mode, choose Show
Inline MIDI Editing from the View menu, and then choose Show Note-On Velocities or Show Note-Off Velocities from the submenu.
1. Click the Enable Inline MIDI Editing button
2. Select the Draw tool
.
.
3. If velocity stems aren't already displayed, choose Show Inline MIDI Editing from the View menu, and then choose Show Note-On
Velocities or Show Note-Off Velocities from the submenu.
Tips: Press F while inline MIDI editing mode to toggle the display of velocity stems.
4. Drag the top of the stem (for note-on velocity
or for note-off velocity ) up to increase the note's velocity, or drag down to
decrease velocity. If multiple notes are selected, the velocities of all selected notes are adjusted at the same time.
Tips:
•
•
Double-click the top of a velocity stem to set the note's velocity to the default value (64).
Right-click a note and choose Velocity from the shortcut menu. You can then choose a command from the submenu to
set the note-on velocity.
•
If multiple notes are selected, you can edit the velocities of all selected notes simultaneously.
Processing and filtering MIDI events
From the Edit menu, choose MIDI Processes and Filters to apply destructive editing to MIDI events on the timeline. You can quantize
data in events, edit velocity values, change the duration of an event, or transpose MIDI data.
198 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quantizing MIDI events
1. From the Edit menu, choose MIDI Processes and Filters. The MIDI Processes and Filters dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Quantize tab.
3. Select your quantization options:
Item
Description
Quantize start
Select this check box to force the beginning (note-on messages) of MIDI events to a specified resolution
on the grid.
Quantize release Select this check box to force the end (note-off messages) of MIDI events to a specified resolution on the
grid.
Preserve duration If you select Quantize start or Quantize release, you can select this check box to maintain the lengths of
notes.
Quantize grid
Tuplet
Click an icon to select the resolution of the quantize grid.
Select this check box to set irregular beat boundaries for the quantize grid. For example, to quantize to
triplet beat boundaries in 4/4 time, select the Tuplet check box and choose 3 in time of 4.
Offset by
Swing
Select the check box and type a value in the box to offset the quantize grid by the specified number of
ticks. You can type negative values to shift the grid backward.
Drag the slider to add a swing to the quantize grid. When you set this slider to 0, notes are quantized
directly to the grid. Increasing the setting shifts every other grid boundary forward: set to 300% to shift
every other grid boundary to the next grid division.
Strength
Drag the slider to adjust how strictly you want to quantize. For example, to quantize directly to the grid,
set the slider to 100%. If you set the slider to 50%, a note that would be shifted 4 ticks is moved only 20
ticks.
4. Select the tracks or events you want to quantize:
•
•
Select a track to quantize all events on the track. Hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking a track header to select multiple tracks.
If you want to quantize multiple events on multiple tracks, hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking the events to select them, and then
select the tracks.
•
If a selected event has note events selected, only the selected notes will be quantized.
Note: Muted tracks will not be quantized.
5. Click the Apply button.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing velocity
1. From the Edit menu, choose MIDI Processes and Filters. The MIDI Processes and Filters dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Velocity tab.
3. Select a check box to indicate whether you want to edit note-on or note-off velocities:
Item
Description
Change Start Velocity
Change Release Velocity
Select this check box to edit note-on velocities.
Select this check box to edit note-off velocities.
4. Select a radio button to indicate how you want to change velocity:
Item
Description
Invert
Select this radio button to invert selected note velocities. When you invert a velocity, it is subtracted from
127 (negative values are forced to positive) so a note with a velocity of 127 will be 0 after inversion, a
velocity of 10 will be 117, and so on.
Set to
Add
Select this radio button and drag the slider to change note velocities to a specific value.
Select this radio button and drag the slider to add (or subtract) a constant offset to selected note
velocities.
Scale by
Limit
Select this radio button and drag the slider to multiply selected note velocities by a percentage. For
example, setting this slider to 50% would reduce all note-on or note-off velocities by half.
Select this radio button and type values in the Min and Max boxes to restrict selected note velocities to
the specified range. For example, if you type 40 in the Min box and 90 in the Max box, velocities below 40
will be set to 40, velocities greater than 90 will be set to 90, and velocities between 40 and 90 will be
unaffected
Change over time Select this radio button and type values in the From and To boxes to change velocity values gradually
over time. The velocity for the first note in the selection is set to the From value, and the velocity for the
last note in the selection is set to the To value. Select the By percentage check box to change velocity
over time based on the current values. For example, to fade a selection in, select the By percentage check
box and type 1 in the From box and 100 in the To box. To fade a selection out, type 100 in the From box
and 1 in the To box. Drag the Curve slider to choose the fade curve that will be used to generate velocity
for notes between the first and last note.
Note: Note-on velocities are bound between 1 and 127 while note-off velocities are bound between 0 and 127.
200 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Select the tracks or events you want to edit:
•
•
Select a track to edit all events on the track. Hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking a track header to select multiple tracks.
If you want to edit multiple events on multiple tracks, hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking the events to select them, and then
select the tracks.
•
If a selected event has note events selected, only the selected notes will be edited.
Note: Muted tracks will not be edited.
6. Click the Apply button.
Editing duration
1. From the Edit menu, choose MIDI Processes and Filters. The MIDI Processes and Filters dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Duration tab.
3. Select a radio button to indicate how you want to change a note duration:
Item
Description
Change by
Select this radio button, and then choose a setting from the drop-down list:
•
Setting duration to — Allows you to set notes to a specific duration.
Click the down arrow next to the selected note size and choose the desired note duration from the
menu. Choose User size to type a duration in beats.ticks in the edit box: for example, type 2.000 for
two beats, or type 0.200 for 200 ticks.
•
•
Adding to duration — Allows you to add a constant value to existing note durations.
Click the down arrow next to the selected note size and choose the amount you want to add to notes.
Subtracting from duration — Allows you to subtract a constant value from existing note durations.
Click the down arrow next to the selected note size and choose the amount you want to subtract from
notes.
Scale by
Select this radio button and drag the slider to multiply selected note durations by a percentage. For
example, setting this slider to 200% would double note durations.
Select the Change start times check box if you want to change the start times of notes while changing
duration.
For example, if you set the Scale by slider to 50% and select the Change start times check box, you can
compress notes so they play in double time. If you set the Scale by slider to 50% and clear the Change
start times check box, note durations will be shorter, but their positions on the timeline will not change.
Limit
Select this radio button and choose Min and Max values to restrict note durations to the specified range.
For example, if you choose an eighth note as the Min setting and a half note as the Max setting, sixteenth
notes will be changed to eighth notes, and whole notes will be changed to half notes. Notes between the
Min and Max settings are unaffected.
4. Select the tracks or events you want to edit:
•
•
Select a track to edit all events on the track. Hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking a track header to select multiple tracks.
If you want to edit multiple events on multiple tracks, hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking the events to select them, and then
select the tracks.
•
If a selected event has note events selected, only the selected notes will be edited.
Note: Muted tracks will not be edited.
5. Click the Apply button.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing MIDI track properties
From the View menu, choose Track Properties to display the Track Properties window. The contents of the Track Properties window
reflect the currently selected track.
For MIDI tracks, you can use the Output Settings tab to adjust MIDI controllers, voices, and drum maps. You can use the Input Filters tab
set up MIDI message, velocity, or quantize filters. You can use the Clip Pool tab to organize each track's media and enable looped or one-
Configuring MIDI track output settings
You can use the Output Settings tab on the configure which controllers can be automated; add, remove, or hide envelopes; set default
values, and set each envelope's default fade curve.
Controller automation
1. From the View menu, choose Track Properties. The Track Properties dialog is displayed.
2. Select the check box for each controller you want to automate with an envelope. If the controller you want to automate isn't
displayed, select the Show all controllers check box at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Click the down arrow
in the Envelope box and choose a command from the menu:
Command
Description
Insert Envelope
If the controller does not have an automation envelope, No is displayed. Click the down arrow
and choose Insert Envelope to add an automation envelope to the timeline.
Show/Hide Envelope
Reset all envelope points
Delete Envelope
If the controller has an automation envelope, Visible or Hidden is displayed. Click the down
arrow
and choose Hide Envelope or Show Envelope to toggle its display.
Click the Hide all Envelopes button at the bottom of the dialog to hide all controller envelopes
on the track.
If the controller has an automation envelope, you can click the down arrow
and choose
Reset all envelope points to restore all points to the default value
Click the Reset all envelope points button at the bottom of the dialog to set all points on all
controller envelopes on the track to the default value.
If the controller has an automation envelope, you can click the down arrow
and choose
Delete Envelope to remove the envelope all envelope points from the timeline.
Click the Remove all Envelopes button at the bottom of the dialog to delete all controller
envelopes on the track.
202 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Double-click the Def box and type a new value to change the default setting for a controller. This value is used when you reset
envelope points.
5. Click the down arrow
in the Curve Type box to set the default fade curve for each controller's automation envelope. The new
curve type will be applied to all segments on the envelope. You can right-click a segment and choose a new fade curve to override
the default curve type.
6. Click the Save button if you want to save the current settings as a mapping file, or click Load to browse to a mapping file that will
replace the current settings.
Note: You can also select controllers by doing either of the following:
•
•
Double-click the MIDI track icon
menu.
Click the Program button , choose Select Program Change.
to open Track Properties dialog. On the Output Setting tab, choose Controllers from the drop-down
Tip: You can MIDI merge recording to record MIDI controller values from a MIDI device. For more information, see Using MIDI merge
Setting the track voice
You can set the voice used to play the entire track, or you can add keyframes to add program changes.
1. Right-click the track header, choose Insert/Remove Envelopes, and then choose Configure Controllers from the menu. The Track
Properties dialog is displayed.
2. On the Output Settings tab, choose Voices from the drop down menu.
3. Choose the voice you want to use.
Note: You can also set the track voice by doing the following:
•
•
Double-click the MIDI track icon
Click the Program button , choose Select Program Change, and then choose Voices from the drop-down menu.
to open Track Properties dialog. On the Output Setting tab, choose Voices from the drop-down menu.
Changing the track voice
1. Click the Program button
.
2. Choose a program from the menu, or choose Select Program Change to display the Output Settings tab in the Track Properties
window, where you can select a patch.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the track does not contain program change keyframes, the selected patch is used to play the entire track. If the track contains
keyframes, the selected patch is assigned to the keyframe that occurs before the current cursor position.
Note: You can also select drum maps by doing either of the following:
•
•
Double-click the MIDI track icon
menu.
Click the Program button , choose Drum Maps and then Select Drum Map.
to open Track Properties dialog. On the Output Setting tab, choose Drum Map from the drop-down
Changing the patch for a hardware synth
If your track is routed to a hardware synth, there are several ways to change patches:
•
•
Click the Program button
and choose Synth Control of Patch if you want to change patches using the synth's controls.
Click the Program button
and choose Use Program Change and Bank if you want to change patches by specifying the
program, MSB, and LSB values. Double-click the values in the track header to edit them:
•
If you've created a patch map for your device, click the Program button
and choose Use Device Patch Map to return to the
device's patch map. You can then choose a patch by clicking the Program button and choosing a patch from the menu. (For
more information about creating patch maps and assigning them to hardware devices, click here.)
Selecting a drum map for a track
1. Right-click the track header, choose Insert/Remove Envelopes, and then choose Configure Controllers from the menu. The Track
Properties dialog is displayed.
2. Under the Output Settings tab, select Drum Map from the drop down menu.
3. Choose the drum map you want to use.
Note: You can also select drum maps by doing any of the following:
•
•
Double-click the MIDI track icon
menu.
Click the Program button , choose Drum Maps, and then choose Select Drum Map.
to open Track Properties dialog. On the Output Setting tab, choose Drum Map from the drop-down
204 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring MIDI input filters
You can use the Input Filters tab set up MIDI message, velocity, or quantize filters.
Setting up MIDI message input filters
Use the Input Filters tab to choose which notes or other MIDI messages you want to record or exclude from MIDI recordings.
1. Select the track where you want to apply the filter.
2. From the View menu, choose Track Properties.
3. In the Track Properties dialog, click the Input Filters tab.
4. Choose Message Filter from the drop-down list at the top of the page.
5. Select the Enable check box.
6. Select your recording options.
Item
Description
Record all
Select this radio button if you want to record all MIDI messages from the input port.
Select this radio button if you want to choose which MIDI messages you want to record.
Record selected items
Record unselected items Select this radio button if you want to choose which MIDI messages you want to ignore when
recording.
7. Choose a setting from the MIDI Message Type drop-down list. The box at the bottom of the page displays the available MIDI
messages.
8. Select the check box for each MIDI message that you want to filter. When editing note messages, you can double-click the Min and
Max boxes to type the notes you want to filter.
Tips:
•
•
•
If you're recording into two tracks, you can use note message filters to split your keyboard and create two separate parts. For example, set
track 1 to record only notes A1 to B4, and set track 2 to record only notes C5 to C9. If you assign track 1 to a plucked string bass soft synth
and track 2 to a grand piano synth, the low notes you play on your keyboard will be recorded only on track 1 and will be voiced by the
bass. The high notes you play will be recorded only on track 2 and will be voiced by the piano.
Filtering continuous controller messages allows you to control exactly which continuous controllers are recorded. For example, if you
wanted to make sure you didn't accidentally record modulation automation by bumping your keyboard's modulation wheel, you could
select the Record unselected items radio button, choose Continuous Controllers from the MIDI Message Type drop-down list, and
then select the Modulation check box.
Excluding system exclusive messages during recording can improve performance during real-time recording and when using MIDI thru.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up MIDI velocity input filters
Use the Input Filters tab to modify or limit note-on and note-off velocity from a track's MIDI input device during recording.
1. Select the track where you want to apply the filter.
2. In the Track Properties dialog, click the Input Filters tab.
3. Choose Velocity from the drop-down list at the top of the page.
4. Select the Enable check box.
5. Select a check box to indicate whether you want to edit note-on or note-off velocities:
Item
Description
Change Start Velocity
Select this check box to edit note-on velocities.
Change Release Velocity Select this check box to edit note-off velocities.
6. Select a radio button to indicate how you want to change velocity:.
Item
Description
Invert
Select this radio button to invert note velocities. When you invert a velocity, it is subtracted from 127 (negative
values are forced to positive), so a note with a velocity of 127 will be 0 after inversion, a velocity of 10 will be
117, and so on).
Set to
Add
Select this radio button and drag the slider to change note velocities to a specific value.
Select this radio button and drag the slider to add (or subtract) a constant offset to note velocities.
Scale by
Select this radio button and drag the slider to multiply note velocities by a percentage. For example, setting
this slider to 50% would reduce all note-on or note-off velocities by half.
Limit
Select this radio button and type values in the Min and Max boxes to restrict note velocities to the specified
range. For example, if you type 40 in the Min box and 90 in the Max box, velocities below 40 will be set to 40,
velocities greater than 90 will be set to 90, and velocities between 40 and 90 will be unaffected.
Note: Note-on velocities are bound between 1 and 127, and note-off velocities are bound between 0 and 127.
206 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up MIDI quantize input filters
Use the Input Filters tab to force notes from a track's input port to align with musical beats during recording.
1. Select the track where you want to apply the filter.
2. In the Track Properties dialog, click the Input Filters tab.
3. Choose Quantize from the drop-down list at the top of the page.
4. Select the Enable check box.
5. Select your quantization options:
Item
Description
Quantize start
Select this check box to force the beginning (note-on messages) of MIDI events to a specified resolution
on the grid.
Quantize release Select this check box to force the end (note-off messages) of MIDI events to a specified resolution on the
grid.
Preserve duration If you select Quantize start or Quantize release, you can select this check box to maintain the lengths of
notes.
Quantize grid
Tuplet
Click an icon to select the resolution of the quantize grid.
Select this check box to set irregular beat boundaries for the quantize grid. For example, to quantize to
triplet beat boundaries in 4/4 time, select the Tuplet check box and choose 3 in time of 4.
Offset by
Swing
Select the check box and type a value in the box to offset the quantize grid by the specified number of
ticks. You can type negative values to shift the grid backward.
Drag the slider to add a swing to the quantize grid. When you set this slider to 0, notes are quantized
directly to the grid. Increasing the setting shifts every other grid boundary forward: set to 300% to shift
every other grid boundary to the next grid division.
Strength
Drag the slider to adjust how strictly you want to quantize. For example, to quantize directly to the grid,
set the slider to 100%. If you set the slider to 50%, a note that would be shifted 4 ticks is moved only 20
ticks.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the clip pool
You can use the Clip Pool to organize each track’s media and enable looped or one-shot drawing for MID events.
1. Select a track.
2. From the View menu, choose Track Properties. The Track Properties dialog is displayed.
3. Select the Clip Pool tab.
Tips: You can also access the clip pool by doing the following:
•
•
Double-click the MIDI track icon
Click the Paint Clip Selector button and then choose Clip Pool.
to open Track Properties dialog. Click the Clip Pool tab from the drop-down menu.
Toggling looped or one-shot painting for a MIDI clip
Select the Loop button
icon in the track list.
on the Clip Pool if you want a MIDI clip to repeat when painted on the timeline. Loop clips are displayed with
a
Deselect the Loop button
if you want a MIDI clip to be treated as a one-shot. One-shot clips are displayed with a icon.
Editing a MIDI clip’s time signature
To change a MIDI clip's time signature, right-click a clip on the Clip Pool tab, choose Time Signature from the shortcut menu, and then
choose a time signature from the submenu.
The time signature you choose will be used to display the grid on the piano roll editor and to display M.B.T (measure.beat.tick) values on
the list editor.
MIDI Track Envelopes and Keyframes
With MIDI track envelopes, you can adjust volume, panning, controller parameters, program changes, or Sysex commands dynamically
over the duration of a track.
You can automate VSTi parameters using envelopes on the soft synth bus track.
To record track automation using the controls in the track header, select the Automation Settings button
. When the button is not
selected, the controls adjust static (trim) levels.
Tips: You can use the Display tab in the Preferences dialog to change the colors used to draw track envelopes. Using custom envelope
colors can help you avoid getting lost in a maze of envelopes when you're using track envelopes to control MIDI controllers. For more
208 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a mute envelope
1. Select a MIDI track.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Envelopes, or right-click in the track list and choose Insert/Remove Envelope from the shortcut
menu.
3. From the submenu, choose Mute. A check mark is displayed next to the command, and an envelope is added to the timeline.
Mute automation is either on or off with no fade between the on and off states. If you want to use fades, apply volume automation.
4. If you want to change the track's mute state throughout the track, edit the envelope in the timeline. For more information, see
5. If you want to change the track's mute state by recording automation settings, select the Automation Settings button
in the
track header.
6. Click the Mute button in the track header to change the track's mute automation state at the cursor position.
The button behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode:
•
•
When the track automation mode is set to Off, the button mutes the entire track.
When the track has a mute envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read, the button changes state to reflect the
envelope setting during playback but cannot be adjusted.
•
When the track has a mute envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch, the button edits the envelope
setting at the cursor position.
Notes: When you apply mute automation to a track, it's possible to have a track that is muted and soloed simultaneously if you use the
Mute and Solo buttons in the track header. The mute state overrides the solo state:
•
•
If a track's Solo button is selected, the track is included in the solo group, but it will be muted whenever the mute automation is set to mute
the track.
If the track's Mute button is selected, the track is muted regardless of the mute automation settings.
Adding a MIDI controller envelope
1. Select the track where you want to add or remove the envelope.
2. Perform one of the following actions:
•
•
•
Click the Insert/Hide Envelope button
next to the controller's slider in the track header.
From the Insert menu, choose Envelopes, and then choose a controller type.
Right-click the track header, choose Insert/Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu, and then choose a controller type.
If the controller you want to adjust is not displayed in the menu, choose Configure Controllers from the menu. You can use
the Output Settings tab of the Track Properties window to configure which controllers are available on the track.
3. If you want to change the controller setting throughout the track, edit the envelope in the timeline. For more information, see
4. If you want to change controller settings by recording automation, click the Automation Settings button
in the track header.
The slider handles are displayed as in automation mode.
Tip: If you want to record MIDI controller envelopes into a track using a hardware controller, you can use MIDI merge recording to record
WORKING WITH MIDI | 209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Drag a slider to edit automation settings at the cursor position.
The track header controls behave differently depending on the track's automation recording mode:
•
•
•
When the track automation mode is set to Off, the controls adjust the level of the entire track. In this mode, the automation
envelope is bypassed, and the control does nothing.
When the track has a controller envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read, the control will follow the envelope
during playback but cannot be adjusted.
When the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch, the control edits the envelope setting at the cursor position. If the
track does not have an envelope, an envelope will be added when you adjust the control.
If multiple tracks are selected, all selected tracks are adjusted.
Configuring MIDI track controller automation
You can use the Output Settings tab in the MIDI Track Properties dialog to configure which controllers can be automated; add, remove,
or hide envelopes; set default values; and set each envelope's default fade curve. For more information, see Configuring MIDI track output
Resetting a MIDI controller envelope’s points
Perform either of the following actions to reset an envelope's points to their default values:
•
Click the down arrow
next to the Insert/Hide Envelope button
next to the controller's slider in the track header and
choose Reset All Envelope Points.
•
Right-click the envelope and choose Reset All from the shortcut menu.
You can set the default value for each continuous controller on the Output Settings tab in the Track Properties dialog. For more
Deleting a MIDI controller envelope
Click the down arrow
next to the Insert/Hide Envelope button
next to the controller's slider in the track header and choose
Delete Envelope.
Adding a program change keyframe
If you want to show or hide an envelope without deleting its settings, click the Insert/Hide Envelope button
.
To add a program change keyframe:
1. Click the Program button and choose Insert Program Change Keyframe. The program change keyframe row is displayed at the
bottom of the track.
2. Using the Draw
or Envelope
tool, double-click in the track's keyframe row to add a keyframe.
3. To edit a keyframe, double-click it to display the Output Settings tab in the Track Properties window, and then select the patch you
want to assign to the keyframe.
210 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add a Sysex keyframe
1. Right-click the track header, choose Insert/Remove Envelope, and then choose Insert Sysex from the submenu.
2. Using the Draw
or Envelope
tool, double-click in the track's keyframe row to add a keyframe.
3. To edit a keyframe, double-click it to display the System Exclusive Editor dialog.
Tip: To hide the Sysex keyframe row without removing keyframes, right-click the track header, choose Insert/Remove Envelope, and
then choose Hide Sysex from the submenu. You can view the keyframe row again by right-clicking the track header, choosing Insert/
Remove Envelope, and then choosing Show Sysex.
Automating VSTi parameters
You can use the soft synth bus track to control parameter automation for VST instruments.
Adding parameter automation envelopes
1. Select the bus track header for a VSTi soft synth.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Envelopes, and then choose Soft Synth Automation from the submenu. The Soft Synth Parameter
Automation dialog is displayed.
3. Select the check box for each parameter you want to automate with an envelope.
4. Click the down arrow
in the Envelope box and choose a command from the menu:
Item Description
Insert Envelope If the parameter does not have an automation envelope, No is displayed.
Click the down arrow
and choose Insert Envelope to add an automation envelope to the timeline.
Show/Hide
Envelope
If the parameter has an automation envelope, Visible or Hidden is displayed.
Click the down arrow
and choose Hide Envelope or Show Envelope to toggle its display.
Click the Hide all Envelopes button at the bottom of the window to hide all envelopes on the bus track.
Reset All
Envelope Points
If the parameter has an automation envelope, you can click the down arrow
Envelope Points to restore all points to the default value.
and choose Reset All
Click the Reset all Envelopes button at the bottom of the window to set all points on all envelopes on the
bus track to the default value.
Delete Envelope
If the parameter has an automation envelope, you can click the down arrow
and choose Delete
Envelope to remove the envelope and all envelope points from the timeline.
Click the Remove all Envelopes button at the bottom of the window to delete all parameter envelopes
on the bus track.
5. Click the down arrow
in the Curve Type box to set the default fade curve for each parameter's automation envelope. The new
curve type will be applied to all envelope segments. You can right-click a segment and choose a new fade curve to override the
default curve type.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing parameter automation envelopes
You can edit mute automation settings by adding an envelope to the bus track or by using the controls in the Soft Synth Properties
1. Select the Automation Settings button
.
2. Click to position the cursor in the timeline where you want to edit a parameter.
3. You can adjust automated parameters by editing the envelopes in the timeline or by recording automation with the controls in the
The controls in the Soft Synth Properties window behave differently if the track has automation envelopes and when you change
the track automation recording mode:
•
•
•
When the track automation mode is set to Off, the controls in the Soft Synth Properties window affect the entire bus track (and
all tracks routed to the soft synth).
When the track has automation envelopes and the track automation mode is set to Read, the Soft Synth Properties controls
change state to reflect the envelope setting during playback but cannot be adjusted.
When the track has automation envelopes and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch, the Soft Synth Properties
controls edit the envelope setting at the cursor position.
Editing MIDI clip properties
From the View menu, choose Clip Properties (or Ctrl+Alt+3) to display the Clip Properties window. You can also get to the Clip
Properties window by double-clicking the track icon
one of the clips to open the Clip Properties dialog.
and selecting the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties window. Double-click
The contents of the Clip Properties window will change to display properties for the currently selected clip in the timeline. You can use
the Clip Properties window to edit MIDI data using the list editor or piano roll.
Tip: When the Clip Properties window is undocked, you can double-click its title bar to toggle its size — especially handy when
you’re using the piano roll.
Editing a MIDI clip with the Piano Roll
The piano roll editor is a OPT plug-in that you can use to create and edit note events within the ACID Clip Properties window for a MIDI
Editing a MIDI clip with the List Editor
The List Editor tab is an OPT plug-in that you can use to perform detailed filtering and editing within the Clip Properties window for a
Merging controller data from a MIDI clip
If you use MIDI clips that contain MIDI controller data, the controller data will not be displayed in the timeline by default.
Right-click the event on the timeline and choose Merge Envelope Data from the shortcut menu to represent MIDI controllers as
envelopes on the timeline.
Note: The Merge Envelope Data command is not available in inline MIDI editing mode. For more information, see Editing MIDI on the
Tip: When Lock Envelopes to Events is selected from the Options menu, envelope points will move with an event as you move it along
the timeline. When Lock Envelopes to Events is not selected, you can move events and envelopes independently.
212 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the piano roll editor
The piano roll editor is an OPT plug-in that you can use to create and edit note events within the Clip Properties window for a MIDI clip.
The top pane of the piano roll editor displays note information like a sequencer or a roll from a player piano. Each note is represented by
a rectangular note event of a certain length and pitch. The piano keys along the left side of the window indicate the pitch of a note
event. The beat ruler across the top of the window shows the length and location of a note event.
The lower pane of the piano roll editor displays velocity information for each note event. A transport bar for previewing MIDI appears at
the bottom of the window.
Viewing the piano roll editor
1. Double-click the MIDI icon ( ) on the track header to open the Track Properties window.
2. Select the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties dialog.
3. Double-click one of the listed clips to open the Clip Properties dialog.
4. Click the Piano Roll Editor tab. The piano roll editor appears.
Pitch and length
Velocity
Middle C
Transport bar
Previewing MIDI
You can preview the entire MIDI file, a loop selection, or single notes using the piano roll editor.
Tip: To control volume during playback in the piano roll editor, drag the Preview fader in the Mixing Console window.
Previewing the MIDI file
Use the transport bar buttons at the bottom of the piano roll editor to play your MIDI.
Tip: You can use the Solo button ( ) to solo a particular MIDI track during preview playback.
Previewing a selection in looped playback
You can preview a selection in looped playback just as you would in the main ACID window.
1. Drag the handles of the loop bar in the piano roll editor to create the desired loop region.
2. Click the Loop Playback button ( ) to turn on looped playback.
3. Click the transport bar’s Play button ( ) or press Space. The piano roll editor loops the playback of the selected area. To stop
playback, click the transport bar’s Stop button ( ) or press Space.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding note events
You can add note events using the Draw tool (
) or the Paint tool (
) in the same way you do in the main ACID window.
Tip: As you drag to create new events, the event edge snaps to the divisions on the beat ruler. To snap to smaller divisions, click the
Zoom In Time button ( ) at the bottom of the window to zoom in more tightly. Or, to turn off snapping altogether, click the Enable
Snapping button (
) to toggle it off.
Drawing note events
The Draw tool limits you to drawing one pitch at a time. In other words, you cannot drag up and down with the Draw tool to draw note
events across several pitches at once.
1. Click the Draw Tool button (
). The Draw tool is selected.
2. Drag in the row for the pitch you wish to create. A new note event appears as you drag.
Painting note events
Unlike the Draw tool, the Paint tool allows you to create note events across multiple pitches with a single drag of the mouse. The Paint
tool also allows you to select the note length you want to paint.
1. Click the arrow adjacent to the Paint Tool button (
) and choose a note length to paint from the menu.
2. Click the Paint Tool button ( ). The Paint tool is selected.
3. Drag to create new note events. The new events appear as you drag.
Editing note events
You can change the length or pitch of a note event using the Draw tool. You can also cut, copy, and paste events in the same way you
do in the main ACID window.
Changing pitch
With the Draw tool (
) selected, drag a note event to a new row.
Changing length
With the Draw tool (
) selected, drag the edge of a note event to a new location.
Tip: As you drag the edge of a note event, the event edge snaps to the divisions on the beat ruler. To snap to smaller divisions, click the
Zoom In Time button ( ) at the bottom of the window to zoom in more tightly. Or, to turn off snapping altogether, click the Enable
Snapping button (
) to toggle it off.
Specifying a velocity value for notes
To enter a specific velocity value, right-click a note event in the piano roll, choose Velocity from the shortcut menu, and choose the
appropriate command from the submenu.
Command
Description
Set to Maximum
Set to Default
Set to Minimum
Set to...
Sets the velocity to 127.
Sets the velocity to 64.
Sets the velocity to 0.
Allows you to enter a custom velocity
value.
214 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing velocity data
1. In the lower-left corner of the Piano Roll Editor tab, click the drop-down arrow and choose Velocity from the menu.
2. In the area at the bottom of the Piano Roll Editor tab, drag the top of a velocity bar up or down to change the velocity value. You
can also drag across multiple bars to change their values at the same time.
Setting pitch bend
1. In the lower-left corner of the Piano Roll Editor tab, click the drop-down arrow and choose Pitch Bend from the menu.
2. In the area at the bottom of the Piano Roll Editor tab, drag to draw your pitch bend curve. To erase a curve, right-click and drag.
Changing continuous controller information
1. In the lower-left corner of the Piano Roll Editor tab, click the drop-down arrow, choose All Continuous Controllers from the menu,
and choose a controller from the submenu.
2. In the area at the bottom of the Piano Roll Editor tab, drag to draw your controller information.
Selecting note events
With the Draw tool selected, you can select individual note events by clicking them. You can also use one of several methods to select
multiple events:
•
With the Draw tool selected, press Ctrl or Shift while clicking note events. Pressing Shift allows you to select the first and last note
events of a range in order to select all notes in between, while pressing Ctrl allows you to select non-contiguous note events.
•
•
Click the Selection Tool button (
) and drag across note events you wish to select.
Press Ctrl+A to select all note events on a track.
Moving note events
After you select note events, you can drag them to new positions.
Tip: Press Alt while dragging note events to restrict your movement to vertical (change pitch) or horizontal (change location in
time).
WORKING WITH MIDI | 215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using cut, copy, and paste
After you select note events, you can click the Cut (
) or Copy (
) buttons to cut or copy the events. You can then position the
cursor in a new location and click the Paste button (
) to paste the events. Note events are always pasted at the same pitch as the
original note event.
Toggling note snapping
Click the Enable Snapping Notes to Specified Scale button (
) to toggle snapping.
If the button is selected, you can only draw or drag notes within the selected scale. Hold Alt while drawing or dragging notes to override
snapping.
Click the down arrow next to the button to choose a root note and scale.
Quantizing note events
You can use the MIDI Quantize dialog to force notes to align with musical beats based on the parameters you specify.
1. Select the notes you want to quantize. For more information, see Selecting note events on page 215.
2. Click the Quantize button (
). The MIDI Quantize dialog appears.
3. From the Quantize resolution drop-down list, choose the beat to which you want the selected notes to be quantized.
4. Select the Start times check box to snap start times to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop-down list.
5. Select the Note durations check box to snap note durations to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop-down list.
6. Click Apply.
Deleting note events
Use the Erase tool (
) to erase events in the piano roll. Alternately, you can select events and press Delete. For more information, see
Undoing and redoing
You can easily undo and redo actions in the piano roll editor by using keyboard shortcuts. Press Ctrl+Z to undo an action, and press
Ctrl+Shift+Z to redo an action.
Using the list editor
The List Editor tab is an OPT plug-in that you can use to perform detailed filtering and editing within the Clip Properties window for a
MIDI clip.
Events within the MIDI file are displayed in a table. Each event occupies one row, and the rows are sorted in chronological order. The
columns in the List Editor tab display the contents of the events.
Viewing the list editor
1. Double-click the MIDI icon ( ) on the track header to open the Track Properties window.
2. Select the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties dialog.
3. Double-click one of the listed clips to open the Clip Properties dialog.
4. Click the List Editor tab. The list editor appears.
216 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Toolbar
Events
Transport bar
Loop boxes
Previewing MIDI
You can preview individual events or the MIDI file as a whole within the list editor.
Tip: To control volume during playback in the list editor, drag the Preview fader in the Mixing Console window.
Previewing single events
When monitoring is enabled, the list editor will play events when you select them.
1. In the list editor, click the Monitor button ( ) to turn on the event monitor.
2. Click anywhere in an event row to play the event.
Playing MIDI files
In list editor, you may play your MIDI file by using the buttons on the transport bar:
Item
Icon Description
Loop Playback
Click to toggle looped playback mode. When the button is selected, only the events between
the mark in and mark out points will be played.
Play from Start
Play
Plays the entire MIDI file from the beginning, regardless of cursor position.
Plays from the current cursor position.
Pause
Halts playback. The next time you click Play, playback will begin with the last event played.
Stop
Halts playback. The next time you click Play, playback will begin with the first event in the list.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the list.
Go to Start
Go to End
Moves the cursor to the end of the list.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting a loop region
When the Loop Playback button
is selected, you can set a portion of the edit list to play repeatedly. The beginning, end, and length
of the loop region are displayed in the Loop boxes in the lower-right corner of the List Editor tab.
1. Select the Loop Playback button
2. Select the first event you want to play.
3. Click the Mark Loop Start button
4. Select the last event you want to play.
5. Click the Mark Loop End button
6. Click the Play button to start playback. Select the event where you want to begin playback and click the transport bar’s Play button
) or press Space. The piano roll editor begins playback and loops the marked selection.
.
.
.
(
7. To stop playback, click the transport bar’s Stop button ( ) or press Space.
Filtering the list
A MIDI file can contain a dizzying number of individual events. You can speed the task of locating events in the list editor by applying a
filter. You can filter what the list editor displays either by track or by event type.
Filtering the list by event type
1. Click the Event Filter button (
). The MIDI Event Filter dialog appears.
2. Select the check box for an event type to hide that type, or clear the check box to display that event type.
3. Click OK. The list is filtered according to the criteria you selected.
Editing events
Once you have located a particular event, you can edit the parameters of the event as needed.
1. Click in the event row you want to edit.
2. Click the Edit Event button (
). The Edit MIDI Event dialog appears.
Tip: You can also double-click an event’s Message parameter to open the Edit Event dialog.
4. Click OK. The event updates to the new values.
Tip: You can edit individual parameters in columns other than Message by double-clicking the parameter and entering a new
value.
218 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event parameters
The table below describes the editable event parameters for different event types.
Event type
After Touch
Editable parameter
Start Time
Channel
Description
Time (in measures.beats.ticks) where you want the event to begin.
MIDI channel (1-16) where you want to send the event.
Amount of vibrato (0-127) you want to apply to each voice on the channel.
Time (in measures.beats.ticks) where you want the event to begin.
MIDI channel (1-16) where you want to send the event.
Pressure
Control
Change
Start Time
Channel
Controller Change
Number
Displays the number of the current controller change type. Choose a
controller change type from the drop-down list to the right of the Event
type drop-down.
Controller Change Value Controller value.
Note
Start Time
Channel
Note
Time (in measures.beats.ticks) where you want the event to begin.
MIDI channel (1-16) where you want to send the event.
Numeric value of the note you want to play. For more information, see
On Velocity
Off Velocity
Duration
Speed of the note’s attack (0-127). Low values produce a soft attack; high
values produce a strong attack.
Speed of the note's release (0-127). Low values produce a soft release; high
values produce a staccato release.
Length of the note’s sustain in measures.beats.ticks.
Time (in measures.beats.ticks) where you want the event to begin.
MIDI channel (1-16) where you want to send the event.
Parameter’s most significant byte.
Packed NRPN* Start Time
Channel
NRP MSB
NRP LSB
Parameter’s least significant byte.
Data MSB
Value for the most significant byte.
Data LSB
Value for the least significant byte.
Packed RPN** Start Time
Channel
Time (in measures.beats.ticks) where you want the event to begin.
MIDI channel (1-16) where you want to send the event.
Parameter’s most significant byte.
NRP MSB
NRP LSB
Parameter’s least significant byte.
Data MSB
Value for the most significant byte.
Data LSB
Value for the least significant byte.
Patch
Start Time
Channel
Bank LSB
Bank MSB
Patch
Time (in measures.beats.ticks) where you want the event to begin.
MIDI channel (1-16) where you want to send the event.
Least significant byte value for the bank.
Most significant byte value for the bank.
Number of the patch you want to play.
Pitch Bend
Start Time
Pitch +/-
Time (in measures.beats.ticks) where you want the event to begin.
Number of cents by which you want to bend the pitch.
Time (in measures.beats.ticks) where you want the event to begin.
MIDI channel (1-16) where you want to send the event.
Note to which you want to apply pressure.
Poly Pressure Start Time
Channel
Note
Pressure
Pressure (0-127) you want to apply to the note. Most devices will apply
more vibrato to a note as the pressure increases.
Program
Change
Start Time
Channel
Patch
Time (in measures.beats.ticks) where you want the event to begin.
MIDI channel (1-16) where you want to send the event.
Number of the new patch you want to play.
*Packed nonregistered parameter numbers (NRPN) are used to adjust settings such as vibrato and filtering, but are not
part of the General MIDI specification. Refer to your MIDI device’s documentation for more information about the
required parameters.
**Packed registered parameter numbers (RPN) are used to adjust common settings such as pitch wheel range.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI notes and frequencies
The following table shows the musical pitch and frequency associated with each MIDI note.
A5 is 440 Hz, and middle C is C5 at 261.63 Hz. These values can differ, often by one octave, from values used by other manufacturers. The
following frequencies are based on equal temperament tuning.
Pitch MIDI Key Frequency
Pitch MIDI Key Frequency
Pitch
D7
MIDI Key Frequency
C0
0
8.176
G3
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
97.998
103.82
110.00
116.54
123.47
130.81
138.59
146.83
155.56
164.81
174.61
184.99
195.99
207.65
220.00
233.08
246.94
261.63
277.18
293.66
311.13
329.63
349.23
369.99
391.99
415.31
440.00
466.16
439.88
523.25
554.37
587.33
622.25
659.26
698.46
739.99
783.99
830.61
880.00
932.32
987.77
1046.5
1108.7
86
1174.7
1244.5
1318.5
1396.9
1480.0
1568.0
1661.2
1760.0
1864.7
1975.5
2093.0
2217.5
2349.3
2489.0
2637.0
2793.8
2960.0
3136.0
3322.4
3520.0
3729.3
3951.1
4186.0
4434.9
4698.6
4978.0
5274.0
5587.7
5919.9
6271.9
6644.9
7040.0
7458.6
7902.1
8372.0
8869.8
9397.3
9956.1
10548.1
11175.3
11839.8
12543.9
C#-0
D0
1
8.662
G#3
A3
D#7
E7
87
2
9.177
88
D#0
E0
3
9.723
A#3
B3
F7
89
4
10.301
10.913
11.562
12.250
12.978
13.750
14.568
15.434
16.352
17.324
18.354
19.445
20.601
21.826
23.124
24.499
25.956
27.500
29.135
30.867
32.703
34.648
36.708
38.890
41.203
43.653
46.249
48.999
51.913
55.000
58.270
61.735
65.406
69.295
73.416
77.781
82.406
87.307
92.499
F#7
G7
90
F0
5
C4
91
F#0
G0
6
C#4
D4
G#7
A7
92
7
93
G#0
A0
8
D#4
E4
A#7
B7
94
9
95
A#0
B0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
F4
C8
96
F#4
G4
C#8
D8
97
C1
98
C#1
D1
G#4
A4
D#8
E8
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
D#1
E1
A#4
B4
F8
F#8
G8
F1
C5
F#1
G1
C#5
D5
G#8
A8
G#1
A1
D#5
E5
A#8
B8
A#1
B1
F5
C9
F#5
G5
C#9
D9
C2
C#2
D2
G#5
A5
D#9
E9
D#2
E2
A#5
B5
F9
F#9
G9
F2
C6
F#2
G2
C#6
D6
G#9
A9
G#2
A2
D#6
E6
A#9
B9
A#2
B2
F6
C10
C#10
D10
D#10
E10
F10
F#10
G10
F#6
G6
C3
C#3
D3
G#6
A6
D#3
E3
A#6
B6
F3
C7
F#3
C#7
220 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating events
In addition to editing existing events, you can also create new events.
1. Click the Insert Event button (
). The Insert MIDI Event dialog appears.
2. Choose an event type from the Event type drop-down list.
3. Enter a start time in the Start time box.
4. Enter values for the remaining event parameters.
5. Click Insert. The new event is inserted at the designated start time.
Quantizing events
You can use the MIDI Quantize dialog to force events to align with musical beats based on the parameters you specify.
1. To quantize only specific events, select the events you want to quantize in the list editor.
Tip: Hold Shift or Ctrl while clicking event rows to select multiple events.
2. Click the Quantize button (
). The MIDI Quantize dialog appears.
3. From the Quantize resolution drop-down list, choose the beat to which you want the selected events to be quantized.
4. Choose the appropriate options for quantizing:
•
•
•
Select the Start times check box to snap event start times to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop-down list.
Select the Note durations check box to snap note durations to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop-down list.
Select the Notes only check box to quantize note events alone. When you select this check box, the list editor does not
quantize after touch, control change, meta, NRPN, RPN, pitch bend, poly pressure, and program change events.
•
Select the Apply to current selection only check box to quantize only the selected events. Clear the check box to quantize all
events within the list.
5. Click Apply.
Deleting events
Click an event row and click the Delete button (
).
Undoing and redoing
You can easily undo and redo actions in the list editor by using keyboard shortcuts. Press Ctrl+Z to undo an action, and press Ctrl+
Shift+Z to redo an action.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Routing tracks to MIDI devices or soft synths
Each MIDI track can be played through any external MIDI port or any DLS, VSTi, or ReWire 2.0 soft synth bus control in the Mixing
Console window. For more information, see Adding track, assignable FX, bus, and soft synth channels on page 155.
1. Click the MIDI Output button. A list of all the available MIDI devices and software synthesizers is displayed.
•
If the soft synth you want to use does not appear in the menu, choose Insert Soft Synth to add a soft synth bus control to the
project and route the track to the new synth. Click one of the following links for more information about DLS sets, VST
instruments, or ReWire device applications.
•
If a MIDI device does not appear in the menu, choose External MIDI Device Preferences to open the MIDI tab of the
Preferences dialog and verify that the check box for the device is selected. If a device is selected for generating MIDI timecode
on the Sync Preferences tab, it will be unavailable as a playback device.
2. Choose a device from the list to send the current track to that device. To route to a specific port in a ReWire 2.0 device, choose your
ReWire device application from the list, and then choose a port from the submenu.
Note: In order to render projects that contain MIDI tracks, MIDI tracks must be routed to DLS, VSTi, or ReWire 2.0 soft synths. Tracks that
are routed to external MIDI devices will not be included in the rendered file. For more information, see Using the Sync tab on page 262.
3. To choose which MIDI channel will be used to send MIDI data, choose MIDI Channel, and then choose a channel from the
submenu.
Tip: If you want to select multiple input channels, hold Ctrl and select additional channels from the MIDI Channel submenu.
Resetting MIDI ports
When a MIDI port is stuck playing a sustaining sound, a quick method to turn off MIDI ports is provided (much like the panic button on
MIDI hardware devices). From the Tools menu, choose Reset All MIDI Ports to send a global Note Off command to all MIDI ports.
Tip: Press Ctrl+Alt+F7 to reset all MIDI ports.
Rendering projects with MIDI tracks
To render projects that contain MIDI tracks, route the MIDI tracks to soft synths (DLS sets) rather than to external MIDI devices; MIDI
tracks that are routed to external MIDI devices are not included in the rendered file. For more information, see Rendering projects on page
Playing MIDI from external devices
You can receive MIDI input from an external device such as a MIDI keyboard. You can then use a soft synth control (with its DLS set or
VST instrument) or external MIDI device to output the sound from the external device.
Adding external devices as MIDI inputs
1. Verify that the Enable Real-Time MIDI command is selected in the Options menu.
2. From the Options menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears.
222 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Click the MIDI tab.
4. Select a device in the Make these devices available for MIDI input pane.
5. To enable MIDI thru for the selected input, right-click the entry in the MIDI Thru column and choose a MIDI thru device from the
shortcut menu.
Note: The MIDI thru device must be selected in the Make these devices available for MIDI track playback pane in order to
appear in the menu. You can choose more than one MIDI device for MIDI thru output, if desired.
6. Click OK.
Assigning MIDI inputs to soft synth controls
You can route MIDI input from an external device to any soft synth control in your project.
Note: You can assign both individual tracks and external MIDI devices to a single soft synth.
1. In the Mixing Console window, double-click the soft synth icon on a control ( ). The Soft Synth Properties window appears.
2. Click the External MIDI Input Port button (
) and select the MIDI input device from the menu.
Soloing MIDI device inputs
External MIDI devices can be routed to multiple soft synths or MIDI thru devices. Soloing a MIDI device input prevents your device from
playing through other soft synths and MIDI thru devices, soloing the input through the selected soft synth control. You can solo MIDI
input on more than one soft synth control, if desired.
1. Double-click the soft synth icon on a control ( ). The Soft Synth Properties window appears.
2. Click the Solo Listen to MIDI Input button (
).
Creating or editing program maps
From the Tools menu, choose Program Map Editor to display the Program Map Editor dialog.
You can use the Program Map Editor dialog to create or edit program maps for external MIDI devices. A program map allows you to
view program names in the track header and on the Output Settings tab of the Track Properties window when a MIDI track is routed to
a hardware synth.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating program maps
1. From the Tools menu, choose Program Map Editor to display the Program Map Editor dialog.
2. Click the New button
to create a new program map. You'll be prompted to choose a file name and location where you want to
save the new map.
Tip: If you want to create a program map based on an existing map, load a program map and then click the Save As button
to save
a copy of the program map with a new name.
3. Click the Add New Program
or Add New Drum Program
button to add a program to the table in the first available slot.
Note: If a group is selected from the Voice Group drop-down list, the table lists only programs that belong to the selected group. Any
programs you add will automatically be associated with the selected group.
4. Type a description of the program in the Program box. You can double-click an existing name to edit it.
5. If you want to assign the program to a group, right-click the Group box and choose a group from the shortcut menu. If you want to
create a new group, choose Add New Group and type a name in the box.
6. Double-click the Prog, MSB, and LSB values to edit them and type the values that correspond to the appropriate program. Please
refer to your device or its documentation to determine the correct values for each program.
Notes:
•
•
Within ACID, MIDI values range from 0-127. If your device uses 1-128, subtract 1 when editing the program.
Devices that use Sysex messages to change programs are limited to 128 programs.
7. Click OK to close the dialog and save your changes.
Editing program maps
1. From the Tools menu, choose Program Map Editor to display the Program Map Editor dialog.
2. Load the program map you want to edit:
•
•
Choose a setting from the MIDI Device drop-down list.
Click the Load button and browse to the map you want to edit.
Tip: If you want to create a program map based on an existing map, load a program map and then click the Save As button
to save
a copy of the program map with a new name.
3. To add programs to the map, click the Add New Program
or Add New Drum Program
button to add a program to the
table in the first available slot.
Note: If a group is selected from the Voice Group drop-down list, the table lists only programs that belong to the selected group. Any
programs you add will automatically be associated with the selected group.
4. To remove a program from the map, select a program and click the Delete button
.
5. To edit a program name, double-click the name and type a new value in the box.
6. To change a program
to a drum program
, right-click the program name and choose Drum Kit from the shortcut menu. To
change a drum program to a program, right-click the program name and choose Drum Kit from the shortcut menu to clear the
check mark.
7. If you want to assign the program to a group, right-click the Group box and choose a group from the shortcut menu. If you want to
create a new group, choose Add New Group and type a name in the box.
224 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Double-click the Prog, MSB, and LSB values to edit them and type the values that correspond to the appropriate program. Please
refer to your device or its documentation to determine the correct values for each program.
Notes:
•
•
Within ACID, MIDI values range from 0-127. If your device uses 1-128, subtract 1 when editing the program.
Devices that use Sysex messages to change programs are limited to 128 programs.
9. Click OK to close the dialog and save your changes.
Assigning a patch map to a MIDI device
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences.
2. Click the MIDI tab.
3. In the Make these devices available for MIDI track playback section of the dialog, verify the check box is selected for your MIDI
device.
4. Right-click the Device value for your MIDI device and choose Load Device Template from the shortcut menu.
5. Browse to the patch map you want to use and click Open. The selected patch map will be used for any track that is routed to the
MIDI device.
Creating or editing drum maps
From the Tools menu, choose Drum Map Editor to display the Drum Map Editor dialog.
You can use the Drum Map Editor dialog to create or edit drum maps. When a drum map is defined for a soft synth, you can use the
drum grid in the timeline to edit MIDI data.
A drum grid allows you to edit MIDI
A piano roll allows you to edit MIDI
notes for soft synths that have drum
notes for most patches.
maps defined.
Editing a drum map
1. From the Tools menu, choose Drum Map Editor to display the Drum Map Editor dialog.
2. Choose the drum map you want to edit.
•
Select a drum map in the MIDI Drum Map Template list.
—or—
•
Click the Open button
to browse to an XML drum mapping file.
Tip: Drum maps that belong to the GM2 kits are displayed with a and cannot be edited.
3. If you want to edit the name of the drum map, double-click the name in the MIDI Drum Map Template column and type a new
name in the box.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If you want to associate the drum map with a MIDI device, double-click the Device box and type the name of a MIDI device.
When you associate a drum map with a MIDI device, the drum maps will be displayed automatically on the Output Settings tab of
the Track Properties window when you choose Drum Map from the drop-down list at the top of the page. For more information, see
Note: Be sure to type the device name identically in the Drum Map Editor and the Patch Map Editor. For more information, see Creating
5. If you want to change the description of the map, edit the text in the Drum Map Description box.
6. Add keys as needed:
a. Click the Insert Key button
to add a key to the drum map.
If a key is selected, the next available key will be inserted. For example, if you select C5 and click Insert Key, C#5 will be added
if it does not exist in the current drum map. If C#5, D5, and D#5 already exist, E5 will be added.
b. Double-click the name in the Instrument column and type the name of the instrument associated with the selected key.
7. Select a key in the table on the right side of the dialog and click the Delete Key button
to remove it from the drum map.
8. If you want to copy key assignments from other drum maps, perform the following steps:
a. In the MIDI Drum Map Template list, select the drum map that contains the keys you want to copy.
b. Select the keys you want to copy. Hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple keys.
c. Click the Copy Selected Keys button
.
d. In the MIDI Drum Map Template list, select the drum map that you want to edit.
e. Click the Paste Copied Keys into Map button
.Select the keys you want to copy. Hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple keys.
If a key is selected, the next available key will be inserted. For example, if you select C5 and click Insert Key, C#5 will be added
if it does not exist in the current drum map. If C#5, D5, and D#5 already exist, E5 will be added.
f. Double-click the name in the Instrument column and type the name of the instrument associated with the selected key.
9. Click OK to close the dialog and save your changes.
Choosing a drum map for a track
Tracks that are routed to a VSTi soft synth or a MIDI device can display a piano roll or a drum grid.
Tracks that are routed to the DLS soft synth will display a drum grid only if a drum map exists for the current patch. You cannot edit
drum maps for GM2 drum kits.
Synchronizing using MIDI timecode
ACID can generate MIDI timecode (MTC) and MIDI clock as well as trigger from MIDI timecode. These features allow ACID to be
synchronized with other audio applications and external audio hardware.
Note: The software cannot chase MTC or MIDI clock.
Generating MIDI timecode
MIDI timecode is a standard timecode that most applications and some hardware devices use to synchronize themselves. Stable MTC is
generated at all available frame rates for other applications to chase.
1. Specify a MIDI output device to which you will send timecode and a frame rate for the timecode. These options can be found on
2. From the Options menu, choose Timecode, and choose Generate MIDI Timecode from the submenu.
MTC begins generating wherever you click the Play button ( ).
226 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Generating MTC with an offset
In some cases, you may want to start sending timecode with an offset (e.g., 01:00:00:00) to allow time for multiple devices to
synchronize. You can create an offset on the ACID time ruler to accomplish this. For more information, see Using the ruler offset on page
Viewing outgoing timecode
You can view outgoing timecode in the time display located directly above the track list. Right-click the time display and choose MIDI
Timecode Out from the shortcut menu to display outgoing MTC time.
Triggering from MIDI timecode
You can trigger ACID playback using MTC. This means that the software initiates playback by receiving timecode from another device.
1. Connect a word clock signal between your computer and triggering device to lock synchronization.
Note: If the MIDI trigger device can output MIDI timecode, a timecode converter is not necessary; you can connect the trigger device
directly to your computer.
2. Configure your triggering device to send MTC to your computer.
3. From the Options menu, choose Preferences and select the Sync tab to configure the application to receive MTC.
•
•
From the Input device drop-down list, choose the port through which you receive MTC.
From the Frame rate drop-down list, choose the frame rate that your trigger device uses to send MTC to ACID.
4. From the Options menu, choose Timecode, and choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu.
When an incoming MTC signal is received, playback begins from the position indicated by the timecode. If MTC is not being
received, you can play and edit normally.
Viewing incoming timecode
You can view the incoming timecode in the time display located directly above the track list. Right-click the time display and choose
MIDI Timecode In from the shortcut menu to show the incoming MTC time.
This display also shows status and error information. If Trigger from MIDI Timecode is enabled but no MTC is detected, the display
reads Waiting...; If the wrong frame rate of MTC is being detected, the display reads Wrong format.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Generating MIDI clock
MIDI clock differs from MTC in that it contains tempo as well as positional information. MIDI clock is essentially measured in ticks from
the beginning of the project. MIDI clock sends 24 ticks per quarter note.
The advantage of using MIDI clock is that tempo changes are sent to the chasing application and they will be preserved.
1. Specify a MIDI output device to which you will send the clock. This option can be found on the Sync tab of the Preferences dialog.
2. From the Options menu, choose Timecode, and choose Generate MIDI Clock from the submenu.
MIDI clock is generated when you click the Play button (
).
Viewing outgoing MIDI clock
You can view the outgoing clock in the time display located directly above the track list. Right-click the time display and choose MIDI
Clock Out from the shortcut menu to display the outgoing MIDI clock time.
Exporting MIDI files
By using the Clip Pool tab, you can save the selected clip to a new folder or with a new file name. When you export a MIDI file, the MIDI
tracks in your project are saved to a standard MIDI file. Track names, track device names, and track voices are saved in the exported file
Saving MIDI clips for export
You may now export multiple MIDI tracks and individual clips to standard MIDI files. To export files:
1. Select Paint Clip Selector from the track header.
2. Choose Clip Pool to open the Track Properties dialog box.
3. Right-click on the clip you want to save and select Save As.
4. Name the file and choose Save.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
Files are saved in the MIDI Export folder but they can be saved to any location.
Files are saved as standard MIDI files (.mid).
All MIDI clips are exported as MIDI file type 0. The MIDI File Type box is greyed out.
File resolution is set at 960 pulses per quarter note. Resolution can be set between 24 and 960 pulses per quarter note. All sequencers/
players can read in any arbitrary resolution.
Exporting the project to a standard MIDI file
1. From the File menu choose Export MIDI.
2. From the Export Project as Standard MIDI File screen, choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop down list, or use the browse
window to locate the folder where you want to save your file.
3. Type a name in the File name box, or select a file in the browse window to replace an existing file.
4. Choose a setting from the MIDI file type drop-down list to indicate the type of file you want to save:
•
•
Choose Standard MIDI File Type 1 to preserve tracks when exporting. This mode preserves the MIDI data in your ACID project.
Choose Standard MIDI File Type 0 to save your project as a single-track, multichannel MIDI file. For more information, see
Note: When you add a Type 0 MIDI file to your project, a separate track will be created for each channel in the file. If you have tracks
routed to separate soft synths or MIDI devices, they will be preserved as separate tracks only if their MIDI outputs use different
228 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Type a value in the Resolution box to set the resolution of file. The default is 960, but you can specify any value between 24 and
960.
Important: Not all MIDI devices can read arbitrary resolutions.
6. Click the Save button.
Configuring a Mackie Control Universal
The Mackie Control Universal is fully supported by ACID. An overlay is available from Mackie that you can use to label the buttons and
controls with their mapped functions in ACID.
Configuring a Frontier TranzPort
Using a Frontier TranzPort, you can control ACID wirelessly.
Configuring a generic MIDI controller
You can configure up to five generic MIDI control surfaces to work with the ACID interface.
For information about your specific device, please refer to the manufacturer's documentation.
Configuring a Behringer BCF2000 controller
The Behringer BCF2000 is fully supported by ACID and lends a tactile element to your editing sessions.
WORKING WITH MIDI | 229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 | CHAPTER 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13
Working with Video
By adding a video track to your ACID® project, you can use the software as a scoring tool.
Video is always added to the top track in the track list. Depending on your horizontal zoom level, each frame displayed in
the video track may represent multiple frames from the source video. As you zoom in, marks display to represent each
frame, and you can zoom further to view individual frames.
Managing video
ACID makes it easy to add video to a project and work with the video track.
Adding or replacing video files
Use the Explorer window to find the file you want to use, and then add it to the project by double-clicking it or dragging
it into the track view. The video file is placed in the top track, and if the file has an audio stream, it is placed as a separate,
one-shot track in the track view.
If your project already contains a video track, you are prompted to replace the existing video if you open another video
file.
Tip: You can also add a still image (such as a BMP, JPEG, PSD, GIF, PNG, or TGA file) to the video track.
Removing the video track
Right-click anywhere in the video track and choose Remove Video from the shortcut menu.
Hiding and showing the video track
By default, video displays in the track view when you add it to a project. You can hide or show the video track at any time
by choosing Show Video Track from the View menu. A check mark next to the command indicates that the video track
displays.
Synchronizing audio and video
Editing the audio associated with a video file can cause it to become out of sync with the video. To resynchronize the
audio and video, right-click the audio file and choose Synchronize with Video from the shortcut menu.
Note: This does not work if you have changed the audio track to a loop.
Removing the video’s audio
Right-click the audio track in the track list and choose Delete Track from the shortcut menu. The audio track is removed,
but the video remains.
Changing frame numbering
Each frame is numbered in the video track. You can change the numbering format or turn off frame numbering
altogether.
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears.
2. Click the Video tab.
3. Choose a setting from the Show source frame numbers on video thumbnails as drop-down list.
WORKING WITH VIDEO | 231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing video events
You have several video editing options to help you score your video.
Moving video events
Drag the event to a new location along the video track.
Trimming video events
Drag either end of the video event. The video event stays in place, but the beginning or end of the video moves.
You cannot trim the beginning or end of the event past the event’s original end. You cannot trim an event earlier than its starting point
unless the event has been trimmed previously.
Slipping and sliding video events
To help you picture what happens when you slip and slide events, think of an event as a window to a media file. The window can display
the entire media file or a small section. When the window displays only a portion of the media file, you can move either the window or
the underlying media to adjust the media played by an event:
•
•
When you slip an event, your event maintains its place on the timeline, but the media file moves in the direction you drag.
When you slide an event, the media file maintains its place on the timeline, but the event moves in the direction you drag.
Shifting the contents of video events (slipping)
Hold Alt while dragging the video event to move the position of the video within the event. The event itself does not move.
Slip-trimming video events
Hold Alt while dragging the beginning or end of a video event. The video moves with the event edge, and the opposite edge of the
event remains fixed.
Sliding video events
Hold Ctrl+Alt while dragging the video event to move the event while leaving the video in place. The relative position of the video
changes as when you slip an event.
Using the Video Preview window
The Video Preview window is used to view the video as it plays or to view the frame at the cursor position. To display the Video Preview
window, choose Video Preview from the View menu, or press Alt+4.
232 | CHAPTER 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Toolbar buttons
Shortcut menu
Background
Status bar
Copying a frame to the clipboard
The Copy Frame toolbar button in the Video Preview window allows you to copy the current frame to the Windows® clipboard.
Using toolbar buttons
The toolbar allows you to access two commonly used functions of the Video Preview window.
Button
Description
Copies the current frame to the
Windows clipboard.
Sends the preview to an external
monitor.
Using the shortcut menu
Right-click anywhere in the Video Preview window to display a shortcut menu with Video Preview window options.
Item
Description
Copy Frame
Default Background
Copies the current frame to the Windows clipboard.
Sets the background color of the Video Preview window to the default
color.
Black Background
White Background
External Monitor
Sets the background color of the Video Preview window to black.
Sets the background color of the Video Preview window to white.
Sends the preview to an external monitor.
Display Square Pixels
Compensates for any spatial distortions due to non-square pixel aspect
ratios.
Display at Media Size
Show Toolbar
Displays video at the native resolution, clipping if necessary.
Toggles the display of the Video Preview window toolbar.
Toggles the display of the Video Preview window status bar.
Show Status Bar
Viewing the status bar
Right-click the Video Preview window and choose Show Status Bar from the shortcut menu to view the status bar. The status bar shows
the video’s frame size, frame rate, and display size.
WORKING WITH VIDEO | 233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Previewing on external monitors
You can use your system’s external monitor for previewing video playback. You must have an OHCI IEEE-1394 adapter and a device to
convert the DV signal to video, such as a DV camcorder, deck, or media converter.
To specify an external monitor, click the External Monitor button (
) on the Video Preview window, or choose Preferences
from the Options menu and click the Video tab.
Other settings for the external monitor can also be found on the Video tab. For more information, see Using the Video tab on page 261.
Scoring video
ACID has tools that allow you to adjust the tempo of a project to easily synchronize audio with specific video frames.
1. Add your audio track(s) and video to your project.
2. If the Video Preview window is not displayed, choose Video from the View menu.
3. Click the Play button (
4. Press H each time you want to place a time marker at a frame you want to emphasize (where an explosion is heard, for example).
5. Click the Stop button ( ) to stop playback.
) to begin playback.
6. Return to the leftmost time marker and fine tune its placement so it coincides exactly with the desired video frame.
Tip: Holding Alt while pressing the right or left arrow keys allows you to step the cursor through your video by individual frames. You
may need to drag your time marker to the cursor to get it on the desired frame.
7. Place the cursor at the point to which you want to synchronize your time marker. For example, you might want the frame that you
marked in step six to coincide with a downbeat.
8. Right-click the time marker and select Adjust Tempo to Match Marker to Cursor from the shortcut menu. The new tempo appears
in the track list.
9. Press T to insert a tempo change marker. The adjusted tempo is detected and inserted into the tempo marker’s box. The tempo
change marker preserves synchronization between the time marker and location on the beat ruler as you perform editing further
down the timeline. For more information, see Adding tempo/key/time signature change markers on page 91.
10. Repeat steps six through nine to synchronize the rest of your video.
234 | CHAPTER 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14
Working with 5.1 Surround
You can create 5.1-channel mixes to wrap a listener in your remixes or prepare audio for cinema, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
or DTS 5.1 Music projects.
Note: ACID plays, mixes, and renders uncompressed 5.1-channel audio. Authoring software such as Sony DVD
Architect software is required to burn the audio to DVD.
What is 5.1 surround?
5.1 surround is a standard format consisting of three speakers across the front and two speakers in the rear. The “.1” is a
sixth channel called low-frequency effects (LFE) that enhances the bass levels in the mix.
5.1 surround includes five main channels...
...and a sixth channel for low frequency effects.
LFE
Left
Center
Right
Left
Right
Surround
Surround
The LFE channel is commonly used in motion pictures to enhance low audio frequencies for effects such as explosions or
crashes. Audio in this channel is commonly limited to a range from about 25 Hz to 120 Hz. Unlike the five primary
channels, the LFE channel adds no directional information. Depending on the speaker setup and audio levels, the sound
assigned to the LFE channel may be routed among the five main speakers or to an additional subwoofer.
WORKING WITH 5.1 SURROUND | 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up surround hardware
Before you create surround projects, you should set up your system to provide 5.1 surround playback. To play a 5.1 surround project,
you must have an appropriate speaker setup such as:
•
•
Six powered speakers
Six passive speakers with a six-channel amplifier
Your system must also have an appropriate sound card setup such as:
•
•
•
5.1-compatible sound card
Sound card with three stereo outputs
Three stereo sound cards
There are several ways to set up your system, depending on the sound card and speaker setup you are using.
Six powered speakers
Six passive speakers with a six-channel amplifier
5.1-
compatible
sound card
Connect powered speakers to your sound card’s
outputs as indicated by your sound card’s
documentation.
Connect your sound card’s front, rear, and center/
subwoofer outputs to the appropriate inputs on a
six-channel amplifier/home theater receiver. Connect front,
rear, center, and LFE speakers to the amplifier.
Sound card
with three
stereo
Connect powered speakers to your sound card’s
outputs where you have routed each of the pairs of inputs on a six-channel amplifier/home theater receiver.
channels. The left channel of the Center/LFE pair is Connect front, rear, center, and LFE speakers to the
the center channel; the right channel is the LFE
channel.
Connect your sound card’s outputs to the appropriate
amplifier.
outputs
Three stereo
sound cards
Connect powered speakers to your sound cards’
outputs where you have routed each of the pairs of inputs on a six-channel amplifier/home theater receiver.
channels. The left channel of the Center/LFE pair is Connect front, rear, center, and LFE speakers to the
Connect your sound card’s outputs to the appropriate
the center channel; the right channel is the LFE
channel.
amplifier.
Setting up surround projects
You can configure an ACID project to use 5.1 surround in the Project Properties dialog. You can also choose to apply a low-pass filter for
the LFE channel. Applying a low-pass filter approximates the bass-management system in a 5.1 decoder and ensures that you’re
sending only low-frequency audio to the LFE channel.
1. From the File menu, choose Properties.
2. Click the Audio tab.
3. From the Master bus mode drop-down list, choose 5.1 surround.
4. To limit the audio sent to the LFE channel, do the following:
•
Select the Enable low-pass filter on LFE check box and enter a value in the Cutoff frequency for low-pass filter box. The low-
pass filter isolates the audio sent to the LFE channel by limiting it to frequencies lower than the value entered in the Cutoff
frequency for low-pass filter box.
•
Choose a setting from the Low-pass filter quality drop-down list to determine the sharpness of the filter’s rolloff curve. Best
produces the sharpest curve.
Note: Before rendering your surround project, check your surround authoring application’s documentation to determine its required
audio format. Some encoders require a specific cutoff frequency and rolloff, while other encoders require that no filter be applied before
encoding.
5. Click OK.
The track list and Mixing Console window switch to 5.1 surround mode. The Master bus becomes the Surround Master bus, which
contains faders for each of the six surround channels. Surround panners appear on tracks and Mixing Console controls. Tracks routed to
Mixing Console controls (busses, assignable effects, or soft synths) do not have surround panners; panning for these tracks takes place
on the Mixing Console control.
236 | CHAPTER 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Track list in 5.1 surround mode
Mixing Console in 5.1 surround mode
Surround
panner
Surround
panners
Track routed
to LFE
Track routed
to Bus
MIDI track
routed to
soft synth
Front L/R
Rear L/R Center LFE
Routing to hardware in the Mixing Console
You must route the surround audio to the correct output in the Mixing Console.
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences.
2. Click the Audio Device tab.
3. From the Audio device type drop-down list, choose an audio device type other than Microsoft Sound Mapper (such as Windows
Classic Wave Driver).
4. Choose the playback devices for the six surround channels:
•
•
•
From the Default Stereo and Front playback device drop-down list, choose the appropriate device for the front left and right
surround channels.
From the Default Rear playback device drop-down list, choose the appropriate device for the rear left and right surround
channels.
From the Default Center and LFE playback device drop-down list, choose the appropriate device for the center and LFE
surround channels.
5. Click OK.
Overriding the default device routing
By setting up the device routing in the Audio Device tab of the Preferences dialog, you have set the defaults for surround routing.
However, you can override the default device routing at any time.
1. From the View menu, choose Mixing Console to open the Mixing Console window.
2. In the I/O control region, click the Output button and choose an output device for the Front channels.
3. Repeat step two for the Rear and Center/LFE channel pairs.
Assigning audio to the LFE channel
Once the project is in 5.1 surround mode, you must decide whether a track will provide the “5” (surround panning) or the “1” (LFE
channel) in 5.1 surround. Initially, all tracks in a surround project are set to provide surround panning, but you can assign a track to the
LFE channel instead.
You can assign an individual track to the LFE channel or you can route the track to a Mixing Console control (bus, soft synth, or
assignable effect chain) and assign the control to the LFE channel.
To assign audio to the LFE channel, right-click the surround panner on the track header or Mixing Console control and choose LFE Only
from the shortcut menu. The track or Mixing Console control is assigned to the LFE channel.
WORKING WITH 5.1 SURROUND | 237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change a track or Mixing Console control back to surround panning, right-click the LFE indicator and choose Surround Pan from the
shortcut menu.
Note: Before rendering your surround project, check your surround authoring application’s documentation to determine its
required audio format with respect to the LFE channel. For more information, see Setting up surround projects on page 236.
Adjusting volume
Adjusting track volume for 5.1 surround projects behaves almost identically to stereo projects. The fader controls in the track headers
can function as trim controls that adjust the overall volume of the track, bus, or assignable effects chain, or they can adjust volume
Adjusting track volume
You can adjust track volume using the Vol fader in the track header the same way you do in stereo projects.
Deselect the Automation Settings button ( ) in the track header if you want to adjust trim levels.
Track header in trim mode
Select the Automation Settings button if you want to adjust volume automation. The fader handle is displayed as a
in automation
mode.
Track header in automation mode
Adjusting assignable effects send or bus send levels
You can adjust send levels for busses or assignable effects chains using the multipurpose fader in the track header. Click the fader label
and choose an assignable effects chain or bus from the menu. The fader in the track header can function as a trim control that adjusts
the overall send level of the track, or it can adjust send level automation settings.
Deselect the Automation Settings button ( ) if you want to adjust trim levels.
Select the Automation Settings button if you want to adjust volume automation. The fader handle is displayed as a
in automation
mode.
Adjusting channel levels
Use the Master bus control in the Mixing Console window to adjust the individual levels of the 5.1 channels. The faders in the track bus
control can function as trim controls that adjust the overall level of each channel, or you can automate the master volume of the Master
bus (individual channel levels cannot be automated).
Click the Automation Settings button ( ) in the bus control or bus track and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected if you
want to adjust trim levels, or select Show Automation Controls if you want to adjust volume automation.
238 | CHAPTER 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panning audio
You can pan audio in a 5.1 surround project in two ways:
•
•
Pan tracks individually using the Surround Panner window.
Route tracks to mixer controls (busses, assignable effect chains, or soft synths) and pan the mixer controls using the Surround
Panner window.
Note: You cannot pan audio on tracks or busses that are routed to hardware outputs in a 5.1 surround project.
Panning tracks
1. Deselect the Automation Settings button ( ) on the track you want to pan.
2. Double-click the surround panner on the track you wish to pan. The Surround Panner window appears.
Double-click to display
the Surround Panner
window
3. Adjust the panning settings. For more information, see Using the Surround Panner window on page 240.
4. Close the Surround Panner window.
Tip: You can also use the surround panner in the track header to pan your track.
Panning mixer controls
You may choose to route tracks to busses or other mixer controls (such as soft synths or assignable effect chains) and pan them as a
group rather than panning each track individually.
Note: When you route a track to a bus or soft synth control, stereo (two-channel) output is sent to the mixer control and the mixer
control sends 5.1 (six-channel) output to the Master bus.
1. Add a mixer control to the project. For more information, see Using the Mixing Console on page 151.
2. Route tracks to the mixer control. For more information, see Assigning tracks to busses on page 111.
3. Double-click the surround panner on the mixer control to display the Surround Panner window.
WORKING WITH 5.1 SURROUND | 239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Double-click to display
the Surround Panner
window
4. Adjust the panning settings. For more information, see Using the Surround Panner window on page 240.
5. Close the Surround Panner window.
Tip: You can also use the surround panner on the mixer control to pan your track.
Using the Surround Panner window
Whether you’re adjusting track panning or mixer control panning, you use the same controls in the Surround Panner window.
View the Surround Panner window by double-clicking a surround panner on a track header or mixer control. Once the Surround Panner
window is open, you can dock it in the ACID workspace. For more information, see Docking and floating ACID windows on page 247.
Tip: You can also choose Surround Panner from the View menu to display the Surround Panner window. Once the Surround
Panner window is displayed, double-click the surround panner for a track or mixer control to view its pan settings.
Toggle options for constraining pan
point movement
Assign track/bus to LFE channel
Pan point
= Muted channel
= Active (included) channel
Pan type indicator
1. Click the speaker icons to mute or include channels.
Muting a channel ensures that no audio bleeds through a channel. For example, you might want to mute all but the center channel
when you’re panning dialogue to the center channel.
Tip: Ctrl + click a speaker icon to solo the channel.
2. Drag the pan point to position the sound within the sound field. For more information, see Moving the pan point on page 241.
240 | CHAPTER 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Click the center speaker icon to include the center channel and drag the Center fader to apply a gain to the center channel.
Applying a gain to the center channel may make dialogue more present in the mix.
Note: When automating panning using keyframes, you cannot automate the gain applied using the Center fader. For more
4. Drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the smoothness of the interpolation path between panning keyframes. The smoothness
setting appears only when you are automating panning using keyframes. For more information, see Adjusting the Smoothness slider
Moving the pan point
You have a variety of methods to help you position the pan point in the Surround Panner window.
Method
Description
Click to toggle through three options for constraining pan point motion
as you drag: Move Freely ( ), Move Left/Right Only (
), and Move
Front/Back Only ( ).
Double-click
Double-clicking the pan point resets it to the center front of the
surround panner.
Double-clicking in the Surround Panner window moves the pan point
to the double-click location.
Ctrl+drag
Makes fine adjustments.
Shift+drag
Constrains motion to vertical, horizontal, or diagonal motion at 45
degree increments.
Alt+drag
Constrains motion to a constant radius from the center of the surround
panner.
Shift+Alt+drag
Constrains motion to the maximally inscribed circle (a constant radius
at the greatest possible distance from the center of the surround
panner).
Arrow keys
Moves front/back/left/right.
Ctrl+Arrow keys
Makes fine adjustments.
Page Up/Page Down
Shift+Page Up/Page Down
Numeric keypad 1-9
Ctrl+Numeric keypad 1,3,7, 9
Moves front/back.
Moves left/right.
Jumps to a corner, edge, or center of the surround panner.
Jumps to a location on the maximally inscribed circle (a constant radius
at the greatest possible distance from the center of the surround
panner).
Mouse wheel
Moves front/back.
Shift+mouse wheel
Ctrl+mouse wheel
Ctrl+Shift+mouse wheel
Moves left/right.
Makes fine front/back adjustments.
Makes fine left/right adjustments.
Choosing pan types
When you pan a track or mixer control, you can choose among several pan types to determine how the audio is panned. The current
pan type appears at the bottom of the Surround Panner window.
Right-click the Surround Panner window and choose a pan type from the shortcut menu.
•
The Add Channels pan type makes the audio appear to move as a unit among the surround channels. As you move the pan point
toward a channel (speaker icon), more and more of the signal from the other channels are folded into the channel you are panning
towards, until at the extreme, all channels are fed at full intensity into a single channel. This pan type uses a linear panning curve.
•
The Balance pan type is most useful for adjusting the relative signal levels of the channels. In this pan type, as you move the pan
point from the center to a channel, the signal in the channel you are panning towards starts at the base dB level (either 0 dB, -3 dB,
or -6 dB) and increases to 0 dB. The signal in the channel you are panning away from starts at a base dB level (either 0 dB, -3 dB, or -
6 dB) and decays to no signal level. For example, when you pan fully to the right, only the right channel is audible. This pan type
uses a linear panning curve.
•
The Constant Power pan type maintains a constant volume as you move the pan point from channel to channel. This pan type,
which uses the constant-power panning curve, is most useful for panning monaural source media.
WORKING WITH 5.1 SURROUND | 241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
The Film mode allows you to pan between pairs of adjacent speakers in 5.1 surround projects using a constant power model. This
mode is optimized for theater-style speaker placement. In stereo projects, Film mode functions identically to Constant Power.
As you drag the pan point to the center speaker, the sound becomes diffused through the front and rear speakers. When the track
is panned fully to the center speaker, there is no output from the front and rear speakers.
Dragging the pan point to the center of the surround panner sends the signal to all speakers.
Note: If you're panning fully to a single speaker in Film mode, you may notice that some signal is mixed to the opposite speaker. This
is because the ideal placement for surround speakers does not match the representation in the surround panner. For example,
panning to the front-left speaker produces a low-level signal in the rear-left speaker.
This is because your front-left speaker should be positioned 30° left of center and the speaker in the surround panner is located 45°
left of center. To produce a true 45° left-of-center pan, the signal is panned between the front- and rear-left speaker.
Using the grid to monitor panning
The grid in the Surround Panner window helps you to visualize how your panning will sound. The grid's spacing changes to match the
current pan type.
The vertical lines represent the points where the left-to-right signal ratio is 6 dB, 0 dB, and -6 dB respectively: at the far-left line, the left
channel is 6.0 dB louder than the right channel.
The horizontal lines represent the points where the front-to-rear signal ratio is 6 dB, 0 dB, and -6 dB respectively. As you adjust the
Center fader, the lines move forward or backward to compensate for the center-channel gain.
Note: The grid assumes that you're using a correctly set-up surround system (matched speakers and ideal positioning). Variations in
your monitoring system will cause inconsistencies between the graph and perceived output.
Automating panning
You can automate panning on a track or mixer control by adding keyframes. Keyframes are similar to envelope points in that they mark
specific locations in the track where settings change. However, unlike envelope points, keyframes appears just below the track to which
they apply.
To add panning keyframes to a mixer control, you must first view the mixer control in track view. From the View menu, choose Show
Bus Tracks to view the bus track at the bottom of the track view.
Turning on panning keyframes
Before adding individual keyframes, you must first turn on the panning keyframes for the track or bus track.
1. Select the track or bus track for which you want to automate panning.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Envelopes, and choose Surround Pan Keyframes from the submenu.
An additional row appears below the track with a single keyframe positioned at the beginning of the project. This single keyframe
represents the current panning settings for the track.
Keyframe
Adding panning keyframes
With panning keyframes turned on, you can add keyframes at any location along the track or bus track.
1. Position the cursor where you want to begin panning the track.
2. Select the Automation Settings button ( ) on the track you want to pan.
242 | CHAPTER 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Double-click the surround panner to display the Surround Panner window.
4. Adjust the panning settings. For more information, see Using the Surround Panner window on page 240.
Note: You cannot automate muting/including channels.
5. Close the Surround Panner window.
A keyframe with the pan settings you created appears below the track at the cursor position.
Tip: You can also add keyframes by double-clicking the keyframe row or by right-clicking the row and choosing Add Keyframe
from the shortcut menu. Once you’ve added the keyframe, double-click it to adjust panning settings in the Surround Panner window.
As you add keyframes to a track or bus track, the Surround Panner window shows the path of the panning keyframes. The
Smoothness slider controls the smoothness of the interpolation path between the keyframes. For more information, see Adjusting
Working with keyframes
After you add keyframes, you can work with them in much the same way as envelope points. For more information, see Using track
Moving keyframes
Drag a keyframe to a new position below its track.
Duplicating keyframes
Hold Ctrl and drag a keyframe to a new position below its track.
Editing keyframes
1. Double-click a keyframe to open the Surround Panner window.
2. Adjust the panning settings as desired and close the window.
WORKING WITH 5.1 SURROUND | 243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing keyframe interpolation curves
To control how the pan is interpolated between keyframes, right-click a keyframe and choose an interpolation curve type from the
shortcut menu. Keyframe interpolation curves control how the pan occurs over time.
Keyframe
Interpolation curve
Hold
Description
No interpolation takes place. The keyframe's settings are maintained until the next
keyframe.
Linear
Fast
Panning is interpolated in a linear path.
Panning is interpolated in a fast logarithmic path.
Panning is interpolated in a slow logarithmic path.
Panning is interpolated along a smooth, natural curve.
Slow
Smooth
Adjusting the Smoothness slider
The Smoothness slider controls the perceived motion of sound within the sound field among three or more keyframes. When you drag
the Smoothness slider to 0, the changes are interpolated between keyframes along a linear path. As you increase the smoothness value,
the path between keyframes grows more curved and smooth.
1. Double-click a keyframe. The Surround Panner window appears.
Smoothness slider
2. Drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the smoothness of the spatial interpolation path leading up to this keyframe.
...and the same three keyframes
with smoothness=0.
Three keyframes with
smoothness=100...
Locking keyframes to events
If you want keyframes to move with an event when it is moved along the timeline, choose Lock Envelopes to Events from the Options
menu.
244 | CHAPTER 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hiding keyframes
1. Select the track for which you want to hide keyframes.
2. From the View menu, choose Show Envelopes, and choose Surround Pan Keyframes from the submenu.
Deleting keyframes
Right-click a keyframe and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
Rendering surround projects
Rendering a surround project creates six mono files (AIFF, WAV, W64, or PCA) or a single 5.1-channel file (AC-3, WMA, and WMV) that
your authoring application can use to create DVD-Video or 5.1-channel music projects.
With the addition of the Sony 5.1 Surround Plug-In Pack, you can render AC-3 files using ACID software and burn the resulting files to
DVD.
Note: Before rendering your surround project, check your surround authoring application’s documentation to determine its required
audio format. Some encoders require a specific low-pass filter cutoff frequency and rolloff, and your encoder may require that no filter be
applied before encoding. Use the Audio tab of the Project Properties dialog to configure a low-pass filter. For more information, see
1. From the File menu, choose Render As. The Render As dialog appears.
2. From the Save in drop-down list, choose the drive and folder where the file will be saved.
3. Enter a new name for the project in the File name box. A separate file will be created for each channel using this name as a base.
For example, if you type My Project in the File name box and render your project using wave files, the following files would be
created: My Project Left.wav, My Project Right.wav, My Project Center.wav, My Project LFE.wav, My Project Left
Surround.wav, and My Project Right Surround.wav.
4. From the Save as type drop-down list, choose the desired file format. If you have the Sony AC-3 Encoder, you can choose AC-3
from the list.
5. Choose 44,100 Hz, 16 Bit, Mono, PCM from the Template drop-down list if you want to render six mono files, or choose an
appropriate 5.1-channel template if the selected file type supports it.
6. Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to save only the portion of the project that is contained within the Loop
Region. Loop Playback does not need to be selected for this option to work.
WORKING WITH 5.1 SURROUND | 245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the selected file type supports it, you can select the Save project markers with media file check box to include markers, regions,
and time markers in the rendered media file. If the information cannot be saved to your media file, an .sfl file will be created (using
the same base name as your media file).
8. Click Save.
Burning AC-3 files to DVD
With the addition of the AC-3 DVD Burner included in the Sony 5.1 Surround Plug-In Pack, you can burn AC-3 files to a DVD.
1. From the Tools menu, choose Start AC-3 DVD Burner. The AC-3 DVD Burner application starts.
2. Follow the instructions for burning a DVD in the AC-3 DVD Burner online help. To access online help, click Help in the AC-3 DVD
Burner screen.
246 | CHAPTER 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
A
Customizing ACID Software
You can customize the software to suit your project needs and working preferences. You may change these settings at
any time. If you use the same settings for all of your projects, you may set the ACID® application to use your settings as
defaults.
In this chapter, you will find information about functions that allow you to customize and set the application’s
preferences.
Working with ACID windows
The software has various windows that allow you to perform specific tasks related to your project or manage your media.
These windows can float on the workspace or be docked in the window docking area. All these windows may be viewed
or hidden via the View menu or their respective shortcut keys.
Window
Explorer
Shortcut keys Description
Alt+1
Alt+2
Allows you to view and access your media files without leaving the work
area. You may also preview media files and place them in your project
from this window.
Allows you to select portions of a media file that can be placed into tracks
as events.
Chopper™
Mixing Console Alt+3
Video Preview Alt+4
Media Manager Alt+5
Track Properties Alt+6
Allows you to work with busses, assignable effect chains, and soft synth
controls.
Displays a project’s video output at the current cursor position in the
timeline.
Displays the Media Manager™, which you can use to search for, manage,
and tag your media files.
Allows you to view and edit track attributes. For MIDI tracks, allows you to
edit MIDI using the piano roll editor, list editor or other OPT plug-ins.
Allows you to control panning in a 5.1 surround project.
Surround
Panner
Alt+7
Alt+8
Soft Synth
Properties
Allows you to change the attributes of soft synth controls in the Mixing
Console window.
Audio Plug-In Alt+9
Allows you to view and edit settings for assignable, bus, soft synth, and
track effect chains.
Plug-In
Manager
Groove Pool
Ctrl+Alt+1
Allows you to view and choose effects plug-ins to be added to a track,
bus, or assignable effects chain.
Allows you to view and edit grooves in your project.
For audio (non-MIDI) clips: allows you to change clip types (loop, one-
shot, and Beatmapped), and adjust time stretching, pitch, root notes,
tempo, and downbeat.
Ctrl+Alt+2
Clip Properties Ctrl+Alt+3
For MIDI clips: allows you to edit data using the list editor or piano roll.
Docking and floating ACID windows
The window docking area allows you to keep frequently used windows available but out of the way while you are
working with a project. You can dock windows either in a single stack spanning the width of the screen or divide the
window docking area into sections (e.g., right, middle, and left) and create several stacks. You can also create floating
docks by dragging several windows to the same area on your screen.
Windows that are not currently visible in a stack display a tab that you can click to display it. You can also expand, restore,
or close a window using the buttons in the window’s upper-left corner. Windows are displayed in fixed positions in the
lower portion of the window.
APPENDIX A | 247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Close window
Expand/restore window
Drag handle
Tabs
Note: When the last window in the docking area is closed or removed, the docking area minimizes automatically. When the docking
area is minimized, dragging a dockable window over the bottom of the ACID window causes the docking area to open again.
Docking windows
1. If the window is floating on the workspace, grab the window by its title bar and drag it to the window docking area anywhere
below the track list or track view. As you drag the window, the window’s outline appears.
2. Position the window’s outline in the docking area where you want it and release the mouse.
Floating windows
You may float a window so that it does not appear in the docking area.
1. Grab the window by its handle (the border along the left side) and drag the window to the workspace. As you drag the window, the
window’s outline appears.
2. Position the window anywhere in the workspace and release the mouse. You can move the floating window by dragging it to a
new position or docking it again.
If desired, you can create a floating dock with multiple windows by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Preventing windows from docking
Press Ctrl while dragging a window to prevent it from docking in the workspace.
Resizing the window docking area
You can resize the track list, track view and docking area sections of the ACID workspace by dragging the dividers between them.
Tip: You can quickly hide or show the window docking area by pressing F11.
248 | APPENDIX A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the time ruler format
You may specify a time format for the ACID time ruler to display. The ruler, located below the track view, displays real time in several
formats. You may change the ruler format in one of the following ways:
•
•
From the View menu, choose Time Ruler, and choose the desired format from the submenu.
Right-click the time ruler and choose the desired format from the shortcut menu. In addition to right-clicking the time ruler in the
track view, you can use this technique on the time rulers in the Chopper and Track Properties windows.
The following table describes the available time formats.
Time format
Samples
Description
Displays the time ruler in samples.
Time
Seconds
Displays the time ruler in hours:minutes:seconds.milliseconds.
Displays the time ruler in seconds.
Time & Frames
Displays the time ruler in hours:minutes:seconds.frames with a frame rate equal to that of your
video.
Absolute Frames
Displays the time ruler in total frames from the beginning of the project.
Feet & Frames 16 mm Displays the time ruler in feet+frames at a rate of 40 frames per foot.
Feet & Frames 35 mm Displays the time ruler in feet+frames at a rate of 16 frames per foot.
SMPTE Film Sync
(24 fps)
Displays the time ruler in hours:minutes:seconds:frames with a frame rate of 24 frames per
second for synchronizing with film.
SMPTE EBU (25 fps)
Displays the time ruler in hours:minutes:seconds:frames with a frame rate of 25 frames per
second for European Broadcasting Union.
SMPTE Non-Drop
(29.97 fps)
Displays the time ruler in hours:minutes:seconds:frames with a frame rate of 29.97 frames per
second.
SMPTE Drop
(29.97 fps)
Displays the time ruler in hours:minutes:seconds;frames with a frame rate of 29.97 frames per
second using dropped frame numbers.
SMPTE 30 (30 fps)
Displays the time ruler in hours:minutes:seconds:frames with a frame rate of 30 frames per
second.
Audio CD Time
Displays the time ruler in tt+mm:ss:ff (track number +/- minutes:seconds:frames) with a frame
rate of 75 fps.
Using the ruler offset
The ruler offset allows you to change the project ruler to start at a specific time. Typically, this feature is used in conjunction with SMPTE
and MIDI projects when their timelines are the main reference. Basically, the ruler offset allows you to set the ACID time ruler based on
another project’s timeline for reference purposes, i.e., the SMPTE or MIDI timelines.
When you enter a new value along the timeline, the ruler’s time units are adjusted at the cursor position and at the start of the timeline.
For example, if the cursor is positioned at the 2:00 minute mark and you enter 15:00 minutes, the start of the project will begin at 13:00
minutes. The ruler offset feature works the same for all time formats.
1. Position the cursor anywhere along the timeline.
2. Right-click the time ruler to display a shortcut menu.
3. From the shortcut menu, choose Set Time at Cursor. A box opens at the cursor position.
4. Enter a time value.
5. Press Enter to set the cursor position’s time value. The value that you enter at the cursor position affects all time values that
precede and follow it.
Using the project grid
The project grid appears on the track view and is mainly used to align the events in your project. The grid divides your project into equal
units based on the setting that you choose. The grid setting can be based on the project type or how you prefer to work.
It is important to remember that in some cases the grid lines and the ruler divisions do not match. This is because they are two
independent functions. However, you may set the grid to align to the ruler, which is the default setting.
APPENDIX A | 249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The grid can use the following formats:
Ruler Marks
16th Notes
Measures
Half Notes
16th Note Triplets
32 Notes
Quarter Notes
Quarter Note Triplets
8th Notes
32nd Note Triplets
64th Notes
64th Note Triplets
8th Note Triplets
Setting the grid type
You may change the grid type at any time and apply it to your project. There are two ways to set the grid type for your project.
•
•
From the Options menu, choose Grid Spacing, and choose the type of grid you want from the submenu.
Right-click the marker bar, choose Grid Spacing from the shortcut menu, and choose the type of grid that you want from the
submenu.
Using the toolbar
The toolbar is set to display below the menu bar. However, you may hide and customize the toolbar to suit your preferences. The
settings that you apply to the toolbar remain set until you change them again.
Hiding and displaying the toolbar
If you prefer to use shortcut keys when working with your project, you may hide the toolbar to create more workspace. Choose Toolbar
from the View menu to hide it. The check mark next to the command is removed and the toolbar disappears. The toolbar remains
hidden until you choose Toolbar from the View menu to display it again.
Reordering toolbar buttons
You can change the toolbar’s button order to suit your preferences. You may either reorder the buttons directly on the workspace or via
the Customize Toolbar dialog.
Reordering buttons on the ACID workspace
1. Hold Shift and drag the button that you want to move to the new location on the toolbar. A hand icon ( ) within an outline of the
button indicates that you are moving the button.
2. Release the mouse to drop the button in its new location.
Reordering buttons in the Customize Toolbar dialog
The Customize Toolbar dialog allows you to control the order and functionality available on the Toolbar. You may return the toolbar to
its default settings by clicking the Reset button.
1. From the Options menu, choose Customize Toolbar. The Customize Toolbar dialog appears.
250 | APPENDIX A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. On the Current toolbar buttons pane, select the button that you want to move and click Move Up or Move Down.
3. Click Close to save the toolbar changes and close the dialog.
Adding buttons to the toolbar
A series of buttons are included that you may add to the toolbar. These buttons are listed in the Customize Toolbar dialog. You may also
add separators on the toolbar to organize the buttons to suit your preferences.
You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button on the dialog.
1. From the Options menu, choose Customize Toolbar. The Customize Toolbar dialog appears.
2. On the Available toolbar buttons pane, use the scroll bars to locate the button that you want to add and select it.
3. On the Current toolbar buttons pane, select the button that you want the newly added button to proceed in order.
For example, if you want to add the Save As button and want it to precede the Publish button, select the Publish button in the
Current toolbar buttons pane.
4. Click Add. The new button is added above the selected button on the Current toolbar buttons pane.
Tip: You may also double-click a button in the Available toolbar buttons pane to add it to the toolbar.
5. Click Close to save the toolbar settings and close the dialog.
Removing buttons from the toolbar
You may remove buttons and separators from the toolbar. If you have added buttons to the toolbar, removing unused or unwanted
buttons allows you to maximize the toolbar’s space. You may remove toolbar buttons either directly on the workspace or via the
Customize Toolbar dialog.
Removing buttons on the ACID workspace
1. Hold Shift and drag the button that you want to remove off the toolbar. A hand icon ( ) within an outline of the button indicates
that you are removing the button.
2. Release the mouse to remove the button.
Removing buttons in the Customize Toolbar dialog
You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button on this dialog.
1. From the Options menu, choose Customize Toolbar. The Customize Toolbar dialog appears.
2. On the Current toolbar buttons pane, select the button that you want to remove.
3. Click Remove. The button is removed from the Current toolbar buttons pane and will not appear on the toolbar.
Tip: You may also double-click a button to remove it.
4. Click Close to save the toolbar settings and exit the dialog.
APPENDIX A | 251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the time display
The time display above the track list reflects the cursor’s position on the timeline.
Changing cursor position
You can edit the cursor position using time as it is displayed on either the beat ruler or time ruler:
•
To set the cursor’s position based on the beat ruler, right-click the time display and choose Edit Cursor Position - Beats from the
shortcut menu.
•
To set the cursor’s position based on the time ruler, right-click the time display and choose Edit Cursor Position - Time from the
shortcut menu.
Once you make your selection from the shortcut menu, a box appears for the appropriate time display. Enter the cursor’s new position
and press Enter.
Tip: You can also edit the cursor position directly by double-clicking the desired time display value and entering the new cursor position.
Changing the time display
The time display window always reflects the format of the time ruler. You may change the ruler settings for the time ruler via the time
display window.
1. Right-click the time display window to display a shortcut menu.
2. Choose Time at Cursor Format to display a submenu.
3. Choose the desired time format.
Both the time window and time ruler display the chosen time format.
Monitoring MIDI timecode
You can use the time display to monitor incoming or outgoing MIDI timecode. MIDI can be monitored in the following ways:
•
•
Display MIDI timecode generated from external sources.
Display MIDI timecode and MIDI clock information that is generated.
The time display settings work in conjunction with your project’s properties and MIDI setup options.
1. Right-click the time display window to display a shortcut menu.
2. From the shortcut menu, choose the type of MIDI monitoring to be displayed. Once you have made your selection, the time display
window displays both the MIDI code being input or output and a status message.
Setting default track properties
Each new track has certain default properties, including height, volume, pan type, and track effects. You can modify these track
properties and then use the modified track as a standard for all new tracks you create.
1. Modify a track’s volume (pg. 41), pan type (pg. 113), height (pg. 40), and track effects (pg. 101).
2. Right-click the track header and choose Set Default Track Properties from the shortcut menu.
252 | APPENDIX A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Select the check boxes for properties you wish to set. Clear the check boxes for the properties you wish to leave as
they are.
Tip: Select the Restore original defaults check box to return to the original track properties.
4. Click OK.
Setting ACID preferences
From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog.
APPENDIX A | 253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the General tab
Item
Description
Automatically open last project on Select this check box if you want to reopen the project that was open the last time the
startup
software was closed. When you clear this check box, the software starts with a blank
project.
Show logo splash screen on
startup
Select this box if you want the ACID logo splash screen to display upon startup.
Use Net Notify to stay informed
about Sony products
When you select this check box, information is periodically displayed from Sony at
startup. Clear the check box to bypass the Net Notify dialog.
Create undos for FX parameter
changes
Select this check box if you want Undos to be created when you change a plug-in
parameter.
Confirm media file deletion when When you select this check box, a message box appears asking if you want to delete a
still in use media file that is currently in use by the project.
Close media files when ACID is not When you select this check box, you can edit files in external editors while the files are
the active application contained in events in ACID.
Close audio and MIDI ports when Select this check box if you want to close ACID audio and MIDI ports when you switch to
ACID is not the active application another application.
Clear the check box if you want to leave ports open. For example, if you have a MIDI
keyboard routed to an ACID soft synth, clearing the check box allows you to continue to
hear the soft synth while you work with a sequencer.
Note: When you edit a clip in an external editor, audio, MIDI, and external control
hardware is released regardless of the Close audio and MIDI ports when ACID is not
the active application check box setting. The ports are re-enabled when focus is
restored to ACID.
Enable multimedia keyboard
support
When you select this check box, you can use a multimedia keyboard to control playback
of a project.
Automatically render large Wave The WAV format is limited by a maximum file size of ~2GB. When you select this check
files as Wave64
box, you can render larger files as Sony Wave64 files.
Prompt for region and marker
names if not playing
When you select this check box, a box appears so you can name markers and regions as
you place them.
Create project file backups on
save (.acd-bak)
When you select this check box, a backup of project files is made when you open them.
Backup files are stored in the same folder as your project and use the same file name
with the extension .acd.bak. You can use backup project files to revert to a project’s
previous state.
Preserve pitch for new
Select the check box if you want to maintain the pitch of Beatmapped tracks when the
Beatmapped tracks when tempo project tempo changes.
changes
Automatically start the
Select the check box if you want to start the Beatmapper Wizard when you add a file
Beatmapper Wizard for long files that is longer than 30 seconds to your project.
Use slower updates to prevent
playback clicks during editing
Select this check box if you want to update the ACID audio engine more slowly.
Selecting this option can prevent unwanted artifacts during timeline editing.
Enable autosave
Select this check box to create a temporary project file that can aid in crash recovery.
Your project information is autosaved every five minutes without overwriting your
project file.
Use SPTI for CD burning
Select this check box if you want to use SPTI (SCSI Pass-Through Interface) to
communicate with your CD burning drive.
Autoname extracted CD tracks
Select this check box if you want file names to be automatically assigned to tracks that
you extract from CDs.
File names include the CD's ID number and track number.
Keep bypassed FX running (to
avoid pause on bypass/enable)
Select this check box if you want effects to remain open so you can bypass/enable
effects with no pause for A/B testing. When the check box is cleared, effects are fully
bypassed, conserving processing power.
Confirm groove deletion when still When this check box is selected, a message box will appear asking if you want to delete
in use
a groove that is currently in use by the project.
Enable Windows XP Theme
support
When this check box is selected, the ACID window will inherit the appearance of the
current theme when using Windows® XP. When the check box is cleared, user interface
elements will maintain the classic Windows operating system appearance.
254 | APPENDIX A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
Save media-usage relationships in When this check box is selected, the Media Manager™ will save information about
active media library
media usage so you can perform searches for media relationships.
You can search for projects that use a media file, projects where a media file was
previewed, media that was rendered with a media file, and so on.
Enable Media Manager (requires When this check box is selected, the Media Manager will start when you start ACID.
ACID restart)
Clear the check box to turn off the Media Manager and prevent it from starting with the
application. If you're not using the Media Manager, you may want to turn it off to
conserve processing power or memory.
Allow snapping for post-groove
When this check box is selected, groove markers in the Groove Editor will snap to the
markers
current grid spacing if snapping is enabled. Hold Shift while dragging to bypass
snapping (press Shift after you click).
Clear the check box if you do not want groove markers to snap to the grid.
Check .acd file type association at When this check box is selected, ACID automatically checks whether .acd, acd-bak, and
startup
.acd-zip are associated with ACID and prompts you to restore the file association if
necessary.
Do not query Gracenote for CD
information
When this check box is selected, ACID will not attempt to obtain disc information from
Gracenote MusicID when you insert an audio CD.
Recently used project list
Select the check box and enter a number in the box if you want to list your most
recently used projects at the bottom of the File menu.
Default All
Restores all general preferences to the default settings.
Using the Audio tab
Item
Description
Open files as loops between
(seconds)
Enter a lower and upper limit to specify which files will be opened as loops if
stretching properties are not saved in the file.
Files that are shorter than the lower limit will be opened as one-shot tracks; files
longer than the upper limit will the Beatmapper Wizard. (pg. 113)
Quick fade edit edges of audio
events
When the check box is selected, ACID software will place a rapid fade on the edges
of audio events (10 ms by default) to soften potentially harsh transitions. When
the command is not selected, edges of new events are not faded (fades that were
applied before the check box is cleared are not removed).
Right-click an event and select or clear the Quick Fade Edges command to
override the default event fade behavior for individual events.
Note: Selecting or clearing the check box will not affect existing quick fades in
your project. To remove all quick fades from a project, enter 0 in the Quick fade
time box.
Quick fade time (ms)
Enter a time (in milliseconds) to specify the duration of fades applied to the edges
of events.
Important: Changing this setting will affect all existing quick fades in your
project.
Waveform display while recording Choose a setting from the drop-down list to specify whether you want to display
displays can improve performance.
ACID type for recorded audio
Choose a setting from the drop-down list to specify the type of clip that will be
Record action when nothing is
armed
Choose a setting from the drop-down list to specify what happens if you click the
Record button when no track is armed:
New Audio Track: Creates a new audio track where you can record.
New MIDI Track: Creates a new MIDI track where you can record.
Do Nothing: The Record button is unavailable unless an audio or MIDI track is
armed for recording.
APPENDIX A | 255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
Include project name when
naming recorded media
Select this check box if you want to use the project name to identify recorded
clips.
For example, if this check box is selected and you’re working with My Remix.acd,
recorded files will be named My Remix Track X Recording X.wav.
If this check box is not selected, recorded files will be named Track X Recording
X.wav.
Track prefader sends listen to mute Select this check box if you want pre-volume sends from tracks to busses and
assignable effects to respond to the track mute state.
When the check box is cleared, the pre-volume sends are not affected by the mute
state (in order to facilitate cue mixes).
Use legacy track send gain
Metronome sound
Select this check box if you want to configure audio track sends to behave as they
did in ACID 6.0 and earlier. When the check box is selected, you can open projects
created with earlier versions of ACID and be assured they will sound the same as
they did in earlier versions of ACID.
Choose a setting from the drop-down list to choose the sound that will be used to
Normalize peak level (dB)
Default All
Type a value or use the spinner to change the value that will be used when
normalizing clips.
Click to restore the Audio tab to the default settings.
256 | APPENDIX A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Audio Device tab
Item
Description
Audio device type
Choose a driver type from the drop-down list:
•
Microsoft Sound Mapper: The default setting. Allows the Sound Mapper to
choose an appropriate playback device.
•
Direct Sound Surround Mapper: Allows the Surround Mapper to choose
appropriate playback devices for the front, rear, and center/LFE channels in a
•
Windows Classic Wave Driver: Allows you to choose a specific audio device
using a classic wave driver. For stereo projects, choose a device from the
Default Stereo and Front playback device drop-down list. For 5.1-surround
projects, choose devices from the Default Stereo and Front playback device,
Default Rear playback device, and Default Center and LFE playback device
drop-down lists.
•
•
ASIO: Allows you to choose a specific audio device using a low-latency ASIO
driver. For stereo projects, choose a device from the Default Stereo and Front
playback device from the drop-down list. For 5.1-surround projects, choose
devices from the Default Stereo and Front playback device, Default Rear
playback device, and Default Center and LFE playback device drop-down lists.
ReWire Device Driver: Allows you to use ACID software as ReWire device in a
ReWire mixer application. If a ReWire mixer application starts ACID software,
that ACID window will start in ReWire mode and cannot be switched from
ReWire mode. If a ReWire mixer connects to an existing ACID window, that
window will run in ReWire mode, and you can switch out of ReWire mode if
necessary. If you exit that instance of the software and start ACID software
again, the new instance will start ReWire mode, and you can switch out of
ReWire mode if necessary by choosing a different audio device type.
Default Stereo and Front playback Choose the device that you want to use for playing stereo sound data. In a 5.1
device
surround project, this device plays the right and left channels.
Selecting a device such as the Microsoft Sound Mapper allows Windows to select
an appropriate device to use for the current sound data.
Note: If you have selected Microsoft Sound Mapper, you cannot assign busses
to different devices.
Default Rear playback device
Choose the device that you want to use for playing the rear channels (right
surround and left surround) in a 5.1 surround project.
Default Center and LFE playback
device
Choose the device that you want to use for playing the center and LFE channels in
a 5.1 surround project.
Playback buffering (seconds)
The Playback buffering (seconds) slider specifies the total amount of buffering
that is used during playback. The larger the number, the more buffering that
occurs during playback. This value should be as low as possible without gapping.
To set it, start at 25 and play a typical song. Move some of the track faders. If the
playback gaps at all, try increasing this slider in small increments until the gapping
stops. As you increase this slider, the RAM meter at the bottom of the ACID
window will indicate more RAM usage.
If you simply cannot get playback to be free of gapping, you need to either
decrease the number of tracks you are trying to play simultaneously, install more
RAM in your computer so you can increase buffering, buy a faster access hard
drive, or minimize the number of audio plug-ins you are trying to use
simultaneously.
Enable track buffering
Select this check box and drag the Track buffering slider if you want to adjust the
amount of audio that is prerendered ahead of the cursor position.
When the check box is selected, a separate processing thread is used to render
audio from tracks. On multiprocessor or multicore computers, a thread will be
created for each logical processor.
When the check box is cleared, a single processing thread is used to render audio
from tracks and busses.
Default audio recording device
Choose the device that you want to use for recording sound data.
Selecting the Microsoft Sound Mapper allows the operating system to select an
appropriate device to use for the current sound data.
APPENDIX A | 257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatically detect and offset for Select the check box to automatically compensate for offset between the time you
hardware recording latency
initiate recording and when your sound card starts recording.
Click this button to open the Advanced Audio Configuration dialog.
Click to restore the Audio tab to the default settings.
Advanced
Default All
Setting Advanced audio preferences from the Audio Device tab
Item
Description
Audio devices
This list displays all of the audio devices that are installed in your computer.
Selecting a device allows you to set the options for that device.
Interpolate position
Position bias
When you select this check box, the software attempts to compensate for
inaccurate devices by interpolating the playback or recording position. If you
notice that your playback cursor is offset from what you are hearing, select this
option for the playback device.
If the position of playback or record does not match what you hear after you
enable Interpolate position, you can attempt to compensate using the Position
bias slider. Moving this slider offsets the position forward or backward to
compensate for the inaccuracies of the device.
Do not pre-roll buffers before
starting playback
When you select this check box, buffers are not created prior to starting playback.
Some devices do not behave properly if you clear this check box. If your audio
stutters when you start playback, try selecting this option.
Audio buffers
Drag the slider to set the number of audio buffers that will be used. Adjusting this
setting can decrease gapping or help you synchronize the input and output for
record input monitoring.
Buffer size (samples)
Priority
Choose a setting from the drop-down list to indicate the buffer size you want to
use.
Choose a setting from the drop-down list to set the priority that is assigned to your
audio buffers. Increasing the buffers’ priority can help you attain smoother
playback, but it can also adversely affect other processes.
258 | APPENDIX A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing ASIO Port Naming
When you use an ASIO sound card, default names are displayed in ACID for each of the device’s ports. If you have a simple setup, the
default names probably work well enough for you. However, if you have a complex setup, customizing the port names can help you
keep track of your routing with meaningful labels.
For example, if you have your control room monitors connected to outputs 1 and 2 on your sound card, you could replace the default
MainOut 1L and MainOut 1R port names with CtrlRm Left and CtrlRm Right. If your lead vocal microphone is connected to Mic/Inst 1,
you could name the port LeadVocal, and a harmony microphone connected to Mic/Inst 1 could be labeled Harmony.
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences, and then click the Audio Device tab.
2. Choose your ASIO audio interface from the Audio device type drop-down list, and then click Apply.
3. Click the Advanced button to display the Advanced Audio Configuration dialog.
4. If you want to edit the name of an input or output port, click the label in the Name column, and then press F2. You can then type a
new name in the edit box.
Item
Description
Name
The name of the port as it will be displayed in ACID.
Default naming.
Input pairs and outputs can be mono, or multiple mono, or
stereo.
•
•
Mono: A single-channel input or output.
Stereo: A pair of two mono inputs or outputs. For example,
you might connect the right and left outputs of a stereo
device to a stereo input.
•
Multi mono: A grouping of two monaural channels as a
multichannel port. The content in the channels is from
distinct monaural sources and not intended to be mixed
as a stereo signal. For example, you might connect two
microphones to separate inputs to record harmony vocals.
After renaming the multiple mono port Mic/InstIn 1/Mic
InstIn 2 to Guitar, the port is switched to stereo, and the left
and right channels are renamed Guitar Left and Guitar Right.
If you rename either of a stereo port’s channels, the port is
switched to a multiple mono channel, and labels are updated
accordingly.
If you want to switch back to a stereo channel, you can
rename the Multi Mono channel.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
•
ASIO port names are not saved per project.
In stereo pairs, odd-numbered ports represent the left channel; even-numbered ports represent the right channel.
Stereo pairs must consist of sequential channels. You cannot make stereo pairs from arbitrary channels.
If you want to restore a port’s default name, delete the label in the Name column, and the Internal Name is restored.
If you want to restore all port names, click the Reset Names button (or press Alt+N).
I/O
Indicates whether the port is an input or output port.
The default name of the port.
Internal Name
Channel
Indicates whether a port is a stereo, mono, or multiple mono.
APPENDIX A | 259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the MIDI tab
Note: If you have a MIDI controller that includes buttons and knobs that you map to external control functions, you can use the device
as an external control device and as a MIDI input device for recording MIDI — for example, you can use the buttons, knobs, and sliders on
the device for external control, and still use the keyboard, pitch wheel, and modulation wheel for recording MIDI.
MIDI messages that are mapped to external control functions are filtered when you record MIDI. If a note message is assigned to a control
surface function, both the note-on and note-off messages will be filtered.
Item
Description
Make these devices available for
MIDI track playback
Select the check box for each MIDI device that you want to use as a MIDI output
for MIDI tracks and generating MIDI clock.
To load a program map for a hardware synth, right-click the Device box for your
MIDI device and choose Load Device Template from the shortcut menu.
The selected program map will be used for any track that is routed to the MIDI
device. The device name will be displayed on the MIDI Output button on the track
header, and the programs from the device map will be available when you click
the Program button
in the track header.
To assign an input device to a MIDI output port, right-click the Device box, choose
Input from the shortcut menu, and then choose an input device from the
submenu. For example, by assigning an input device, you can choose which
controller you want to use to play a MIDI device.
When you assign an input device to a MIDI output port, the device name is
displayed in the Device column in the appropriate row in the Make these devices
available for MIDI input list.
If you want an output device to receive MIDI thru data from an input device, right-
click the MIDI Thru From column and choose a device from the shortcut menu.
When you choose a MIDI Thru From device, the device name is displayed in the
Device column in the MIDI Thru To column in the Make these devices available
for MIDI input list.
Make these devices available for
MIDI input
Select the check box for each MIDI device that you want to be available for
To assign an output port to an input device, right-click the Device box, choose
Output from the shortcut menu, and then choose an output device from the
submenu.
If you want a MIDI input device to echo its MIDI data to an output device, right-
click the MIDI Thru To column and choose a device from the shortcut menu. You
can select multiple devices to send MIDI thru data.
Auto MIDI input routing
When this check box is selected, the focus track will accept input from any MIDI
input device.
When multiple tracks are selected, the focus track displays a blinking indicator in
its track number.
The Solo Listen to MIDI Input button
in the Soft Synth Properties window is
unavailable when this check box is selected.
Default All
Restores all MIDI preferences to the default settings.
260 | APPENDIX A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Video tab
Item
Description
Device
Choose a DV output device from the drop-down list. This is the interface to which
your video device is connected.
Details
Displays information about the device selected in the External monitor device
drop-down list.
If project format is invalid for DV
If your source media does not conform to DV standards, choose a setting from the
output, conform to the following drop-down list.The video is adjusted to display properly on your external monitor.
Sync offset (frames)
If your audio is not synchronized with your external monitor, you can configure an
offset for your hardware. Drag the slider to synchronize audio and video.
This setting affects synchronization for previewing on an external monitor. Audio
and video synchronization in your ACID project is unaffected.
Record engage delay (frames)
Drag the slider to specify the number of frames it takes your camcorder or deck to
switch from Record Pause to Record mode. If you're missing frames from the
beginning of your file after printing to tape, increase the setting. If you see
duplicated frames at the beginning of your video, decrease the setting.
Default All
Restores all video preferences to the default settings.
Using the Editing tab
Item
Description
Project tempo range
Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the boxes to specify the minimum
and maximum tempo available in the ACID project. Changing this option affects
the resolution of the Project Tempo slider.
Tempo curve segmentation
Editing Application X
Choose a setting from the drop-down list to change the timing resolution ACID
Enter the name of each editor you want to display in the track list shortcut menu.
Right-click a track in the track list and choose Edit in [editor name] to edit the
media file associated with a track.
You can specify any editing tool you want to use; however, this feature was
designed for use with destructive audio/MIDI editors.
Browse
Name
Clear
Click Browse and select the .exe file for each editor you want to have available in
the track list shortcut menu.
Enter the name that you want to use to identify each editor. The name is displayed
in the track list shortcut menu and the Tools menu.
Removes the specified editor from the Editing tab.
Check for latest versions of Sony
editors
When you select this check box, the software automatically searches for the latest
available Sony editors on your computer. If one is located, it appears as an
available editor in the Editing Application X box.
Default All
Restores all editing preferences to the default settings.
APPENDIX A | 261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Sync tab
Setting sync preferences
Generate MIDI Timecode settings
Output device
Choose a MIDI device from the drop-down list. MIDI timecode is sent to this
device. The MTC slave should also be set to this device. This device will not be
available for MIDI playback.
Frame rate
Choose a frame rate from the drop-down list. This frame rate is used to generate
the MIDI timecode. The MTC slave must be set to the same frame rate.
Generate MIDI Clock settings
Output device
Choose a MIDI device from the drop-down list. MIDI clock is sent to this device.
The MIDI clock slave should also be set to this device.
Trigger from MIDI Timecode settings
Input device
Choose a MIDI device from the drop-down list. MIDI timecode is received from this
device. The MTC master should also be set to this device.
Frame rate
Choose a frame rate from the drop-down list. This value specifies the frame rate at
which the MTC master sends timecode to ACID.
Advanced
Default All
Click to open the Advanced Sync Preferences dialog.
Restores all sync preferences to the default settings.
Setting advanced sync preferences
MTC Input
Free-wheel for timecode loss
Select this check box if you want to continue to play if timecode is lost.
Enabling this option can compensate for infrequent losses in timecode. If you
frequently lose timecode, you should perform troubleshooting to determine the
cause of the problem.
Free-wheel slack time
Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the box to specify the amount of
time that timecode can be lost before the free-wheel playback time starts. A
longer time is more tolerant of breaks in the incoming timecode.
Free-wheel playback time
Synchronization delay time
Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the box to specify the amount of
time that playback continues after the free-wheel slack time has been exceeded.
Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the box to specify the amount of
time it takes for the software to synchronize itself to incoming timecode.
On slower computers, this time should be set to approximately two seconds. On
faster computers, it may be set lower.
Setting this value too low can sometimes result in audible pitch shifting at the
start of playback.
Offset adjust
If ACID is consistently behind or ahead of your MTC generator, enter a value in the
box to adjust a synchronization offset with quarter-frame accuracy.
If the software is behind, set this value to a negative number. A setting of - 4 is a
common offset.
If the software is ahead, set this value to a positive number. A setting of +4 is a
common offset, although it is rare that the application will sync ahead.
MTC Output
Full-frame message generation
Select a radio button to determine when full-frame timecode messages are sent
while Generate MIDI Timecode is active. Full-frame messages are used by some
external synchronizable audio devices to seek to a proper location prior to actually
starting synchronization. Tape-based recorders especially benefit from seeking to
full-frame messages because of the time it takes to move the transport to the
proper location. However, full-frame messages are ignored by some devices, and
may actually cause unexpected behavior in other devices.
Refer to your hardware documentation to find out if your hardware supports full-
frame messages.
MIDI Clock Output
262 | APPENDIX A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MTC Input
Send Start instead of Continue
when beginning playback
Select this check box if you want a Start command rather than a Continue
command to be sent when Generate MIDI Clock is activated.
When the check box is cleared, a Continue command is sent, as this type of
command allows the chasing device to start from a specific time. However, some
older sequencers that support MIDI Clock chase do not support the Continue
command and must start playback from the beginning every time.
Song Position Pointer generation Select a radio button to determine when Song Position Pointer messages are sent
while Generate MIDI Clock is active.
Song Position Pointer messages are used by MIDI applications and devices to
seek to a proper location prior to starting synchronization.
Using the Display tab
Item
Description
Track colors
Use these controls to change the default colors used to display tracks in your
project.
Select a track from the Track drop-down list, and then click the color swatch to
display a color picker.
You can choose any color using the RGBA or HSLA controls, or click the
eyedropper to sample a color from your screen.
When you click OK or Apply, all tracks that used the selected color are updated.
Envelope colors
Section colors
To customize an envelope’s color, select an envelope from the Envelope type
drop-down list. Click the color button to the right to display the Envelope Color
dialog and choose a custom color.
Use these controls to change the default colors used to display sections in your
project.
Choose a section letter from the Section drop-down list and click the color button
to the right to display a color picker, where you can choose any color using the
RGBA or HSLA controls. Click the
button to switch between RGB and HSL
to sample a color from your screen.
color modes, or click the eyedropper
Icon color saturation
Icon color tint
Drag the slider to adjust the color intensity of icons in the ACID window. Drag to
the left to decrease the color saturation, or drag to the right to increase it.
Drag the slider to adjust the amount of tinting that is applied to the icons in the
ACID window. Drag the slider to the right to add an average of the title bar colors
to the icons. Drag to the left to decrease the amount of tinting applied.
Default All
Restores all display preferences to the default settings.
Using the Other tab
Item
Description
Enable multiple-selection preview Select this check box if you want to preview multiple selected files in the Explorer.
in Explorer window
Enter values in the Number of times to repeat each Loop, Seconds of each One-
Shot to play, and Number of Beatmapped measures to play boxes to specify
how different file types are previewed.
APPENDIX A | 263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Folders tab
Item
Description
Default project folder
This box displays the path to the folder that will be used for creating new projects.
Click the Browse button to choose a different folder.
Use a single default folder for
project media saves
Select this radio button if you want to save all project media in a single folder.
Use separate defaults for each type Select this radio button if you want to choose where to save each type of project
of project media save
media.
The following boxes display the location where each type of media file will be
saved.
Record
This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when
you record new audio or MIDI tracks. Click the Browse button to
choose a different folder.
The folder you specify here is used by default for new projects,
but if you want to choose a project-specific recorded files folder,
you can use the Recorded files folder box on the Audio tab of
the Project Properties dialog.
Extract from CD This box displays the path to the folder that will be used for
tracks that you extract from audio CDs. Click the Browse button
to choose a different folder.
Render project This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when
you render your project. Click the Browse button to choose a
different folder.
Render to new This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when
you render to a new track. Click the Browse button to choose a
different folder.
Chop to new
This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when
you create new tracks with the Chopper window. Click the
Browse button to choose a different folder.
New MIDI
This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when
you export MIDI. Click the Browse button to choose a different
folder.
MIDI files are not created when you record MIDI or create new
MIDI clips. MIDI data for clips is stored within the ACID project.
Default groove folder
Temporary files folder
This box displays the path to the folder where default grooves for new ACID
projects are saved. Click the Browse button to choose a different folder.
This folder is also used as the default location for saving exported grooves from
the Groove Pool window.
Displays the folder where temporary files are stored. Click Browse to specify a new
folder.
When you add a media file to a project from a removable device, a copy of the
media file is stored in a temporary files folder. This keeps the media file available
for use even if the source of the media is no longer accessible.
Be aware that this folder is cleared when you close the software. However, the
temporary files are not cleared if the software closes inappropriately.
Free storage space in selected
folder
This value displays the amount of space available in the folder specified in the
Temporary files folder box.
264 | APPENDIX A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the External Control & Automation tab
Use the External Control & Automation tab to set up and customize control surfaces. From the Options menu, choose Preferences to
display the Preferences dialog. Click the External Control & Automation tab. For more information, see Configuring a Mackie Control
Note: From the Options menu, choose External Control to enable your selected control surfaces.
Preference
Description
Smooth and thin automation
When recording automation or drawing envelope curves, ACID software creates as
data after recording or drawing many envelope points or keyframes as possible to represent your control
movements.
Select this check box if you want to reduce the number of envelope points/
keyframes after recording or drawing is finished.
Set controls to default values
when automation is turned off
Select this check box if you want controls to return to their default values when set
the track's automation recording mode to Automation Off. Automated effect
parameters do not have default settings and will retain their last-set values when
you turn automation off.
When the check box is cleared, controls will retain their last-set values when you
turn automation off.
Available devices
Choose a device from the drop-down list and click Add to choose the control
surfaces that will be available to ACID software. Adding a device loads its default
profile.
For information about configuring specific MIDI controllers, see Setting up a
Active control devices
Default all
Lists the control devices that you’ve added. Double-click a device name to
customize its behavior.
Restores all control surface preferences to the default settings.
Note: You can connect one Mackie Control Universal (with up to four Mackie Control Universal Extenders), one Frontier TranzPort, and
up to five generic MIDI controllers.
Customizing keyboard shortcuts
From the Options menu, choose Customize Keyboard to customize the keyboard shortcuts available in the ACID interface.
The Keyboard mapping box displays the currently assigned shortcut keys. Click a tab in the middle of the dialog to choose which
shortcuts you want to see.
Editing or creating new shortcuts
1. Click a tab in the middle of the dialog to indicate the type of command you want to assign to a keyboard shortcut.
2. Select a command in the list.
Tip: You can type a word in the Show commands containing box to filter the list of commands to display only commands that contain
the word you typed.
3. Click the Shortcut keys box and press the key combination you want to assign to the selected command.
4. Click the Add button to assign the key combination in the Shortcut keys box to the selected command.
APPENDIX A | 265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving a keyboard mapping
Click the Save as button and type a name to save your current keyboard shortcuts to an .ini file in the C:\Documents and
Settings\[user name]\Local Settings\Application Data\Sony\ACID Pro\7.0 folder
(C:\Users\[user name]\AppData\Local\Sony\ACID Pro\7.0 on Windows Vista).
Tip: The Application Data folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the
Windows Folder Options control panel.
You can use this file as a backup or to share your keyboard shortcuts with other ACID users.
Deleting a keyboard mapping
Choose a mapping from the Keyboard mapping drop-down list and click the Delete button to remove the selected keyboard mapping.
Tip: You cannot delete the default ACID keyboard mapping.
Importing a keyboard mapping
Copy an ACID keyboard mapping .ini file to the C:\Documents and Settings\[user name]\Local Settings\Application
Data\Sony\ACID Pro\7.0 folder (C:\Users\[user name]\AppData\Local\Sony\ACID Pro\7.0 on Windows Vista).
Tip: The Application Data folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the
Windows Folder Options control panel.
The next time you start ACID, the new keyboard mapping will be available from the Keyboard mapping drop-down list in the
Customize Keyboard dialog.
Resetting the default keyboard mapping
Choose [Default] from the Keyboard mapping drop-down list and click OK to restore the default configuration.
266 | APPENDIX A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
B
Using Control Surfaces with ACID
A control surface is a hardware device that uses knobs, faders, and buttons to control user interface elements that are
normally controlled with a mouse. Using a control surface lends a tactile feel to your editing sessions.
Unlike keyboard shortcuts—which determine the shortcut's behavior based on the portion of the ACID window that has
focus—a control surface's mapped functions work no matter what part of the application has focus.
When your control surface is enabled, an indicator is displayed in the track list and the Mixing Console to indicate which
channels are under external control. Multiple bars are displayed if a channel is under the control of multiple devices.
In the track list, vertical
bars in tracks 1-4 indicate
that those tracks are
under external control.
In the Mixing Console,
horizontal bars at the top
of channels 1-4 indicate
which channels are under
external control
Connecting a control surface
You can use one Mackie® Control Universal with up to four Mackie Control Universal Extenders, one Frontier TranzPort, or
up to five generic control surfaces with ACID software. Perform the following steps for each device.
1. Connect the MIDI Out port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI In port on your control surface.
2. Connect the MIDI In port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI Out port on your control surface. For more information,
3. Configure ACID software to use your control surface.
Note: If you’re using a USB interface such as Frontier TranzPort, just plug in the USB cable. For information about your
specific device, please refer to the manufacturer's documentation.
APPENDIX B | 267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ACID to use your control surface
Use the MIDI tab in the Preferences dialog to select the device to which your control surface is connected. For more information, see
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog.
2. Enable your MIDI input and output ports:
a. Select the MIDI tab in the Preferences dialog.
b. In the Make these devices available for MIDI track playback box, select the check box for the MIDI port that is connected to
your control surface's In port.
c. In the Make these devices available for MIDI input box, select the check box for the MIDI port that is connected to your control
surface's Out port.
Note: MIDI ports that are in use by a Mackie Control Universal or Mackie Control Universal Extender display a
icon to
indicate that they are not available for MIDI track input or playback.
3. Choose your control surface:
a. Select the External Control & Automation tab in the Preferences dialog. For more information, see Using the External Control &
b. Choose a device from the Available devices drop-down list and click the Add button. Adding a device loads its default profile.
If you want to customize the behavior of the control surface, double-click its entry in the Active control devices list.
4. Click OK to apply your changes and close the Preferences dialog.
5. From the Options menu, choose External Control to enable your selected control surfaces.
Configuring or customizing your control surface
Use the External Control & Automation tab in the Preferences dialog to select the control surfaces you want to use and adjust their
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog.
2. Select the External Control & Automation tab.
3. Choose a device from the Available devices drop-down list and click the Add button. The device is added to the Active control
devices list.
4. Double-click the entry in the Active control devices list to display the configuration dialog.
For information about configuring specific MIDI controllers, see Setting up a Mackie Control Universal on page 269, Using a Frontier
TranzPort on page 283, Configuring a generic MIDI controller on page 285, or The Behringer BCF2000 control surface on page 288.
Using your control surface
This section describes how to use your control surface in general terms.
For information about your specific device, please refer to the manufacturer's documentation.
1. From the Options menu, choose External Control to enable your selected control surfaces.
2. If necessary, press the Automation button on your control surface.
3. Click the Automation Settings button
for each track you want to edit with the control surface and choose Automation Write
(Touch) or Automation Write (Latch) to enable automation recording. For more information, see Automation recording modes on
To enable automation recording for audio busses and soft synths, use audio bus tracks.
Use the functions on your control surface to edit your project.
268 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up a Mackie Control Universal
The Mackie Control is fully supported by ACID® software and lends a tactile element to your editing sessions. There are many overlays
available that you can use to label the Mackie Control buttons and controls with their mapped functions in ACID. For more information
about Mackie Control overlays, please check the Mackie Web site:
The overlay identifies the default control mapping. You can also customize the buttons and controls on the Mackie control. For more
information, see Configuring or customizing control mappings on page 271. When you use the default mapping, the Mackie Control is
divided into several functional areas. All functionality described in this document refers to the default control mapping.
Connecting the Mackie Control Universal
You can use one Mackie Control Universal (with up to four Mackie Control Extenders) with ACID. Perform the following steps for each
device.
If you’re using Mackie Control Extenders, you’ll need a multiport MIDI interface with MIDI In/Out ports for each device.
1. Connect the MIDI Out port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI In port on your Mackie Control Universal.
2. Connect the MIDI In port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI Out port on your Mackie Control Universal.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each Mackie Control Extender.
APPENDIX B | 269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the software to use the Mackie Control Universal
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog.
2. Enable your MIDI input and output ports:
a. Select the MIDI tab in the Preferences dialog.
b. In the Make these devices available for MIDI track playback box, select the check box for the MIDI port that is connected to
the Mackie Control Universal’s In port.
c. In the Make these devices available for MIDI input box, select the check box for the MIDI port that is connected to your
Mackie Control Universal’s Out port.
d. Repeat Steps 2b and 2c for each Mackie Control Extender.
e. Click Apply.
Note: MIDI ports that are in use by a Mackie Control or Extender display a
icon to indicate that they are not available for MIDI
track input or playback.
3. Choose your control surface:
a. Select the External Control and Automation tab in the Preferences dialog.
b. From the Available devices drop-down list, choose Mackie Control and click the Add button to load the default profile.
4. Click OK to apply your changes and close the Preferences dialog.
5. From the Options menu, choose External Control to enable the Mackie Control Universal.
Configuring channel mappings for Mackie Control Extenders
If you’re using Mackie Control Extenders, you’ll need to set up your channel mapping. Channel mapping tells the software how the
devices are arranged on your desktop.
For example, if your Mackie Control Universal is on the left of your Mackie Control Extender, you could configure the Mackie Control to
adjust channels 1 through 8 and use the Mackie Control Extender to adjust channels 9 through 16. If you have a Mackie Control
Universal positioned between two Mackie Control Extenders, you could adjust channels 1 through 8 on the left Extender, adjust
channels 9 through 16 on the Mackie Control Universal, and adjust channels 17 through 24 on the right Extender.
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog.
2. Select the External Control & Automation tab.
3. Double-click your Mackie Control in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Mackie Control dialog.
The current channel mapping is displayed on each device's LCD.
270 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Choose the channels you want to control with the Mackie Control Universal:
a. From the Device Type drop-down list, choose Mackie Control.
b. From the Channel Mapping drop-down list, choose the channels you want to adjust with the Mackie Control Universal.
5. Choose the channels you want to control with the Mackie Control Extender:
a. From the Device Type drop-down list, choose Mackie Control Extender.
b. From the Channel Mapping drop-down list, choose the channels you want to adjust with the Mackie Control Extender.
6. Repeat Step 5 for each Mackie Control Extender.
7. Click OK to apply your changes and close the Configure Mackie Control dialog.
8. Click OK to apply your changes and close the Preferences dialog.
Configuring or customizing control mappings
Use the External Control & Automation tab in the Preferences dialog to select the control surfaces you want to use and adjust their
configuration.
Reminder: When you customize your control mappings, button functions may not match the labels on the overlay. You can click the
Default All button in the Configure Mackie Control dialog to restore the default settings.
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog.
2. Select the External Control & Automation tab.
APPENDIX B | 271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Double-click your Mackie Control in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Mackie Control dialog.
4. To add or change a function do the following:
a. Select an item in the User defined surface control mappings list.
b. Select an item in the Available host functions list.
c. Click the Assign button.
5. To remove a function, select an item in the User defined surface control mappings list and click the Clear button.
6. To remove all functions, click the Clear All button.
7. To replace all custom functions with the default settings, click the Default All button.
Important: The Mackie Control Universal can control either trim or automation settings. In order to control automation settings, the
Automation button in the Audio/Video section must be selected, and the track or bus you want to edit must be set to Automation Write
(Touch) or Automation Write (Latch). Hold the F1 button while turning the V-Pot (or use the Automation Settings button
) to
change the automation recording mode for each track and bus track.
272 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mackie Control Universal
The following sections describe the default control mapping for the Mackie Control Universal when used with ACID.
The Mackie Control Universal can control either trim or automation settings. In order to control automation settings, the Automation
button in the Audio/Video section must be selected, and the track or bus you want to edit must be set to Automation Write (Touch) or
Automation Write (Latch). Hold the F1 button while turning the V-Pot (or use the Automation Settings button) to change the
automation recording mode for each track and bus track.
Channel section
The channel section includes V-Pots (knobs), buttons, and faders that you can use to edit your tracks and busses.
If you’re using Mackie Control Extender units, you can control eight additional channels with each Extender. For more information, see
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Item
Description
1
V-Pot
Adjusts values for panning, volume (when Flip button is selected), and effect parameter values.
•
Audio track volume: Adjusts track volume when the Pan or Sends button is selected and the Flip button is
selected.
•
•
•
Audio track panning: Adjusts audio track panning when the Pan button is selected.
Bus send levels: Adjusts bus send levels when the Sends button is selected.
Effect parameters: Adjusts effect parameters when the Inserts button is selected.
The V-Pot is velocity sensitive, so rotating quickly changes values quickly, and you can press the button to
choose a selection.
When the Pan or Sends button is selected, press the V-Pot to edit the track or bus effects chain.
2
Rec/Ready
Button
Arms audio tracks for recording.
3
4
5
6
Signal LED
Indicates whether an audio track or bus is outputting a signal.
Solo Button Press to solo a track or remove it from the solo group.
Mute Button Press to mute or unmute a track.
Select
Press to select a track.
Button
APPENDIX B | 273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
7
Fader
Adjusts the track or bus level (unless the Flip button is selected).
When the Automation button is selected, the fader adjusts the automation envelope if the track is in
Automation Write (Touch) or Automation Write (Latch) mode.
The fader can also adjust settings for the following items when you select other buttons in the Channel section.
•
•
Audio track panning: Adjusts audio track panning when the Pan and Flip buttons are selected.
Bus send levels: Adjusts bus send levels when the Sends and Flip buttons are selected.
The fader is touch sensitive, so if you're recording automation parameters, recording will begin when you touch
the fader and stop when you release it. The current setting is displayed in the Mackie Control display.
Footswitches (not shown)
The Mackie Control has two switched inputs (labeled User Switch A and User Switch B) that you can use to connect footswitches.
By default, footswitch A toggles playback, and footswitch B starts and stops recording.
You can customize the footswitches in the Configure Mackie Control dialog. Double-click Mackie Control in the Active control devices
list on the External Control & Automation tab of the Preferences dialog to display the Configure Mackie Control dialog. For more
Control buttons
The buttons in the Control section determine the operation of the V-Pots and faders in the channel section of your Mackie Control. In
every mode, the fader adjusts track volume, and the V-Pot adjusts the selected control mode. You can press the Flip button to reverse
the V-Pot and fader function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Item
Description
1
2
3
4
Output
Press the Output button to set the output device for each track or bus. Turn the V-Pot in the channel section to
choose an output device and press the V-Pot to select it.
Input
Pan
Press to set the recording input device for each track. Turn the V-Pot in the channel section to choose an input
device and press the V-Pot to select it.
Press to adjust track panning using the V-Pot in the channel section.
In 5.1 surround projects, pressing the Pan button toggles left-to-right panning, front-to-rear panning, and
center-channel level adjustment using the V-Pot.
Sends
Press to adjust bus and assignable effects send levels. Press the Sends button to scroll through the available
busses and assignable effects chains, and then turn the V-Pot to adjust the send level.
274 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
5
Inserts
Press to adjust effects settings.
Press the button once to display PL in the Mackie Control Assignment display. The Mackie Control LCD displays
the effects that are assigned to each track or bus. The following example shows a three-track project:
Turn the V-Pot to scroll through the effects, and press the V-Pot to edit the current effect. In editing mode, PE is
displayed in the Assignment display. The following example shows the settings for the Noise Gate plug-in on
track one:
PE mode uses the following controls:
•
V-Pots 1-4: Turn to edit the effect's parameters. For “switch” parameters such as Bypass, press the V-Pot to
change the setting.
•
•
•
•
V-Pot 5: Turn to scroll through an effect's property pages.
V-Pot 6: Turn to choose from a plug-in's available presets. Press the V-Pot to choose a preset.
V-Pot 7: Turn to edit the current effect for a different channel.
V-Pot 8: Turn to choose other effects for the current channel.
Press the Inserts button again to view effects chains. PS is displayed in the Assignment display. The following
example shows the effects chain on track one:
PS mode uses the following controls:
•
V-Pots 1, 3, and 5: Turn to choose other effects for the current channel. Press to edit the selected effect and
enter PE mode.
•
•
V-Pots 2, 4, and 6: After choosing an effect with V-Pot 1, 3, or 5, press V-Pot 2, 4, or 6 to add it to the channel.
V-Pot 7: If a channel has multiple pages of effects in the chain, turn to display additional effects. In the
previous example, Aud 1 1/2 means that track one has two pages of effects.
•
V-Pot 8: Turn to choose effects chains for other channels.
When <No Insert> is displayed above a V-Pot, you can turn the V-Pot to view effects that you can add to the
chain. New effects are displayed with a *. Press the next V-Pot (to the right) to add the effect.
6
Settings
Press to adjust track or bus settings using the F1 through F6 buttons.
•
F1: Hold the button and turn the V-Pot to change the automation recording mode for each track and bus
track.
•
•
•
F2: Hold the button and turn the V-Pot to change the current panning mode.
F3: Hold the button and press the V-Pot to change the track phase.
F4: Hold the button and turn the V-Pot to change record input monitoring settings when you're using an
ASIO audio device.
•
F5: When the Pan button is selected, press the Settings button and then hold F5 while pressing the V-Pot to
change the bus or assignable effects output fader to Pre FX or Post FX.
When the Sends button is selected, press the Settings button and hold F5 while pressing the V-Pot to change
a track's bus or assignable effects send level to Pre Volume or Post Volume. Press the Sends button to scroll
through the available bus and effects sends.
•
F6: Press the Settings button and hold F6 while pressing the V-Pot on a channel to return the channel's
settings to the track defaults.
APPENDIX B | 275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fader Banks buttons
The Fader Banks buttons control the behavior of the channel section controls.
1
2
3
Item
Description
1
Bank
Press the left or right arrow button to scroll the channels 8 units at a time.
For example, if tracks 1-8 are currently displayed, pressing the right arrow will change to tracks 9-16.
Press the left or right arrow button to scroll the channels 1 unit at a time.
2
Channel
For example, if tracks 1-8 are currently displayed, pressing the right arrow will change to tracks 2-9.
Hold the Option button while pressing either Channel button to change track order. For example, if track two is
selected and you press Option+ < Channel, track two becomes track one. Conversely, if track one is selected and
you press Option + Channel >, track one becomes track two.
3
Flip
Press to exchange the behavior of the fader and V-Pot when allowed.
Display buttons
The Display buttons control the behavior of the channel section controls.
1
2
Item
Description
1
Meters/
Values
When you're working with audio tracks or busses, press to display meters or numeric values. Even in Meters
mode, numeric values are displayed when you edit a value.
Hold the Shift button in the Modifiers section while pressing the Meters/Values button to toggle control of
tracks, busses, or tracks and busses.
•
•
•
•
•
Press once to show audio and MIDI tracks.
Press again to show audio tracks.
Press again to show MIDI tracks.
Press again to show busses.
Press again to show all tracks and busses.
2
Time Fmt
Zero
Press and hold to display the current time format. Turn V-Pot 8 while holding the button to change the format.
276 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Markers buttons
The Markers buttons control additional track and channel settings.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item
Description
1
Marker 1/9
Press to place the cursor at marker 1, or hold Shift and press to place the cursor at marker 9.
Automation
Mode
When the Settings button is selected, hold the button and turn the V-Pot to change the automation recording
mode for each track and bus track.
2
Marker 2/10 Press to place the cursor at marker 2, or hold Shift and press to place the cursor at marker 10.
Pan Mode
When the Settings button is selected, hold the button and turn the V-Pot to change the current panning mode.
3
4
Marker 3
Press to place the cursor at marker 3.
Press to place the cursor at marker 4.
Marker 4
Input
Monitor
When the Settings button is selected, hold the button and turn the V-Pot to change record input monitoring
settings when you're using an ASIO audio device.
5
Marker 5
Pre/Post
Press to place the cursor at marker 5.
When the Pan button is selected, press the Settings button and then hold F5 while pressing the V-Pot to change
the bus or assignable effects output fader to Pre FX or Post FX.
When the Sends button is selected, press the Settings button and hold F5 while pressing the V-Pot to change a
track's bus or assignable effects send level to Pre Volume or Post Volume. Press the Sends button to scroll
through the available bus and effects sends.
6
Marker 6
Default
Press to place the cursor at marker 6.
Press the Settings button and hold F6 while pressing the V-Pot on a channel to return the channel's settings to
the track defaults.
7
8
Marker 7
Marker 8
Press to place the cursor at marker 7.
Press to place the cursor at marker 8.
Add New buttons
The Add New buttons add busses or tracks to your project.
1
2
Item
Description
1
2
Track
Bus
Press to add a new audio track.
Press to add an audio bus to your project.
APPENDIX B | 277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows buttons
The Windows buttons control the display of various ACID windows.
1
2
3
Item
Description
1
2
3
Mixer
Press to show the Mixing Console window. If the window is not docked, pressing the button shows/hides the
window.
Video
Preview
Press to show the Video Preview window. If the window is not docked, pressing the button shows/hides the
window.
Plug-Ins
Press to show the Plug-In Manager window. If the window is not docked, pressing the button shows/hides the
window.
View buttons
The View buttons control the display of various sections of the ACID window.
1
2
3
Item
Description
1
Bus Tracks
Press to show or hide audio bus tracks in the ACID timeline.
When the Video button is selected, press to show or hide the video bus track.
Press to show or hide the Window Docking Area at the bottom of the ACID window.
Press to show or hide the track list in the timeline.
2
3
Dock Area
Track List
278 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifiers buttons
The Modifiers buttons extend the functionality of other buttons on the Mackie Control.
1
2
3
4
Item
Description
1
Shift
Hold the Shift button while pressing a button labeled with inverse text to perform the shift function.
For example, hold Shift while pressing the Undo/Redo button to reverse an undo action.
2
Option/Track Hold the Option/Track Order button while pressing a button in the Settings, Add New, or Windows group for
Order
alternative functions.
Hold the Option/Track Order button while pressing a the Channel < or Channel > button to change track order.
Hold the Option/Track Order button while pressing F1 to F16 to perform custom functions you can define.
Hold the Ctrl button while using a control for alternative functions.
3
4
Ctrl
Alt
Hold the Alt button while using a control for alternative functions.
Audio/Video buttons
The Audio/Video buttons control various audio and video settings for your project.
1
2
3
6
5
4
Item
Description
1
Automation Press to place the controls on the Mackie Control in automation mode. The controls in the channel section of the
Mackie Control will affect the automation parameters on the track or bus if Automation Write (Touch) or
Automation Write (Latch) mode is selected.
When the button is not selected, the buttons control trim (static) values.
2
3
Bypass FX
Metronome Press to turn the metronome on or off.
Hold Shift and press to toggle metronome countoff.
Press to bypass/enable all audio effects.
4
5
6
Surround
Downmix
Dim
Press to toggle the project properties between stereo and 5.1 surround mode.
Press to toggle the state of the Downmix Output button in the Mixing Console window.
Press to toggle the state of the Dim Output button in the Mixing Console window.
APPENDIX B | 279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Project buttons
The Project buttons perform various project-level commands.
1
2
3
4
Item
Description
1
2
Save
Press to save your project.
Undo/Redo Press to reverse edit operations.
Hold Shift while pressing the button to reverse an undo operation.
Not used.
Not used.
3
4
OK
Cancel
Timeline buttons
The Timeline buttons perform various commands for the project timeline.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Item
Description
1
2
3
4
Marker
Press to place a marker at the cursor position.
Hold the Ctrl button while pressing the button to remove a marker.
Press to convert the current selection to a region.
Hold the Ctrl button while pressing the button to remove a region.
Press to toggle looped playback mode.
Region
Loop/
Select
Hold the Shift button while pressing the Loop/Select button to create a time selection from the loop region.
Mark In/
Go to In
Press to set the beginning of the loop region at the cursor position.
Hold the Shift button while pressing the Mark In/Go to In button to move the cursor to the beginning of the
loop region.
5
6
Mark Out/
Go to Out
Press to set the end of the loop region at the cursor position.
Hold the Shift button while pressing the Mark Out/Go to Out button to move the cursor to the end of the loop
region.
Event Trim/ Hold the Shift button while pressing the Event Trim/Center Cursor button to center the cursor in the timeline
Center
Cursor
view.
280 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
7
RTZ/
End
Press to move the cursor to the beginning of the project.
Hold the Shift button while pressing the RTZ/End button to move the cursor to the end of the project.
Transport buttons
The Transport buttons allow you to navigate the timeline and preview your project.
1
2
3
4
5
Item
Description
1
2
3
4
5
Rewind
Press and hold to move backward through the timeline at 20x speed.
Fast Forward Press and hold to move forward through the timeline at 20x speed.
Stop
Press to stop playback and return the cursor to its position before playback started.
Play
Press to start playback. Press again to stop playback and leave the cursor at its current position.
Press to start recording. Press again to stop recording and leave the cursor at its current position.
Hold the Shift button while pressing the Record button to render the current selection to a new track.
Record
APPENDIX B | 281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arrow buttons
The arrow buttons allow you to navigate the timeline and preview your project.
1
2
Item
Description
•
•
•
•
Press the left or right arrow button to move left or right 1/32 note.
1
Left/Right
Hold Ctrl while pressing the left or right arrow button to go to the beginning or end of the project.
Hold Alt while pressing the left or right arrow button to go to the beginning of the next or previous measure.
Press to zoom in or out.
2
Up/Down
282 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Jog dial
The jog dial allows you to navigate the timeline and trim events.
Navigating the timeline
When playback is paused and the Scrub button is not selected, the jog dial performs the following functions:
•
•
Turn the dial clockwise or counterclockwise to navigate the timeline by 1/32 note.
Hold Alt and turn the dial to go to the beginning of the next or previous measure.
Scrubbing the timeline
During playback, turning the jog dial increases or decreases the playback rate.
When playback is paused and the Scrub button is selected, turning the jog dial scrubs the timeline.
Using a Frontier TranzPort
Using a Frontier TranzPort, you can control ACID wirelessly.
Viewing the control mappings
The map for the TranzPort assigns the controls as follows.
Control
Track
Function
Shift Function
Focus to previous track or Insert audio track.
mixer control.
Track
Focus to next track or mixer Insert MIDI track.
control.
Rec
Arm track for record.
Mute track
Mute
Solo
Undo
In
Solo track.
Undo.
Redo.
Set loop start.
APPENDIX B | 283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control
Out
Function
Shift Function
Set loop end.
Toggle metronome.
Punch
Toggle MIDI merge recording when displaying volume or panning for a MIDI
track.
•
•
Press Track or Track to select a MIDI track.
Press Shift + Loop until volume or panning information is displayed on the
TranzPort.
•
Hold Shift and press Punch.
Loop
Shift
Toggle looped playback.
Toggle jog wheel control of volume, panning, input, or output device for tracks
or mixer controls.
•
•
Press Track or Track to select the track you want to adjust.
Press Shift + Loop until the item you want to edit is displayed on the
TranzPort.
•
Hold Shift while rotating the jog wheel to adjust the selected control.
Toggle alternate functions.
Move to previous marker.
Markers
Prev
Markers
Add
Insert marker at cursor.
Move to next cursor.
Markers
Next
Jog Wheel
Scroll cursor.
Rewind.
Adjust volume or pan for current track.
Go to start.
Fast forward.
Go to end.
Stop playback or recording.
Play/pause.
Punch in or start recording.
Adjusting track or bus volume
1. Press Track or Track to select the track or mixer control you want to adjust.
2. Press Shift+Loop until the TranzPort displays volume.
3. Hold Shift while rotating the jog wheel to adjust the volume of the selected track or mixer control.
Adjusting track or bus panning
1. Press Track or Track to select the track or mixer control you want to adjust.
2. Press Shift+Loop until the TranzPort displays panning.
Note: Not all mixer controls allow panning adjustment.
3. Hold Shift while rotating the jog wheel to adjust panning for the selected track or mixer control.
284 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing a track's input device
1. Press Track or Track to select the track you want to adjust.
2. Press Shift+Loop until the TranzPort displays the track's input device.
3. Hold Shift while rotating the jog wheel to scroll through the available inputs. When you change the input device, an asterisk is
displayed before the device name on the TranzPort.
4. Press Shift+Punch to set the input device.
Editing a track or mixer control’s output device
1. Press Track or Track to select the track or mixer control you want to adjust.
2. Press Shift+Loop until the TranzPort displays the track’s output device.
3. Hold Shift while rotating the jog wheel to scroll through the available output devices. When you change the output device, an
asterisk is displayed before the device name on the TranzPort.
4. Press Shift+Punch to set the output device.
Configuring a generic MIDI controller
You can configure up to five generic MIDI control surfaces to work with the ACID interface.
For information about your specific device, please refer to the manufacturer's documentation.
Notes:
•
If you have a MIDI controller that includes buttons and knobs or faders, you can use the device as an external control device and as a MIDI
input device for recording MIDI — for example, you can use the buttons, knobs, and sliders on the device for external control, and still use
the keyboard, pitch wheel, and modulation wheel for recording MIDI. For more information, see Recording MIDI on page 189.
MIDI messages that are mapped to external control functions are filtered when you record MIDI. If a note message is assigned to a control
surface function, both the note-on and note-off messages will be filtered.
•
Effects parameters cannot be adjusted with a generic controller.
Important: A generic control surface can control either trim or automation settings. In order to control automation settings, you
must assign a button to place the control surface in automation mode, and the Automation Settings button
on the track or bus
you want to edit must be set to Automation Write (Touch) or Automation Write (Latch).
Customizing your control mappings
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog.
2. Select the External Control & Automation tab.
3. Double-click the Generic Control entry in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Generic Control dialog.
4. To add or change a function do the following:
a. Choose a setting from the View function group drop-down list.
b. Select the Learn check box.
c. Select an command in the Host Command list and activate the control on your control surface.
d. You can click the Edit button to fine-tune the MIDI message settings.
5. Repeat step 4 for each command you want to make available on your control surface.
6. To remove a function, select an item in the Host Command list and click the Reset button.
7. To remove all functions, click the Reset All button.
8. Click the Save As button to save your updated configuration file.
APPENDIX B | 285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading a control mapping file
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog.
2. Select the External Control & Automation tab in the Preferences dialog.
3. Double-click the Generic Control entry in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Generic Control dialog.
4. Click the Open button and browse to the mapping file you want to use.
5. Click OK to apply your changes and return to the Preferences dialog.
6. Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
Example of how you can set up MIDI keyboard as a generic control surface
If you have a MIDI device that has knobs, faders, and buttons, you can use assign those controls to adjust the tracks in your project.
For this example, let's set up a MIDI keyboard with 8 knobs to adjust track volume.
Notes:
•
You can use this same process to assign a controller to any configurable parameter. To adjust track volume, we're selecting Channel x
Fader in the Host Command list in step 10 below. However, if you wanted to adjust panning, you could choose Channel x Pan, or if you
wanted to adjust the bus send level, you could choose Channel x Send.
•
Effect parameters cannot be controlled with a generic controller.
1. From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog.
2. Select the MIDI tab, and verify that the port where your controller is connected is selected in the Make these devices available for
MIDI input list.
3. Select the External Control & Automation tab.
4. From the Available devices drop-down list, choose Generic Control, and then click the Add button. The Generic Control is added
to the Active control devices list.
5. Double-click the Generic Control entry in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Generic Control dialog.
6. Verify that the port where your controller is connected is selected from the MIDI input drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog.
7. Because the MIDI keyboard in our example has 8 knobs, type 8 in the Number of channels box.
8. Now, let's assign buttons to shift the channel banks up and down so you can control all the tracks in your project.
For example, when you start using the controller, the knobs will adjust tracks 1-8. When you shift the banks down, you can control
tracks 9-16, and so on.
a. From the View function group drop-down list, choose Channels.
b. Select the Learn check box.
c. Select Channel Bank Down from the Host Command list.
d. Press the button or key you want to use to switch to the next group of 8 tracks.
e. Select Channel Bank Up from the Host Command list.
f. Press the button or key you want to use to switch to the previous group of 8 tracks.
9. Choose Audio Channels from the View function group drop-down list.
10. Program each knob:
a. Verify that the Learn check box is still selected.
b. Select Channel 1 Fader from the Host Command list.
c. Turn knob 1 on your MIDI keyboard. You'll notice that the Channel, MIDI Message, and MIDI Data columns are updated.
d. Repeat steps 10a and 10b to program knobs 2 through 8 on your keyboard.
11. Now, let's assign a button to toggle the controller in and out of automation mode so we can use the knobs to adjust the track's
volume (trim) or record volume automation:
a. From the View function group drop-down list, choose Assign.
286 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b. Select Toggle Automation Mode from the Host Command list.
c. Verify that the Learn check box is still selected, and then press the button or key you want to use to switch your control surface
in and out of automation mode.
You'll notice that the Channel, MIDI Message, and MIDI Data columns are updated.
12. Click OK to close the Configure Generic Control dialog, and then click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
13. From the Options menu, choose External Control to enable your controller.
You're ready to start using your controller.
•
Turn each knob on your controller and notice that turning knob 1 adjusts the volume (trim) of track 1, turning knob 2 adjusts
the volume of track 2, and so on.
•
Press the button that you assigned to scroll the channel bank down in step 8.
Turn each knob on your controller and notice that turning knob 1 now adjusts the volume (trim) of track 9, turning knob 2
adjusts the volume of track 10, and so on.
•
•
Press the button that you assigned to scroll the channel bank up in step 8 so you can control tracks 1-8 again.
Press the button that you assigned to toggle automation mode in step 11.
Select the Automation Settings button
on each track to enable automation recording.
Start playback, and turn each knob on your controller, and notice that turning knob 1 records volume automation on track 1,
turning knob 2 records automation on track 2, and so on. For more information, see Automation recording modes on page 147.
•
Press the automation mode toggle button once more, and you can use the knobs to adjust track trim levels again.
APPENDIX B | 287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Behringer BCF2000 control surface
LCD
display
Knobs
Encoder
groups
buttons
Push buttons
Editing
buttons
Preset
buttons
Assignable
buttons
Faders
Note: The following instructions describe using the Behringer BCF2000 only as an emulated Mackie Control
Universal device. However, it can also be used as a generic controller. To set up the BCF2000 as a generic controller,
Overview
The buttons and knobs on the Behringer BCF2000 perform the following functions:
•
•
•
•
Encoder Groups buttons with Editing buttons. These buttons control the save function, metronome, track effects display, sound
device display, automation mode, downmix output, and bus display. For more information, see Push buttons on page 293.
Encoder Groups buttons with Push buttons. These buttons control track functions including mute, solo, track selection,
Encoder Groups buttons with Assignable buttons. These buttons control play, pause, rewind, fast forward, record, and home
functions. You can also add markers and regions to your project. For more information, see Knobs on page 293.
Encoder Groups buttons with knobs. These control panning, busses, sound devices and track effects. For more information, see
•
•
Faders. These control the track volume level and automation envelopes. For more information, see Faders on page 294.
Preset buttons. These controls allow you to move left or right through the BCFview virtual display. For more information, see
Hardware setup
1. First open and run the USB MIDI driver .zip file (v1.1.1.1) for BCF2000.
Note: After installing the MIDI driver, the B-Control Rotary/Fader 2000 (12/23/2004,1.1.1.1) will be visible under Sound, video and
game controllers in your system’s Device Manager.
288 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Open and run the BCF2000 Version 1.10 firmware .zip file.
3. Open and run the firmware update utility .zip file.
4. Turn off the Behringer BCF2000 and turn it back on after a few seconds. The LCD display should quickly flash 1.10 to indicate that
the firmware has successfully installed. Then the LCD display should read P-1.
If P-1 is not displayed, turn off the Behringer BCF2000. Press and hold the first push button in the top row of buttons (under the first
knob) and turn the unit back on. The LCD display should now read P-1.
5. Plug the USB cable into the back of the Behringer BCF2000 and into your computer’s USB port.
Note: In addition to USB mode, you can also use the Behringer BCF2000 in MIDI mode. For more information about MIDI
6. Press and hold the Edit button and press the Store button at the same time. The LCD display should read EG (edit global mode).
7. Turn the first rotary encoder (labeled Type on the Behringer unit) clockwise slightly until the LCD displays U-1. U-1 indicates USB
mode. In the LCD display, U-1 will flash for just a moment and then read EG again.
8. Press the Exit button to exit the edit global (EG) mode. The LCD display should read P-1.
9. Turn off the Behringer BCF2000.
10. Press and hold the second push button in the top row of buttons (under the channel knobs) and turn the unit back on. The LCD
should now display NC C (Mackie® Control for Cubase).
11. Open and run the BCFview virtual display for BCF2000.
12. Right-click the virtual display and choose BCF2000.
Configuring ACID to use the Behringer BCF2000
1. Open your ACID project.
2. From the Options menu, choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog.
3. Enable your MIDI input and output ports:
APPENDIX B | 289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a. Select the MIDI tab in the Preferences dialog.
b. In the Make these devices available for MIDI track playback box, select the BCF2000 check box.
c. In the Make these devices available for MIDI input box, select the BCF2000 check box.
d. Click Apply.
Note: MIDI ports that are in use by the Behringer BCF2000 display a
icon to indicate that they are not available for MIDI track
playback or input.
4. Choose your control surface:
a. Select the External Control & Automation tab in the Preferences dialog.
b. From the Available devices drop-down list, choose Mackie Control and click the Add button to load the default profile.
c. Under Active control devices, double-click Mackie Control to open the Configure Mackie Control dialog.
Double-click Mackie Control to open
the Configure Mackie Control dialog.
d. From the Device type drop-down list, choose Emulated Mackie Control Device.
290 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e. From the MIDI input and MIDI output drop-down lists, choose BCF2000.
BCF2000 should be selected under
MIDI input and MIDI output.
5. Click OK in the Configure Mackie Control dialog to close it.
6. Click OK in the Preferences dialog to apply your changes and close the dialog.
7. From the Options menu, choose External Control to enable the Behringer BCF2000.
Note: The faders should automatically move into positions that correspond with your ACID settings.
APPENDIX B | 291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Behringer BCF2000 with ACID
The following sections describe the default control mapping for the Behringer BCF2000 when used with ACID.
Encoder Groups buttons
The Encoder Groups buttons − when used alone or with Editing buttons, Push buttons, Assignable buttons − or knobs, allow you to
change a variety of settings in your project.
Knobs
Encoder Groups buttons
Upshift
Input
Output
Downshift
Editing buttons
Store
Learn
Exit
Edit
Editing buttons
Items
Description
Upshift+Learn
Upshift+Exit
Input
Saves your project
Turns the metronome on or off.
Displays the sound device in the BCFview virtual display for each track. In this example, Microsoft Sound
Mapper (McSnMp) is shown.
Note: Turning the knobs displays other available sound devices for each track. For more information, see
Input+Store
Input+Edit
Displays the effects for each track.
Note: Turning the knobs displays what effects are used on each track. For more information, see Knobs on
Removes the sound device or track information from the virtual track viewer.
Downshift+Store Bypasses Track FX.
Track FX off
Downshift+Edit Turns automation mode on or off.
Downshift+Exit Turns the Downmix Output on or off in the Mixing Console window.
Output
Displays the tracks with their associated busses in the BCFview virtual display. In the example below, the
Master bus is shown.
Note: Turning the knobs displays all busses in your project. For more information, see Knobs on page 293.
Displays the effects for each track.
Output+Store
Output+Edit
Removes the bus or FX information from the BCFview virtual display.
292 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push buttons
Knobs
Top row of
push buttons
Encoder
Groups
buttons
Bottom row of
push buttons
Items
Description
Push buttons (top row)
Upshift+push button (top row)
Push button (bottom row)
Upshift+push button (bottom row)
Turns mute on or off for each track.
Turns the solo on or off for each track.
Selects the track.
Arms the track for recording.
Downshift+push button (bottom row) Adds an audio track to your project.
Assignable buttons
Assignable button 1
Assignable button 2
Assignable button 3
Assignable button 4
Items
Description
Assignable button 1
Assignable button 2
Assignable button 3
Rewind. Press and hold to move backward through the timeline.
Fast forward. Press and hold to move forward through the timeline.
Stop. Press to stop playback and return the cursor to its position before playback
started.
Assignable button 4
Play/Pause. Press to start playback. Press again to stop playback and leave the cursor
at its current position.
Upshift+assignable button 1
Upshift+assignable button 2
Upshift+assignable button 4
Downshift+assignable button 1
Downshift+assignable button 2
Downshift+assignable button 3
Downshift+assignable button 4
Inserts loop region to the cursor position.
Home. Moves the cursor to the beginning of your project.
Record. Adds a track to your project and arms it for recording.
Inserts a marker to your project.
Inserts a region marker into your project.
Turns selected loop region on or off.
Creates a loop region from the cursor position.
Knobs
Items
Description
Rotating knobs
Controls panning, busses, sound devices, and track effects for each track. The knobs
are velocity sensitive, so rotating quickly changes values.
Pressing knobs
Chooses a selection.
APPENDIX B | 293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faders
The faders control the following in your project:
•
•
The track volume level.
The automation envelope on the track (when in automation mode).
Preset buttons
The Preset buttons allow you to move left or right through the BCFview virtual display to expose all the tracks in your project. The virtual
channel view will display 8 tracks at one time.
Tracks 1-8 of your ACID project in the virtual view.
If you press the right preset button, the next set of tracks in your project
Preset buttons
will be exposed.
Pressing the left preset will take you back to tracks 1-8.
Right
Left
In the real world...
Adding envelopes and automating them
A couple of common questions when using the Behringer BCF2000 is “How do I add envelopes to an ACID track?” and “How do I set up
the Behringer to record the envelope’s moves?” The following instructions should guide you through that process.
1. Open an ACID project.
2. On the Behringer unit, turn on the automation mode by pressing Downshift+Edit.
Note: You can select multiple tracks at one time by pressing the bottom row of buttons for each track.
3. In the track header, choose Automation Write (Touch) or Automation Write (Latch) to determine how the automation will be
written.
Automation Settings button in the track header
294 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To add a volume, pan, or mute envelope, do the following:
a. To add a volume envelope (purple), move the track fader.
b. To add a pan envelope (red), twist the track knob.
c. To add a mute envelope (green), press the top row button of the track..
Twist the track knob
to add a pan envelope
Mute
Press the top row
envelope
track button to add
a mute envelope
Pan
envelope
Volume
envelope
Cursor
Move the track fader to
add a volume envelope
Note: To add envelope points, place your cursor where you want to add the point by twisting the track knob (pan),
pressing the top row track button (mute), or moving the track fader (volume).
Pan
envelope
Mute
envelope
Volume
envelope
Envelope points in the timeline
5. After an envelope is added to a track, you can set-up the Behringer BCF2000 to record the volume, pan, and mute envelope’s
moves in your ACID project.
a. On the Behringer unit, turn on the automation mode by selecting Downshift+Edit.
b. Place the cursor at the beginning of your ACID project.
c. Use assignable button 4 to play your project. For more information, see Assignable buttons on page 293.
As the cursor moves past the envelope points, the faders will move automatically (volume), the top row button will light red
(mute), and the red lights around the track knob will light up (pan).
Tip: You can add points to the envelope as the project is playing back. For example, by moving a fader, you can add
points to a volume envelope.
Note: For more information about envelopes, see the full ACID User Manual (available on the application disc or the
Sony Creative Software Inc. Web site) or check the online help (from the ACID Help menu, choose Contents and
Index).
APPENDIX B | 295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fader automation
Another question that comes up often is, “Why aren’t the faders following the envelopes?” There are two quick answers to this question.
1. The Behringer BCF2000 is not in automation mode. To enable automation press Downshift+Edit.
2. On the track header, Automation Off has been selected. To enable automation, choose Automation Read, Automation Write
(Touch), or Automation Write (Latch).
Automation disabled on the track header
Automation enabled on the track header
296 | APPENDIX B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
C
ACID Tips and Tricks
The following sections contain some time-saving tips and creative suggestions for building ACID® projects.
Adding long media files quickly
You can paint an entire CD track or MIDI file on an ACID track with a single click.
1. Add a long file such as a CD track or MIDI file to your ACID project. For more information, see Adding media to the
2. Click the Paint Tool button (
). The Paint tool is selected.
3. Press Ctrl and click in the track. The entire file is painted onto the track at the position you clicked.
Note: In a Beatmapped track, the file is painted starting from the location you identified as the downbeat. If the file
contains pick-up notes, drag the left edge of the event to reveal audio before the downbeat.
Playing with duplicate tracks
You can duplicate a track in your ACID project and then use the new track to create some interesting effects.
Detuning paired tracks
Detuning a paired track is a quick and easy way to thicken an audio track without adding the additional processing of
effects. This trick works extremely well with synths, pads, strings and ambient sounds, but you can also experiment with it
to add body to drums, basses, and horns.
1. Right-click a track and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu. A copy of the track is added to the track list.
The new track is the currently selected track.
2. Use the + (plus) and - (minus) keys on your numeric keypad to change the pitch of the duplicated track.
Octave intervals (e.g., +12, -12, -24) typically sound best when working with pitched audio; however, experimenting
with other, less ordinary intervals may produce surprising results. When working with non-pitched audio, intervals
do not matter, thereby allowing you to freely experiment with radical pitch shifting.
This technique typically works best when tuning the duplicate track to a lower octave than the original track, but
you can also experiment with raising the pitch of the duplicate track.
Panning in conjunction with detuning
Few things are as uninteresting as a series of tracks panned down the middle of a stereo image. Particularly after
detuning a paired track, you should experiment with spatially positioning the tracks using the panning control (on the
multipurpose slider) or a pan envelope. Panning each track to a specific channel produces a nice, wide aural effect. If you
are looking for something a little more dynamic, position the original track anywhere in the stereo image and use a pan
envelope to sweep the duplicate track from the left channel to the right channel of the mix. For more information, see
APPENDIX C | 297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Duplicating with offset
Another way to add interesting dynamics to a project is to duplicate tracks and add an offset to one of the pair. This trick works well with
most instrument loops and allows you to create different levels of effect. For example:
•
•
•
Configuring a slight offset between duplicate tracks creates a natural chorus effect.
Configuring small offsets creates various reverb effects.
Configuring larger offsets creates interesting echoes.
1. Right-click a track and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu. A copy of the track is added to the track list.
2. Hold Alt while dragging the waveform of the duplicate track. Notice that the waveform moves within the event, which retains its
size and position on the timeline.
3. Experiment with different offsets between the duplicate tracks.
Tip: As with most tricks, this method can be combined with pan and volume envelopes to produce an unlimited range of effects.
Creating ping-pong pan effects
You can use a pair of tracks to ping-pong audio from one speaker to another.
1. Right-click a track and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu. A copy of the track is added to the track list.
2. Use the multipurpose slider to pan the original track 100% right and the duplicate track 100% left.
3. Use the Erase tool ( ) to erase every other beat, alternating between the original and duplicate track.
Tip: You can also use a pan envelope on a single track to create the same effect. For more information, see Volume or pan automation on
Adding depth with assignable effects
You can add depth to your mix by panning a dry signal (no effects) to one side and a wet signal (with effects such as chorus or reverb) to
the other. You can pan the dry and wet signals by adding an assignable effects chain to your project.
1. Add an assignable effects chain containing an effect such as chorus or reverb to your project. For more information, see The Mixing
2. Press B to view bus tracks.
3. Right-click the bus track for the assignable effect control, choose Insert/Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu, and choose
Pan from the submenu. A pan envelope appears on the bus track.
4. Drag the envelope down to 100% right.
5. Use the multipurpose slider (on the track to which you want to apply the effect) to make three changes:
•
•
•
Pan the track 100% left.
Set the assignable effect send to approximately the same volume as the track.
Set the assignable effect send to Pre Volume.
Preview the effect. The dry signal is panned to the left, and the wet signal (with the chorus or reverb effect) is panned to the right.
...and set the assignable effect send to
Pre Volume
...match the assignable effect
send level to the track volume...
Pan the track hard left...
298 | APPENDIX C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing double time/half time
You can also produce interesting effects by misinforming ACID regarding the number of beats in a file. Configuring a file with half its
actual number of beats results in double-time playback. This is an easy way to add speed metal drum tracks to your project. This
technique is also useful for adding a kick drum on every beat to producing a heavy dance foundation. Conversely, configuring a file with
twice its actual number of beats results in half-time playback.
1. Right-click the desired track in the track list and choose Clip Properties from the shortcut menu. The Clip Properties window
appears.
2. Click the Stretch tab.
3. Change the value in the Number of beats box.
Constructing the wall of sound
As mentioned previously, it is sometimes preferable to color and thicken mixes without resorting to effects and other digital processing.
Working without the benefit of multitrack recording, music producer Phil Spector colored his songs by having several instruments play
slightly different parts. For example, he might have an acoustic bass, an electric bass, and a piano play slight variations on the same
basic riffs. These variations, along with the different timbre of the actual instruments, produced a dense sonic mass that became known
as The Wall of Sound.
•
•
•
To add this aural density to your projects, experiment with using two, three, or even four tracks of similar instrumentation.
Alter the pitch of specific tracks to help them cut through the mix. For more information, see Changing a clip’s key on page 93.
Further differentiate specific tracks using pan and volume envelopes to color the project and simulate live performance. For
•
Make the effects even more pronounced by setting a start offset within specific individual events. For more information, see
Adding through subtraction
You can create dynamics by removing sections of events. You can erase sections of events from a project by using the Erase (
) tool.
To demonstrate using subtractive arranging, add three or four similar drum loops to a project. Use the Erase tool to delete specific
sections of each event. For example, erase all snares from one track, all basses from another, high hats from the third, and so on. This
results in a tighter, more realistic drum sound for your project.
Experiment with taking this technique a step further and randomly remove sections from each track. When doing this, remember to
keep at least one of the drum tracks playing at all times, unless you want the drums to completely drop out of the mix. Randomly
removing sections of events adds realism to your projects by approximating how a drummer plays with slight variations throughout a
song.
Tweaking dynamics
You can use several techniques to adjust the dynamics of your mix.
Fading in and out of mixes
With bus tracks, you can use a volume envelope to fade in and out of the entire project.
1. Press B to view bus tracks.
2. Select the Master bus track and press Shift+V to add a volume envelope.
3. Add and adjust envelope points to fade into and out of the project. For more information, see Choosing stereo pan types on page 113.
Adding build ups
If you are attempting to build projects that escape the perceived limitations of computer-generated loop-based music, you should
concentrate on reproducing the subtle (and not so subtle) dynamics associated with live instrumentation.
APPENDIX C | 299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One of the simplest, but most effective examples of this is the build up. When musicians play live, there is a tendency to increase
dynamics as a song enters a chorus or refrain. Think of how a drummer uses accents, drum rolls, and fills that steadily increase in volume
to enter a song or indicate an approaching change from verse to chorus or chorus to bridge.
This effect is easily reproduced by adding a volume envelope to the track. Add points at the various drum beats and adjust them so that
the volume steadily increases. For more information, see Adding volume or pan envelopes on page 138.
Creating wah-wah effects with automated Track EQ
You can use the automatable Track EQ effect to create a custom wah-wah effect on a track. The example below provides sample values
to use in the Track EQ plug-in, but you can adjust the settings to suit your taste.
1. Click the Track FX button ( ) on the track to which you want to add the effect. The Audio Plug-In window appears.
2. Adjust the settings for band 1 as follows:
•
•
•
Frequency: 20,000
Gain: -14.9
Rolloff: 24
3. Adjust the settings for band two as follows:
•
•
Gain: 15
Bandwidth: 0.9
4. Click the FX Automation button ( ). The FX Automation Chooser dialog appears.
5. Select the Band2 Frequency check box and click OK. An effect automation envelope appears on the track.
6. Add points to the envelope so that the Band2 Frequency parameter oscillates between about 100 Hz and 3000 Hz. For more
Making automated changes more stark
ACID envelopes allow you to change settings for a variety of features over time. While you may often use envelopes to transition
smoothly from one setting to another, you can also create interesting effects by making stark changes between settings.
Abruptly changing volume or pan
By holding its setting until the next envelope point, the hold fade curve allows you to use volume and pan envelopes to make abrupt
1. Select a track and press Shift+V (volume) or Shift+P (pan) to add an envelope.
Tip: You can also use this technique on a bus track.
2. Click the Envelope Tool button (
) to select the envelope tool.
3. Right-click the first point on the envelope and choose Hold from the shortcut menu.
4. Add several more points by double-clicking the envelope. Note that each new point also has the hold fade curve.
5. Set each point to a different level. For more information, see Adjusting individual envelope points on page 143.
You can repeat the pattern by copying and pasting the envelope points repeatedly. For more information, see Cutting, copying, and
Turning automated effects on and off
You can use effect automation envelopes to change effect settings over time, but you can create a simple, dramatic effect by simply
automating whether the effect is processed (on) or bypassed (off).
1. Add an automatable effect to a track and adjust the effect’s parameters to your liking. For more information, see Using track effects on
2. In the Audio Plug-In window, click the FX Automation button ( ) to display the FX Automation Chooser.
3. Click the automatable plug-in at the top of the FX Automation Chooser. A list of the effect's automatable parameters appears.
300 | APPENDIX C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Select the Bypass check box and click OK. An envelope for the Bypass parameter of the effect appears on the track.
5. Add multiple points to the envelope. For more information, see Adding envelope points on page 142.
6. Adjust the envelope points to alternate between bypassing the effect (Bypass=True) and processing the effect (Bypass=False). For
Preview the effect. The track alternates cleanly between processing the effect and bypassing the effect. You can repeat the pattern
by copying and pasting the envelope points repeatedly. For more information, see Cutting, copying, and pasting envelope points on
Making automated frequency changes more natural
When you automate an effect’s frequency parameters, such as the frequency parameters in the track EQ effect, you may notice that the
frequency changes are more apparent moving through the lower frequencies than the higher frequencies. Without getting too
technical, frequency scales in track EQ and other plug-ins use a logarithmic scale instead of a linear scale. Since effect automation uses
linear interpolation, an effect’s automated frequency parameter will sound as if it sweeps through the lower frequencies faster than the
high frequencies. You can visualize this if you watch the plug-in settings in the Audio Plug-In window during automated effect
playback.
To make automated frequency changes sound more natural, use envelope fade curves to change the rate at which interpolation
happens between two envelope points. For a high-to-low frequency sweep, use a fast fade curve between points, and for a low-to-high
frequency sweep, use a slow curve. Although the fast and slow curves are not logarithmic curves, they are similar enough to make the
frequency transitions sound more even. For more information, see Changing envelope fade curves on page 144.
Overriding compress/expand
One of the most powerful features of the software is its ability to compress or expand a loop while maintaining the loop’s original pitch.
However, you can override this feature in order to produce specific effects in your projects.
1. Right-click an event and choose Clip Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. Click the Stretch tab.
3. From the Stretching method drop-down list, choose Pitch shift segments. The clip’s pitch will change in relation to the tempo of
the project.
While this may seem like just a way of producing old-school effects, it actually has practical applications as well. For example, specifying
Pitch shift segments can actually improve the fidelity of drum loops recorded at a tempo near the project tempo. In addition,
overriding the compress/expand feature allows you to create great bass grooves by slowing drum loops.
APPENDIX C | 301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slicing and dicing in the Chopper
You can use the Chopper™ to add creative slice-and-dice effects to your ACID project.
Chopping new loops for alternate time signatures
The Chopper makes it easy to clone a new loop from a song or sample. This feature can be particularly handy when you want to create a
loop for a different time signature. In this example, you’ll create a 3/4 pattern from a 4/4 loop.
1. Set the project time signature to 3/4. For more information, see Changing project time signature on page 91.
2. Place a 4/4 loop file in the Chopper. For more information, see Placing files in the Chopper on page 97.
3. Select a three-beat section of audio to be used for the new loop. Use the Chopper’s transport bar to preview the new loop.
4. Right-click the selection and choose Chop to New Track from the shortcut menu. Alternately, press Ctrl+M. The Chop to New Track
dialog appears.
Tip: You can also drag a selection from the Chopper to the track list.
5. Complete the information in the Chop to New Track dialog and click Save.
The selection is saved and the file is added as a 3/4 loop to a new track in the project. For more information, see Saving Chopper
Chopping multiple files into a new loop
Want to combine short segments of several loops into a new loop? You can use the Chopper to chop segments from several files into
new loops and then combine the new loops into a single loop.
2. Select audio in the Chopper and press Ctrl+M to chop the audio to a new loop.
3. Repeat steps one and two for as many loop segments as you want.
4. Draw events on the new tracks to create a new melodic or rhythmic pattern.
5. Select the new tracks and from the Tools menu, choose Render to New Track to render the tracks to a single track. The Render to
New Track dialog appears.
6. Complete the information in the Render to New Track dialog and click Save. For more information, see Mixing multiple tracks to a
The new composite loop is saved and adds it to your project as a new track.
Creating drum-roll build ups
2. Create a one-measure selection. For more information, see Creating selections of a specific musical length on page 97.
3. Click the Insert Selection button (
4. Click the Halve Selection button (
5. Click Insert Selection button (
6. Click the Halve Selection button (
) once. The selection is pasted to the track view.
). This decreases the selected portion of the waveform by half.
) twice.
).
7. Continue to double the number of inserts after each halving of the selection until you achieve the desired drum roll effect.
302 | APPENDIX C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating drum fills
1. Place a file in the Chopper.
2. Create an eighth-note (or other length) selection of a drum track in the Chopper.
3. Click the Insert Selection button (
).
4. Use the Shift Selection Left ( ) and Shift Selection Right (
) buttons to move the selection randomly through the drum track,
) to insert drum hits.
clicking the Insert Selection button (
Creating one-track remixes
1. Place a Beatmapped track in the Chopper. For more information, see Using the Beatmapper on page 113.
2. Create a selection in the Chopper.
3. Click the Insert Selection button (
) twice.
4. Use the Shift Selection Right button (
) to move through the track, clicking the Insert Selection button (
) as desired to
insert events.
Creating pseudo-granular synthesis
1. Create a sixty-fourth note (or shorter) selection in the Chopper.
2. Click the Insert Selection button (
).
3. Use the Shift Selection Left (
) and Shift Selection Right (
) buttons to move the selection randomly through the track,
clicking the Insert Selection button (
) to insert events.
Building instrument solos
The previous section described an extended technique to create challenging rhythmic variations in your projects. You can use a slightly
different version of the slice-and-dice technique to build instrument solos for your projects. To demonstrate this, let’s start with an
event containing a simple bass riff.
1. Slice and dice the file in the Chopper to create new riffs and add them to the project. For more information, see Using the Chopper on
2. Use the pitch shifting to transpose some of the new events. For more information, see Changing an event’s key on page 93.
3. Apply volume envelopes to simulate the varying attacks associated with live soloing. For more information, see Adding volume or
4. Use tempo/key/time signature change markers to create passages with tempos that deviate from the project tempo. For more
Building scales
Though it is well outside the intended scope of the application, you can build unique scales from audio loops. To do this, you must first
isolate a note and determine what pitch it is. You can easily do this using the Spectrum Analysis tool in Sound Forge®. Once you isolate
and identify the note, choose Save As from the File menu in Sound Forge to save the note as a new WAV file with a unique name.
Finally, add the file to the ACID project and use pitch shifting to create all remaining notes in the scale.
APPENDIX C | 303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 | APPENDIX C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
D
Shortcut commands
Keyboard command reference
The ACID keyboard commands are shortcuts that you can use while working on your project.
Important: Some keyboard commands listed below are associated with features that are not available in all versions of
ACID. For information on a specific feature and its availability, please refer to the description of the feature in this manual.
General commands
Description
Keys
Display online help
Display context-sensitive help
Refresh screen
F1
Shift+F1 and click an item
F5
Shortcut menu
Temporarily suspend snapping
Shift+F10
Shift+drag
Project file commands
Description
Keys
Description
Keys
Create new project
Ctrl+N
Save project
Ctrl+S
Create new project and bypass the Ctrl+Shift+N
Project Properties dialog
Open project properties
Alt+Enter
Open existing project or media file Ctrl+O
Close the current project
Ctrl+F4
APPENDIX D | 305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Magnification and view commands
Description
Show Explorer window
Keys
Alt+1
Description
Restore project magnification to
the default settings
Keys
F9
Show Chopper window
Alt+2
Alt+3
Restore track height to a level
where all track list controls are
displayed
Reduce timeline magnification so Ctrl+F9
the entire length of the project and
as many tracks as possible are
Shift+F9
Show Mixing Console window
displayed
Show Video/Video Preview
window
Alt+4
Zoom time in/out small increments Up or Down Arrow
(when timeline has focus)
Show Media Manager window
Alt+5
Zoom time in/out large increments Ctrl+Up or Down Arrow
(when timeline has focus)
Show Track Properties window
Show Surround Panner window
Alt+6
Zoom in time until each video
thumbnail represents one frame
Zoom track height in/out (when
timeline has focus)
Alt+Up Arrow
Alt+7
Shift+Up or Down Arrow
Show Soft Synth Properties
window
Alt+8
Change track height for all tracks Ctrl+Shift+Up or Down
Arrow
Show Audio Plug-In window
Alt+9
Minimize/restore track height for
all tracks
‘
Show Plug-In Manager window
Show Groove Pool window
Show Clip Properties window
Ctrl+Alt+1
Ctrl+Alt+2
Ctrl+Alt+3
Return all tracks to the default
height
Ctrl+’
Minimize/restore the window
docking area
F11 or Alt+’
Show/hide Event Information
Minimize/restore timeline
vertically and horizontally (window
docking area and track list will be
hidden
Ctrl+Shift+I
Ctrl+F11 or Ctrl+Alt+’
Shift focus forward through open F6
ACID windows
Shift focus backward through open Shift+F6
ACID windows
Minimize/restore the track list
Shift+F11 or Shift+Alt+’
B
Shift focus forward (clockwise)
through track list, timeline, bus
track timeline, and bus track list
(when track view or timeline has
focus)
Tab
Show/Hide bus tracks
Shift focus backward
Shift+Tab
(counterclockwise) through track
list, bus track list, bus track
timeline, and timeline (when track
view or timeline has focus)
Explorer window commands
Description
Add all selected files to the track
list
Keys
Enter
Description
Add selected file or currently
playing file to the track list
Keys
Ctrl+Enter
306 | APPENDIX D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cursor placement, loop region and time selection commands
Description
Keys
Home
Description
Center in view
Keys
\
Go to beginning of active loop
region or viewable area (if no
selection)
Go to end of active loop region or End
viewable area (if no selection)
Move cursor to corresponding
marker or select corresponding
region
Number keys (not
Keypad)
Toggle cursor between beginning Numeric keypad 5
and end of loop region
Move left/right one pixel
Left/Right Arrow
Time select loop region (when
Time Selection tool is selected)
Toggle previous selection
Shift+Q
Move to marker(s)
Ctrl+Left/Right Arrow
Backspace
W or Ctrl+Home
Ctrl+End
Move left/right to event edit points Ctrl+Alt+Left/Right Arrow
including fade edges
Move through a video event one Alt+Left or Right Arrow
frame at a time
Create or extend loop region/time Shift+Left or Right Arrow
selection
Go to beginning of project
Go to end of project
Move left by grid marks
Page Up
Double loop region/selection
length
‘ (apostrophe)
Move right by grid marks
Go to
Page Down
Ctrl+G
Halve loop region/selection length ; (semicolon)
Shift loop region/selection left
, (comma)
(using measures, beats, and ticks)
Go to
Shift+G
Shift loop region/selection right
. (period)
(using absolute time)
Set end of time selection
(using measures, beats, and ticks
when Time Selection tool is
selected)
Ctrl+Shift+G
APPENDIX D | 307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event editing commands
Description
Keys
Description
Join selected events
Keys
J
Paint the entire media length for all Ctrl+click in timeline
media except video (only when
Paint tool is selected)
Cycle event clip forward for all
selected clips
C
Create fades
F
Cycle event clip backward for all
selected clips
Select Draw tool
Shift+C
Ctrl+D
Reverse event
U
Trim events to selection length.
This command has no effect if
there is no selected data. Trimming
does not copy data onto the
clipboard. Available only when the
Time Selection tool is active
Slip Trim: moves the media with
the edge as it is trimmed
Slip: move media within event
without moving the event
Slide: move event while leaving the Ctrl+Alt+drag event
underlying media in place
Ctrl+T
Select next edit tool in list
Select previous edit tool in list
Undo
D
Alt+drag edge of event
Alt+drag inside the event
Shift+D
Ctrl+Z
Redo
Cut selection
Copy event
Ctrl+Shift+Z
Ctrl+X
Create fades
Copy selection
F
Ctrl+C
Ctrl+drag
Pitch up one semitone
Numeric keypad +
=
Paste from clipboard
Ctrl+V
Ctrl+B
Pitch down 4 semitones
Pitch up 4 semitones
Shift+Numeric keypad -
Shift+-
Paste repeat from clipboard
Shift+Numeric keypad +
Shift+=
Paste insert
Insert event at cursor
Paste event at cursor
Ctrl+Shift+V
Y
Shift+Y
Pitch down one octave
Pitch up one octave
Reset pitch
Ctrl+Numeric keypad -
Ctrl+Numeric keypad +
Ctrl+Shift+Numeric
keypad - or +
Ctrl+Shift+-/=
Keypad / or *
Delete selection
Delete
Change an event’s gain setting
Move selected event(s) right one Numeric keypad 6
pixel
Change an event’s gain setting by Shift+Keypad / or *
10%
Move selected event(s) left one
pixel
Numeric keypad 4
Change an event’s gain setting by Ctrl+Keypad / or *
25%
Temporarily suspend Snap To
Shift while dragging an
event (press Shift after
you click)
Set an event’s gain to 0.0 dB
Shift+Ctrl+Keypad *
Erase entire event
Split event(s)
Ctrl+click event with
Erase tool
S
Set an event’s gain to silence
Shift+Ctrl+Keypad /
Ctrl+M
Render to new track
Chop to new clip if the Chopper
window has focus
Pitch down one semitone
Numeric keypad -
-
308 | APPENDIX D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback commands
Description
Keys
Description
Keys
Start/stop playback
Stop playback
Toggle looped playback
Play from start
Spacebar
Esc
Q
Record
Ctrl+R
Go to start of project
Go to end of project
Skip backward
Ctrl+Home or W
Ctrl+End
Page Up
Shift+Spacebar or
Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar
when the timeline or track
view has focus
Shift+F12 from any
window
Play from cursor
Ctrl+Spacebar when the
timeline or track view has
focus
Skip forward
Page Down
F12 (from any window)
Enter when the timeline
or track view has focus
Pause/resume playback
Ctrl+F12 from any
window
Timeline commands
Description
Record
Keys
Ctrl+R
Description
Insert/remove track volume
envelope
Keys
Shift+V
Go to (using measures.beats.ticks) Ctrl+G
Adjust envelope point value in fine Ctrl+drag envelope point
increments without changing the or segment
point’s timeline position
Go to (using current time ruler
format)
Shift+G
Adjust envelope point value in
normal increments without
changing the point’s timeline
position
Ctrl+Alt+drag envelope
point or segment
Set end of time selection (using
measures, beats, and ticks when
Time Selection tool is selected)
Toggle snapping
Ctrl+Shift+G
Adjust envelope point’s timeline
position without changing its value
Alt+drag
F8
Insert region
R
Temporarily suspend snapping
Toggle snap to grid
Shift+drag
Ctrl+F8
Ctrl+L
Ctrl+D
D
Insert marker (standard)
Insert time marker
M
H
Ripple edit mode
Draw tool
Select next edit tool in list
Select previous edit tool in list
Mark in point
Insert disc-at-once CD track marker N
Change tempo
Insert command marker
Insert tempo change
Insert key change
Alt+drag time marker
C
Shift+D
I or [
T
K
Mark out point for selection
Render to new track
Insert/show/hide track pan
envelope
O or ]
Ctrl+M
P
Insert time signature change
Insert tempo and key change
Maximize timeline vertically
(window docking area will be
hidden)
Shift+K
Shift+T
F11
Insert/remove track pan envelope Shift+P
Maximize timeline vertically and
horizontally (window docking area
and track list will be hidden)
Maximize timeline horizontally
(track list will be hidden)
Ctrl+F11
Insert/show/hide track volume
envelope
V
Shift+F11
APPENDIX D | 309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Track list commands
Description
Keys
Description
Keys
Mute selected tracks
Solo selected tracks
Record
Z
X
Render to new track
Show/hide bus tracks
Insert folder track
Insert audio track
Ctrl+M
B
Ctrl+Alt+F
Ctrl+Q
Ctrl+R
E or Shift+E
Cycle through effect automation
envelopes
Insert new MIDI track
Ctrl+Alt+Q
Mixing Console commands
Description
Keys
Description
Keys
Change selection of a mixer control Left/Right Arrow
Select multiple nonadjacent mixer Ctrl+Left/Right Arrow
controls
Move the right channel of the fader Ctrl+Up/Down Arrow
for the selected mixer control
Delete the selected bus or
assignable FX control
Delete
Move the left channel of the fader Shift+Up/Down Arrow
for the selected mixer control
Move the fader of the selected
mixer control (for assignable effect
controls, moves the Out fader)
Up/Down Arrow
Select multiple, adjacent mixer
controls
Shift+Left/Right Arrow
MIDI commands
Description
Keys
Description
Keys
Insert new MIDI track
Generate MIDI Timecode
Generate MIDI Clock
Ctrl+Alt+Q
F7
Shift+F7
Trigger from MIDI Timecode
Reset all MIDI ports
Show velocity information in MIDI
events
Ctrl+F7
Ctrl+Alt+F7
F
Copy to new MIDI clip
Ctrl+Shift+C
Toggle inline MIDI editing mode
G
Chopper commands
Surround Panner commands
Mouse scroll-wheel shortcuts
Description
Keys
Zoom in on timeline
Rotate mouse wheel forward or
back
Vertical scroll
Horizontal scroll
Auto-scrolling
Ctrl+wheel
Shift+wheel
Press mouse wheel and move
the mouse in the desired
direction
Move the cursor in grid increments Ctrl+Shift+wheel
Move the cursor in video frames
Adjust slider/fader
Ctrl+Alt+Shift+wheel
Wheel up or down while
hovering over slider/fader
handle
Adjust slider/fader in fine
increments
Ctrl+wheel up or down while
hovering over slider/fader
handle
310 | APPENDIX D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
E
Glossary
The glossary contains terms and their definitions that you may come across in the manual. This glossary not only includes
terms associated with ACID® software, but also includes relevant industry terms.
.acd-zip
An ACID project file that contains all information regarding the project including track
layout, envelope settings, and effects parameters. In addition, all audio files used in the
project are embedded into the project file.
Activation Code
This number is based on the Computer ID number of the computer on which the software
is installed. Each computer has a unique number, similar to a license plate. When you
register your copy of the software, Sony generates an activation code for you based on
the Computer ID number. Once you enter the activation code, the ACID application will
not time out. Since the activation number is based on the Computer ID, it is important
that you have the software installed on the computer where you will be using it.
Adaptive Delta Pulse
Code Modulation
(ADPCM)
A method of compressing audio data. Although the theory for compression using ADPCM
is standard, there are many different algorithms employed. For example, Microsoft's
ADPCM algorithm is not compatible with the International Multimedia Association’s (IMA)
approved ADPCM.
Advanced Streaming
Format (ASF)
Aliasing
A type of distortion that occurs when digitally recording high frequencies with a low
sample rate. For example, in a motion picture, when a car's wheels appear to slowly spin
backward while the car is quickly moving forward, you are seeing the effects of aliasing.
Similarly, when you try to record a frequency greater than one half of the sampling rate
(the Nyquist Frequency), instead of hearing a high pitch, you may hear a low-frequency
rumble.
To prevent aliasing, an anti-aliasing filter is used to remove high-frequencies before
recording. Once the sound has been recorded, aliasing distortion is impossible to remove
without also removing other frequencies from the sound. This same anti-aliasing filter
must be applied when resampling to a lower sample rate.
ASIO
ASIO™ (Audio Stream In/Out) is a low-latency driver model developed by Steinberg Media
Technologies AG.
ASX File
Attack
The attack of a sound is the initial portion of the sound. Percussive sounds (drums, piano,
guitar plucks) are said to have a fast attack. This means that the sound reaches its
maximum amplitude in a very short time. Sounds that slowly swell up in volume (soft
strings and wind sounds) are said to have a slow attack.
Attenuation
A decrease in the level of a signal.
Audio Compression
Manager (ACM)
The Audio Compression Manager from Microsoft® is a standard interface for audio
compression and signal processing for Microsoft Windows. The ACM can be used by
Windows programs to compress and decompress WAV files.
Audio Interchange File
Format (AIFF)
An audio file format developed by Apple®.
Audio Proxy File (.sfap0)
Bandwidth
When discussing audio equalization, each frequency band has a width associated with it
that determines the range of frequencies that are affected by the EQ. An EQ band with a
wide bandwidth affects a wider range of frequencies than one with a narrow bandwidth.
When discussing network connections, refers to the rate of signals transmitted; the
amount of data that can be transmitted in a fixed amount of time (stated in bits/second):
a 56 Kbps network connection is capable of receiving 56,000 bits of data per second.
Beatmapped track
A file that has tempo information added to it as a result of going through the
Beatmapper® Wizard.
APPENDIX E | 311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beats Per Minute (BPM)
Bit
The tempo of a piece of music can be written as a number of beats in one minute. If the
tempo is 60 BPM, a single beat occurs once every second.
The most elementary unit in digital systems. Its value can only be 1 or 0, corresponding to
a voltage in an electronic circuit. Bits are used to represent values in the binary
numbering system. As an example, the 8-bit binary number 10011010 represents the
unsigned value of 154 in the decimal system. In digital sampling, a binary number is used
to store individual sound levels, called samples.
Bit Depth
Buffer
The number of bits used to represent a single sample. For example, 8- or 16-bit are
common sample sizes. While 8-bit samples take up less memory (and hard disk space),
they are inherently noisier than 16-bit samples.
Memory used as an intermediate repository in which data is temporarily held while
waiting to be transferred between two locations. A buffer ensures an uninterrupted flow
of data between computers. Media players may need to rebuffer when there is network
congestion.
Bus
A virtual pathway where signals from tracks and effects are mixed. A bus's output can be a
physical audio device in the computer from which the signal is heard.
Byte
Refers to a set of 8 bits. An 8-bit sample requires one byte of memory to store, while a 16-
bit sample takes two bytes of memory to store.
Clipboard
Clipping
The clipboard is the location where data cut or copied from ACID is stored. You can then
paste the data back into the software at a different location.
Occurs when the amplitude of a sound is above the maximum allowed recording level. In
digital systems, clipping is seen as a clamping of the data to a maximum value, such as
32,767 in 16-bit data. Clipping causes sound to distort.
Codec
Coder/decoder: refers to any technology for compressing and decompressing data. The
term codec can refer to software, hardware, or a combination of both technologies.
Compression Ratio
(audio)
A compression ratio controls the ratio of input to output levels above a specific threshold.
This ratio determines how much a signal has to rise above the threshold for every 1 dB of
increase in the output. For example, with a ratio of 3:1, the input level must increase by
three decibels to produce a one-decibel output-level increase:
Threshold = -10 dB
Compression Ratio = 3:1
Input = -7 dB
Output = -9 dB
Because the input is 3 dB louder than the threshold and the compression ratio is 3:1, the
resulting signal is 1 dB louder than the threshold.
Compression Ratio
(file size)
The ratio of the size of the original noncompressed file to the compressed contents. For
example, a 3:1 compression ratio means that the compressed file is one-third the size of
the original.
Computer ID
Each computer has a unique number, similar to a license plate. Sony creates an activation
number based on that number. Since the activation number is based on the Computer ID,
it is important that you have the ACID application installed on the computer where you
will be using it. The Computer ID is automatically detected and provided to you when you
complete the installation process.
The Computer ID is used for registration purposes only. It doesn't give Sony access to any
personal information and can't be used for any purpose other than for generating a
unique activation number for you to use the software.
Crossfade
DC Offset
Mixing two pieces of audio by fading one out as the other fades in.
DC offset occurs when hardware, such as a sound card, adds DC current to a recorded
audio signal. This current results in a recorded wave that is not centered around the zero
baseline. Glitches and other unexpected results can occur when sound effects are applied
to files that contain DC offsets.
312 | APPENDIX E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Decibel (dB)
A unit used to represent a ratio between two numbers using a logarithmic scale. For
example, when comparing the numbers 14 and 7, you could say 14 is two times greater
than the number 7; or you could say 14 is 6 dB greater than the number 7. Where did we
pull that 6 dB from? Engineers use the equation dB = 20 x log (V1/V2) when comparing
two instantaneous values. Decibels are commonly used when dealing with sound
because the ear perceives loudness in a logarithmic scale.
In ACID, most measurements are given in decibels. For example, if you want to double the
amplitude of a sound, you apply a 6 dB gain. A sample value of 32,767 (maximum positive
sample value for 16-bit sound) can be referred to as having a value of 0 dB. Likewise, a
sample value of 16,384 can be referred to having a value of -6 dB.
Device Driver
A program that enables Windows to connect different hardware and software. For
example, a sound card device driver is used by Windows software to control sound card
recording and playback.
Digital Rights
Management (DRM)
A system for delivering songs, videos, and other media over the Internet in a file format
that protects copyrighted material. Current proposals include some form of certificates
that validate copyright ownership and restrict unauthorized redistribution.
Digital Signal Processing
(DSP)
A general term describing anything that alters digital data. Signal processors have existed
for a very long time (tone controls, distortion boxes, wah-wah pedals) in the analog
(electrical) domain. Digital Signal Processors alter the data after it has been digitized by
using a combination of programming and mathematical techniques. DSP techniques are
used to perform many effects such as equalization and reverb simulation.
Since most DSP is performed with simple arithmetic operations (additions and
multiplications), both your computer's processor and specialized DSP chips can be used
to perform any DSP operation. The difference is that DSP chips are optimized specifically
for mathematical functions while your computer's microprocessor is not. This results in a
difference in processing speed.
DirectX
A set of Application Program Interfaces designed by Microsoft for multimedia
development. A DirectX® plug-in, such as the Sony Noise Reduction™ DirectX Plug-In,
uses the DirectX Media Streaming Services (DMSS) API. Because DMSS is a standard API, a
DirectX plug-in can be used in any application that supports DMSS.
Downbeat
This term is used in the Beatmapper to refer to the first beat of the first measure.
Downloadable Sound
(DLS)
A DLS file stores a custom sound set that you can load into your soft synth, giving you
another set of voices for MIDI playback.
Drag and Drop
A quick way to perform certain operations using the mouse. To drag and drop, you click
and hold an item, drag it (hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse) and
drop it (let go of the mouse button) at another position on the screen.
Dynamic Range
The difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels. It can refer to a musical
performance (high-volume vs. low-volume signals) or to electrical equipment (peak level
before distortion vs. noise floor). For example, orchestral music has a wide dynamic range,
while thrash metal has a very small (always loud) range.
Envelopes
Envelopes allow you to automate the change of a certain parameter over time. In the case
of volume, you can create a fade out (which requires a change over time) by adding an
envelope and creating a point in the line to indicate where the fade starts. Then you pull
the end point of the envelope down to -inf.
Equalization (EQ)
Equalizing a sound file is a process by which certain frequency bands are raised or
lowered in level. EQ has various uses. The most common use for ACID users is to simply
adjust the subjective timbral qualities of a sound.
Event
An instance of a media file on a track. An event may play an entire media file or a portion
of the file.
File Format
Frame Rate
A file format specifies the way in which data is stored. In Windows, the most common
audio file format is the Microsoft WAV format.
Audio uses frame rates only for the purposes of synching to video or other audio. To
synchronize with audio, a rate of 30 fps (frames per second) is typically used. To
synchronize with video, 29.97 fps drop is usually used.
APPENDIX E | 313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequency Spectrum
Groove
The frequency spectrum of a signal refers to its range of frequencies. In audio, the
frequency range is basically 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz. The frequency spectrum sometimes refers
to the distribution of these frequencies. For example, bass-heavy sounds have a large
frequency content in the low end (20 Hz-200 Hz) of the spectrum.
A groove refers to the rhythmic pattern of a piece of music. By deviating from a machine-
quantized beat, individual beats may be played early or late to change the feel of the
music. Applying a groove can simulate the timing patterns of human musicians, lending a
human feel to MIDI-generated music or quantizing several distinct pieces of music to a
common timing.
Hertz (Hz)
The unit of measurement for frequency or cycles per second (CPS).
In-place plug-in
An in-place plug-in processes audio data so that the output length always matches the
input length. A non-in-place plug-in's output length need not match a given input length
at any time: for example, Time Stretch, Gapper/Snipper, Pitch-Shift (without preserving
duration), and some Vibrato settings can create an output that is longer or shorter than
the input.
Plug-ins that generate tails when there is no more input but otherwise operate in-place
(such as reverb and delay) are considered in-place plug-ins.
Insert Increment
Insertion Point
Sections of silence between selections that you can create using the Chopper and insert
into the track view.
The insertion point (also referred to as the cursor position) is analogous to the cursor in a
word processor. It is where markers or commands may be inserted depending on the
operation. The insertion point appears as a vertical flashing black line and can be moved
by clicking the left mouse button anywhere in the track view.
Loop
Loops are small audio clips that are designed to create a repeating beat or pattern. Loops
are usually one to four measures long and are stored completely in RAM for playback.
Marker
A marker is an anchored, accessible reference point in a file.
An informational pathway over which MIDI data can travel.
MIDI Channel
Media Control Interface
(MCI)
A standard way for Windows programs to communicate with multimedia devices such as
sound cards and CD players. If a device has an MCI device driver, it can easily be
controlled by most multimedia Windows software.
Media File
MIDI Clock
Files that may be placed within the ACID project. After a media file is placed into the
project, it is referred to as an event.
A MIDI device-specific timing reference. MIDI Clock is not absolute time like MIDI
timecode (MTC); instead it is a tempo-dependent number of ticks per quarter note. MIDI
clock is convenient for synchronizing devices that need to perform tempo changes mid-
song. MIDI clock out is supported, but MIDI clock in is not.
MIDI Port
A MIDI port is the physical MIDI connection on a piece of MIDI hardware. This port can be
a MIDI in, out or through. Your computer must have a MIDI-capable card to output MIDI
timecode to an external device or to receive MIDI timecode from an external device.
MIDI Timecode (MTC)
MTC is an addendum to the MIDI 1.0 specification and provides a way to specify absolute
time for synchronizing MIDI-capable applications. MTC is essentially a MIDI
representation of SMPTE timecode.
Multiple-Bit-Rate
Encoding
Multiple-bit-rate encoding (also known as Intelligent Streaming for the Windows Media
platform and SureStream™ for the RealMedia™ G2 platform) allows you to create a single
file that contains streams for several bit rates. A multiple-bit-rate file can accommodate
users with different Internet connection speeds, or these files can automatically change
to a different bit rate to compensate for network congestion without interrupting
playback.
To take advantage of multiple-bit-rate encoding, you must publish your media files to a
Windows Media server or a RealServerG2.
314 | APPENDIX E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Musical Instrument
Device Interface (MIDI)
A standard language of control messages that provides for communication between any
MIDI-compliant devices. Anything from synthesizers to lights to factory equipment can
be controlled via MIDI.
Normalize
Refers to raising the volume so that the highest level sample in the file reaches a user
defined level. Use normalization to make sure you are using all of the dynamic range
available to you.
Nyquist Frequency
The Nyquist Frequency (or Nyquist Rate) is one half of the sample rate and represents the
highest frequency that can be recorded using the sample rate without aliasing. For
example, the Nyquist Frequency of 44,100 Hz is 22,050 Hz. Any frequencies higher than
22,050 Hz produce aliasing distortion in the sample if no anti-aliasing filter is used while
recording.
Offline Media
One-Shot
A media file that cannot be located on the computer. If you choose to leave the media
offline, you can continue to edit events on the track; the events point to the original
location of the source media file.
One-shots are chunks of audio that are not designed to loop, and they are streamed from
the hard disk rather than stored in RAM if they are longer than three seconds. Things such
as cymbal crashes and sound bites could be considered one-shots.
Unlike loops, one-shots do not change pitch or tempo with the rest of a project.
OPT Plug-In
A plug-in that uses the Open Plug-in Technology (OPT) standard from Yamaha. OPT plug-
ins provide tools for working with MIDI such as edit views, effect processors and filters,
arpeggiators, and real-time panel automation.
Pan
To place a mono or stereo sound source perceptually between two or more speakers.
Peak Data File
The file created when a media file is opened for the first time. This file stores the
information regarding the graphic display of the waveform so that opening a file is almost
instantaneous. This file is stored in the directory where the audio file resides and has a .sfk
extension. If this file is not in the same directory as the audio file or is deleted, it is
recalculated the next time you open the file.
Proxy File
Working with certain types of media files with particular audio compression schemes can
be inefficient and slow. To compensate for this, audio proxy files are created for these
formats to dramatically increase speed and performance.
The file is saved as a proprietary .sfap0 file, with the same name as the original media file
and the same characteristics as the original audio stream. The conversion happens
automatically and does not result in a loss of quality or synchronization. You can safely
delete audio proxy files at any time since these files are recreated as needed.
Pulse Code Modulation
(PCM)
PCM is the most common representation of uncompressed audio signals. This method of
coding yields the highest fidelity possible when using digital storage. PCM is the standard
format for WAV and AIFF files.
Quantization
The correction of rhythms to align with selected note lengths or beats in a MIDI sequence.
Real-Time Streaming
Protocol (RTSP)
A proposed standard for controlling broadcast of streaming media. RTSP was submitted
by a body of companies including RealNetworks and Netscape®.
Redirector File
A metafile that provides information to a media player about streaming media files. To
start a streaming media presentation, a Web page includes a link to a redirector file.
Linking to a redirector file allows a file to stream; if you link to the media file, it downloads
before playback.
Windows Media redirector files use the .asx or .wax extension; RealMedia redirector files
use the .ram, .rpm, or .smi extension.
Region
A region is a section of time used to subdivide your project into segments.
Rendering
The process in which the project is saved to a specific file format like WMA or MP3.
APPENDIX E | 315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resample
Sample
The act of recalculating samples in a sound file at a different rate than the file was
originally recorded. If a sample is resampled at a lower rate, sample points are removed
from the sound file, decreasing its size, but also decreasing its available frequency range.
Resampling to a higher sample rate, extra sample points are interpolated in the sound file.
This increases the size of the sound file, but does not increase the quality. When down-
sampling, one must be aware of aliasing.
The word sample is used in many different (and often confusing) ways when talking
about digital sound. Here are some of the different meanings:
A discrete point in time which a sound signal is divided into when digitizing. For example,
an audio CD-ROM contains 44,100 samples per second. Each sample is really only a
number that contains the amplitude value of a waveform measured over time.
A sound that has been recorded in a digital format; used by musicians who make short
recordings of musical instruments to be used for composition and performance of music
or sound effects. These recordings are called samples. In this manual, we try to use sound
file instead of sample whenever referring to a digital recording.
The act of recording sound digitally, i.e., to sample an instrument means to digitize and
store it.
Sample Rate
The sample rate (also referred to as the sampling rate or sampling frequency) is the
number of samples per second used to store a sound. High sample rates, such as
44,100 Hz provide higher fidelity than lower sample rates, such as 11,025 Hz. However,
more storage space is required when using higher sample rates.
Sample Size
Sample Value
The sample value (also referred to as sample amplitude) is the number stored by a single
sample. In 16-bit audio, these values range from -32768 to 32767. In 8-bit audio, they
range from -128 to 127. The maximum allowed sample value is often referred to as 100%
or 0 dB.
Secure Digital Music
Initiative (SDMI)
The Secure Digital Music Initiative (SDMI) is a consortium of recording industry and
technology companies organized to develop standards for the secure distribution of
digital music. The SDMI specification was created to answer consumer demand for
convenient accessibility to quality digital music, enable copyright protection for artists'
work, and enable technology and music companies to build successful businesses.
Shortcut Menu
A context-sensitive menu that appears when you right-click certain areas of the screen.
The functions available in the shortcut menu depend on the object being right-clicked as
well as the state of the program. As with any menu, you can choose an item from the
shortcut menu to perform an operation. Shortcut menus are used frequently for quick
access to many commands.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
The signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) is a measurement of the difference between a recorded
signal and noise levels. A high SNR is always the goal.
The maximum signal-to-noise ratio of digital audio is determined by the number of bits
per sample. In 16-bit audio, the signal to noise ratio is 96 dB, while in 8-bit audio the ratio
is 48 dB. However, in practice this SNR is never achieved, especially when using low-end
electronics.
Society of Motion
Picture and Television
Engineers (SMPTE)
SMPTE timecode is used to synchronize time between devices. The timecode is formatted
as hours:minutes:second:frames, where frames are fractions of a second based on the
frame rate. Frame rates for SMPTE timecode are 24, 25, 29.97 and 30 frames per second.
Soft Synth
A soft synth is a software-based synthesizer. Downloadable Sounds (DLS) and Virtual
Studio Technology Instruments (VSTi) are two types of soft synths.
You add a soft synth control in the Mixing Console window for each software synthesizer
you want to use in a project.
Streaming
A method of data transfer in which a file is played while it is downloading. Streaming
technologies allow Internet users to receive data as a steady, continuous stream after a
brief buffering period. Without streaming, users must download files completely before
playback.
316 | APPENDIX E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tempo
Tempo is the rhythmic rate of a musical composition, usually specified in beats per
minute (BPM).
Threshold
Time Format
Track
A threshold determines the level at which the signal processor begins acting on the
signal. During normalization, levels above this threshold are attenuated (cut).
The format by which the time ruler and selection times are displayed. These can include:
time, seconds, frames, and all standard SMPTE frame rates.
A discrete timeline for audio data. Audio events sit on tracks and determine when a sound
starts and stops. Multiple audio tracks are played together to give you a composite sound
that you hear through your speakers.
Track List
Track View
μ-Law
The track list contains the master controls for each track. From here you can adjust the
mix, select playback devices, and reorder tracks.
The majority of the track view is made up of the space where you draw events on each
track.
μ-Law (mu-Law) is a companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the
Geneva Recommendations (G.711). The G.711 recommendation defines μ-Law as a
method of encoding 16-bit PCM signals into a non-linear 8-bit format. The algorithm is
commonly used in European and Asian telecommunications. μ-Law is very similar to A-
Law, however, each uses a slightly different coder and decoder.
Undo/Redo
These commands allow you to change a project back to a previous state or reapply
changes after you have undone them.
Virtual MIDI Router
(VMR)
A software-only router for MIDI data between programs. The VMR is used to receive MIDI
timecode and send MIDI clock. No MIDI hardware or cables are required for a VMR, so
routing can only be performed between programs running on the same PC.
VST Instrument (VSTi)
WAV
A Virtual Studio Technology instrument (VSTi®) is software synthesizer plug-in technology
for outputting MIDI developed by Steinberg Media Technologies AG.
A digital audio file format developed by Microsoft and IBM®. One minute of
uncompressed audio requires 10 MB of storage.
Waveform
A waveform is the visual representation of wave-like phenomena, such as sound or light.
For example, when the amplitude of sound pressure is graphed over time, pressure
variations usually form a smooth waveform.
Waveform Display
Each event shows a graph of the sound data waveform. The vertical axis corresponds to
the amplitude of the wave. For 16-bit sounds, the amplitude range is -32,768 to +32,767.
For 8-bit sounds, the range is -128 to +127. The horizontal axis corresponds to time, with
the leftmost point being the start of the waveform. In memory, the horizontal axis
corresponds to the number of samples from the start of the sound file.
Windows Media® Format
A Microsoft® file format that can handle audio and video presentations and other data
such as scripts, URL flips, images and HTML tags. Advanced Streaming Format files can be
saved with .asf, .wma, or .wmv extensions.
APPENDIX E | 317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318 | APPENDIX E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Numerics
5.1 Surround, See Surround
A
Adding
B
Anchors
Beatmapped clips
Assignable effects
Audio effects
Bus
Busses
Automating
Automation
C
CD
INDEX | i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
Channel strip
Channel strips
Cutting
D
Deleting
DLS sets
Clip properties
Clips
E
Effects
ii | INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
External devices
F
Fading in/out
Event takes
Events
Filtering MIDI events
G
Generic MIDI controller
Gracenote
H
Hardware
INDEX | iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locking events
Hiding/showing
I
Loops
Icons
Increments
M
Input bus
J
K
Key changes
Keyboard shortcuts
Knobs
Media files
L
iv | INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Media libraries
Media library
MIDI tracks
INDEX | v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panning, audio
Pasting
Pitch shifting
Moving
Muting
Plug-In Manager
Plug-Ins, See Effects
N
O
One-shots
Preferences
Opening
P
Previewing media
Panning
vi | INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projects
Rendering
Replacing
Properties
Resizing
S
Q
R
Saving
Quantizing MIDI
Search pane
Searching for media files
Sections
Reloading
Removing
Renaming
INDEX | vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Signal flow
Takes
Tempo changes
Sliding
Slipping
Time
Slip-trimming
Time selection
Soloing
Time signature changes
Tracks
T
Tags
viii | INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Volume
Volume automation
W
Windows
Transposing
U
Z
Zoom controls
Using the Behringer BCF2000 control surface
V
INDEX | ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x | INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|